Home

Avaya IP Line User's Manual

1. 0602B50 BIN TUE JUL 15 17 27 06 2003 0602B56 BIN TUE SEP 02 09 21 06 2003 0603B39 B1N THU APR 17 12 01 40 2003 0603844 BIN TUE JUL 15 17 27 04 2003 0603856 BIN TUE SEP 02 09 21 04 2003 LYWIFW file name Browse File upload oopoajoaojaaaaaaanaaajajajaja Click a button to invoke a command 3 Click the Browse button In the Choose File dialog box select the path and file to upload Alternatively enter the path and filename for the file to be uploaded Note Only one software or firmware file can be uploaded at a time IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 396 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 4 Once selected the path and file name appear in the text box to the left of the Browse button See Figure 126 Figure 126 Firmware file text box DAxiaoyi fwil2004 tw 5 Click the File Upload button The firmware file appears in the list at the top of the window when it is uploaded Note To delete older versions of the firmware and software files click the check box associated with the older file and then click the Delete button located at the top of the column of check boxes End of Procedure Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software Once the files are uploaded to the file server the cards must be upgraded to the newest software version To upgrade the card softwar
2. Applet TerminalClientApplet started Internet 5 Enter a user name and password to access the IPL gt CLI Note For Meridian 1 systems the default user name and password are both itgadmin However for security reasons the user name and password should have been changed during installation For CS 1000 systems use the PWD1 user ID and password The IPL gt prompt appears if the login is successful 6 Type atthe prompt to display a list of available IPL gt CLI commands IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 554 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager See IP Line CLI commands on page 585 for a detailed list of commands End of Procedure Check the Voice Gateway Channels To check the Voice Gateway Channels running on a Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 96 Procedure 96 Checking the Voice Gateway Channels 1 Inthe navigation tree click System Status gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens 2 Expand the node to show all its elements See Figure 188 on page 555 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Figure 188 IP Telephony Information Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 555 of 770 IP Telephony Information gt Node ID 451 gt Node ID 400 V Node 1D 450 Index card gt Node 1D 444 Node IP 192 168 2 91 Node IP
3. 2200eeeeeeeee 201 COMMS tear E E teen eereang E TET S ataree 201 Production sci cb Seo ikee deere eieaeered awe edad waeab de 202 Egupment considerin eesriie serr eat rE E EEO EEA 203 Install the hardware Components s 2 24c cc0cerercesageascares 204 Initial configuration of IP Line 4 0 data 0 228 Modeclechon TUES aisanicaceirecaiecedteeadee Adie d ade be 251 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 8 of 770 Contents Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 a es os exec hn doastnd ee 558s COMEN 6 Rosie odd Raw T eS ALS RRR ERS RREAERTAR ER INOCUHIOR EENE EELT EET EST ETT ESETET ETEESI EEE Configure IF Line data usme OTM oa ic eens cesget een ve tertera Transmit node configuration from OTM 2 2 to the Voice Gateway Media Cards is ccecsvevosgeearteauetees Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone IMV E soa cdg torad cage dandaeet en ERRARE EEA Configure OTM Alarm Management to receive IP Line SNM Tape swsn eh eeee hem et sees ken sre heeds dee eer ona Assemble and install an IP Phone 00200 0000 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 200000e5 COMENS ee ee ee ee ee ee MACON ca eed eb E A SRA EAA ESSES SETT ATENT Configure IP Line 4 0 data using Element Manager Tr
4. 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 535 of 770 12 Remove the Voice Gateway Media Card configuration data from the Call Server Identify the TN of the Voice Gateway Media Card b In LD 20 enter the LTN List Terminal Number command where TYPE VGW to list the TNs on the Voice Gateway Media Card TN This returns a list of units equipped on the card Verify the number of units that are equipped on the card Note the first unit equipped on the card c In LD 14 use the Out n command where n equals the number of units that are equipped on the card 13 At the TN prompt enter the TN for the first unit that was equipped on the card As the units are deleted verify that the intended units are outed End of Procedure Delete the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card from the node In the usual system configuration the Signaling Server is the Leader of the node However if a second or subsequent node is configured on the system then a Voice Gateway Media Card is configured as the Leader for that node If the Leader card for a second or subsequent node that is the card in Element Manager that displays the card role as Leader is deleted then another card in the node must be selected and the setLeader command must be issued on that card A node must have a Leader card for it to operate correctly when the node is powered up Note The role of a card can be viewed in Element Man
5. tpsShow The following is an example of the output from the tpsShow command for an ITG P 24 port line card IPL gt tpsShow Node ID 0 Is master 1 Up time 4 days 2 hours 40 mins 53 secs 355253 secs TN 03 00 Platform ITG Pentium TPS Service Yes IP TLAN 192 168 1 140 IP ELAN 192 168 1 14 ELAN Link Up Sets Connected 4 Sets Reserved 0 value 18 0x12 Packet loss monitor Monitor audio packet loss using the following commands e vgwPLLog 01112 enables the packet loss monitor Packet loss is measured in the receive direction and the two halves of a call are monitored and logged independently A value of zero 0 disables packet loss logging A value of one 1 default logs a message if packet loss during the course of the call exceeds the threshold set with the itgPLThreshold command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 449 of 770 A value of two 2 indicates that log messages are printed as packet loss is detected during the call A message is printed each time packet loss is detected indicating how many packets where lost at that moment e itgPLThreshold xxx this command sets the packet loss logging and alarm threshold where xxx is a number between 1 and 1000 and represents the threshold in 0 1 increments Packet loss which exceeds the threshold generates an SNMP trap and writes a message to the log file if logging is e
6. 298 Transmit card properties to all cards in the node 300 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 254 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware 303 IP Phone firmware installation and upgrade 303 IP Phone firmware upgrade from a new Voice Gateway Media Card 305 Verify card software and IP Phone firmware 306 parade pUer eiri e EEE REEE SEE NA 310 Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card software 311 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software 314 Upgrade the IP Phone Tm wares c62 ccs cseseewerareed aves 319 Configure OTM Alarm Management to receive IP Line SNMP traps 322 Assemble and mstall an IP Phon cr erirssrrisercironioreinis 328 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password 328 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password 328 Introduction This chapter explains how to configure IP Telephony nodes and Voice Gateway Media Cards using Optivity Telephony Manager OTM 2 2 This chapter also provides instruction for transmitting data to Voice Gateway Media Cards upgrading card software and upgrading IP Phone firmware using OTM Read about IP network engineering guidelines in Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 before installing an IP Telephony node Configure IP Line data using OTM OTM can be us
7. 3 Expand a node Select the card s to upgrade by selecting the check box to the left of the card information Note Element Manager supports upgrading the software on up to four cards at the same time IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 398 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 5 7 In the lower part of the window click the radio button of the most current software version Note lf the card receiving the upgrade is an ITG P 24 port line card select the radio button next to the most current version of the ITG P 24 port line card software IPL400xx p2 If the card receiving the upgrade is a Media Card select the radio button next to the must current version of the Media Card software IPL400xx sa Click the Loadware Upgrade button at the bottom of the window A confirmation dialog box appears similar to the dialog box in Figure 128 Click OK to confirm the card upgrade The upgrade begins Figure 128 Loadware Upgrade confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer i xj Q You are about to use work file IPL40012 P2 to upgrade loadware on elements ip 207 179 153 109 TYPE ITGP Are you sure you want to do this cme The Loadware Upgrade Progress window opens See Figure 129 on page 399 The status of the upgrade is shown for each of the cards selected to receive the software upgrade This status of the upgrade can be Work in progress Upgrading Fail or
8. After the UKLossPlanSet command is entered the loss plan adjustment is transmitted by that card to all other cards in the node The loss plan is then adjusted on any registered IP Phones and on other IP Phones as they register To clear the loss plan adjustment use the command UKLossPlanClr Refer to IP Phone Loss Plan UK commands on page 615 for more information on these and other loss plan commands Add card and configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Card If the network administrator provides IP addresses and subnet masks in CIDR format for example 10 1 1 10 24 convert the subnet mask to dotted decimal format See Appendix E on page 761 Note In the Cards section cards can be added changed or removed in the node one at a time WARNING Every node must has a Leader Exercise caution when removing the Leader card If the Leader card is deleted a new Leader must be configured immediately Follow the steps in Procedure 49 to configure Voice Gateway Media Card properties Procedure 49 Adding card and configuring Voice Gateway Media Card properties 1 Click Cards and then click the Add button See Figure 107 on page 366 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 366 of 770 Figure 107 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Cards NORTEL E NETWORKS gt System Status v Configuration gt
9. Page 688 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager routeShow ROUTE NET TABLE destination gateway 0 0 0 0 47 104 39 129 3 0 47 104 39 0 47 104 39 115 101 0 47 104 39 128 47 104 39 243 101 0 ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface 675 ixpMacU 0 ixpMacl 0 ixpMac0 flags Refcnt Use Interface 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 5 0 0 loU rudpdShow RUDP Port Summary Port ID Src IP Src Port 0x02bcb904 0 0 0 0 15001 0x02bcb878 47 11 221 48 15000 0x02b4b748 47 11 151 148 7300 0x0231d808 47 11 151 148 5100 RUDP Connection Summary Src IP Src Port Connect ID Dst IP Dst Port 0 0 0 0 15001 0x02bcb77c 47 11 221 41 15000 15000 0x02bcad18 47 11 221 41 15000 47 11 221 48 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Status DUDP Established Msg rcv Msg sent Retries 1 0 0 2 44305 3075 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 689 of 770 umsPolicyShow Total firmware 2 FirmWare TermType PolicyName Server FileName Limit When Upgrade Protocol Retry UBUZB33 2004 DEFAULT 47 10439 245 fumsi2U0U4IWw 1U ALWAYS ANY TFIP l RO 0603B38 i2002 DEFAULT_ 47 10439245 umsi2002fw 10 ALWAYS ANY TFTP 1 12002 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 690 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager vgwShowaAll VGW Service is Chan ChanState DspMode 0 Idle 1 Idle 2 Idle 3 Idle
10. Signaling CLI Command Description Server tpsAROutput Sets the output for all tpsAR protocol traces X lt Output_Destination gt Where lt File Pathname gt e Output_Destination specifies where all the trace messages for the tpsARTraceSet are to be directed If the command is run from the Voice Gateway Media Card or the vxshell prompt The values are 1 TTY 2 RPTLOG 3 File 4 TTY File If the command is run from the OAM prompt or PDT prompt on the Signaling Server The values are the actual word not a number TTY RPTLOG FILE TTY FILE e File Pathname is a string encapsulated in quotes It specifies the file to output to if option 3 or 4 was selected tpsARTraceSettings Displays the trace tool settings which endpoints X are being traced and where the trace output is being directed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 88 Protocol trace tool CLI commands for the NCS Part 3 of 3 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 627 of 770 Signaling CLI Command Description Server tpsARTraceHelp Displays a list of all CLIs used for tracing tpsAR X protocol messages including usage and parameters Lamp Audit and Keep Alive functions The Lamp Audit function provides a continuous source of heartbeat messages to ensure the IP Phone is powered and the IP connection is alive Since there is a reliable UDP connection from the core through to the IP Phones any
11. Unpack the card Remove all contents from the Remove all contents from packaging box the packaging box Install the CompactFlash Not applicable Procedure 11 on page 210 Card Install the Voice Gateway Procedure 10 on page 208 Procedure 12 on page 216 Media Cards Install NTCW84JA Procedure 13 on page 218 Procedure 13 on page 218 ITG specific I O Panel Filter Connector for Option 51C 61C 81 81C Install the NTMF94EA ELAN Procedure 14 on page 224 Not applicable TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable Install the A0852632 Shielded Not applicable Procedure 15 on page 228 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 206 of 770 Table 44 Installation summary Part 2 of 2 Configure card as a Leader or Follower Add the card and configure the card properties Transmit Transfer properties ITG P 24 port line card In OTM 2 2 Procedure 31 on page 296 In Element Manager Procedure 51 on page 373 Leader Procedure 53 on page 379 Follower In OTM 2 2 Procedure 22 on page 269 In Element Manager Procedure 49 on page 365 In OTM 2 2 Procedure 32 on page 298 Procedure 33 on page 300 In Element Manager Procedure 52 on page 375 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Media Card line card In OTM 2 2 Procedure 31 on page 296 In Element Manager Procedure 51 on page 373 Leader Procedure 53 on pag
12. on page 425 To set the IP Phone Installer Password in Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 97 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 559 of 770 Procedure 97 Setting the administrative and temporary IP Phone Installer Passwords 1 Click System Status and then IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens 2 Expand the node to show all its elements See Figure 192 Figure 192 IP Telephony Information window Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information Total gt Node Node IP elements 1 1D 451 192 168 2 91 7 Total V Node Noge IP elements I1D 400 192 168 2 100 1 Index ELAN IP Type ELAN 24 192188445 Porum SN A O A E Total gt i Node Node IP elements 1 192 168 2 90 Total gt 3 Node Node IP elements 2 192 168 2 81 Click buttons to invoke a command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 560 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 3 Click the GEN CMD button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The General Commands windows opens See Figure 193 Figure 193 General Command Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group x Command Select A Group RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings B PING C
13. warm reboot 635 Y yellow 340 Z Zones 53 IP Line Index Page 769 of 770 Description Installation and Operation Page 770 of 770 Index 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Copyright 2003 2004 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Publication number 553 3001 365 Document release Standard 3 00 Date September 2004 Produced in Canada NORTEL NETWORKS
14. Card role leaded O Card TN ue ooo Management IP iz 22 11 2 Card Type sMc TG SA gt Management MAC e2 38 25 C2 FA 11__ Voice IP s7 12 41 5 Voice LAN gateway IP 47 12 33 1 Syne status New Add Change Delete Host Names MAC address Cad TN Leader 47 22 11 2 02 38 25 C2 FA 11 4 12 41 5 fs 12 33 1 Cancel Apply Help IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 270 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 2 Enter the Card Properties data for the Leader 0 and Follower cards as follows a Card role Assign the Card role of Leader 0 to the first card configured For the second card configured assign the role of Leader 1 For all remaining cards assign the role of Follower Note When adding cards for a node that resides on a CS 1000S system for the purpose of retrieving OM reports always assign the Signaling Server to be the Leader 0 card A backup Signaling Server if present is assigned to be the Leader 1 card and all the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node are assigned to be Follower cards If no Backup Signaling Server is present assign one of the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node to be the Leader 1 card b Management IP This is the ELAN network interface IP address for the card OTM 2 2 and Meridian 1 CS 1000M use this address to communicate with the card c Management MAC This is the motherboard Ethernet address from the Voice Gateway
15. Figure 212 Node Summary window Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary New Node E Lto Add Import Node Files gt Node 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Transfer Status 4 Click the Import Node Files button The Import Node Files window opens See Figure 213 on page 704 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 704 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Figure 213 Import Node Files window Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt Import Node Files Management LAN ELAN IP address of the leader from C where to retrieve the node files mpor Click a button to invoke a command 5 Inthe box enter the Leader ELAN IP address of the former Leader 0 of the IP Trunk node that has been converted Click Import The following text is displayed The BOOTP 1 and CONFIG1 INI files were retrieved from Voice Gateway Media Card x x x x 6 As the BOOTP 1 file does not have a node ID enter the node ID for this node If a Signaling Server has already been installed the Signaling Server will be the leader for this node and if IP Phones have been configured to point to the Signaling Server node ID use the node ID of that Signaling Server to create this node Add the Signaling Server to this node in Step 8 See Figure 214 on page 705 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September
16. Follow the steps in Procedure 115 to prevent ground loops Procedure 115 Preventing ground loops 1 Connect the customer provided shielded CAT5 LAN cable to the external LAN equipment Ensure that the external LAN equipment is powered up 2 Use an ohmmeter to measure resistance to ground between the free end of the shielded RJ 45 cable and the building ground The ohmmeter must measure Open to ground before plugging it into the shielded RJ 45 coupler on the end of the NTMF94EA If the ohmmeter does not measure Open install the unshielded RJ 45 coupler provided on the end of the NTMF94EA to prevent ground loops to external LAN equipment WARNING The serial maintenance ports on the faceplate connector and the DB 9 female connector of the NTMF9DA cable assembly are identical Do not connect a serial device to both access points simultaneously This results in incorrect and unpredictable operation of the Voice Gateway Media Card End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 724 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description NTAG81CA maintenance cable description The NTAG81CA maintenance cable is connected between the 9 pin D type RS 232 input on a standard PC and the MAINT connector on the NT8R17AB faceplate or through the I O cable serial port See Figure 219 Figure 219 NTAG81CA Maintenance cable DB 9 Female 553 ITGO007 The NTAG91CA maintenance cable pin descr
17. G 711 Clear Channel The G 729A codec is selected as it precedes the G 723 1 codec in the order of preference of the best bandwidth codecs Voice Gateway codec registration The Voice Gateway registers codecs for the gateway channels as follows G 711 a law and G 711 mu law are always registered T 38 and G 711 Clear Channel fax codecs are always registered G 711 Clear Channel is used for IP Trunk connections to BCM which does not support T 38 fax A minimum of two codecs are registered if only G 711 was configured A maximum of four codecs can be registered the G 711 a law and mu law for BQ codec and some BB codecs defined by the following rules Ifthe G 729A codec is configured only the G 729A codec is registered with the Call Server Ifthe G 729AB codec is configured the G 729A codec and the G 729AB codec are registered with the Call Server Ifthe G 723 codec is configured the G 723 codec is registered with the Call Server Example 1 G 711 a law G 729A G 729AB and G 723 1 are configured The Voice Gateway registers G 711 a law G 711 mu law G 729A and G 729AB IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 188 of 770 Codecs Example 2 G 711 mu law G 729A and G 723 1 are configured The Voice Gateway registers G 711 a law G 711 mu law and G 729A Example 3 G 711 mu law and G 723 1 are configured The Voice Gateway registers G 711 a law G 711 mu law and G 723 1
18. IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 656 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Transmit card properties to the cards To transmit cards properties to the Voice Gateway Media Cards follow the steps in Procedure 105 CAUTION This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 105 Transmitting card properties 1 Inthe OTM Navigator select the Services folder Double click on the IP telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Select the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card 3 Click Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit 4 The Transmit Options window opens See Figure 202 on page 657 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 657 of 770 Figure 202 Transmit Options dialog box Transmit Options This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards and or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware rm Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Transmit to selected cards F Node Properties to Active Leader _ Card properties to all cards in node Tl Card software Software location Browse F Intemet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware location Browse F SNMP r m Community Sting m Transmit control Start transmit View last transmit Clos
19. IP Phone Under the circumstances described in this section an IP Phone with a 3 digit Node ID can register to a node that is configured with a 4 digit Node ID To enable the registration to be successful the 3 digit Node ID must match the first 3 digits of the node s 4 digit Node ID This feature enhances the IP Phone s survivability in the case of network outages or equipment failure as it allows an IP Phone to register to more than one node on a system By configuring the IP Phone s S1 and S2 Connect Server IP addresses to the node addressees of two different nodes and properly configuring the Node IDs the IP Phone is able to register to another secondary node if it cannot register to the primary node The rules are as follows e ifthe Node ID on the system has 3 digits or less the Node ID from the IP Phone must match exactly e ifthe Node ID on the system has 4 digits and the Node ID from the IP Phone has fewer than 3 digits reject the registration the Node ID from the IP Phone has 4 digits the Node ID must match exactly ifthe Node ID from the IP Phone has 3 digits and they match the first 3 digits of the node s 4 digit Node ID left to right then allow the IP Phone to register If the first three digits do not match reject the registration 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 143 of 770 Up to 10 nodes can be configured on a system 3 digit Node ID base 0 9 for the fourth di
20. If the IP address of a Voice Gateway Media Card has changed restart only that card Follow the steps in Procedure 92 to restart a specific card using the CLI Alternatively a Voice Gateway Media Card can be restarted from within Element Manager Follow the steps in Procedure 93 to restart the card using Element Manager Procedure 92 Restarting a Voice Gateway Media Card at the CLI 1 To prevent interruption to the speech path log into LD 32 2 Type the DISI command This command disables the voice gateway channels when they become idle DISI removes the call traffic but does not remove the IP Phones that are registered on that Voice Gateway Media Card The Graceful TPS Disable command disiTPS removes the registered IP Phones 3 Type disiTPS at the card s IPL gt prompt to disable the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card This Graceful TPS Disable command prevents new IP Phones from registering on the card All IP Phones registered on the card are re directed to another Voice Gateway Media Card when the IP Phone becomes idle IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 548 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager After the command is entered an idle IP Phone should be updated with the Watchdog reset message However the LTPS sends a soft reset message to the IP Phone re directing it to the Connect Server The disabled LTPS does not accept new registrations so the IP Phones must register with an
21. Service Interruption These procedures are not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 73 Deleting a Voice Gateway Media Card from the node 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Select the node in the upper portion of the window 3 Inthe IP Telephony window select Node gt Properties from the popup menu The Node Properties window opens 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Select the Voice Gateway Media Card to be deleted from the working list at the bottom of the window 6 Click the Delete button 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 10 11 12 13 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 477 of 770 Click OK Next transmit the node properties In the IP Telephony window click the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window opens Select the Transmit to selected nodes radio button Select the Node Properties to Active Leader check box Click the Start transmit button Monitor progress in the Transmit Control window Confirm that the node properties are transmitted successfully to Leader 0 When the transmission is complete click the Close button Remove the Voice Gateway Media Card 14 15 CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Follow the anti static procedures and place the Voice Gateway Media Card in an appropriate anti static package Remove the
22. i Press Select to select Telephone Options ii Use the Navigation keys to scroll to Set Info iii Press the Select softkey then press the Navigation keys until it displays FW Version For the Voice Gateway Media Card select the appropriate firmware Note For example a firmware version can be labelled 0602B38 which means IP Phone firmware version 1 38 e 02 represents the IP Phone 2004 e B represents the Version number 1 e 38 represents the Release number 38 Lift the handset and make a call to verify the IP Phone works When the IP Phone is working verify the date and time on the node Ensure each Voice Gateway Media Card has the correct loadware and firmware before using the umsUpgradeAll command to upgrade all the IP Phones To verify the date and time on the node from OTM 2 2 select the node in the top of the IP Telephony Gateway IP Line 4 0 window Double click on Leader 0 in the bottom of the window The Card Properties window opens Note Cards receive their time from the Leader 0 card If the time for Leader 0 is correct all cards on the node should be the same If Leader 0 displays the incorrect time reset the time The time propagates to the other cards Click the Maintenance tab This displays the Node time If the time is incorrect click on the Set Node Time button The Set Node Time window opens Under Time and date set the Time where the time is displayed in the HH MM SS AM PM format Click OK
23. user ID and password in the NVRAM If the PWD1 is changed and an EDD operation is not performed the cards can contain a mixture of old and new passwords This could happen if a new card is plugged in an existing card reboots or loses and reestablishes its ELAN subnet connection Nortel Networks recommends that an EED be performed when the PWD1 password is changed on the Call Server Performing an EDD ensures that all cards have the new PWD1 user ID and password For more information on the PWD1 Level 1 password see the LD 17 Gate Opener PWD Password section in Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 IP Phone Installer Password An IP Phone displays the node ID and Terminal Number TN of the IP Phone for five seconds as the IP Phone boots up IP Line 4 0 password protection controls who can change the TN on the IP Phone This feature is available on the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 The IP Phone Installer Password protection controls registration with a virtual line TN on the Call Server IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 426 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Note The IP Phone Installer Password can also set using the CLI commands in Element Manager See Setting the IP Phone Installer Password on page 558 Administrator IP Phone Installer Password This feature adds basic IP Phone Installer Password protection on the IP Phone
24. 4 Idle 5 Idle 6 Idle 7 Idle 8 Idle 9 Idle 10 Idle 11 Idle 12 Idle 13 Idle 14 Idle 15 Idle 16 Idle 17 Idle 18 Idle 19 Idle 20 Idle 21 Idle 22 Idle 23 Idle 24 Idle 25 Idle 26 Idle 27 Idle 28 Idle 29 Idle 30 Idle 31 Idle 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Enabled Codec Tn n a UxU8Uc n a 0x080d n a 0x080e n a 0x080f n a 0x084c n a 0x084d n a 0x084e n a 0x084f n a 0x088c n a 0x088d n a 0x088e n a Ox088f n a Ox08cc n a 0x08cd n a 0x08ce n a 0x08cf n a 0x090c n a 0x090d n a 0x090e n a 0x090f n a 0x094c n a 0x094d n a 0x094e n a 0x094f n a 0x098c n a 0x098d n a 0x098e n a 0x098f n a 0x09cc n a 0x09cd n a 0x09ce n a 0x09cf Reg yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes AirTime rxTsap gt gt ccececieciscsccUccmcmUcUCOCUCUCOCOCUCOCUC OCUCOCUCcW OCU OUCUCOUCUCHOCOCcCCOCUcUCOCcC OCUCUOCcCCOCcUCOCCcOCUcUCOCCcCCOCUcCOCUCc SF 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0
25. AO6 6 party conference key Key 19 CFW NUL CFW Call Forward key Key 20 RGA NUL RGA Ring Again key Key 21 PRK NUL PRK Call Park key Key 22 RNP NUL RNP Ringing Number pickup key 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 251 of 770 Table 55 LD 11 IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment Part 2 of 2 IP Phone key number Response s Allowed Key 23 SCU SSU SCC SSC NUL SCU Speed Call User SSU System Speed Call User SCC Speed Call Controller SSC System Speed Call Controller PRS NUL PRS Privacy Release key CHG NUL CHG Charge Account key CPN NUL CPN Calling Party Number key Node election rules The rules for the node election process are as follows 1 A Signaling Server wins over any Voice Gateway Media Cards 2 A Leader card always wins over a Follower card 3 A Media Card wins over an ITG P card 4 Within each class Leader Follower the card with the longest up time wins 5 Inthe event of a tie in up time length the card with the lowest IP address wins The precedence of the rules is from 1 highest to 5 lowest This means for example that since Rule 2 is applied before Rule 3 a Media Card Follower card cannot win over an ITG P Leader card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 252 of 770 Installation and initi
26. Codec negotiation For every virtual trunk call a common codec must be selected for the call This is known as codec negotiation Codec negotiation for virtual trunk calls is performed through the H 323 FastStart and Terminal Capability Set TCS messages For a call setup with the FastStart procedure the originating node sends its codec list in the FastStart element in the SETUP message to the terminating node For a call setup using the SlowStart procedure or for a call modification media redirection each node sends its codec list in the TCS message to the other node Codec sorting Before sending a codec list in FastStart and TCS messages the codec list must be sorted according to the BB or BQ policy This is determined by the following e the zone configuration of the IP Phone DSP involved in the call e the zone configuration of the virtual trunk used for the call 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 189 of 770 Codec sorting methods There are two methods for sorting the codec list 1 BQ sorting the codec list is sorted so that the first codec in the list is the best BQ codec the second codec is the second best BQ codec in the list and so on 2 BB sorting the codec list is sorted so that the first codec in the list is the best BB codec the second codec is the second best BB codec in the list and so on IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 190 of 770 Codecs Table 4
27. Communication Server 1000E Planning and Engineering 553 304 1 120 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 18 of 770 About this document e IP Phone 2001 User Guide e IP Phone 2002 User Guide e IP Phone 2004 User Guide e Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 User Guide e Nortel Networks Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide Online To access Nortel Networks documentation online click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel Networks home page http www nortelnetworks com CD ROM To obtain Nortel Networks documentation on CD ROM contact your Nortel Networks customer representative 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 19 of 770 Description Contents This section contains information on the following topics odieth a ik conden ethene NESW RESEDA LULL EEE EOS 20 ol oe ee eee ee ee ee L ee eee eee ee eee 20 Voice Gateway Medid Cards y223c 0c 2eckeciereearsnenesed 21 Titers 6 cache ainteod ay ceo Oe ee CE Oe ed ee Dat 2i Applicable S MOMS oi ccedy one aE EE EE E R 23 Unsupported products 24 6 ee sb cede ca dee rinitni inei rnia 23 System TEGUNSMCNI a on He COA eRe EOIN e DEER Gea eos 23 OTM 2 2 and Element Manager sd ccccce0sdesceaaneeaxreses 23 System CONMPUTAUONS ea ine e RAE NEER EEE 24 Meridian T ccs iporererd rinnat kaar A hea 25 CS 1000 system erasora nieka Eea 25 e e v 2344 4 060 sone ET E EE S dees fa 26 Reguired Pakat ennari a E EEA ar IP Line package components li
28. DFLT_SCPW has been added to the Flexible Feature Code FFC parameters for the Call Server When DFLT_SCPW is set to YES the system assigns a default password the primary DN to IP Phone users when an IP Phone is added or changed in LD 11 IMPORTANT System administrators must ensure that users change the default password on the IP Phone to control access as the default password is the same on all IP Phones when DFLT_SCPW is set to YES The new prompt DFLT_SCPW and the existing prompt Station Control Password Length SCPL are prompted only if FFC package 139 is enabled The SCPL is also defined in LD 15 s Flexible Feature Code FFC configuration parameters and in Element Manager If the SCPL length is changed the change takes effect only after a data dump and then a sysload of the Call Server The SCPL is changed to the new length during the sysload If the length has been increased then 0 is inserted at the beginning of the 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 169 of 770 SCPW to conform to the new length If the password length has been reduced then the leading digits are removed during the sysload Password administration The Station Control Password SCPW controls access to the user s private Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List information When the IP Phone first registers to the system after it has been created by default the p
29. Found on Card TN 003 00 Chan cChanstate DspMode When the IP address is found in the list of VGW channels for a card other than where the command was entered the VGW channel information for the first occurrence is returned plus a count of the number of times the IP address occurs in that card s list Multiple instances can occur when the customer s network is configured so that multiple IP Phones are behind a NAT device sharing the NAT device s public IP address If there is more than one match the administrator can log into that specific card and enter the vygwShow command without entering an IP address and port number That will print all the busy channels on the card To quickly find a particular IP Phone use the IPDN or DNIP commands in LD 117 to obtain the IP Phone s media stream public IP address and port number then enter the public IP address and port number as parameters for the vygwShow command Firmware download using UNIStim FTP Previously IP Phones on CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems downloaded their firmware using Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Firewalls often have their well known TFTP port port 69 disabled to maintain security When port 69 is blocked IP Phones cannot obtain firmware downloads This situation prevents the IP Phone from registering and coming into service IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 84 of 770 Features In order to eliminate the file transfer problem with t
30. IPL gt shell command on page 597 IP Phone Installer Password commands on page 598 Voice Gateway commands on page 601 Data Path Capture Tool commands on page 603 Translation IP DN commands on page 604 Graceful Disable commands on page 614 IP Phone Loss Plan commands on page 615 Patching Tool commands on page 622 General trace tool commands on page 623 Protocol trace tool CLI commands for the NCS on page 625 Maintenance audit commands on page 631 Audit commands on page 632 General purpose commands Table 71 General purpose commands Part 1 of 4 Table 71 lists the general purpose IPL gt commands Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server i Displays the current task list X itgHelp Displays the complete command list also shows the command list logout Exits the IPL gt Command Line Interface routeAdd Adds a route to the network routing table X 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 587 of 770 Table 71 General purpose commands Part 2 of 4 Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server routeShow Displays the current host and network routing X tables logPrintOff Turns off logging in the TTY session currently logged in logPrintOn Turns on logging in the TTY session currently logged in chkdsk chkdsk C Checks the internal file system for errors
31. Installation and Operation Page 134 of 770 Features Firmware file management with IP Line 4 0 Due to the limited flash drive space on the Voice Gateway Media Cards IP Line 4 0 manages the firmware file in the following manner 1 Each IP Phone type has one firmware file These files are saved and retrieved in one of the following two locations a to from a file server The file server can be a dedicated external server the Call Server or a Voice Gateway Media Card b to from a Master card s RAM device 2 The server s information is configured in Element Manager and the information is saved in the CONFIG INI file The server s IP address routing table file path user name and password are specified during configuration time 3 When the Master card boots it searches for the firmware files on the specified server a Iffound they are retrieved and stored on the RAM drive in the ums directory b Otherwise i for a Voice Gateway Media Card the Master card continues to search for the firmware files in the local A fw directory and then the C fw directory until the files are found ii fora Signaling Server the Master card attempts to search for the firmware files in the u fw directory and then the A fw directory 4 When a Follower card boots it looks for the firmware files on the Master card s RAM drive in the ums directory If the Master has not yet retrieved the files the Follower waits until the
32. Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 223 of 770 Install the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable The NTMF94EA cable provides the ELAN TLAN and serial interface for the ITG P 24 port line card See Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description on page 717 for pinouts and technical specifications on the NTMF94EA cable Figure 44 NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN and RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O cable Mounting Screw gt Shielded 25 pair Amphenol Connector gt Shielded RJ 45 Mating Coupler Shielded RJ 45 Cable 9 Pin D Sub Female gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 224 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node To install the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN serial interface cable complete the steps in Procedure 14 Procedure 14 Installing the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN serial interface cable WARNING Plug all Voice Gateway Media Card ELAN network interfaces belonging to the same node into the same ELAN hub or Layer 2 switch port group On Large Systems connect the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN and RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O cable to the I O panel connector for the left hand card slot For Small Systems connect the cable to the I O connector in the cabinet that corresponds to the IP Line card slot see Figure 218 on page 719 Connect a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable from the customer s TLAN L
33. Master sends notification that the firmware files are retrieved Using FTP the Follower transfers the files from the Master and stores them in the ums directory on its RAM drive 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 135 of 770 5 Once a firmware file is found and stored in the card s RAM drive the upgrade manager parses the file and updates its policy based on the firmware version it received from file 6 The IP Phones are checked against the upgrade policy at the time they register If a firmware update is required the firmware is downloaded from the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media Card s TFTP server to the IP Phone The firmware file for the Phase I IP Phone 2004 is saved as 12004 fw as 12002 fw for the Phase I IP Phone 2002 and as IPP2SETS fw for the Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 These filenames are required for the upgrade manager to find certain files in either the stand alone file server or the Master card s RAM drive In order for all Voice Gateway Media Cards to obtain the same firmware files ensure that the configured file server is running before any of the Voice Gateway Media Cards boot up In CS 1000 systems the Signaling Server acts as the file server and the Master function is on the Signaling Server As a result no time to download the firmware files from the file server is needed The A drive the PC Card slot on the card s faceplate of the Vo
34. PUBLIC RTCP port number 70 PVQM 77 PWDI1 373 425 Q QoS 107 Quality of Service 107 R reboot 635 red 340 red LED on Voice Gateway Media Card 669 reliability 753 remove an SNMP trap server 347 543 replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card 668 replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 671 restart a specific card using the CLI 547 restart the card using Element Manager 547 RS 232 maintenance port 37 RTCP 77 RUDP 50 Run time configuration 121 S safety regulations table 756 schedule a generated OM Report 455 Security Device is missing 668 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 SNMP IP addresses 547 standalone IP Telephony node 107 standards regulatory 756 status of password 434 Succession Media Card 35 superloop 50 242 Survivable Succession Media Gateway IP address 544 T temperature specifications 755 temporary IP Phone Installer Password 434 Traffic printouts 107 Transfer Status button 340 Transfer Status button red 340 Transfer Status button yellow 340 Type II socket dual type 36 U unrecoverable hardware failure 668 Upgrading the 12050 MVC 321 upgrading the 12050 MVC software 321 user ID 373 V Virtual Office 123 virtual superloop 50 Virtual Superloops 241 Virtual TNs 51 VLAN ID 68 VLANs 68 Voice Gateway Media Card 31 Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet 198 VTNs 50 VxWorks shell 672 674 W
35. Password This is also known as the node level IP Phone Installer Password If a null password 0 characters in length is configured all IP Phones that attempt to register after this command has been issued display a prompt for node password before the TN can be modified The password parameter must be null or 6 to 14 digits in length The valid characters are 0 9 The null password causes the Node ID and Password screen on the IP Phone to be skipped during restart This command can be entered at any time the new password entered overwrites the prior password X nodePwdShow Displays the settings of the IP Phone Installer Password The command displays the current password the state of password entry enable disable the temporary password and the number of uses and time to expiry nodePwdEnable Enables the administrative IP Phone Installer Password setting After this command is entered all IP Phones registering display the password screen 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 599 of 770 Table 78 IP Phone Installer Password commands Part 2 of 3 Signaling IPL gt command Description Server nodePwdDisable Disables both the administrative and the X temporary IP Phone Installer Password settings After this command is entered all IP Phones display the original Node ID and TN screen during registration IP Line Desc
36. STATI scu Display the IP Phone state STAT cu UNEQ IDLE BUSY and DSBL have the usual meaning IDLE and DSBL state are precise by the following information e UNREGISTERED identifies an IP Phone that is configured in the system but that has not yet registered e REGISTERED identifies an IP Phone that has registered DISUIscu Change the IP Phone state to DSBL DISU cu UNREGISTERED REGISTERED state is not modified ENLUIscu Change the IP Phone state to IDLE ENLU cu UNREGISTERED REGISTERED state is not modified IDUIscu Displays selected IP Phone information IDU cu Displays the TN number MAC address device code NT code color code release code software code serial number IP Phone IP address and LTPS IP address STAT VTRM lt cust gt Displays the status of the virtual trunks for a customer s route lt route gt lt start_mb gt starting from a specified starting member for the number of lt number of members gt members specified 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 583 of 770 IDU command Since the system must request the information from the IP Phone the IDU is effectively a PING command and can be used to test the end to end IP connectivity of the IP Phone An example of the output format of the IDU command in LD 32 is shownin Figure 196 on page 584 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 584 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card m
37. UFTP Server task new Download log files are created The Download log file is a circular file writing over the oldest information when the log file is full Each log file entry contains the following download information about the IP Phone e F W download date e F W download start time e F W download status specifies if the download succeeded or failed e IP Address of the IP Phone e IP Phone type e e F W download error code If the F W download was successful this field is empty The following is the list of all possible error codes 00 F W not exist 01 F W size is 0 02 F W corrupted 03 RUDP connection down 04 Response time out 05 Reason Unknown The format of the download log message is lt Date gt lt Download start time gt lt Download Status gt lt IP address of the IP Phone gt lt IP Phone type gt lt Error Code gt The following is an example of the Download log message 31 01 04 17 04 36 F W Dnld fail 47 11 215 44 i2004 Ph2 F W Corrupted 31 01 04 17 05 46 F W Dnld success 47 11 215 44 i2004 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 87 of 770 CLI commands CS 1000 Release 4 0 introduces the following CLI commands to support UFTP firmware downloads e uftpNodeShow e uftpShow e uftpRunTimeDataReset e activeDlogShow e nActiveDlogShow e dnldFailShow uftpNodeShow The uftpNodeShow command provides a complete UFTP IP Phone firmwar
38. When the 10 minute timer expires for the lockout period the system raises an ITG5038 cleared alarm The clear message is sent after the lockout period expires perceivedSeverity Cleared probableCause Unauthorized maximum access attempts Alarm text IPL login protection login available e There is no online indication or warning during the failed login attempt lockout state Everything appears the same to the user trying to login The user is not informed that login blocking has been activated The login is ignored for 10 minutes Note Both the critical and cleared alarms send an SNMP trap to the system administrator For security reasons these two alarms do not call the syslog function as the other itgAlarms do so no syslog message is displayed on the console or written in the syslog file e On the Voice Gateway Media Card the faceplate displays GO38 ITG1038 when the ITG1038 alarm is received since it is a critical alarm The ITG5038 clears GO38 from the faceplate when the 10 minute timer expires Node password synchronization The BOOTP TAB CONFIG INI and IP Phone firmware files must be the same on all cards in the system The cards that can be in the system are the ITG P 24 port line card the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line card and the Signaling Server To maintain a consistent configuration within the system files are transferred from Leader 0 to the Follower cards using FTP IP Line Descriptio
39. and Media Gateway 1000E enter Card TN I s c information For Small Systems CS 1000S system Media Gateway 1000B and Media Gateway 1000T enter only the card number between 0 50 The card TN format is determined by the system type that is configured in the OTM Navigator Enter the correct system type in the OTM Navigator before adding the node g Card Type Select Pentium for the ITG P 24 port line card or Strong Arm for the Media Cards Click Add The card role and address information appear in a working list at the bottom of the New Node window Click Apply to add the Card Properties to the Node If more cards are to be added add them by repeating the previous steps Click OK when all the cards are added Prematurely clicking OK at this point closes the window and saves any changes Double click the new node in the upper part of the main IP Telephony window to re open Node Properties and complete the configuration procedures In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens From the list of IP Telephony nodes in the upper part of the window select the IP Telephony node to which configuration data will be transmitted Click Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window opens Keep the default setting of Transmit to selected nodes radio button Select only the Node Properties to Active Leader check box See Figure
40. card is only readable by the SSC card It is not readable by the ITG P 24 port card or the Media Card A PC Card formatted using a Voice Gateway Media Card ITG P 24 port card or Media Card is only readable by another Voice Gateway Media Card It is not readable by the SSC card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 37 of 770 MAC address label The MAC address label on the card s faceplate is labeled ETHERNET ADDRESS It shows the TLAN and ELAN network interface MAC addresses The Management ELAN network interface MAC address for each card is assigned during manufacturing and is unchangeable The MAC address label on the Media Card is similar to the following example ETHERNET ADDRESS TLAN 00 60 38 BD C9 9C ELAN 00 60 38 BD C9 9D Ethernet activity LEDs The faceplate contains six Ethernet activity LEDs three for the ELAN network interface and three for the TLAN network interface The LEDs indicate the following links on the ELAN network interface and TLAN network interface in order from the top 1 100 100BaseT 2 10 10BaseT 3 A Activity Maintenance hex display This is a four digit LED based hexadecimal display that provides the role of the card It also provides an indication of fault conditions and the progress of PC Card based software upgrades or backups RS 232 Maintenance Port The Media Card faceplate provides a female 8 pin mini DIN serial maintenance port connection The facepl
41. diagnostic status of the card during power up its operational state when in service and error information on the functional state of the card e Table 64 on page 569 lists the normal and fault display codes for the ITG P 24 port line card e Table 65 on page 571 list the normal and fault display codes for the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 569 of 770 During power up the card performs multiple self tests including an internal RAM test ALU test address mode test boot ROM test timer test and external RAM test If any of these tests fail the card enters a maintenance loop and no further processing is possible A failure message is printed on the display to indicate which test failed For example if the timer test fails on the ITG P 24 port line card F 05 is displayed If the other tests fail up to and including the EEPROM test a message is displayed for three seconds If more than one test fails the message displayed indicates the first failure If verbose mode has been selected by the test input pin on the backplane the three second failure message is not displayed If the maintenance display on the ITG P 24 port line card shows a persistent T 20 indicating an IP Line 4 0 software failure and if this occurs after the card was reset during a loadware download procedure call the Nortel Networks technical support for assistance in
42. disable Default Station Control Password default When DFLT_SCPW YES the system automatically assigns an SCPW when a new IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 or IP Softphone 2050 is created Note An SCPW is not automatically assigned to an existing IP phone unless that IP Phone is given a service change Password guessing protection A password retry counter tracks how many incorrect password entries are made If the IP Phone password verification fails three times in one hour then the user is locked out for one hour This means that the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List cannot be accessed and no password administration can be performed A message displays on the IP Phone to indicate that access is locked After one hour the retry counter is reset and access is unlocked The retry counter also resets when the password is entered correctly The administrator can reset the counter and unlock the access either in Element Manager or in LD 32 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 171 of 770 Note If a user is locked out from using their SCPW to access their Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List then the user is also blocked from accessing their Virtual Office login since VO uses the same SCPW Conversely a user who is locked out from the VO login is also locked out from accessing their Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List
43. echoServerShow 99 sample output Echo Server 1 Configured 0 0 0 0 10000 Actual 47 11 212 54 10000 TLAN IP this card LTPS request sent B1563 Failed resp rec d Configured 0 0 0 0 10000 Actual 47 11 212 60 10000 node IP other card LTPS request sent 50199 Failed resp rec d 4 NAT Timeout 30 seconds Configured 0 0 0 0 10000 Actual 47 11 212 54 10000 TLAN IP this card LTPS request sent D Failed resp rec d Configured 0 0 0 0 10000 Actual 47 11 212 60 10000 ode other card LTPS request sent 0 Failed resp rec d D NAT Timeout 30 seconds vgwShow The vgwShow command has been modified to allow the optional entry of an IP Phone s IP address and port A search is made of all the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node to find the IP Phone s IP address and port With the introduction of NAT Traversal more than one IP Phone may map to a single IP address The command input is modified to allow the entry of the public port number for a specific IP Phone vgwShow lt IPAddr gt lt port gt 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 83 of 770 If no port number is entered the first entry found with the specified IP address on a Voice Gateway Media Card is returned An example is shown in Figure 10 Figure 10 vgwShow with IP address command output 47 11 215 136 0x0 Card TN 005 00 ELAN IP 47 11 216 174 TLAN IP 47 11 215 143 r of matches 2 tate DspMode gt
44. gt RUN Number of Pings f3 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 531 of 770 30 From the Command drop down list select pbxLinkShow See Figure 175 Figure 175 pbxLinkShow command Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 192 168 1 101 Element Type SS Group pbxLink gt Command Select A Command z RUN A Select A Command F IP address 192 168 1 50 Number PING Click a button to invoke a command 31 Click the Run button The output appears in the window See Figure 176 on page 532 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 532 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 176 pbxLinkShow output Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group pbxLink 7 Command pbxLinkShow 7 RUN IP address 207 179 153 399 Number of Pings B PING ITG link is tracking the Main Cabinet Active Call Server type Small System Active Call Server 5 W Release 400 Supported Features CorpDir UserKeyLabel VirtualOffice UsecSPwd 12001 12004 Call Server Main ip 207 179 153 99 ConnectID 0x1835d08 BroadcastID 0x18 Call Server Survivable ip 207 179 153 102 ConnectID 0x1834640 BroadcastID Call Server Signaling Por
45. gt Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 dit Transfer Status gt Node 400 Node IP 192 168 2 100 The Transfer Status window opens See Figure 118 Figure 118 Transfer Status window Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 450 gt Transfer Status Select All Unselect All Transfer to Selected Elements Transfer to Failed Elements eee Transfer Status Transfer Status BOOTP CONFIG Element Element Unreachable Unreachable Hostname ELAN IP TN Type Role I Cara 192 168 1 10 130 ITG Pentium Unknown 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 381 of 770 5 Select the desired type of transfer 6 Click OK to confirm the transfer See Figure 119 Figure 119 Transfer confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer Ea Are you sure you want to transfer this node The Transfer Progress window opens and displays each of the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node The Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the Call Server 7 When the transfer is complete click OK in the Progress Check Complete dialog box See Figure 111 on page 370 If the transfer is successful for a card the Status column displays Complete If the transfer is unsuccessful the Status column displays Fail 8 Ifthe Follower card is
46. nodes Example ECNT NODE 8765 lt lt Zone 8765 gt gt Number of Registered Ethersets 3 ECNT SS Counts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified lt hostName gt Signaling Server e If hostName parameter is not entered the count is printed for all Signaling Servers Example ECNT SS lt lt Signaling Server BVWAlphaFox IP 10 10 10 242 gt gt Number of Register Ethersets 1000 Note f the hostName variable contains an underscore _ then an NPROO1 error message is returned as an underscore is considered to be an invalid character Error messages for the ECNT commands Error messages are printed when invalid data is entered for these commands The messages include valuable information such as the correct ranges for the command parameters See the following tables for the error messages e Table 23 ECNT Card command error messages on page 111 e Table 24 ECNT Zone command error messages on page 111 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 111 of 770 e Table 25 ECNT Node command error messages on page 112 e Table 26 ECNT SS command error message on page 112 Table 23 ECNT Card command error messages Error Slot out of range error Error Message Slot out of range Range 61 99 Slot non virtual loop error Slot does not correspond to a virtual loop Slot not configured loop error Slot corresponds to a virtual
47. s IP address and generates an NPROOS3 message As well if the IP Phone is registered but the Call Server is not responding an NPRO503 message is generated IP Line CLI commands IP Line CLI commands are designed to supplement Overlay commands and to introduce features specific to the ITG P 24 port line card Media Cards and Signaling Server platform All the CLI commands listed in Table 71 to Table 90 are supported on the ITG P 24 port line card and Media Cards The CLI commands are also available on the Signaling Server if an X is shown in the Signaling Server column of the table The IP Line CLI commands are accessed by connecting a TTY to the MAINT port on the Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate Alternatively use Telnet to access the CLI These IP Line CLI commands are entered at the IPL gt prompt Instructions for connecting to the maintenance port of the Signaling Server are described in Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration 553 3031 210 Refer to the Signaling Server maintenance ports section The commands are grouped into the following categories e General purpose commands on page 586 e File Transfer commands on page 590 e IP Configuration commands on page 594 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 586 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Reset commands on page 595 DSP commands on page 596 Upgrade commands on page 596
48. s Voice Gateway e Idle gateway channels are unregistered e A busy gateway channel is unregistered when it becomes idle IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 138 of 770 Features Note Care should be taken with this command to avoid a potential problem when calls are placed on hold When an IP Phone has a call on hold the voice gateway channel on the card is idle however it is still reserved in the Call Server If the voice gateway is still disabled when the call is taken off hold the call does not have a speech path Recommendation Nortel Networks recommends that the LD 32 DISI command be used for disabling the gateway channels Hardware watchdog timer A hardware watchdog timer is enabled on the ITG P 24 port and Media Card line cards This functionality adds further robustness to the existing exception handler and maintenance task audits The hardware watchdog timer handles scenarios such as the following e the CPU failing e the code running and not triggering an exception e resetting the card and bringing it back to normal operation The timer runs on the ITG P 24 port and Media Card line card processors The card s main processor is polled every 20 seconds If three pollings are missed then the card is reset This gives the main processor 60 seconds to respond covering most normal operating conditions A reset reason is logged and saved when a card resets The reset reason is displayed as
49. tpfShow itgCardShow The itgCardShow command displays information about a Voice Gateway Media Card At the IPL gt prompt type itgCardShow The itgCardShow command displays information similar to the following Index 1 Type EXUT Role Leader Node 123 Leader IP 47 103 247 220 Card IP 47 103 247 221 Card TN 44 0 10 Card State ENBL Uptime 1 days 19 hours 43 mins 11 secs 157391 secs Codecs G711Ulaw default G711Alaw G729AB 1lnPci stat 100 Mbps Carrier OK value 1 0x1 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 446 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration electShow The electShow command shows information to help a technician quickly become familiar with the current state of the node The command displays a list of cards in the node and information about each card This includes showing all registered followers to a leader The output has two sections e cards currently registered e cards that are in the BOOTP TAB configuration but not yet registered Registered cards The following information is displayed for each card currently registered e platform TN e ELAN network interface MAC e TLAN network interface IP Address e ELAN network interface IP Address e how long it has been registered e how many IP Phones are registered to the card number of Time Outs Unregistered cards The following information is displayed for each card currently not yet registere
50. using the Branch Office feature A branch office is a remote location in the network where IP Phones PSTN access and TDM telephones are located 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 127 of 770 Definition Branch Office is a feature set of the equipment and software that a secondary location needs to centralize the call processing of its IP based communications network The Call Server at the main office provides the call processing for the IP Phones in both the main office and the MG 1000B in the branch office location The MG 1000B in the branch office location provides access to the local PSTN Connections The MG 1000B is connected to the main office over virtual trunks on a WAN or LAN IP Phone calls and IP network connections are controlled by and come from the main office If the main office fails to function or a network outage occurs the Small System Controller SSC in the MG 1000B provides service to the IP Phones located in the branch office location The IP Phones then survive an outage between the MG 1000B and the main office Components The basic hardware of an MG 1000B includes the Media Gateway and the Signaling Server The Media Gateway provides access to the local PSTN for users in the branch office location It also provides support for analog devices such as fax machines or telephones in the branch office location For detailed information about MG 1000B refer to Branch Office Installatio
51. value 40 0x28 IPL gt Check the release label on the faceplate below the Hex display and ensure it is newer than Release 8 Reboot the card While the card is booting break into the BIOS by entering jkl when prompted At the prompt enter the following commands gt initMm value 0 0x0 gt spawnMm value 0 0x0 Depending on the location of the software file enter one of the following commands as shown in Table 92 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 643 of 770 The file name for the 8051 XAController firmware for the Media Card is SMCFW65 BIN Table 92 Upgrade command based on file location File is located on the card s C drive The file was previously FTPed to C upgradeXa 127 0 0 1 userid password lt C path gt lt fw_filename gt File is located on a PC Card plugged in the card s faceplate upgradeXa 127 0 0 1 userid password lt A path gt lt fw_filename gt 3 File is located on another card s C drive The file was previously FTPed to C upgradeXa lt ITG ELAN IPaddr gt userid password lt path gt lt fw_filename gt File is located on the OTM PC upgradeXa lt PC s IP addr gt itguser itguser lt Fw_filename gt File is located on a network FTP server upgradeXa lt server s IP addr gt lt uid gt lt pswd gt lt path gt lt Fw_fil
52. 1 50 gt System Utility gt Call Server System Utility gt Call Server Restore Action Restore from Backup Data PIB Submit Cancel 3 Select Restore from Backup Data from the Action drop down list Click the Submit button If the Restore is successful the message Restore was done successfully is displayed End of Procedure Update IP Telephony node properties To update the node properties of a Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 87 Procedure 87 Updating the IP Telephony node properties 1 Click Configuration in the navigation tree 2 Inthe Configuration menu click IP Telephony 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 521 of 770 The Node Summary window opens See Figure 165 3 Click the Edit button associated with the node to be updated Figure 165 Element Manager Node Summary F Site 192 168 1 52 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt NORTEL E NETWORKS Node Summary gt System Status Leta New Node to Add v Configuration Q ps Call Server Import Node Files IP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support P Tools A Logout gt Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 The Edit window opens See Figure 166 on page 522 IP Line Description Installation and
53. 168 1 2 1401 NAT PC IP IP Address Router 69 156 96 28 57285 Server 2 192 168 1 2 Private IP IP 18 26 4 77 9856 192 168 1 1 Public P 69 156 96 28 Server 3 IP IP 18 26 4 29 9856 69 156 96 28 57285 Since all three servers see the same PUBLIC port the NAT router is using Cone NAT 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 717 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics odieth ocr Ge ec sa eiad ee cieweeodedaniedsadatseedaiees 77 NIMPOSEA VO Cale 9 cia cele e nese ese enews ade eases 718 Connector PIN GSSISMIMOMIS ccc lied keni ttreke ERARE TES 720 Prevent ground loops on connection to external customer LAN equipment 723 NTAG81CA maintenance cable description 724 NTAGSIBA maintenance extender Cable 5 24 02 40005e0 030 725 Replace the NT8D81BA cable with the NT8D1AA cable and install the NTCWS4IW special IPEER syerescrreri osita dtes lemeeeesads decane 726 TOGIS lsd iteusireniatessake sone oeedeoroeueacheadeee 728 Remove the NTSD8SIBA cable 2s 6esscnesee wees sneenen 728 Install the NTCW84JA filter and NT8D81AA cable 729 This appendix describes the NTMF94EA NTAG81CA and NTAG81BA cables and explains how to replace the NT8D81BA backplane ribbon cable and install the NTCW84JA filter if required IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 7
54. 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary New Node i _to Add Import Node Files gt Node 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Transfer Status 2 Configure the IP addresses and subnet masks for the Signaling Server 3 Configure the IP Phone Application Server using the ELAN address of the new Signaling Server Click Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Personal Directories Server Configuration See Figure 22 on page 158 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 158 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Figure 22 Personal Directory Server Configuration NORTEL NETWORKS Site 207 179 153 939 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration v System Status a gt Node Summary gt Call Server Personal Directories Server Configuration Personal Directories User Profile N Configuration Quality Of Service Thresholds QoS gt call Server SNMP Configuration 1p Telephony Network Address Translation NAT gt Network Numbering Plan gt ip Telephony 4 Configure the backup parameters for Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List and click Submit See Figure 23 on page 159 Refer to Table 37 on page 155 for more information 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Figure 23 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Personal Directories Server Configuration window NORTEL NETWORKS v System Status gt Call
55. 179 153 99 Number of Pings E PING VGU Service is Enabled Chan ChanState DspMode Codec Reg AirTime Closed OxO0c04 Closed 0x0c05 Closed 0x0c06 Closed Ox0cO Closed Ox0c44 Closed Ox0c45 Closed Ox0c46 Closed Ox0c47 Closed n a Ox0c84 Closed G 711 30 Ox0c 85 Closed G 711 30 Ox0cs6 OWUMAMDM bN eO ooo0oo0oo0oo0c co 000 ooo0oo0o00 00000 ooo0o0o00 00000 ooo0o0oo00 00000 ooo0oo0oo0o0 co 000 H 7 To view the VGW Channel configuration from the Command drop down list select Print VGW Channels and click the RUN button The output of the Print VGW Channels command is shown in Figure 191 on page 558 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 558 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 191 Output of Print VGW Channels Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group Yow bd Command Print VGW Channels x RUN IP address 207 179 153 399 Number of Pings 3 PING VGW Channel Configuration 013 0 00 00 VGW o ITGP 000 013 0 00 01 VGW 0 ITGP End of Procedure Setting the IP Phone Installer Password Element Manager includes the CLI commands for setting the administrative and temporary IP Phone Installer Password For detailed information about the IP Phone Installer Password refer to the section IP Phone Installer Password
56. 192 168 2100 Node IP 192 168 2 90 ELAN IP 192 168 1 10 Node IP 192 168 2 81 Total elements Total elements 1 Total elements 1 Type ITG Pentium Total elements 2 ELAN OM RPT Reset Virtual Terminal Status Click buttons to invoke a command 3 Click the GEN CMD button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The General Commands window opens See Figure 189 on page 556 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 556 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 189 General Command Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group x Command Select A Group RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings BRING 4 From the Group drop down list select Vgw From the Command drop down list select vgwShowaAll 6 Click RUN The output of the vgwShowAll command is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the window See Figure 190 on page 557 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 557 of 770 Figure 190 vgwShowAll output Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group Vow he Command vgwShowAll gt RUN IP address 207
57. 2 Major 3 Minor 4 Warning 5 Cleared Info 6 Indeterminate Info Error messages with a severity category of Critical are displayed on the Voice Gateway Media Card s maintenance faceplate display in the form Gxxx or Sxxx where xxx is the last three digits of the ITG or ITS message The Signaling Server does not have a faceplate display Alarms appear in the Signaling Server s report log or by way of SNMP on an Alarm browser IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 574 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 67 lists the critical ITG messages and Table 68 on page 577 lists the critical ITS messages All listed alarms can be sent by a Voice Gateway Media Card Any alarm that can be sent by the Signaling Server has an X in the column labeled Signaling Server For a complete listing of other error messages see Software Input Output System Messages 553 3001 411 Table 67 Critical ITG Error messages Part 1 of 4 Corresponding Maintenance Critical Signaling Display Error Message Server Description GO0oo ITG1000 X Card re booted G001 ITG1001 X Task spawn failure lt name gt Go02 ITG1002 X Memory allocation failure G003 ITG1003 X File IO error lt operation gt lt object gt lt errno gt lt errtext gt G004 ITG1004 X Network IO error lt operation gt lt object gt lt errno gt lt errtext gt GO005 I
58. 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 705 of 770 Figure 214 BootP 1 information window Site 47 11 214 224 gt Configuration gt Node Summary gt Import Node Files Management LAN ELAN IP address of the leader from py where to retrieve the node files Currently configured nodes Node ID of the new node to be created Continue The BOOTP 1 and CONFIG1 INI files were retrieved from Voice Gateway Media Card 47 11 214 228 Since the BOOTP 1 file does not have a node ID please enter the node ID that you want for this node and click on the Continue button If you have already installed a signaling server which will be the leader for this node please use the node ID of that signaling server to create this node and then add the signaling server to this node 7 Enter the node ID 8 Click Continue When the new node has been created with the imported data the following warning is displayed Warning Call Server address in CONFIG INI is 0 0 0 0 Please edit the node and update it BOOTP TAB AND CONFIG INI files for node yyy were retrieved from Voice Gateway Media Card x x x x and stored on Call Server z z z z The new node will appear on the Node Summary page Configuration gt IP Telephony 9 Inthe Node Summary window click the Edit button for the new node See Figure 215 on page 706 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 706 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Card
59. 221 38 TN 000 f IP Telephony Maintenance Configuration The basic configuration of the card including the IP addresses are defined in the node properties The card must be disabled before changes can be made OTM site SAW version OTM system i2001 FAW version Name i2002 FAW version Hostname i2002e FAW version Location i2004 FAW version Contact i2004e F W version Customer Node Id Card role Card TN Card Properties synch status Last downloaded The current Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware versions are displayed on the Configuration tab The Voice Gateway Media Card software is labelled S W version and the IP Phone firmware is labeled i2001 i2002 or i2004 F W version 5 Write down the loadware and firmware version for each Voice Gateway Media Card Compare the loadware and firmware version with the latest recommended software release on the Nortel Networks web site 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 309 of 770 Check the Nortel Networks web site for the latest IP Line 4 0 software and IP Phone firmware releases Download the files See Appendix F on page 763 Note The IP Line 4 0 software files and IP Phone firmware files are contained in the IP Line 4 00xx SA file in the Internet Telephony Gateway product list on the Nortel Networks web site The zipped file contains the following e The IPL400xx p2 and
60. 274 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 3 Under Codec Options the following parameters are user configurable on a per codec basis Leave the values at their default settings unless directed to change them as follows or by Nortel Networks Field Support a Law type The law type is applicable to G 711 only The default is mu law Voice Activity Detection The default is VAD disabled The VAD value is stored in the Config ini file under the entry VadEnabled VAD is not supported for G 711 Voice payload size The default is the maximum supported This parameter is not configurable for the following G 723 1 T 38 Fax G 711 Clear Channel Fax The payload size is stored in the Config ini file under the entry VxPayload d Voice playout nominal delay nominal jitter buffer Voice playout maximum delay maximum jitter buffer The default values and the range of allowed values are displayed in the drop down lists 4 Click OK 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 275 of 770 Figure 66 New Node DSP Profile tab Codec Options sub tab with G 729 AB Codec selected DSP Options Codec Options r G 729AB Settings Enable one or more codec types and mudaw alaw Reset Codec Defauts select the appropriate settings for each Vv Enable yoice activity detection WAD m Codec Selection Voice payload size 20 E Voice pla
61. 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 391 of 770 3 Expand a node and select a card See Figure 124 Figure 124 FWvVersionShow button IP Telephone FW Upgrade Distribute to Nodes Distribute to Elements Open all nodes Close All nodes Clear all V Node ip Node IP 8 192 168 253 7 Hostname ELAN IP Type Role cr gt NODES m 24 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower faversionShow 207 179 153 100 Signaling Server Leader fwiVersionShow m s 207 179 153 111 Succession Unknown fwersionShow Media Card Firmlare TermType PolicyName Server FileName Limit When i2004 DEFAULT_I2004 192 168 253 8 fums i2004 f0 15 i2004 DEFAULT_IZ004 192 168 253 6 ums i2004 fw 15 ALUA M FileName Release Version 0602B65 BIN ee a oe 0604D44 BIN 200x Phase2 4 Click the fmVersionShow button located to the right of the card information IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 392 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager The firmware version running on the card is displayed in the pane in the center of the IP Telephone FW window In the example displayed in Figure 124 on page 391 the firmware versions shown are for the ITG Pentium card 5 Note the firmware version for the card End of Procedure Download the current software and IP Phone firmware To check for the latest software and IP Phone firmware rele
62. 45 46 46 48 48 49 50 51 32 53 33 54 54 54 56 56 The IP Line 4 0 application provides an interface that connects an IP Phone to a Meridian 1 PBX and a CS 1000 Call Server Note IP Line 4 0 does not operate on Meridian 1 or CS 1000 systems running software earlier than CS 1000 Release 4 0 IMPORTANT IP Line 3 1 or earlier is not supported in CS 1000 Release 4 0 Features IP Line 4 0 introduces the following features e support for the Nortel Networks IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 21 of 770 support for the Nortel Networks IP Phone 2001 IP Call Recording Personal Directory for IP Phones Callers List for IP Phones Redial List for IP Phones password protection for the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List centralized database and administration for the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List support for UNIStim File Transfer Protocol UFTP for IP Phone firmware downloads support for traversal of Network Address Translation NAT devices Voice Gateway Media Cards If a Media Card 32 port card a Media Card 8 port card or an ITG P 24 port card is running IP Line 4 0 software it is known as a Voice Gateway Media Card DHCP server A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server can be used to provide the required information to enable the IP Phone network connection and connect to the Voice
63. Best Quality and requires the largest amount of bandwidth The last entry requires the least amount of bandwidth BB Best Bandwidth with lower voice quality When the Call Server sets up a Call Server connection between an IP Phone to IP Phone or IP Phone to Voice Gateway Channel Server the pre defined table determines which codec it selects for that connection This information is provided to the system as part of the IP Phone registration sequence For more information about the registration sequence refer to Configuring the DHCP Server in Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Codec selection The systems use this information to set up a speech path and select a codec that both endpoints support As part of zone management the system further selects the codec based on whether it is trying to optimize quality BQ or bandwidth usage BB CAUTION When voice compression codecs are used voice quality is impaired if end to end calls include multiple compressions 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 181 of 770 The term codec refers to the voice coding and compression algorithm used by the DSPs on the Voice Gateway Media Card Different codecs provide different levels of voice quality and compression properties The specific codecs and the order in which they are used are configured in the LTPS and on the system Table 39 shows which codecs are supported on the CS 1000 and Meri
64. Cables are designated by the letter of the I O panel cutout such as A B and C where the 50 pin cable connector is attached Each cable has three 20 pin connectors 16 positions are used designated 1 2 and 3 that attach to the backplane Using the designations described the backplane ends of the first cable are referred to as A 1 A 2 and A 3 The locations of the cable connectors on the backplane are designated by the slot number LO through L9 for NT8D11 LO through L15 for NT8D37 and the shroud row 1 2 and 3 Using these designations the slot positions in the first slot are referred to as LO 1 LO 2 and LO 3 In NT8D37BA and NT8D37EC and later vintage IPE Modules all 16 IPE card slots support 24 pair cable connections Table 99 NT8D37 cable connections on page 727 shows the cable connections from the backplane to the inside of the I O panel 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 727 of 770 Table 99 NT8D37 cable connections Backplane slots shroud rows I O panel cable designation L10 1 L11 1 2 3 L12 1 2 3 L13 1 2 3 L14 1 2 3 L15 1 2 3 A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T U Figure 221 on page 728 shows the designations for the backplane end of the cables the backplane slot designations for the cable connections and the associated network segments for the backplane slots IP Line Description Installation and O
65. DSP IPL gt commands applicable to the Voice Gateway Media Card Table 75 DSP commands Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server DSPReset Resets the specified DSP DSPNumShow Displays the number of DSPs on the Voice Gateway Media Card Upgrade commands Table 76 lists the upgrade IPL gt commands Table 76 Upgrade commands An Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server umsPolicyShow Displays the current upgrade policy X umsUpgradeAll Upgrades all registered IP Phones according to X policy and firmware file umsUpgradeTimerShow Shows the upgrade schedule xX umsUpgradeTimerCancel Cancels the scheduled upgrade 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 597 of 770 IPL gt shell commands Table 77 lists the command to change the IPL gt shell password Table 77 IPL gt shell command Signaling IPL gt command Description Server shellPasswordSet Changes the current user name and password of the IPL gt CLI shell IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 598 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance IP Phone Installer Password commands Table 78 lists the IP Phone Installer Password commands Table 78 IP Phone Installer Password commands Part 1 of 3 IPL gt command Description Signaling Server nodePwdSet password Sets and enables the administrative IP Phone Installer node
66. Directory feature for this TN The Call Server service change does not affect Corporate Directory immediately If a telephone is in Corporate Directory mode and there is a service change to set CLS as CPRD then the current display and key handling should not be affected The changed CLS occurs only when the user quits the Corporate Directory application and enters again For more information about the operation of the Corporate Directory feature refer to Optivity Telephony Manager Installation and Configuration 553 3001 230 Note Corporate Directory is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 416 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Private Zone configuration DSP channels and IP Phones are set as Shared or Private based on zone configuration This is accomplished through the parameter zoneResourceType in the zone configuration commands in LD 117 The lt zoneResourceType gt parameter specifies the zone to be either shared or private A zone is configured in LD 117 as follows NEW ZONE lt zoneNumber gt lt intraZoneBandwidth gt lt intraZoneStrategy gt lt interZoneBandwidth gt lt interZoneStrategy gt lt zoneResourceType gt CHG ZONE lt zoneNumber gt lt intraZoneBandwidth gt lt intraZoneStrategy gt lt interZoneBandwidth gt lt interZoneStrategy gt lt zoneResourceType gt By default a zone is configured as Shared zoneResourceType shared
67. Edit window click the Remove button for the old Leader card Card B that was removed Click OK to confirm the deletion of the card Click Save and Transfer In the Node Summary window click the Transfer Status button associated with the node containing the new Leader card and the deleted Leader card End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 537 of 770 Change the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in Element Manager Before changing any IP address understand Codecs on page 179 and consult with the IP network administrator IP address configuration changes are completed in four sections of the Edit window The four sections are Node network connections are configured in this section See Figure 179 on page 538 Card card properties are configured in this section See Figure 180 on page 540 SNMP SMNP traps are enabled and configured in this section See Figure 181 on page 542 LAN Configuration ELAN TLAN settings and card routing table entries are configured in this section See Figure 182 on page 543 To change the IP address of an IP Telephony node follow the steps in Procedure 91 Procedure 91 Changing the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in Element Manager 1 Click Configuration in the navigation tree 2 Inthe Configuration menu click IP Telephony The IP Telephony window opens 3 Click Node Summary The N
68. Element Manager See Procedure 57 on page 394 5 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software See Procedure 58 on page 396 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 383 of 770 6 Restart the Voice Gateway Media Card See Procedure 59 on page 400 7 Upgrade and distribute the IP Phones firmware on the Voice Gateway Media Card See Procedure 60 on page 401 Note To upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card firmware see Procedure 61 on page 407 Upgrade options Once the Voice Gateway Media Card loadware and IP Phone firmware has been verified there are three upgrade options 1 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software only It may only be necessary to upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software This option is used most frequently however verify if an IP Phone firmware upgrade is also required 2 Upgrade both the Voice Gateway Media Card software and the IP Phone firmware Note Defer restarting the cards until the end of the firmware upgrade If the IP Phones are registered to the Signaling Server rebooting the Voice Gateway Media Card does not affect the telephones as long as they are not using a gateway channel on the rebooted card However if the IP Phones are registered to the Voice Gateway Media Card resetting the card causes the IP Phone to reboot and reregister 3 Upgrade only the IP Phone firmware Note In this case restart all the IP Phones i
69. Excel If Microsoft Excel is not installed on the PC then OTM notifies the user that the file will be opened in Wordpad End of Procedure Operational Measurements OM information for a Voice Gateway Media Card in the node can be viewed using OTM This OM file is a view of the LTPS and Voice Gateway channel activity for each model of IP Phone on that card The OTM OM Report Generation feature is an overview of all the cards in all sites and systems The Voice Gateway Media Card OM file contains the following information for each model of IP Phone e the number of incoming and outgoing calls e the number of call attempts 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 461 of 770 e the number of calls completed e the total holding time for voice calls To view a Voice Gateway Media Card s OM file from OTM follow the steps in Procedure 69 Procedure 69 Retrieving the current OM file from the Voice Gateway Media Card using OTM 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Select the node in the upper portion of the window 3 Select the Voice Gateway Media Card from the lower portion of the window 4 Right click the card and then select Properties from the pop up menu The Card Properties window opens to the Maintenance tab See Figure 145 on page 462 IP Line Description Installation and Operati
70. Gateway Media Card For more information on DHCP refer to Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 and JP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Interworking The IP Phone uses the IP network to communicate with the Voice Gateway Media Card and the optional DHCP server Figure 1 on page 22 shows a diagram of the system architecture IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 22 of 770 Description Figure 1 System architecture CS 1000M Branch Media Gateway LAN IP Trunk 3 0 Signaling Server or later Optionally Redundant li Terminal Proxy Server Signa me Server H 323 proxy Signaling Server Primary Gatekeeper Optionally Redundant Element Manager Web Server __ Terminal Proxy Server H 323 proxy Alternate Gatekeeper Element Manager Web Server CS 1000 Web Browser i Call Server Signaling Server for Element Manager a F IP Requires BCM Phones Release 3 0 or higher Media streams routed directly using IP Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion 553 AAA0400 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 23 of 770 Applicable systems The CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems support the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG Pentium 24 port line card Unsupported products The following remote service products do not support the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG Pentium 24 po
71. IP If applicable enter the Survivable Cabinet ELAN IP address Active ELNK The Survivable Cabinet IP is enabled only for Small Systems and CS 1000S systems Note For Small Systems or CS 1000S systems this field is disabled unless at least one cabinet has been defined in OTM Navigator as a Survivable Cabinet of the main system Each node has only one Survivable Cabinet IP address The Survivable Cabinet is equipped with sufficient trunk cards and Voice Gateway Media Cards In case of Call Server equipment failure the Survivable Cabinet provides a large degree of survivability for IP Phone users c Signaling port This field is read only d Broadcast port This field is read only Under TLAN Signaling port This field is read only b Voice port This field displays the range for RTP packets sent to the IP Phones In general use the default value of 5200 If however numerous IP Phones are working over low bandwidth WAN links using CISCO RTP header compression then change the voice port to a number in the range of 16384 to 32767 Coordinate this value change with the IP network administrator Click Apply When all updates to the IP addresses have been made click OK in the Node Properties window Unplug all the Voice Gateway Media Cards except Leader 0 Leader 0 receives its configuration from the BOOTP TAB file Plug in all the cards Leader 0 forces its configuration to all the other cards IP Line Description Instal
72. IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 544 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 11 Enter the following Management LAN ELAN configuration settings a Call Server IP address This is the IP address of the Call Server on the ELAN subnet Enter the Call Server ELAN subnet IP Address Active ELNK Note The Call Server ELAN subnet IP address must correspond to the Active ELNK IP address configured in LD 117 It must be on the same subnet as the ELAN for the IP Line node b Survivable Media Gateway IP address This is the IP address of the Survivable Media Gateway on the ELAN subnet Note 1 The Survivable Media Gateway IP address must correspond to the Active ELNK IP address If configured all Voice Gateway Media Cards in the same node should be in the same Survivable Cabinet Note 2 The Survivable Media Gateway associated with the primary Signaling Server IP Telephony node is called the Alternate Call Server It is usually located in the same equipment rack with the Call Server and Signaling Server Therefore it is usually connected to the same ELAN subnet as the Call Server and the primary Signaling Server IP Telephony node The Alternate Call Server Media Gateway is equipped with sufficient trunk cards and Voice Gateway Media Cards and centralized CallPilot This provides a large degree of survivability in case of Call Server equipment failure for IP Phone users who normally register through the Signali
73. IP Phones and the card information However even with only one card there still is not a 100 correlation as an IP Phone can still call another IP Phone without involving the Voice Gateway channels IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 514 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Note Element Manager supports the ability to view OM files only OTM can optionally be used to support other Operational Measurements tasks such as scheduling reports generating reports opening reports and viewing reports See Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation on page 454 for more information View IP Line log files Element Manager uses RPC to transfer the sysfile from the Voice Gateway Media Card to the PC The error log file displays error information including error date time the originating module IP Telephony node and specific error data To view error conditions that are abnormal events but not severe enough to raise an alarm follow the steps in Procedure 84 Procedure 84 Viewing IP Line log files 1 Click System Status in the navigation tree 2 Click IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window appears 3 Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 158 on page 508 4 Click the SYS LOG button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The Syslog window appears See Figure 160 on page 515 The Syslog window has five buttons to view the log fi
74. IP Telephony Node along with the TN or IP address of a particular IP Phone displays the information shown in the previous example as well as the identification of the card with which the IP Phone is registered This is useful when it is necessary to identify the card on which to enable a message monitor or to connect a sniffer when debugging a specific IP Phone s problem Figure 7 on page 78 shows a sample output IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 78 of 770 Features Figure 7 isetNATShow sample output IPL gt isetNATShow 47 11 217 102 value 0 0x0 IPL gt Signalling Media Public IP Addr Port Public IP Addr Port Private IP Addr Port Private IP Addr Port NAT Type RTCP Type Set TN Regd TN gt Found on Card TN 009 00 ELAN IP 47 11 217 21 TLAN IP 47 11 216 185 47 11 217 102 10000 47 11 217 102 10354 Cone Y i2002 Ph2 061 08 061 08 192 168 1 3 5000 192 168 1 3 5200 gt Found on Card TN 009 00 ELAN IP 47 11 217 21 TLAN IP 47 11 216 185 47 11 217 102 10006 47 11 217 102 10007 Cone Y i2004 061 00 061 00 192 168 1 4 5000 192 168 1 4 5200 The command isetShow and isetNATShow can display the information about an IP Phone based on IP or TN The IP is the Public IP address used for signaling If isetShow or isetNATShow is typed with a Public IP address used by multiple IP Phones then all those IP Phones are displayed even if the IP Phones are registered to d
75. IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 343 of 770 Figure 95 Element Manager Edit N RTEL NETWORKS gt System Status V Configuration gt Call Server oP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support A Tools A Logout 5 Site 47 11 254 121 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 568 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel gt Node gt SNMP jaca gt VGW Profile QoS gt LAN configuration gt SNTP gt H323 GW Settings gt Firmware gt SIP GW Settings gt SIP URI Map gt SIP CD Services gt cards jaa gt signaling Servers jac Save and Transfer Cancel Mandatory fieids of current configuration The Edit window includes three different buttons e Save and Transfer This button saves and transfers changes to the Call Server and returns the users to the Node Summary window e Cancel This button discards changes made to the IP Telephony node and returns the users to the Node Summary window e Add The Add buttons are associated with specific sections of the IP Telephony node properties The user can add new SNMP traps cards and Signaling Servers Click Node to edit the Node information if it is not already expanded by default See Figure 96 on page 344 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 344 of 770 Configu
76. IPL400xx sa loadware files The IPL400xx p2 file is the IP Line 4 0 application for the ITG P 24 port line card The IPL400xx sa is the IP Line 4 0 application for the Media Card e The 0602Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2004 0603Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2002 and 0604Dnn BIN Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware files For example a firmware version can be labelled 0602B38 This means IP Phone firmware version 1 38 The 02 represents the IP Phone 2004 The letter B represents the version number 38 represents the release number 38 e A readme txt file The readme txt file explains important considerations when installing the new software and firmware versions The readme file also includes identifying information for the software and firmware files such as the date and time size and checksum Locate the saved file and double click the zip file The zipped file opens in a compression utility program and the uncompressed files are listed If the card s software and firmware are not up to date transfer the downloaded files p2 sa and firmware file s from an Internet enabled PC to the OTM PC If the card s software and firmware are not up to date upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card with the software and firmware files IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 310 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Refer to Procedure 35 Upgrading Vo
77. If the area code of the incoming call matches a specified area code the DN is displayed in the configured manner for example the area code may be displayed after the DN No area code Name display format Configures the format of the name display of the incoming call on the IP Phone There are two choices lt first name gt lt last name gt lt last name gt lt first name gt lt first name gt lt last name gt Note The IP Phone 2002 does not display the New Call Indication on the idle screen at the same time as the date and time Instead the New Call Indication alternates with the date and time display IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 152 of 770 Redial List Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Redial List supports the following features e maximum entries 20 e maximum characters in name 24 e maximum characters in DN 31 e contains name DN and the time the last call to that DN occurred in each entry e newest entry overwrites oldest entry once 20 entry limit is reached e sort by the time the call is logged e multiple actions dial DN of an entry edit entry copy entry delete entry delete contents of list one minute time out IP Phone Application Server configuration and administration The IP Phone Application Server runs on the Signaling Server If less than 1000 users are supported then the IP Phone Application Serv
78. In the default state the Time is null If the card is not in the default state this setting specifies the duration in hours in which the temporary password is valid The range is 0 240 hours which is a maximum of 10 days The number specified under Timeout indicates the remaining time to expire of the temporary password The Time parameter is optional if the Uses parameter is non zero The Time parameter is mandatory if the Uses parameter is set to zero Note f both the Uses and Time parameters are entered the password expires based on whichever happens first that is the number of Uses is reduced to zero or the Time has expired If both the Uses and Time parameters are entered and are set to zero it is the same as not setting the temporary password Set the Administrator IP Phone Installer Password The nodePwdSet password commands enables and sets the administrator password The password parameter can be null or 6 to 14 digits in length The valid characters are 0 9 This command can be entered at any time The new password entered simply overwrites the previous password Set the password first with a null password and then with a password specified 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 437 of 770 Type nodePwdSet at the IPL gt prompt Note that no password parameter is specified Type nodePwdShow to see the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Ye
79. Media Card installation summary sheet on page 199 d Voice IP This is the TLAN IP address for the card e Voice LAN gateway IP This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN f Card TN For Large Systems enter Card TN I s c information For Small Systems and CS 1000S systems enter two zeros followed by the card slot number 1 50 for example 0 0 49 The card TN format is determined by the system type that is configured in the OTM Navigator Ensure the correct system type is entered in the OTM Navigator before adding the node g Card Type Choose either Pentium or StrongArm Select Pentium if using a ITG P 24 port line card dual slot card Select StrongArm if using a Media Card single slot card h Click Add The card role and address information appears in a working list at the bottom of the New Node window i Repeat the above steps for each card that is being added to the node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 271 of 770 3 Click Apply to add the card s to the Node Note When Apply is clicked the title of the window changes from New Node to Node Properties End of Procedure Configure DSP profile data In OTM 2 2 the DSP Profile tab and its two sub tabs DSP Options and Codec Options are used to configure DSP profile data Follow the steps in Procedure 23 to configure DSP profile data Procedure 23 Configuring DSP profi
80. NAT router 192 168 0 1 lt gt 47 10 221 114 Public IP Information IP 47 10 221 114 DN 23215 Signaling Port 1500 dynamic UFTP Port 1500 dynamic Audio Port 1501 dynamic Private IP Information IP 192 168 0 101 DN 23215 Signaling Port 5000 UFTP Port 5000 Audio Port 5200 IP Cloud CS 1000 Release 4 0 System Node IP 47 10 220 100 TLAN IP 47 10 220 105 Signaling Port 5100 UFTP Port 5105 IP 47 10 221 201 DN 42121 Signaling Port 5000 UFTP Port 5000 Audio Port 5200 Two Download log files log the results of the UFTP firmware downloads uftplog0 txt and uftplog1 txt One file is active and one file is inactive When a file is full it becomes the inactive file and the other file is written to The active file displays the most recent entries On Voice Gateway Media Cards the log files are located in the C LOG directory The Download log files are limited to 10K each for a total of 20K Approximately 128 log messages can be saved in each log file On the Signaling Server the log files are located in the U LOG directory The Download log files are limited to 400K each for a total of 800K Approximately 5000 log messages can be saved in each log file IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 86 of 770 Features The Download log files are generated during initialization of the UFTP Server task If the Download log files do not exist during the start up of the
81. Office log in from an IP Phone 2004 an IP Softphone 2050 user and an MVC 2050 can log in under certain conditions when the user attempts a Virtual Office login from an IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 See Set type checking and blocking on page 140 An IP Softphone can virtually login from an IP Phone 2004 another IP Softphone 2050 2050 user or an MVC 2050 can log in under certain conditions when the user attempts a Virtual Office login from an IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 See Set type checking and blocking on page 140 An MVC 2050 can virtually log in from an IP Phone 2004 an IP Softphone 2050 or user another MVC 2050 can log in under certain conditions when the user attempts a Virtual Office login from an IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 See Set type checking and blocking on page 140 Virtual Office User Allowed VOUA and Virtual Office Login Allowed VOLA must be configured on the IP Phones as follows e The IP Phone where the user wants to virtually login destination must have Virtual Office User Allowed VOUA configured e The IP Phone where the user wants to log in from source must have Virtual Office Login Allowed VOLA configured IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 126 of 770 Features Failed password attempt Three failed password attempts to log in using the Virtual Office feature locks the user out from Virtual Office login at the Ca
82. Operation Page 522 of 770 Figure 166 Element Manager Edit N RTEL 3 NETWORKS gt System Status v Configuration gt Call Server oP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support Tools A Logout IP Line administration using Element Manager Site 47 11 254 121 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Hode ID 568 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel gt Node gt SNMP jaa gt snip gt 11323 GW Settings gt Firmware gt SIP GW Settings gt SIP URI Map gt SIP CD Services gt cards w fass gt signaling Servers Save and Transfer Cancel Mandatory fields of current configuration Perform all required updates to the parameters in the appropriate sections If Voice Gateway Media Cards are added to deleted from or replaced in the node or a Voice Gateway Media Card is changed then use one of the following procedures e Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node on page 523 e Delete a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card from the node on page 533 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 523 of 770 e Change the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in Element Manager on page 537 e Replacing a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card on page 668 e refer to the Maintenance se
83. Options gt Set Info menu and scroll down to the FW Version menu item The minimum firmware versions based on the vintage of the IP Phone that support the NAT Traversal feature are e Nortel Networks IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 xxxxB64 Nortel Networks Phase II IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 xxxxD41 e Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 xxxx375 Earlier firmware versions do not correctly support the NAT Traversal feature IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 714 of 770 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Natcheck output A NAT router using CONE NAT will have output similar to the following D natcheck gt natcheck v server 1 server 2 server 3 Local TCP Local UDP Request 1 port port oF 20 1400 1401 Connection to server 2 complete Server 1 reports my UDP address Server 2 reports my UDP address Server 3 reports my UDP address 69 69 69 as as as Connection to server 1 complete Server 1 reports my TCP Connection from 18 26 4 Server 3 reports my TCP Loopback packet Loopback packet Loopback packet Loopback packet Request Loopback Request 7 Loopback Request 8 Loopback Request 9 Loopback packet of packet of packet of packet Loopback packet Loopback packet Loopback packet Loopback packet Request 2 of 20 Request 3 of 20 Request 4 of 20 Request 5 of 20 from 69 from 69 fro
84. PRI STATUS PC SP ERRNO DELAY tExcTask _excTask 339a824 0 PEND 2aca80 339a758 3006b 0 tShell _shell 2e31e30 1 PEND 231e08 2e316d4 0 0 tSET 19be9c 2b6263c 200 PEND 256d84 2b62518 320001 0 tSyslogd 10a58 3aff168 255 READY 22f6d0 3afeac4 0 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 684 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager ifShow ixpMac unit number 1 Flags 0x8863 UP BROADCAST MULTICAST ARP RUNNING Type ETHERNET_CSMACD Internet address 47 104 39 115 Broadcast address 47 104 39 127 Netmask Oxf 000000 Subnetmask Oxffffff80 Ethernet address is 00 60 38 bd bb cd Metric is 0 Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500 298604 packets received 23909 packets sent 278631 multicast packets received 4608 multicast packets sent 0 input errors 0 output errors 0 collisions 0 dropped lo unit number 0 Flags 0x8069 UP LOOPBACK MULTICAST ARP RUNNING Type SOFTWARE LOOPBACK Internet address 127 0 0 1 Netmask Oxf 000000 Subnetmask 0xf 000000 Metric is 0 Maximum Transfer Unit size is 32768 4 packets received 4 packets sent 0 multicast packets received 0 multicast packets sent 0 input errors 0 output errors 0 collisions 0 dropped ixpMac unit number 0 Flags 0x8863 UP BROADCAST MULTICAST ARP RUNNING Type ETHERNET_CSMACD Internet address 47 104 39 243 Broadcast address 47 104 39 255 Netmask Oxf 000000 Subnetmask O0xffffff80 Ethernet address is 00 60 38 bd bb cc Metri
85. PRT DNIP output The PRT DNIP command generally produces the following output e an initial line displaying the DN and customer number If there is output for multiple customers this line is repeated before each customer s output e information for each occurrence of the DN on any IP Phone for that customer TN set type 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 605 of 770 key number of DN appearance and type of DN current IP address of the IP Phone configured zone for the IP Phone state of the IP Phone s registration If the IP Phone is behind a NAT device the public IP address is displayed with the private IP address underneath in parenthesis An example of PRT DNIP output is shown in Figure 199 Figure 199 PRT DNIP output gt prt DNIP B001 CUST DO DN B001 TN Type Key Signaling IP Media IP 061 00 12004 01 SCR 30 1 1 10 5000 30 1 1 10 5200 gt prt DNIP 2041 CUST 0O DN 2041 TN Type Key Signaling IP Media IP 061 01 12004 01 SCR 30 1 1 100 1250 30 1 1 10 192 169 1 13 192 168 1 13 PRT IPDN The PRT IPDN command produces the following output e an initial line displaying the IP address for the search e a second line displaying the customer number TN set type zone and registration status of the IP Phone using the specified IP address e information for all DNs configured on that IP Phone key number of DN appearance and t
86. Part 1 of 2 Command Description disiTPS Disables the LTPS service only No new IP Phones are registered on the card and all registered IP Phones are reset when they become idle This command applies to both the Voice Gateway Media Card and Signaling Server On the Signaling Server this command affects only the LTPS It does not affect the virtual trunks or gatekeeper components which means the node mastership is not moved to another LTPS disiVGW Disables the Voice Gateway only All Voice Gateways unregister with the Call Server when they become idle This command is applicable only to the Voice Gateway Media Card or the stand alone IP Line application disiAll Disables both the LTPS service and the Voice Gateway channels This command is a combination of both disiTPS and disiVGW commands On the Signaling Server this command affects only the LTPS It does not affect the virtual trunks or gatekeeper components which means the node mastership is not moved to another LTPS enaTPS Enables the LTPS service This command is used after the disTPS command to bring the LTPS back into service This command applies to both Voice Gateway Media Cards and the Signaling Server On the Signaling Server this command affects the LTPS only It does not affect the virtual trunks or gatekeeper components 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 613 of 770 Table 82 Gracef
87. Password in the Node Password field and click the RUN button Figure 194 Node Password Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group NodePwd Command MEE aa RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings B PING Click a button to invoke a command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 10 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 563 of 770 This enables and sets the administrator password The password parameter can be null or 6 to 14 digits in length The valid characters are 0 9 This command can be entered at any time The new password entered overwrites the previous password The text area returns the message Please run nodePwdShow to verify the result From the Command drop down list select nodePwdShow and click RUN The text area data output is similar to the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 Od Oh Om Os WARNING If the RUN button in the Node Password field is clicked and no password is entered in the text box then the password is enabled but is null In the above output the PwdEna field displays Yes and the Pwd field is blank To configure a temporary password from the Command drop down list select nodeTempPwdSet The window refreshes and blank fields are displayed for the following Node Passwo
88. Properties in the following situations when the OTM IP Line data is out of date and all OTM IP Telephony node data will be synchronized with the data from the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the node when adding a node in OTM by retrieving data from an existing node with more than one card Select Card Properties when attempting to isolate a problem with IP Line configuration on a particular card Select the check boxes for the IP Line configuration data to be retrieved depending on the situation a Select Node Properties and Card Properties if the OTM IP Line data is out of date and all OTM IP Telephony node data will be synchronized with the data from the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the node Select Card Properties if adding a node on OTM by retrieving data from an existing node that consists of more than one card Select any combination of check boxes as indicated by problem symptoms when attempting to isolate a problem on a particular card Use the dummy node for this purpose Click the Start retrieve button Monitor the progress of the retrieval under Retrieve control box The retrieved Node Properties and Card Properties overwrite the existing OTM IP Line configuration data for the respective node or card End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 667 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Contents Introduction This section contain
89. Range 0 to 63 Diffserv Codepoint DSCP Voice packets Range 0 to 63 Enable 802 1Q support 802 10 Bits value 802 1p Range 0 to 7 Enable NAT support Keepalive message interval Range 10 to 3600 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 70 of 770 Features NAT Traversal and Proactive Voice Quality Management IP Line 4 0 introduces Proactive Voice Quality Management Real Time Control Protocol RTCP signaling provides statistics for example latency packet loss and jitter about the Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP stream For the RTCP signaling to be successful the PUBLIC RTCP port number must be the RTP port number 1 For example if the PUBLIC RTP port is 12000 then the PUBLIC RTCP port must be 12001 The NAT router typically assigns the RTCP port number as RTP port number 1 However the NAT router is not guaranteed to properly assign the RTCP port number When the RTCP port number is not properly assigned the RTCP message exchange fails and the Proactive Voice Quality Management feature does not receive the required RTCP data A message is printed to the LTPS console and syslog file and an SNMP trap ITG3054 is generated The NAT Traversal feature attempts a best effort approach to initiate the NAT router to properly assign the RTPC port number The best effort approach is dependent on the NAT router s implementation may vary from NAT router to NAT router and cannot be guaranteed by the NA
90. SERV Part 1 of 2 Application element Information provided LTPS application number of registered IP Phone number of busy IP Phones VTRK application number of registered VTRKs number of busy VTRKs 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 99 of 770 Table 19 Queried information in STAT SERV Part 2 of 2 Application element Information provided Voice Gateway Media number of registered Voice Gateway Media Cards Cards number of busy Voice Gateway Media Cards Signaling Servers and time that the element established its link with the Call Server Voice Gateway Media elements that failed to register or lost their link Cards Figure 18 shows an example of LD 117 STAT SERV output Figure 18 Sample LD 117 STAT SERV output gt stat serv NODE HOSTNAME ELANIP LDR SRV APPS PBXLINK PBXLINK PBXLINK CONNECTID ID STATE DATE TIME 9090 host82 47 11 217 176 NO SMC LTPS LINKUP 28 07 2004 17 51 31 200a4048 Sets reg 00000 busy 00000 VGW s reg 00032 busy 00000 9090 host9 47 11 217 177 YES SS LTPS LINKUP 28 07 2004 17 51 33 200a3f68 VTRK Sets reg 00003 busy 00000 VTRK reg 00383 busy 00000 SIGNALLING SERVER CAPACITY SSRC 2048 9090 itgCard 47 11 217 2 NO ITGP LTPS FAILED 28 07 2004 17 51 16 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 100 of 770 Features Table 20 lists the descriptions for the fields in the STAT SERV response Table 20 STAT SE
91. Server gt ip Telephony V Configuration gt Call Server Pip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration Site 47 11 214 221 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Personal Directories Server Configuration Server Configuration Server IP Address Backup Configuration Perform scheduled remote backup Remote backup time of day hicmm Remote backup IP address Remote backup path Remote backup file name Remote backup userid Remote backup password a7 11 214 223 K fao feuiofetherset iepa fetherset Page 159 of 770 gt Support gt Tools i Logout Cancel 5 Reboot the Signaling Server that was configured as the IP Phone Application Server 6 When the Signaling Server comes back online reset all the IP Phones by performing isetResetAll on every LTPS in the system See Table 74 on page 595 for more information End of Procedure Alarms If the IP Phone Application Server is not installed on the primary Signaling Server and the other Signaling Server s cannot contact the IP Phone IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 160 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Application Server then an SNMP alarm is raised The alarm indicates that the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are not available If this occurs the other Signaling Server s track the Sig
92. System and CS 1000E system where loop s shelf c card u unit Format for Small System CS 1000S system Media Gateway cu 1000B and Media Gateway 1000T where c card and u unit DES aa a Description for gateway channel ITG8 ITG 486 8 port card ITGP ITG P 24 port card MC8 Media Card 8 port card MC32 Media Card 32 port card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 235 of 770 Table 50 Configure physical TNs in LD 14 Part 2 of 2 Prompt Response Description ZONE 0 255 Zone number to which this ITG Physical TN belongs Verify that the zone exists in LD 117 CUST XX Customer number as defined in LD 15 Using Element Manager for Voice Gateway channels Alternatively for CS 1000 systems configure the Voice Gateway channels using Element Manager instead of using LD 14 To use Element Manager to configure Voice Gateway channels follow the steps in Procedure 18 Procedure 18 Using Element Manager to configure Voice Gateway channels 1 Launch and log into Element Manager See Procedure 40 on page 335 for details 2 Inthe navigation tree click Configuration gt IP Telephony The Node Summary window opens See Figure 49 on page 236 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 236 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 49 Node Summary
93. Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel Networks home page http www nortelnetworks com Applicable systems This document applies to the following systems Communication Server 1000S CS 1000S Communication Server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M Chassis Communication Server 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M Cabinet Communication Server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M HG Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG Communication Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG Communication Server 1000E CS 1000E Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 51C Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 61C CP PII Meridian 1 PBX 81 Meridian 1 PBX 81C Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PII Note When upgrading software memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server the Call Server or both 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 About this document Page 15 of 770 System migration When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release 4 0 software and configured to include a Signaling Server they become CS 1000M systems Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system Table 1 Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems This Meridian 1 system Maps to this CS 1000M system Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis CS 1000M Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet CS 1000M Cabinet Meridian 1 PB
94. Telephony Voice LAN TLAN IP address gt Network Numbering Plan Signaling Server gt Software Upgrade 192 168 2 201 gt Patching gt Node 400 Node IP 192 168 2 100 gt System Utility gt Administration gt Node 450 Node IP 192 168 2 90 Transfer Statu gt Support 2 Tools gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 A Logout IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 342 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 3 Enter the new Node ID in the New Node text box The Node ID can be one to four digits in length When defining the node number determine if the Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes functionality is required see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes on page 142 If itis required factor the requirement into the node number assignment process CAUTION The Voice Gateway Media Cards identify themselves with a node using the node number or node ID If there are multiple IP Telephony nodes sharing the same TLAN subnet each node must have a unique ID Each system on the TLAN subnet must have a unique node ID assigned to the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the system Note The Node ID field corresponds to the Node ID field in the IP Phone configuration Write down the node number which is used during the IP Phone configuration Click the to Add button The Edit window opens See Figure 95 on page 343 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of
95. Telephony from the navigation tree The IP Telephony Information windows opens 18 Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 528 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 19 Click the GEN CMD button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 172 Figure 172 Voice Gateway Media Card and GEN CMD button Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information Total gt Node Node IP elernents 1 1D 451 192 168 2 91 V Node Node IP ratal m 400 192 168 2100 ements Index ELAN IP Type ELAN 4 192168418 Pontium TEN E Total gt E Node Node IP elements 1 1D 450 192 168 2 90 Total gt Node Node IP elements 2 1D 441 192 168 2 81 Click buttons to invoke a command The General Commands window opens See Figure 173 on page 529 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 529 of 770 Figure 173 General Commands window Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Group x Command E Select A Group RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings B PING Click a button to invoke a command 20 From the Group drop down list select Misc 21 From the Command drop down list click the card
96. Telephony node b Survival Cabinet IP If applicable enter the Survivable Cabinet ELAN IP address Active ELNK This is the IP address that is configured for survivability The survivable Cabinet IP is enabled only for Small Systems and CS 1000S systems Note For Small Systems or CS 10008 this field is disabled unless at least one cabinet has been defined as a survival cabinet of the main system in OTM Navigator There is only one survival cabinet IP address for each node The survival cabinet is equipped with sufficient trunk cards and Voice Gateway Media Cards In case of Call Server equipment failure it provides a large degree of survivability for IP Phone users c Signaling port The default value is 15000 This field is read only d Broadcast port The default value is 15001 This field is read only Enter the following TLAN settings Signaling port b Voice port Change the Voice port only as instructed by the IP network administrator to improve QoS for the IP Phones For example if RTP Header compression is used to reduce voice bandwidth on narrow band WAN links then TLAN voice port range must be set to 16384 or higher The exact range will be provided by the system administrator Note The TLAN Voice port range is 1024 to 65535 The default Voice ports are 5200 5295 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 284 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Note 3 The TLAN Signaling occurs
97. The Call Server s PWD1 user ID and password is sent to all cards at the following times e when the cards initially establish a connection with the Call Server across the ELAN e when an EDD operation is performed on the Call Server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 425 of 770 Once the PWD 1 information is downloaded from the Call Server it is saved in the card s NVRAM If a card has not yet established a link with the ELAN subnet the user ID and password that are currently stored in the card s NVRAM are used to log in The user ID and password might not match the PWDI1 on the Call Server because the Call Server has not yet downloaded the current PWD 1 to the card Once the ELAN subnet connection is established the user ID and password are synchronized on all cards and the new user ID and password are saved in the card s NVRAM Since all cards automatically receive the user ID and password from the Call Server the password can be changed in a single location the Call Server s CLI This eliminates the need to change the password on every card in the node just change the password once on the Call Server When the password is changed at the Call Server the password is automatically sent to all the Voice Gateway Media Cards A user can change the user ID and password login on any card using the shellPasswordSet CLI command However updates from the Call Server overwrite the cards
98. Tl Card software Software location Browse J Internet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware location Browse m Transmit control Start transmit View last transmit Close Help 5 Use the default setting of Transmit to selected nodes Select both the Node Properties to Active Leader and the Card properties to all cards in the node check boxes IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 300 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 6 Click the Start transmit button Monitor progress in the Transmit control area Confirm that the node and card properties are transmitted successfully to Leader 0 Note At this point it is normal that the card properties fail to transmit to the other cards in the node because they have not yet received the IP address from Leader 0 BootP server When the transmission is complete click Close 8 Reboot the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card At the IPL gt prompt enter cardReset Alternatively push the Reset button on the faceplate of the Voice Gateway Media Card End of Procedure Transmit card properties to all cards in the node To transmit the card properties to all the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node follow the steps in Procedure 33 CAUTION OTM 2 2 does not support transmitting node and or card properties to a node or to any of the cards within the node which resides on a CS 1000 system Procedur
99. Transfer S Import Node Files Delete The Transfer Status window opens See Figure 115 Figure 115 Transfer Status window Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 450 gt Transfer Status Select All Unselect All Transfer to Selected Elements a a ne Transfer to Failed Elements Hostname ELAN IP TN Type Role I Card 192 168 1 10 130 ITG Pentium Unknown Transfer Status BOOTP Element Unreachable Transfer Status CONFIG Element Unreachable 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 377 of 770 4 Select the desired type of transfer 5 Click OK to confirm the transfer See Figure 116 Figure 116 Transfer confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Are you sure you want to transfer the node configuration to the selected elements cns Element Manager notifies the Leader and the Voice Gateway Media Cards which then retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the Call Server The Transfer Progress window opens and displays each of the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node The Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the Call Server 6 When the transfer is complete click OK see Figure 111 on page 370 in the Progress Check Complete dialog box If the transfer is successful
100. User Profile Configuration Customer Directory Number Number DN use L V Personal Directory IV Redial List Callers List V User Preferences Delete Personal Directories Submit Cancel Select the item or items to be deleted 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 177 of 770 3 Click Submit or click Cancel to cancel the action End of Procedure When a new user is configured on the Call Server a user profile can be copied to create the new user profile If a new IP Phone registers and the user is not found in the database then the system automatically creates a user profile based on default settings and the data on the IP Phone In this case the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are automatically created as empty lists IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 178 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 179 of 770 Codecs Contents This section contains information on the following topics INECIBEIGMs orca oecinetdag TEELE TENESTE TENTE EET 179 Predefined codec DIE si arrriccrnrtiniiereree Et erie 180 Bra ee e a i e E E TE E TAE A 180 Codec CONAN 6c00 iced cre er ara Din it 182 Codec selection in OTM ZZ serirocriaviriisisiiveti heared 182 Codec selection in Element Manacefs o c0 ce2ces sc00 220885 183 Codec registrato 5 2 ccc anche savuve dts ex R240 RRR RSET S 1
101. Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Locate the faulty card in the OTM IP Telephony database by the TN MAC address and IP address 2 Disable the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card in LD 32 with the DISI command The system displays NPR0011 when the card has been completely disabled by the DISI command 3 Use the disiTPS command at the IPL gt CLI to disable the LTPS on the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card Note This forces all Internet Telephones registered on this card to re register If there are sufficient resources this can take up to several minutes If there are not sufficient resources Internet Telephones can remain unregistered indefinitely 4 Use the isetShow command to monitor the status of the card and the reregistration of the IP Phones The Voice Gateway Media Card card is completely disabled when there are no IP Phones registered on the card Remove the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card from the system 6 Inthe OTM Navigator select the Services folder Double click on the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the node in the upper part of the window 7 Click on Leader 0 or any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node 8 Click Configuration gt Node gt Properties The Node Properties window opens 9 Click the Configuration tab 10 Select the card to be replaced IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 652 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 11 12 13 1
102. Voice Gateway Media Cards that are registered to a Call Server STAT SERV can provide consolidated link status information by application type IP address host name and IP Telephony Node ID Prior to CS 1000 Release 4 0 software STAT SERV status information included the following e node ID e host name e ELAN IP address e element role e platform type e connection ID e enabled applications e registered unregistered endpoints such as IP Phones and Voice Gateway Media Cards IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 98 of 770 Features In CS 1000 Release 4 0 software the STAT SERV command has been enhanced to provide information about the pbxLink and enabled applications It also provides a Signaling Server resource count to aid in determining the number of virtual trunks that can be configured pbxLink information The STAT SERV command provides the following pbxLink information e the time the pbxLink was last established e the time the pbxLink was lost if previously established e the time the pbxLink last attempted to establish a connection if the pbxLink failed to establish e the Signaling Server resource count Application information If an active link to an element is established the Call Server obtains information about the applications running on the element Table 19 lists the applications and describes the information provided by those applications Table 19 Queried information in STAT
103. a new file for example ITGDevices1 txt to avoid overwriting the template file 8 Inthe Alarm Notification Run Options window verify that the devices field name is correct ITGDevices1 txt Click Apply and then OK Note OTM Alarm Notification must be restarted whenever Control Files are changed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 9 10 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 327 of 770 If OTM Alarm Notification is running the red traffic light is showing on the toolbar click on the red traffic light to stop alarm notification The traffic light changes to green Click the green traffic light to restart alarm notification The traffic light should turn to red to indicate it is running If OTM Alarm Notification is not running as indicated by the green traffic light click on the green traffic light to change it to red This starts Alarm Notification Telnet to each Line card and log in At the IPL gt command line enter the itgAlarmTest command A series of SNMP traps is emitted by the Voice Gateway Media Card and appears in the OTM Alarm Notification browser window Verify that the device name identifies the correct Voice Gateway Media Card Table 57 Format of Devices txt file Device Type IP Address Device Name ITG_IP_PHONE XXX XXX XXX XXX Site_Leader_O ITG_IP_PHONE XXX XXX XXX XXX Site_Leader_1 ITG_IP_PHONE XXX XXX XXX XXX Site_Follower_2 For every Voice Gateway Media
104. a number from 0 3 that are located in the C LOG directory The new information is placed in these files where it cannot be overwritten by the usual information output to the SYSLOG file when the card reboots The auditRebootSet command disables the card reboot if any task is found in a suspended state The maintenance audit enhancement differentiates between tasks that are critical and non critical e A critical task is any task that the IP Line application needs to function When a critical task is not functioning properly it causes noticeable degradation in the IP Line application e A non critical task is any other task that does not cause noticeable degradation to the IP Line application If a critical task is found suspended the stack and register information is dumped and the card is then reset If a task on the critical task list disappears it is treated as a suspended task Therefore a missing critical task triggers a reboot and a missing non critical task does not trigger a reboot If a non critical task is found suspended the information is dumped but the card is not reset The card is reset when the Voice Gateway Media Card clock reaches 2 00 AM default reset time The reset time is configurable from the CLI This eliminates card resets that impact service for non critical tasks by delaying them to a non service impacting time 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 629 o
105. be the same for each card m Retrieve options Tl Node Properties Il Card properties r Retrieve control z Start retrieve Cancel retrieve View last retrieve Close Help 4 Under Retrieve Options configure whether to retrieve Node properties or Card properties by selecting one or more of the check boxes 5 Click Start Retrieve The results of the Retrieve command are displayed under Retrieve control Note 1 f the Retrieve command is successful the current configuration of the node or card properties in OTM is overwritten by the configuration data that was retrieved from the node The new configuration data can be viewed in the Node Properties window 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 499 of 770 Note 2 To view the configuration of a node without overwriting the current node configuration in OTM retrieve the information to a dummy node End of Procedure Add an IP Telephony node in OTM by retrieving an existing node Use this optional procedure in the following cases e to add existing nodes to a particular OTM PC to manage the IP Telephony network from a single point of view e torestore the IP Telephony configuration database to an OTM PC whose hard drive has crashed as an alternative to restoring the OTM IP Telephony nodes from the OTM Disaster Recovery Backup When the IP Telephony node is installed and configured manuall
106. be made This occurs because all DSP channels are in one pool DSP resources and Private Zones To address this situation IP Line 4 0 provides the Private Zone Configuration feature for DSP configuration and allocation to the zone configuration This feature enables the configuration of one or more gateway channels as a private resource This guarantees DSP availability for critical or ACD agent IP Phone A zone can be configured as shared or private 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 119 of 770 Shared Zone The current default zone type is a Shared Zone IP Phones configured in Shared Zones use DSP resources configured in shared zones If all the Shared Zones gateway channels are used the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked Select gateway channels in the following order e Select a channel from the same zone as the zone where the IP Phone is configured e Select any available channel from the Shared Zones channels Private Zone The Private Zone enables DSP channels configured in a Private Zone to be used only by the IP Phones that have also been configured for that Private Zone If more DSP resources are required by these IP Phones than what are available in the zone DSPs from other Shared Zones are used IP Phones configured in Shared Zones cannot use the Private Zones channels Select the gateway channels in the following order e Select a channel from the same P
107. cable assembly with a non removable filter connector The NT8D81BA is compatible with a 10BaseT operation of the TLAN network interface but if a 100BaseT operation of the TLAN network interface is required order the NT8D81AA Backplane to I O Panel ribbon cable assembly to replace it Do not install the NTCW84JA ITG specific filter connector onto the existing non removable filter connector IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 218 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Replace existing I O panel filter connector The standard I O filter connector is shielded metal with a black plastic insert connector The NTCW84JA connector uses yellow warning labels to indicate EMC filtering modifications and which MDF connection points can support 100BaseT connections Procedure 13 Replacing the existing I O Panel Filter Connector 1 Before any of the following steps remove the ITG pack or any other IPE pack from the IPE shelf card slot corresponding to the I O Panel connector to be removed Note Make sure to use the I O Panel Filter Connector which corresponds to the left slot number of the DCHIP card 2 Remove the NT8D81AA Backplane to I O Panel ribbon cable assembly that is connected to the Backplane side of the existing block by releasing the latching pins on the filter block and pulling the NT8D81AA cable away 3 Unscrew the existing filter connector from the I O panel There is one
108. card s Status button in the IP Telephony Information window to verify the status of the Voice Gateway Media Card 6 Use the LD 32 ENLC command to re enable the Voice Gateway Media Cards 7 Repeat these steps for each Voice Gateway Media Card that received the software upgrade End of Procedure Upgrade the IP Phone firmware 553 3001 365 When the IP Line 4 0 software has been upgraded on the Voice Gateway Media Cards determine if an IP Phone firmware upgrade is also required If an upgrade is required the Voice Gateway Media Cards must be upgraded to the newest IP Phone firmware version To upgrade the firmware required for Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 401 of 770 the IP Phones follow the steps in Procedure 60 on page 401 This procedure has two major components loading the IP Phone firmware onto each Voice Gateway Media Card in the node propagating the firmware from the Voice Gateway Media Card to each IP Phone registered on that card Note A firmware download does not occur with IP Phones performing a Virtual Office login or Media Gateway 1000B MG 1000B login to a remote system No firmware upgrade takes place during a Virtual Office Login or MG 1000B user registration with the LTPS The registration is allowed because the IP Phone firmware version must be 1 33 or later to perform a Virtual Office login or MG 1000B user registration The umsUpgradeAll c
109. card while it is the node master This process ensures that the data is correctly propagated to all cards in the node When installing a new Leader card in a node with modified levels always enter the loss plan command on the Leader card s CLI even if the command was previously entered on another card s CLI Note When a node has a modified loss plan that is the command ULKLossPlanSet or lossPlanSet has been used a new card that is added to the node is updated with the modified loss plan 30 seconds after the card has booted Prior to the modified loss plan being received by the new card calls made by IP Phones registered to that new card have the default loss plan levels CAUTION Care must be taken when altering the IP Phone s loss plan Increasing the gain increases the possibility of echo and other audio problems Only adjust the levels when instructed by this document or by Nortel Networks support staff Patch and Patching Tooling tool commands A patch is a piece of code that is inserted or patched into an executable program The patching tool enables loadware on the Voice Gateway Media Cards to be patched or fixed without having to upgrade the card loadware and without service interruption All patch commands on the Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server are accessible at the IPL gt prompt These commands are summarized in Table 85 on page 618 and Table 86 on page 622 Note The parameter string supplied to
110. card with a pointed object such as a ball point pen WARNING Do not use a pencil to reset the Voice Gateway Media Card The graphite carbon can create an electrical short circuit on the board 4 Start up messages are displayed on the terminal Type jkl on the terminal keyboard when the prompt is displayed Note jkl runs from BIOS or boot ROM which is printed early in the bootup process There is only a six second window at the prompt to enter jkl If the prompt is missed restart the card and repeat the above step 5 Once the card has booted from BIOS or boot ROM a CLI prompt such as the BIOS gt appears Enter the following command shellPasswordNvramClear at the prompt 6 Type reboot at the prompt to reboot the card 7 Wait for the card to completely reboot into the IP Line 4 0 application The password synchronization feature changes the password on the card automatically End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 441 of 770 IP configuration commands Table 61 describes the IP configuration commands Table 61 IP configuration commands IP configuration Function command setLeader Performs all the necessary actions to make a Leader Sets IP address gateway subnet mask boot method to static and Leader bit in NVRAM clearLeader Clears the Leader info in NVRAM and sets the boot method to use BOOTP thus making the card a Follower NVRIPShow Prints th
111. chkdsk C 1 Repairs the file system errors and saves the damaged cluster in files chkdsk C 2 Repairs file system errors and returns damaged clusters to the free pool ping host Sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to a xX numpackets network host The host matching the destination address in the packets responds to the request If a response is not returned the sender times out This command is useful to determine if other hosts or Voice Gateway Media Cards are communicating with the sender card The numpackets parameter specifies how many packets to send If it is not included ping runs until it is stopped by Ctrl C also exits the IPL gt CLI Example IPL gt ping 47 82 33 123 10 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 588 of 770 Table 71 General purpose commands Part 3 of 4 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server electShow Displays a list of cards in the node and information X about each card This includes showing all registered followers to a leader The output has two sections e cards currently registered cards that are in the BOOTP TAB configuration but not yet registered itgCardShow Displays Voice Gateway Media Card information xX itgMemShow Displays memory usage X ifShow Displays detailed IP address information including X MAC addresses IPInfoShow Displ
112. click the Late execution check box if the report is to run at a later time if the system is busy at the scheduled time 7 Click OK End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 458 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 The generated OM report includes information for all cards in all the nodes in the system The report file accumulates data for the month The data is stored in the generated file called ipline_MM_YYYY_file csv OTM has a report feature called Generate OM Report now This feature enables an OM Report to be generated immediately WARNING Running the Generate OM Report now feature while the Scheduled OM Reports feature is also running causes duplicate data to be displayed at the end of the OM Report The data for the current day is appended to the end of the OM file by the Generate OM Report Now option Be careful to take into account any duplicate data when viewing system performance To generate an OM Report immediately follow the steps in Procedure 67 Procedure 67 Generating reports 1 Inthe IP Telephony window click the node Click File gt Report The Generate OM Report window opens See Figure 143 on page 459 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 459 of 770 Figure 143 Generate OM Report Generate OM report now Generate OM Report This option collects all the operational measurement OM da
113. codec C1 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 194 of 770 Table 41 Codecs e Find the first codec in the far end list that is also in the near end list same type same payload size Call this codec C2 e The Cl and C2 codec that is selected is considered to be the BB codec type To determine which codec type is Best Bandwidth the following rules are used aG 729AB codec is considered BB compared to G 729A G 723 1 G 711_mu Law and G 711_a Law codecs aG 729A codec is considered BB compared to G 723 1 G 711_muLaw and G 711_aLaw codecs aG 723 1 codec is considered BB compared to a G 711_mu Law and G 711_a Law codec aG 711_mu Law codec is considered BB compared to a G 711_a Law codec Table 41 shows the codec that would be selected between any two codecs For example if the two codecs are the G 729A and G 723 1 the selected codec is the G 729A Best Bandwidth codec Selection between any two codecs types Codec type G 711_a Law G 711_a Law G 711_a Law G 711_mu Law G 711_muLaw G 729A G 729AB G 729AB G 723 1 G 711_mu Law G 711_mu Law G 711_mu Law G 729A G 729AB G 723 1 G 729A G 729A G 729A G 729A G 729AB G 729A G 729AB G 729AB G 729AB G 729AB G 729AB G 729AB G 723 1 G 723 1 G 723 1 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 G 729A G 729AB G 723 1 Page 195 of 7
114. database The user s entry must be recreated the next time the user tries to access his or her Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List User profile management in Element Manager To access the user profile management functionality in Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 6 Procedure 6 Accessing User Profile Management in Element Manager 1 Select Configuration gt IP Telephony in the Element Manager navigation tree The IP Telephony Configuration window opens See Figure 31 Figure 31 IP Telephony Configuration window Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration Node Summary Personal Directories Server Configuration Personal Directories User Profile Quality Of Service Thresholds QoS gt SNMP Configuration Network Address Translation NAT 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 173 of 770 2 Click the Personal Directories User Profile link The Personal Directories User Profile Configuration window opens 3 From the drop down list select the desired action End of Procedure Reset the IP Phone user password To reset the password for an IP Phone user follow the steps in Procedure 7 Procedure 7 Resetting the IP Phone user password 1 Select Reset Station Control Password from the drop down list from the drop down list in the Personal Directories User Profile Configuration window The
115. dissipating surface 2 Locate the CompactFlash card socket in the lower left hand corner of the Media Card See Figure 37 Figure 37 CompactFlash card socket on Media Card 3 Position the CompactFlash card with the label facing up the metal clip pulled up and contact pins toward the socket as shown in Figure 38 on page 211 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 211 of 770 Figure 38 Position the CompactFlash in socket 4 Insert the Compact Flash card in the socket Ensure force is applied equally at both ends of the Compact Flash when pushing it in See Figure 39 on page 212 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 212 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 39 Insert CompactFlash 5 Gently insert the CompactFlash card so that it is fully in contact with the connectors on the drive See Figure 40 on page 213 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 213 of 770 Figure 40 Seat CompactFlash card 6 Push the metal clip down so that the CompactFlash card is locked in See Figure 41 on page 214 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 214 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 41 Lock card into place Weenagranenrerage a AS 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 S
116. e Version 5 7 for the ITG P 24 port card The minimum versions of IP Line 4 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Cards NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB is Version 8 0 There is no need to download the Version 8 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Cards NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB as the software is pre loaded at the factory Note Refer to the ReadMe First document or the General Release Bulletin to ensure that the latest firmware is identified To upgrade the IP Line software for the Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 36 on page 315 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 315 of 770 Procedure 36 Upgrading the Voice Gateway Media Card software 1 Check the Nortel Networks web site for the most current versions of the IP Line software for the ITG P 24 port line card and Media Card line cards 2 Once the most current version of the software has been downloaded follow the steps in e Procedure 99 on page 639 to upgrade the software on the ITG P 24 port line card e Procedure 100 on page 642 to upgrade the software on the Media Card line cards End of Procedure Upgrade the IP Phone firmware When the IP Line 4 0 software has been upgraded on the Voice Gateway Media Card verify if an IP Phone firmware upgrade is also required Check the Readme First document for the OTM IP Line 4 0 application to determine which IP Phone firmware version is required to be compatib
117. entered for the Uses parameter when setting the temporary password the Time parameter is mandatory When the Time parameter is in effect the password expiration is based on time instead of the number of uses Timeout the Timeout heading corresponds to the Timeout parameter of the temporary IP Phone Installer Password In the default state the Timeout is null If the card is not in the default state this setting specifies the duration in hours in which the temporary password is valid The range is 0 240 hours which is a maximum of 10 days The number specified under Timeout indicates the remaining time to expire of the temporary password The Timeout parameter is optional if the Uses parameter is non zero The Timeout parameter is mandatory if Uses is set to zero IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 562 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager If both the Uses and Timeout parameters are entered the password expires based on whichever happens first that is the number of Uses is reduced to zero or the Timeout has expired If both the Uses and Timeout parameters are entered and are set to zero it is the same as not setting the temporary password 6 From the Group drop down list select NodePwd 7 From the Command drop down list select nodePwdSet and click the RUN button The window refreshes and displays the blank Node Password field See Figure 194 8 Enter the administrator IP Phone Installer
118. far end list to see if Codec1 is a common codec that is is Codec also listed in the far end list If Codec1 is common to both lists Codec1 becomes the selected codec Otherwise the Master obtains the second codec from its own list and repeats the search in the far end list and so on e The Slave node uses the far end list as the preferred list The Slave selects a codec from the far end list and then searches in its own list to find the common codec The issues caused by the Master Slave algorithm are due to the random nature of the Master Slave information The codec that is selected and used during a virtual trunk call cannot be pre determined This can make bandwidth usage calculations and bandwidth management difficult 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 193 of 770 Known issues include e After an on hold and off hold scenario that triggers Master Slave negotiation the codec used for the restored call can be different than the codec used before the call was placed on hold The Master Slave information could have been changed when the call was on hold e Since the terminating end of a call is always the Master a call from Telephone Node1 to Telephone2 Node2 can use a different codec than a call from Telephone2 Node2 to Telephone Node1 e For tandem calls the Master Slave information is not relevant That is the Master Slave information is designed to be used only between two nodes not among
119. firmware Click the Firmware Distribute button 9 Complete this step for each version of the firmware that must be distributed CAUTION Downloading an incorrect version of the IP Phone firmware can result in extended service interruptions and can require special recovery procedures A confirmation dialog box appears similar to the confirmation dialog box in Figure 132 10 Click OK to confirm the firmware upgrade to the card The upgrade begins Figure 132 Firmware Upgrade confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer gt You are about to use fw work file 0603B56 BIN to distribute the set firmware on elements yy ip 47 11 221 38 TYPE SS re you sure you want to do this coe The Firmware Upgrade Progress window opens See Figure 133 on page 404 The status of the upgrade is shown for each of the cards selected to receive the firmware upgrade IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 404 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 133 Firmware Upgrade Progress Site 47 11 216 167 gt Software Upgrade gt IP Telephony PW Upgrade gt Firmware Upgrade Progress 47 11 216 135 Finished 47 11 216 168 Work in progress 47 11 216 142 Work in progress 11 12 13 14 15 47 11 216 194 Work in progress Repeat the preceding steps for all the card s that have to be upgraded The IP Phones continue to run the old firmware until each IP Phone re regi
120. gateway that points to the remote OTM PC subnet c Repeat step b if the card is reset before OTM successfully transmits the card properties containing the SNMP Manager IP addresses and the card routing IP addresses 4 When Leader 1 and all Follower cards show a status of disabled click Configure gt Synchronize gt Transmit When the Transmit window opens click the Transmit to selected nodes radio button Select the Card properties to all disabled cards check box 5 Click Start transmit Carefully monitor the progression in the Transmit Control window Confirm that the card properties are successfully transmitted to every Voice Gateway Media Card in the selected node identified by its TN 6 Verify that all Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node have established a signaling link to the Call Server End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 303 of 770 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware WARNING Before beginning the upgrade ensure that a PWD1 user name and password has been configured on the Call Server If there is no PWD1 user name and password configure them in LD 17 This is necessary to enable login to the Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server Before upgrading the software and firmware determine the version of card software and IP Phone firmware that is currently installed Compare the versions to
121. has limited space to store the files for all the IP Phones on the card Instead a file server can be used to store the IP Phone firmware files The Phase I IP Phone 2002 firmware filename is 0603Bnn BIN where Bnn firmware version nn The Phase I IP Phone 2004 firmware filename is 0602Bnn BIN where Bnn F W version 1 nn The Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware filename is 0603Dnn BIN where Dnn F W version 3 nn External file server option If the external file server option is used in OTM 2 2 for firmware distribution with a node the following files must be renamed before being placed on the server e 0602Bnn BIN file renamed to i2004 fw e 0603Bnn BIN file renamed to i2002 fw e 0604Dnn BIN renamed to IPP2SETS fw To configure the file server follow the steps in Procedure 29 on page 291 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 291 of 770 Procedure 29 Configuring access to the File Server 1 Click the File Server tab See Figure 75 Figure 75 New Node File Server tab New Node General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server Qos SNTP The card obtains the etherset firmware files from the file server FTP service should be running on the file Server Specify the parameters required for the card to connect to the file server Enter the IP address User ID Password and the lo
122. higher priced IP User Licenses Each time an IP Phone is configured the system TN ISM counter is decremented Customers must purchase one License for each IP Phone installed on CS 1000 and Meridian systems A new License uses the existing keycode to enable the IP Phone in the system software The default is zero To expand the License limits for the IP Phones order and install a new Meridian or CS 1000 keycode Refer to the Incremental Software Management feature module in the Features and Services 553 3001 306 NTP 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 53 of 770 Note Individual Licenses are not supported on Functional Pricing With Functional Pricing Licenses are provisioned in blocks of eight License limits The total number of TNs configured with Basic IP User Licenses must not exceed 32767 The total number of TNs configured with IP User Licenses must not exceed 32767 The total number of IP phones configured within the system must not exceed the allowed system capacity limit controlled by customer keycodes Zones To optimize IP Line traffic bandwidth use between different locations the IP Line network is divided into zones representing different topographical areas of the network All IP Phones and IP Line ports are assigned a zone number indicating the zone to which they belong When a call is made the codecs that are used vary depending on which zone s the caller and receive
123. important statistical and traffic information and feedback to the system administrator to better engineer the system The information stored in the OM file applies only to the calls routed over the IP network by way of IP Line OM reports give a quantitative view of system performance such as jitter A single Voice Gateway Media Card s Operational Measurements file can be viewed directly from Element Manager This OM report is a view of the LTPS and Voice Gateway channel activity on that specific card Use this procedure to view the individual card s information for each Voice Gateway Media Card in the node The Voice Gateway Media Card OM file contains the following information e the number of incoming and outgoing calls e the number of call attempts e the number of calls completed e the total holding time for voice calls To view a single Voice Gateway Media Card s OM file directly from Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 83 on page 508 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 508 of 770 Figure 158 IP Line administration using Element Manager Procedure 83 Retrieving the current OM file from the Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager 1 2 Click System Status in the navigation tree Click IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 158 System Status gt IP Telephony gt IP Telephony Inform
124. is required for IP Line 4 0 OTM 2 2 is used for tasks such as the following creating a node adding Voice Gateway Media Cards to the node transmitting loadware to the Voice Gateway Media Cards upgrading loadware defining SNMP alarms selecting codecs Element Manager The Element Manager web server is required for CS 1000 systems Element Manager s web interface enables IP Line 4 0 to be configured and managed from a web browser 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 55 of 770 The Element Manager web interface is divided into two categories 1 Element Manager used to manage the Call Server and IP Telephony nodes IP Line 2 Gatekeeper Element Manager used to administer network numbering plan for the Network Connect Server that is used by Network Wide Virtual Office and Media Gateway 1000B Description Element Manager is a simple and user friendly web based interface that supports a broad range of system management tasks including e configuration and maintenance of IP Peer and IP telephony features e configuration and maintenance of traditional routes and trunks e configuration and maintenance of numbering plans e configuration of Call Server data blocks such as configuration data customer data Common Equipment data D channels e maintenance commands system status inquiries backup and restore functions e software download patch download patch activation Element Manager has
125. loop but it is not configured Customer out of range error Customer out of range Range 0 31 Customer not configured error Customer does not exist Combination of invalid slot and invalid customer Slot does not correspond to a virtual loop Customer out of range Range 0 31 Table 24 ECNT Zone command error messages Error Message Zone out of range error Zone out of range Range 0 255 Zone not configured error Zone not configured Customer out of range error Customer out of range Range 0 31 Customer not configured error Customer does not exist Combination of invalid zone and invalid customer error IP Line Zone not configured Customer out of range Range 0 31 Description Installation and Operation Page 112 of 770 Features Table 25 ECNT Node command error messages Node out of range error Node out of range Range 0 9999 Node not configured error Node not registered Table 26 ECNT SS command error message SS not found in system error Signaling Server lt name gt does not exist IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 A system traffic report IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 in LD 2 is created on the system to print IP Phone data at the zone level The data is printed for the following categories at the end of each collection period on a per zone basis e Total inter intra zone calls made e Total inter intra zone calls blo
126. lt _ TLAN route a ELAN additional ul gt default router TLAN subnet ae lt gt subnet Vy Meridian 1 or 5 1000 Management Workstation In this diagram an additional ELAN route is required to reach the management workstation which is accessible through the ELAN interface but is not on the ELAN subnet End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 362 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Configure file server access With the addition of more IP Phones there are also additional firmware files for the IP Phones The Voice Gateway Media Card has limited space to store the files on the card for all the telephones As a result a file server is used to store the telephone firmware files For more information see IP Phone firmware on page 130 The IP Phone firmware files are labeled as follows e 0603Bnn BIN is the filename for the Phase I IP Phone 2002 firmware where Bnn F W version 1 nn e 0602Bnn BIN is the filename for the Phase I IP Phone 2004 firmware where Bnn F W version 1 nn 0603Dnn BIN is the filename for the Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware where Dnn F W version 3 nn If the external file server option is used in Element Manager for firmware distribution with a node the files must be renamed before being placed on the server e 0602Bnn BIN must be renamed to i12004 fw e 0603Bnn
127. many features to help administrators manage systems with greater efficiency Examples are as follows e Web pages provide a single point of access to parameters that were traditionally available through multiple overlays e Parameters are presented in logical groups to increase ease of use and speed of access e The hide or show information option enables administrators to see information that relates directly to the task at hand e Full text descriptions of parameters and acronyms help administrators reduce configuration errors e Configuration screens offer pre selected defaults drop down lists checkboxes and range values to simplify response selection IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 56 of 770 Description The Element Manager web server resides on the Signaling Server and can be accessed directly through a web browser or Optivity Telephony Manager OTM The OTM navigator includes integrated links to each network system and their respective instances of Element Manager Command Line Interface Definition The Command Line Interface CLI provides a text based interface to perform specific Signaling Server and Voice Gateway Media Card installation configuration administration and maintenance functions Access Establish a CLI session by connecting a TTY or PC to the card serial port or Telnet through the ELAN or TLAN network interface IP address IMPORTANT In the case of an IP Telepho
128. of Procedure For additional information on configuring the IP Phones refer to IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 407 of 770 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card firmware The minimum versions of IP Line 4 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Card vintages earlier than NTVQO1BB and NTVQO1AB are e Version 6 7 for the Media Card e Version 5 7 for the ITG P 24 port card The minimum versions of IP Line 4 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Cards NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB is Version 8 0 There is no need to download the Version 8 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Cards NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB as the software is pre loaded at the factory To upgrade the card firmware follow the steps in Procedure 61 Procedure 61 Upgrading the Voice Gateway Media Card firmware 1 Check the Nortel Networks web site for the most current versions of the firmware for the ITG P 24 port line card and Media Cards 2 Once the most current version of the firmware has been downloaded follow the steps in e Procedure 99 on page 639 to upgrade the firmware on the ITG P 24 port line card e Procedure 100 on page 642 to upgrade the firmware on the Media Cards End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 408 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Configure Alar
129. on the Edit window is clicked The files are saved to the Call Server After the data is saved the configuration must be transferred to the Voice Gateway Media Card When the Transfer Status button on the Node Summary window is clicked Element Manager instructs each card where to retrieve the files using IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 372 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager FTP The Voice Gateway Media Card then retrieves the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files Transferring the configuration main node For a Signaling Server node the process to transfer the node configuration to the cards consists of the following steps 1 Transmit the node properties See Procedure 52 on page 375 2 Configure the Follower card See Procedure 53 on page 379 Note The following sequence of steps are applicable only to nodes that do not use the Signaling Server as the Leader card that is a second or subsequent node is being configured on the system not the main node The Signaling Server must be properly configured to use Element Manager so that the steps of setting and rebooting the Leader are not needed The Signaling Server requires a reboot only if the Signaling Server IP address information has been changed such as the node IP address or Signaling Server TLAN subnet IP address The Voice Gateway Media Cards require a reboot only if the card IP address information has been changed Transf
130. one card there still is not a 100 correlation as an IP Phone can still call another IP Phone without involving the Voice Gateway channels 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 467 of 770 Viewing the IP Line log files OTM uses FTP to transfer the log file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to the PC The file is opened in WordPad The IP Line Error log file syslog displays error information including error date time the originating module IP Telephony node and specific error data To view IP Line error conditions that are abnormal events but not severe enough to raise an alarm follow the steps in Procedure 70 Procedure 70 Viewing IP Line info and error log 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder 2 Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 3 Right click the card and then select Properties from the pop up menu The Card Properties window opens to the Maintenance tab See Figure 145 on page 462 4 Click the Open log file button and review the file contents End of Procedure Back up and restore OTM data The OTM Backup Wizard is used to backup and restore any or all OTM PC based data including IP Line OTM data All IP Line data is stored in an Access database file on the OTM PC or Server This file is backed up only when the Full OTM Backup option is selected This option backs up all OTM data contained in the PC directory whe
131. overwriting the existing IP Line configuration data for an existing node in the OTM IP Telephony database Retrieving the actual IP Telephony node configuration to the dummy node is useful in the following cases e to isolate IP Telephony node configuration faults e to determine which copy of the database is correct in order to determine the desired direction of database synchronization transmit OTM IP Line to an IP Telephony node or retrieve IP Telephony node to OTM IP Line Add the dummy node manually or by retrieving the IP Telephony node configuration data from an existing node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 659 of 770 The site name system name and customer number must exist in the OTM Navigator before a new IP Telephony node can be added Follow the steps in Procedure 106 to create the dummy IP Telephony node CAUTION This procedure in is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 660 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Procedure 106 Creating the dummy IP Telephony node to retrieve configuration 1 In OTM Navigator click Sites gt Configuration gt Add Site See Figure 203 Figure 203 OTM Navigator Configuration gt Add Site ig OTM Navigator File Edit view Maintenance Configuration Security Utilities Wind
132. packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 19 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 20 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 TCP RESULTS TCP consistent translation YES GOOD for peer to peer TCP simultaneous open YES GOOD for peer to peer TCP loopback translation YES GOOD for peer to peer TCP unsolicited connections filtered NO BAD for security UDP RESULTS UDP consistent translation YES GOOD for peer to peer UDP loopback translation YES GOOD for peer to peer UDP unsolicited messages filtered NO BAD for security The important information is highlighted in red In order for the NAT router to support the NAT Traversal feature natcheck must print the following to the screen UDP consistent translation YES GOOD for peer to peer YES indicates that Cone NAT is being used NO indicates that Symmetric NAT is present Symmetric NAT is not supported Note Near the beginning of the printout the PUBLIC port seen by various servers is printed out In this case all three servers receive the packets from the same PUBLIC port of 57283 This Private to Public port mapping is seen in Figure 217 on page 716 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 716 of 770 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Figure 217 Private to Public port mapping IP 69 156 96 28 57285 Server 1 IP 18 26 4 9 9856 UDP Packet from 192
133. payload and changes the values listed in the MVP pull down list so the minimum value listed does not violate the requirement of NVP 2 payload e The MVP value can be changed The pull down values range from the minimum recommended value see above to the maximum allowed value for the selected codec type 5 Set the following values for the codec a Codec Name The codec name is based on the selected codec b Voice payload size msecs frame The payload size is determined by the selected codec For each codec type the payload is defaulted to the maximum supported 30 msec for G 711 a law and mu law 50 msec for G 729A 50 msec for G 729AB and 30 msec for the G 723 1 Note f a system has multiple nodes and the same codec is selected on more than one node ensure that each node has the same voice payload size configured for the codec c Voice playout jitter buffer nominal delay Set the nominal value to the highest setting that the device allows The range is 20 200 ms and is dependent on the codec Changing this value can cause the automatic adjustment of the other settings for this codec For more information see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 d Voice playout jitter buffer maximum delay The maximum delay has a range of 60 500 ms and is dependent on the codec Changing this value can cause the automatic adjustment of the other settings for this codec e VAD Select this check box to enable V
134. raise an alarm through SNMP traps Use the LogFilePut command to download an IP Line 4 0 error log Reset the Operational Measurements file Reset the Operational Measurements OM file if incorrect statistics might have been collected At the IPL gt prompt type resetOM The resetOM command resets all operational measurement parameters that have been collected since the last log dump The statistics start from zero IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 452 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Contents Page 453 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 This section contains information on the following topics INUCUBAION soi nc or bea et bae Meee reese Hd De A EY Rede OOS OTM administration procedures i ce ceceiisendeedwaied edie bu Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation Viewing the IP Line log WINES i3 o 600deeereeeienesiondsdnad Back p and restore OTM data 2 2 5 cccseecsen eens niaii es ris Update IP Telephony node properties using OTM Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node Delete a Voice Gateway Media Card from the node Delete the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card from the node Change the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in OTM Update Voice Gateway Media Card card properties Retrieve command oo costae ela wkedeeR eae Ree ee RGR RTE Add an IP
135. screw on the lower front of the connector and one screw on the upper back of the connector Remove the connector 4 Re position the new NTCW84JA filter connector in the now vacant I O panel opening See Figure 43 on page 219 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 219 of 770 Figure 43 NTCW84JA 50 pin ITG specific I O Panel filter connector for Large Systems System MDF Cable backplane ee side a inside I O Panel Exterior side of system to MDF and so on NT8D81AA Cable System I O Panel 5 Attach the new NTCW84JA ITG specific filter connector to the I O panel by securely fastening the top back screw and the bottom front screw 6 Reconnect the NT8D81AA cable and secure it in place by snapping shut the locking latches provided on the NTCW84JA connector End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 220 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Incorrect configuration problems TLAN network interface operation problems can arise from the standard I O filter connector in IPE modules on Large Systems Some problem scenarios and their respective solutions are outlined in Table 48 Table 48 I O filter connector Scenario Solution The installer forgets to replace the standard Correctly install the Voice Gateway Media IPE module 1 O filter connector with the Card ITG specific filter connecto
136. selected DSP Options Codec Options G 7294B Settings Enable one or more codec types and mulaw alaw Reset Codec Defauits JV Enable voice activity detection VAD p Codec Selection Voice payload size 20 ba Voice playout nominal delay 40 v 80 z select the appropriate settings for each ms packet ms Voice playout maximum delay G 723 1 m T 38FAX Codec profile 17 MG 711Clear Channel Frames packet 2 Note G711 T 38 FAX and G711 Peak Bandwidth 78400 bps Clear Channel are mandatory and cannot be unselected Average Bandwidth 47040 bps Note If there are multiple nodes on a system and the same codec is selected on more than one node ensure that each node has the same voice payload size configured for the codec End of Procedure As a result of the Run time Configuration Change feature the card does not have to be restarted if there are changes to the settings on the DSP Profile tab For changes to the Codec Options disable the card download the card properties and then re enable the card If the settings have changed on the DSP Profile tab follow the steps in Procedure 79 to disable and then enable the Voice Gateway Media Card CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 496 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2
137. steps in Procedure 34 Procedure 34 Verifying card loadware and IP Phone firmware using OTM 2 2 1 Inthe OTM Navigator select the Services folder Double click on the IP Line Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Select an IP Telephony node in the upper part of the window A list of all line cards for that node appears in the lower part of the window 3 Starting with the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card double click each Voice Gateway Media Card in the list to open the Card Properties window 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 307 of 770 There are two tabs in the Card Properties window Maintenance and Configuration See Figure 80 and see Figure 81 on page 308 Figure 80 Card Properties Maintenance tab Card Properties BELLE ILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 IP 47 11 221 38 TN 000 IP Telephony Maintenance Configuration Card state Not responding pe Refresh States Open log file Open OM File Node time Set Node Time Cancel Apply Help 4 Keep the default settings shown in the Maintenance tab Click the Configuration tab See Figure 81 on page 308 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 308 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 81 Card Properties Configuration tab Card Properties BELLEVILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 IP 47 11
138. temporary IP Phone Installer Password for experienced users who are delegated to install IP Phones If a null administrator password is set and a temporary password is created the temporary password overrides the null administrator password 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 435 of 770 If the administrator wishes to suppress all password prompting to reconfigure the Node ID and TN then clear the temporary password using the nodeTempPwdClear command Also set the administrative password to a null password using the nodePwdSet command with no password parameter specified Set the IP Phone Installer Passwords The IP Phone Installer Passwords are configured on one Voice Gateway Media Card or on the Signaling Server in the node The passwords are then applied to all cards in the node Administrative IP Phone Installer Password The Administrative IP Phone Installer Password is used by the administrator to install a new IP Phone or change the configuration node ID and TN of an existing IP Phone To set the Administrative IP Phone Installer Password follow the steps in Procedure 63 Procedure 63 Configuring the Administrative IP Phone Installer Password 1 Connect to any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node 2 Login to the IPL gt CLI and type the nodePwdShow command This command displays the settings of the IP Phone Installer node password If in the default state the IP Phon
139. the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system Example IPL gt bootPFileGet ngals042 anonymous guest bootpDir bootptab IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 592 of 770 Table 72 File Transfer commands Part 3 of 4 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Signaling IPL gt Commands Description Server hostFileGet Transfers any file from OTM to the Voice Gateway Media X hostname Card This command gets any file from the host and does a username Get using FTP to the Voice Gateway Media Card m im Note ITGFileName is the full path AND filename of where E TOR Ory pa the file is to be placed The listener parameter indicates fename E which module to inform of the successful file transfer It ITGFileName can be set to 1 to be disabled listener Example IPL gt hostFileGet ngals042 anonymous guest hostfileDir hostFile txt C ITGFILRDIR ITGFILE TXT 1 currOMFilePut Sends the current Operational Measurements OM fileto X hostname the specified host bona The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP password 5 directory path session with the given parameters and downloads the D yP Voice Gateway Media Card s Operational Measurements filename a file to the specified location on the host Exampl
140. the command must be enclosed with double quotes For example the syntax for the pload command is pload patch1 p 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 617 of 770 These commands are used to manage patches on the Voice Gateway Media Card Patches must be downloaded from a workstation to the Voice Gateway Media Card using a modem an FTP session or Element Manager Patch files are stored in Flash memory and are loaded into DRAM memory Once a patch is in DRAM memory it can be activated deactivated and its status can be monitored Perform the following tasks prior to loading a patch e Verify that the patch matches the platform s CPU type e Verify the loadware version on the card e Block the installation if there is a mismatch The installation of a patch is blocked if either the CPU type or the loadware version of the card is different than the patch If the installation is blocked the reason for blocking the install is printed at the CLI The CPU type and loadware version are also verified during a power up or reboot cycle This prevents active patches from being re installed if the loadware version of the card is changed IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 618 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 85 lists the patch commands Table 85 Patch commands Part 1 of 3 Command Description pload Loads a patch file from the file system in F
141. the output is directed to the TTY Note 3 If the output for the trace cannot be determined then the output is directed to the TTY 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 625 of 770 Protocol trace tool commands for the Network Connection Service IMPORTANT A warm boot of the system causes all tracing to cease Traces must be re entered after the system has restarted Table 88 includes the protocol trace tool commands for the Network Connection Service NCS applicable to the Voice Gateway Media Cards They are issued from the OAM shell Table 88 Protocol trace tool CLI commands for the NCS Part 1 of 3 Signaling CLI Command Description Server tpsARTrace Allows tracing of the tpsAR protocol which is used X IP lt IP Address gt to determine where an IP Phone should register ID lt user ID gt Where e IP Address a string containing the IP Phone s ALL IP address e user UID the ID of the IP Phone to be traced the DN used to log in or the H323_Alias of where the IP Phone is trying to register e ALL all IP Phones are to be monitored tpsARTraceOff Removes the specified endpoint from the list of X IP lt IP Address gt endpoints to be traced ID lt user ID gt ALL IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 626 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 88 Protocol trace tool CLI commands for the NCS Part 2 of 3
142. this new translation resulting in half duplex voice connection between the IP Phone and the far end device 9 Data sent to the far end device gets there but the data coming back is lost Solution 1 The IP Phone periodically sends an extra non RTP packet to the far end to keep the NAT translation alive ensuring that the NAT s session time out does not expire 2 The non RTP packet is constructed to fail any RTP validation tests so it is not played out by the far end device IP Phone or gateway channel IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 68 of 770 Features Hold The Hold function differs from the Mute function as Hold does not cause problems with the audio stream Table 16 describes the Hold process Table 16 Hold process When an IP Phone user places a call on Hold the audio stream in both the Transmit Tx and Receive Rx directions closes The NAT device begins aging the translation When the audio stream is closed and no voice path is present the IP Phone defaults to sending periodic non RTP packets to keep the NAT translation alive Therefore when a call is put on Hold the IP Phone defaults to sending these non RTP packets When the call is retrieved from Hold a new set of open audio stream messages are issued by the LTPS and new connections are established reusing the same NAT translation NAT and VLANs Support of Virtual LANs VLANs is entirely dependent on the Layer 2 switch
143. three or more nodes The Master Slave algorithm makes the codec selection for tandem calls more complex and inefficient To solve the issues another codec selection algorithm was needed This algorithm is called the Best Bandwidth codec Selection algorithm and is not based on the unpredictable Master Slave information The Best Bandwidth codec Selection algorithm is used for virtual trunk calls between Nortel Networks equipment since any change to the Master Slave algorithm implies a change to the H 323 standard The H 323 s Master Slave algorithm is used when there is a virtual trunk call between Nortel Networks equipment and third party equipment Best Bandwidth Codec Selection algorithm The Best Bandwidth Codec Selection algorithm was implemented to solve the issues caused by the H 323 Master Slave algorithm The Best Bandwidth Codec Selection algorithm selects one common codec based on two codec lists With this algorithm every time the selection is done using the same two lists the selected codec is always the same The Best Bandwidth codec selection is based on the codec type only it does not take into account the fact that some codecs while generally using less bandwidth consume more bandwidth than others at certain payload sizes e The Best Bandwidth Codec Selection algorithm finds the first codec in the near end list that is also in far end list codec is the same type and has the same payload size Call the selected
144. to Counting IP Phones on page 107 Table 69 LD 32 Maintenance commands for the Voice Gateway Media Card Part 1 of 3 Command Description DISC Isc Disable the specified card where loop s shelf c card Note 1 Disable the Voice Gateway Media Card before transmitting card properties from the OTM IP Line 4 0 application Note 2 The card reset button is available only in the OTM IP Line 4 0 application when the card is disabled Note 3 When the Voice Gateway Media Card is disabled in LD 32 it does not disable the active Leader or backup Leader functions DISI Isc Disable the specified card when idle where loop s shelf c card Note 1 This temporarily prevents the IP Telephony node from seizing the port from incoming calls Note 2 Use the DISI command to disable the Voice Gateway Media Card instead of the DISC command The disabled state of the Voice Gateway Media Card is indicated by the NPR0011 message DISUIscu Disable the specified unit where loop s shelf c card u unit IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 580 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 69 LD 32 Maintenance commands for the Voice Gateway Media Card Part 2 of 3 Command Description ECNT CARD LS Counts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified C lt customer gt card e If the lt customer gt parameter is specified the count is spec
145. to close the window Click the Configuration tab Note the card s software version and the IP Phone firmware version IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 320 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 18 19 Double click on each card to verify the software and firmware version Do this for every card Before proceeding ensure the time on the card is set correctly Telnet to each Voice Gateway Media Card and log in At the IPL gt command line enter the following umsUpgradeAll hh mma p hh mma p specifies the time when the upgrade will occur a represents A M and p represents P M The time is in Standard format Example umsUpgradeAll 11 30a or umsUpgradeAll 2 45p At the time specified all the IP Phones on the Voice Gateway Media Card go out of service This can take several minutes Upon completion of the firmware upgrade the IP Phones are brought back online in groups of ten WARNING The umsUpgradeAll command without the time parameter causes the IP Phones registered on all cards that are logged into to be immediately taken out of service unless the time parameter is specified After the test telephone is working the umsUpgradeAll does not need the time parameter However without the time parameter the command immediately resets all the IP Phones currently registered on that line card If the technician does not want to immediately reset all th
146. to show a link pulse on the voice IP interface status LED or on the switch It can also be indicated if the maintenance port continuously prints InIsa0 Carrier Failure messages after determining that the hub or switch port and ELAN cable are good e if a voice channel on the Voice Gateway Media Card has a consistent voice quality fault such as persistent noise or lack of voice path even after resetting the card and re transmitting the card properties Replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card To replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 108 Procedure 108 Replacing a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Locate the faulty card by the TN MAC address and IP address 2 Disable the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card in LD 32 with the DISI command The system outputs NPROO11 when the card has been completely disabled by the DISI command 3 Use the disiTPS command at the IPL gt CLI to disable the LTPS on the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card Note This forces all IP Phones registered on this card to re register If there are sufficient resources this can take up to several minutes If there are not sufficient resources IP Phones can remain unregistered indefinitely 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 669 of 770 4 10 11 12 Use the isetShow command to monitor the status of the card and the re registration of t
147. to which the IP Phone is immediately connected Users behind a NAT router may find that the configuration of a VLAN ID is unsupported by their NAT router Refer to the documentation of the NAT router to determine if a VLAN ID is supported Users who attempt to use an IP Phone with VLAN enabled on a NAT router that does not support VLANs cannot connect to the CS 1000 system If DHCP is used the IP Phone cannot even obtain an IP address Note Most NAT routers do not support 802 1Q Tagging If 802 1Q Tagging is not supported on the NAT device the checkbox Enable 802 1Q support in Element Manager s Node Summary Page under the QoS Section must be left unchecked If 802 1Q Tagging is enabled for 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 69 of 770 IP Phones behind NAT the IP Phones are able to send the initial Resume Connection message but then the IP Phones reset and no call path is established Figure 5 802 1Q Tagging on Node Summary page in Element Manager Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Hode ID 8 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel V Node Node ID 8 Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address f92168 2537 le Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address 20717915397 Management LAN ELAN subnet mask 255 255 255 224 Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask 255 255 2550 gt snmp gt VGW Profile v QoS Diffserv Codepoint DSCP Control packets
148. was selected click IP Line and Internet Telephony Gateway ITG Line product and select Software This product list includes the following IP Line 4 0 for Media Cards this zip file contains the IP Line 4 0 loadware for the Media Cards the IP Phone firmware and a readme txt file IP Line 4 0 for ITG P cards this zip file contains the IP Line 4 0 loadware for the ITG P cards the IP Phone firmware and a readme txt file Media Card firmware ITG P 24 port line card firmware IP Line 4 0 Readmefirst document b If CS 1000 was selected click CS 1000E CS 1000M or CS 1000S and select Software This product list includes the following Signaling Server SSE 4 00 xx CD ROM Image this image contains the IP Line 4 0 loadware for the Media Card and the ITG P 24 port card the IP Phone firmware and other key components Media Card firmware ITG P 24 port line card firmware 4 Click the file to be downloaded 5 If not already logged into the My Nortel Networks account enter the User ID and Password on the Sign In window and then click Sign In 6 If not registered to access this web site refer to the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 product bulletin for directions on how to register 7 Once logged in ignore the security alert 8 The Software Downloads Software Details Information window appears Click the link next to File Download 9 Inthe Save As window choose the desired path to save the file to local disk on the PC an
149. 0 b Voice port Change the Voice port only as instructed by the IP network administrator to improve QoS for the IP Phones For example if RTP Header compression is used to reduce voice bandwidth on narrow band WAN links then the TLAN voice port range needs to be set to 16384 or higher The exact range is provided by the system administrator The TLAN Voice port range is 1024 to 65535 The default Voice ports are 5200 5295 CAUTION Do not set the Voice port to a value that is already used for signaling 4100 5000 5100 7300 The Voice port defines the first port in a range spanning the gateway channels on the card this means a Voice port value of 5200 reserves the following e ports 5200 5263 on the Media Card 32 port line card e ports 5200 5215 on the Media Card 8 port line card e and 5200 5247 on the ITG P 24 port line card If this value is changed from the default verify that the selected Voice port value does not intrude into one of the reserved Signaling port values 4 Click the Add button to the right of Routes if entries must be made to the card routing table See Figure 104 on page 360 The Routes fields expand IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 360 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 104 Routes Under Routes enter the IP address and Subnet mask for any host that is not on the ELAN subnet but requires access to the Voice Gateway Med
150. 0 About this document This document is a global document Contact your system supplier or your Nortel Networks representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area Subject This document e describes the physical and functional characteristics of the IP Line 4 0 application for Nortel Networks Communication Server CS 1000 Release 4 0 and Meridian 1 systems and describes its use on the Voice Gateway Media Cards e explains how to engineer install configure administer and maintain an IP Telephony node that contains Voice Gateway Media Cards Structure This document has separate chapters which are applicable only to either Optivity Telephony Manager OTM or Element Manager The configuration administration and maintenance sections are divided into three chapters each For example there is a generic configuration chapter dealing with tasks related to installing and configuring IP Line 4 0 This chapter is followed by two other configuration chapters one for OTM and another for Element Manager The administration and maintenance chapters have the same format IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 14 of 770 About this document Note on legacy products and releases This NTP contains information about systems components and features that are compatible with Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 Software For more information on legacy products and releases click the
151. 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 txTsap 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 691 of 770 Access the IPL gt CLI from Element Manager To access the IPL gt CLI with Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 95 Accessing a Voice Gateway Media Card using Telnet on page 551 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 692 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 693 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INPCUNEION is ce beds EEEE EESE AETAT ESTE TIENES TETT 693 Before yon O6GM nei aka cd eeer ek eee kd tee Rese eatin awseds 694 Convertthe IP Trnk Cards csra reits vied eekbe Pe K
152. 0 shows the codec list sorting order for the BQ and BB codecs To know if a codec is BQ as compared to another codec refer to the lists in columns and 2 To determine if a codec is BB as compared to another codec refer to the lists in columns 3 and 4 The BQ or BB codec is listed at the top of the column Table 40 BQ and BB codec sorting lists Best Quality BQ sorting Best Bandwidth BB sorting For mu law systems For a law systems G 71_mu_law_10msec G 711_mu_law_20msec G 711_mu_law_30msec G 711_a_law_10msec G 711_a_law_20msec G 711_a_law_30msec G 729A_10msec G 729A_20msec G 729A_30msec G 729A_40msec G 729A_50msec G 729AB_10msec G 729AB_20msec G 729AB_30msec G 729AB_40msec G 729AB_50msec G 723 1_5 3kbps_30ms G 723 1_6 4kbps_30ms T 38 G 711CC 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 G 711_a_law_10msec G 711_a_law_20msec G 711_a_law_30msec G 711_mu_law_10msec G 711_mu_law_20msec G 711_mu_law_30msec G 729A_10msec G 729A_20msec G 729A_30msec G 729A_40msec G 729A_50msec G 729AB_10msec G 729AB_20msec G 729AB_30msec G 729AB_40msec G 729AB_50msec G 723 1_5 3kbps_30ms G 723 1_6 4kbps_30ms T 38 G 711CC For mu law systems For a law systems G 729AB_50msec G 729AB_40msec G 729AB_30msec G 729AB_20msec G 729AB_10msec G 729A_50msec G 729A_40msec G 729A_30msec G 729A_20msec G 729A_10msec G 723 1_5 3kbps_30ms G 723 1_6 4kbps_30ms G 711_mu_law_30msec G 711_mu_law_20msec G 711_mu_law_10msec G 71
153. 04 RUDP connection down 28 03 21 42 11 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 15 12002 RUDP connection down 28 03 22 17 40 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 20 12004 Response time out Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List IP Line 4 0 introduces the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List features These features are supported on CS 1000 systems running CS 1000 Release 4 0 software The Personal Directory allows a user to enter or copy names to a personal directory and delete those entries if desired The Callers List and Redial List are call log features The content of these lists is generated during call processing A user can scroll through the Callers List to see who has called The user can dial a number from the Redial List The Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List use a separate central database called the IP Phone Application Server to store directory data and user profile options IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 94 of 770 Features Note Since the IP Phone Application Server is part of the IP Line 4 0 software on the Signaling Server the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are only supported on CS 1000 systems Password protection is available to control access to a user s Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List IMPORTANT CPND must be configured on the system to enable Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Fore more informat
154. 04Reqg Fail izO04Unreg Att 0 izOO04Adud_ Setup 0 izOO4Jitter Avg 0 0 izOO04Jitter Max 0 izOO04Latency Avg 0 0 izOO04Latency Max 0 izO04Pkt_Lost 0 00 izOO04Listen_RFactor 0 0 izO04Voice Time 0 mins 0 secs izo02Reg Att 0 izOO02Reg Fail 0 izO02zUnreg Att 0 The eight most recent OM Report files are displayed in chronological order for that Voice Gateway Media Card 5 To view a OM file click the radio button for the file to be viewed and then click the View OM File button The OM report data appears at the bottom of the window End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 510 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Collection period The file contains collection period information for each hour of the day that the card was running The collection periods start with the hour from midnight to 1 00 am As each hour passes a collection period is added to the OM file therefore there is a maximum of 24 collection periods each day Output The OM report output tracks the statistics for each IP Phone type Data is first output for the Nortel Networks versions of the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050 Note The i2050 set type refers to both the IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 That output is followed by data for the 3rd party IP Phones labelled e 3Pi2001 e 3Pi2002 e 3Pi2004 e 3Pi2050 Finally the data for th
155. 1 mu law G 711 is always configured The maximum number of codecs registered for an IP Phone is five G 711 a law G 711 mu law G729A G729AB and G 723 1 Note IP Phones do not register the fax codecs T 38 and G 711 Clear Channel Example 1 A user configures a G 711 mu law codec with a 30 msec payload and a G 723 1 codec with a 30 msec payload The following three codecs are actually registered 1 G 711 mv law 30 msec 2 G 7I11 a law 30 msec 3 G 723 1 30 msec Example 2 A user configures four codecs 1 G711 a law codec with a 10 msec payload 2 G 729A codec with 50 msec payload 3 G 729AB codec with 30 msec payload 4 G 723 1 codec with a 30 msec payload The following five codecs are actually registered 1 G 711 a law 10 msec 2 G 711 mv law 10 msec 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 185 of 770 3 G 729A 50 msec 4 G 729AB 30 msec 5 G 723 1 30 msec Codec registration for DSPs DSPs register the following codecs e both G 711 a law and G 711 mu law codecs are always registered e both fax codecs T 38 and G 711 Clear Channel are always registered e one best bandwidth BB codec if at least one of G 729A G 729AB or G 723 1 codecs was configured The BB codec is based on the codec type The order of preference for choosing the BB codec is G 729AB G 729A and then G 723 1 IMPORTANT When G 723 1 codec is configured on the Media Card 32 port line card the number of ch
156. 10 Procedure 101 Removing the CompactFlash 1 Liftthe metal clip that holds the CompactFlash card in the socket on the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 201 Figure 201 Lift the metal clip on the CompactFlash card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 646 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance 2 Slide the card out of the socket and carefully remove the CompactFlash card 3 Return the CompactFlash card to an anti static package End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 647 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Contents This section contains information on the following topics oleet e E o PE nue ETA ETE TEA STEET EELT 647 Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card 000s02 000 ee0evnrewes 648 Replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 649 Replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card 651 Verify the Voice Gateway Media Card loadware and firmware 653 Transmit card properties to the cards sc 2245 40 csc verve avanns 656 Access the IPL gt CLI from OTM cc acces aes eeiseweeee oEee se 658 Add a dummy node for retrieving and viewing IP Telephony node COMMING I EEEE E E EE dee eiuccaanse 658 Retrieve IP Line configuration from the IP Telephony node 665 Introduction This chapter provides information on using Optivity Telephony Management OTM 2 2 to perform maintenance functions on the Voice Gateway Media Card I
157. 138 DA 0 0 0 0 N 6 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 139 DA 0 0 0 0 N Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configu Menu 23 System Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status Terminal Baud Rate Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Software Update Command Interpreter Mod Call Control wO Gn g OB WN FP Enter Menu Selection Number H Z ZZZ 24 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 749 of 770 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Port Status Speed TXPkts RXPkts Errs Tx B s Rx B s Up Time al Idle OKbps 16206 12790 0 0 0 0 00 00 Total Outcall Time 0 00 00 Ethernet Name Room 304 RCH Traini Status 10M Half Duplex RAS S W Version V2 13 9 25 98 TX Pkts 135579 Ethernet Address 00 a0 c5 e0 5b a6 RX Pkts 662866 Collisions 49 LAN Packet Which Triggered Last Call Press Command COMMANDS 1 Drop Port 1 9 Reset Counters ESC Exit Menu 24 2 System Maintenance Change Terminal Baud Rate Terminal Baud Rate 9600 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace 1 View Error Log 2 Syslog and Accounting Pleas nter selection 0 179754 PINI INFO SMT Session End 1 179761 PPO9 INFO Password pass 2 1
158. 147 on page 473 Click the Start transmit button Monitor progress under the Transmit Control window Confirm that the node properties are transmitted successfully to Leader 0 When the transmission is complete click the Close button IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 472 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 19 20 21 22 23 24 Choose a card slot for the new card Note the TN Configure IPTN in Meridian 1 See Table 50 on page 234 Install the I O cables for the connection to the ELAN and TLAN subnets on the selected card slot Ensure that the I O cables are connected to the ELAN and TLAN network In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the ITG Line 4 0 icon The IP Telephony Gateway IP Line 4 0 window opens From this list of IP Telephony nodes in the upper part of the window select the IP Telephony node to which the configuration data will be transmitted Click the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window opens Keep the default setting of Transmit to selected nodes radio button Check only the Node Properties to Active Leader check box See Figure 147 on page 473 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 473 of 770 Figure 147 Transmit Options Transmit Options This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards a
159. 18 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description NTMF94EA I O cable The NTMF94EA cable provides the ELAN and TLAN network interfaces from the Voice Gateway Media Card to the customer s network equipment This cable also has one DB9 serial port that provides serial connection between the card and the customer PC or TTY See Figure 218 on page 719 It is important to use the mounting screw provided to secure the top of the NTMF94EA cable 25 pair Amphenol connector to the system The screw ties the LAN cable shield to the Meridian 1 CS 1000M and CS 1000S frame ground for EMC compliance The NTMF94EA cable provides a factory installed shielded RJ 45 to RJ 45 coupler at the end of both the ELAN and the TLAN network interfaces An unshielded coupler is provided to prevent ground loops if required Refer to Prevent ground loops on connection to external customer LAN equipment on page 723 to determine if the unshielded coupler should be used Both ends of the RJ 45 ports of the cables are labeled to distinguish the TLAN and the ELAN The ports provide the connection point to the customer s ELAN and TLAN equipment Use shielded CATS cable to connect to the customer s equipment To improve EMC performance use standard cable ties to bundle all LAN cables as they route out of the system Note To avoid damage to CATS cable do not overtighten cable ties 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix B
160. 1_a_law_30msec G 711_a_law_20msec G 711_a_law_10msec T 38 G 711CC G 729AB_50msec G 729AB_40msec G 729AB_30msec G 729AB_20msec G 729AB_10msec G 729A_50msec G 729A_40msec G 729A_30msec G 729A_20msec G 729A_10msec G 723 1_5 3kbps_30ms G 723 1_6 4kbps_30ms G 711_a_law_30msec G 711_a_law_20msec G 711_a_law_10msec G 711_mu_law_30msec G 711_mu_law_20msec G 711_mu_law_10msec T 38 G 711CC Codecs Page 191 of 770 Codec selection For every virtual trunk call a codec must be selected before the media path is opened When a call setup with the FastStart procedure is used the terminating node selects a common codec and sends the selected codec to the originating node For a call modification media redirection or for a call setup using the SlowStart procedure the codec selection occurs on both nodes Each node has two codec lists its own list and the far end s list To select the same codec on both nodes it is essential to use the same codec selection algorithm on both nodes For the codec selection both the near and far end codec lists are retrieved e The far end list is not modified because it is already sorted when it is received in FastStart or TCS message e The near end list is sorted and then expanded to include lower payloads the same way it is done before sending the codec list in FastStart message The following conditions are met before codec selection occurs e There are two codec lists T
161. 2 under Ethernet Setup IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 738 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 10 11 12 13 14 The Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup is displayed Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP Setup DHCP None Client IP Pool Starting Address N A Size of Client IP Pool N A Primary DNS Server N A Secondary DNS Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 47 177 16 254 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP 2B Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle Under DHCP Setup toggle DHCP None using the space bar Under TCP IP Setup type in the IP Address and the IP Subnet Mask for the Modem Router s Ethernet interface on the ELAN Toggle RIP Direction None Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM then press Esc to return to the RM356 Main Menu Enter menu selection number 12 under the Advanced Applications section The Menu 12 Static Route Setup sub menu is displayed Menu 12 Static Route Setup 1 DefaultGw 2 3 4 Enter Menu Selection Number 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 15 16 17 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 739 of 770 Note 1 If firewall security is properly configured in the customer s Management GW router and if the Modem Router is allowed access over the customer s enterprise network to other IP Telephony nodes on remote ELAN subnets define a
162. 232 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Element Manager for Zone Configuration Figure 47 Zone List NORTEL NETWORKS v System Status P call Server oP Telephony v Configuration gt call Server Sip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support P Tools A Logout Optionally zones can be configured for CS 1000 systems using Element Manager instead of LD 117 To view Element Manager for zone configuration follow the steps in Procedure 18 Procedure 17 Viewing Element Manager for Zone Configuration 1 Launch and log into Element Manager See Procedure 40 on page 335 2 Inthe navigation tree click Configuration gt Call Server and then click Zone The Zone List window opens See Figure 47 Site 192 168 1 52 gt Configuration gt Call Server Configuration gt Zone List Please Choose the Zone 1 z toAdd V Zone 0 gt Zone Basic Property and Bandwidth Management Branch Office Dialing Plan and Access Codes Branch Office Emergency Service Information Branch Office Time Difference and Daylight Saving Time Property gt Zone5 gt Zone 10 3 Click the to Add button to add a new zone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 233 of 770 The Zone Basic Property and Bandwidth Management window opens Figu
163. 29 008 8 Select the card to be changed from the list at the bottom of the Configuration tab 9 Under Card Properties a Card Role The first card in the node must be Leader 0 Each IP Telephony node can have only one Leader 0 All other cards function as Followers OTM however requires that the first Follower 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 483 of 770 be configured as Leader 1 even though it has no Leader functions The remaining cards are configured as Followers Management IP If changing the Management IP address of Leader 0 it is necessary Telnet to the card and use the setLeader command to make the same change new Management IP address in the NVRAM of the Leader 0 card Leader 0 must be reset for OTM to resume communication with the node Note Prior to resetting Leader 0 unplug all the other cards to prevent any other card from becoming the Master When Leader 0 restarts plug the cards back in These other cards receive their new configuration from Leader 0 c Management MAC All other IP configuration depends on the accurate configuration of the Management MAC address The MAC address is located on the faceplate of the Voice Gateway Media Card and is labelled as MOTHERBOARD Ethernet address The Management MAC address corresponds to the ELAN subnet address Voice IP This is the card Voice IP address This address is also known as the card TLA
164. 3 Verify that all Voice Gateway Media Cards that require a firmware upgrade have established a signaling link with the Call Server Note The Voice Gateway Media Cards must first be disabled in order to update the firmware Use the LD 32 DISI command from OTM Maintenance Windows the OTM system Passthru terminal or a system management terminal directly connected to a TTY port To verify that the link is available between the Call Server and Voice Gateway Media Card Telnet to each card and log in From the command line type pbxLinkShow The status of the Call Server link appears If the link is active the screen displays the following RUDPLinkState Up 4 Select Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options dialog box is displayed See Figure 83 on page 317 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 317 of 770 Figure 83 Transmit Options window Transmit Options x This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards and or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware m Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Transmit to selected cards J Node Properties to Active Leader Card properties to all cards in node J Card software Software location Browse J Intetnet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware locatio
165. 4 15 16 17 18 Change the Management MAC to the MAC address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The MAC address is the Motherboard Ethernet address labeled on the faceplate of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card Click Change and then OK Select Leader 0 or any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node in the IP Telephony window Use the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window opens Under Transmit options select the Transmit to Selected Nodes radio button and check the Node Properties to Active Leader check box Click Start transmit This updates the node properties on the active Leader card with the MAC Address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The results of the transmit are displayed under Transmit control When the transmit is successful click Close Install the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slots in the Meridian 1 CS 1000M IPE module Option 11C CS 1000M Cabinet or CS 1000 Media Gateway 1000S Media Gateway 1000S Expander To do this a Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate b Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices Note 1 When cards are installed the red LED on the faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point the red LED turns off If the L
166. 4 Type nodePwdShow to verify that the temporary password has been deleted NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 Od Oh Om Os End of Procedure Default user name and password The IPL gt CLI has a default user name of itgadmin and a default password of itgadmin The default user name and password must be changed as a preventative security measure The shellPasswordSet command changes the IP Line username and password Reset the IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password If the authorized system management personnel do not have the current IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password reset the user name and password to the default itgadmin and itgadmin To reset the IPL gt CLI shell user name and password follow the steps in Procedure 65 This procedure requires a connection to the local maintenance port on the Voice Gateway Media Card and also requires rebooting the card which will interrupt services Procedure 65 Resetting the user name and password to default 1 Connect a terminal to the Maintenance port labeled Maint either directly or through a dial up modem The terminal communication parameters must be as follows e 9600bp e 8 data bits e no parity e 1 stop bit 2 Press the Enter key on the keyboard IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 440 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration The IPL gt prompt is displayed 3 Reboot the card by pressing the RESET button on the faceplate of the
167. 45 One ag oe bs pees Sede dede enw bhawnGreet Caeed awed eh 145 ACCA oo ein Sewn ha ode Sw ew ae waa he eee e ae Ree A 146 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Contents Page 7 of 770 Personal Diego so ciccc nee renren EAER EENE eee deed 149 Coupe LEi sosiete i git ei cieietident Generates meine 149 Pedal Linlsi2 22 caea Sent esis OLE ADEE rede se live esate tens 152 IP Phone Application Server configuration and administration 152 IP Phone Application Server database maintenance 160 Call Server CONMBUPAUNON 2 sta cgi eed ee nere desea RERE 168 Password administratio so erraria rrera nira Ara ERENER 169 User profile manasetient iis o nite needs tees eeddsheeesbend 171 eo soin ir Errr ee eer EARNE NEKA 179 Ear it E E E O T TTE TAT 179 Todel 0 1 5 cesses niee tia a ke E RRRA 179 Codec comh eurONs raasd ir rer eroa PERS REE hee ees 182 Codec tedis manO porsan t EEEren EIE EE REER EREPI NIE 183 Codec negoan o22cnnu dae Face dyeseheswhes kE EEEn 188 OBE leei ear etre er aE dae Se 191 Installation and configuration summary 195 E 4 Lie Ki ag pe he bat ise TE AESA EE TEATES TTET 195 Modulio cosas a oradaetigassrghesieeeeredeec ede diadwadyns 195 Before you Meliss fides dice ieeedsecerhiassi fbisikontiaes 195 Installation Summary ian keene eebaan eer kE REE NE EERTE ES 196 Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet 198 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node
168. 5 pbxLink connection failure detection nussn nunnur 96 Displaying pbxLink information 00 0008 97 LD 117 STAT SERV enhancement c505i5 cajecsiceeess eta 97 POR LR MGIMANON seeti rre wedaceeaseredeeceanrs FERRARE 98 Applicaton MIMBO 5 25 00 ik ad od ede ee RETRO RHR ES 98 IP Phone SUPPOM eee hae OEREN anes eh eee eunee ys 102 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 58 of 770 Features IP Phone Key Expansion Mod le 25 600s ee eicecweiwnseews 104 Comporate Decoy a cs 0idebeditoteson seaet eked EE 105 Element Manager support icaic dsseci Snpra p Aake ERER EA 106 BOOTP and CONFIGINI v4 srcordscrecnereireiinriioiirii 106 Call Statistics Collechonl is 566 sche nerek hiui rinor Seta ha 107 Counting IP PROMS ss 3i5s4chsrbssedeeswek seeds sw abenes 107 IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 35200075t00rchednssconenad 112 User defined feature key labels 2 4 4220o41ace42hee8eeede 04s 117 Private Zone CONN SUIANON cerere s dcgaediwoeisgaersoasteds 118 Shared ZONE srira R A A ER ER aE 119 Pre ZO aeee e LEE SE wad a E 119 LD Ii ic actc been bareienteeseebst pat elo din AREER 119 Run time configuration Changes sce cock ced nase eodeesaae ane 1271 Network wide Vittial OIMCE lt ocssccne diesen tereanh deere anes 123 Branch Office and Media Gateway 1000B 126 OU TO SUPPO os nc ira eked ikre a araen likes tees 127 Configuration of 802 1Q on IP Phones 127
169. 53 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 133 of 770 Download Protocol The TFTP download mechanism is used in IP Line 4 0 The Master card notifies the Followers about changes to the status of the firmware file using a broadcast on the TLAN network interface The UFTP download mechanism is used to download the IP Phone firmware files Bootup Scenarios If the Master is unable to retrieve a firmware file the upgrade policy is set as Never When the upgrade policy is set to Never the IP Phone s firmware version is not checked and the IP Phone registers with the firmware version that is currently on the IP Phone If the Master card reboots the Election process selects another Voice Gateway Media Card as the Master That Voice Gateway Media Card has all firmware files in its memory When the original Master card finishes rebooting it becomes the Master and does the normal Master start up procedure for retrieving the firmware files In a power on situation where all cards reboot together the first card that is elected Master retrieves the firmware files from the server CS 1000 systems Default location of firmware files For CS 1000 system configurations the default storage location for the firmware files is on the Signaling Server in the u fw directory The firmware file is downloaded to this directory the file is selected in Element Manager and the Transmit button is clicked IP Line Description
170. 6 11 using the Shift key for IP Phone 2004 and xx keys 0 3 for the IP Phone 2002 These are self labeled physical keys that can be programmed with any feature xx 0 for the IP Phone 2001 any other key number entered returns an error message aaa key name or function yyy zzz additional information required for the key Note Keys 16 26 are reserved for dedicated IP Phone soft keys Table 55 lists the dedicated IP Phone key name values aaa Other key name values can be found in Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Configure the IP Phone KEM Configure the optional IP Phone KEM in LD 11 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 246 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Note The IP Phone KEM is not supported on the IP Phone 2001 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 1 of 4 Response Description Add new data Change existing data IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 Zone number to which the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 belongs Number of attached IP Phone KEMs Note Up to two IP Phone KEMs can be attached to an IP Phone Pressing lt CR gt without entering a number leaves the value unchanged 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 247 of 770 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 2 of 4 Response Description xx aaa yyyy ccc
171. 62 IPL gt CLI Commands file transfer Part 2 of 2 bootPFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt currOMFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt prevOMFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt logFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt configFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt hostFilePut lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt lt ITGFileName gt Note 1 These commands are case sensitive The parameters following the command must each be enclosed in quotations marks and there must be a comma and no spaces between the parameters Note 2 For a complete description of these commands see Table 72 File Transfer commands on page 590 Note 3 Hostname refers to any of the following the IP address of the FTP host the Voice Gateway Media Card itself use loopback address 127 0 0 1 another Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 451 of 770 Download the IP Line 4 0 error log The IP Line 4 0 error log contains error conditions as well as normal events Some error conditions can be severe enough to
172. 67 jaraai e m en E tee dia reais eirrgcareSgieregteseresed 568 Faceplate maintenance display codes 00 00 0005 568 System error MESS esere rris iiri rir ienie EE nore Dre A x73 IP Line and IP Phone maintenance and diacnosies LD o osu sted cig de Esraa eae se Sakae e adele dans 579 IP Line CLI commands s ccc oct iceacstnaaven essere ecw eeaws 585 Lamp Audit and Keep Alive functions 004 627 Voice Gateway Media Card self tests 000 633 Troubleshoot a software load failure 0 000 633 Troubleshoot an IP Phone installation 04 636 Mantenance ElEPhONe ctcgad cede trand rE EEES ERRESA 637 Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card 8051 XAController firmware 638 Replace the Media Card s CompactFlash 645 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 gcse cece cdaccickn ow sbewes ama 647 CONEIS ong ere Nes Ske E REWER RSE RE ES ERE ER 647 ING OUBEOGN EEEE EAE SEE E ha ribiasinkgrdvanseu se bes ed 647 Replacea Voice Gateway Media Card cc 400scasscecesianecaas 648 Access the IPL gt CLI from OTM casc eee Tr na ENARE TENER 658 Add a dummy node for retrieving and viewing IP Telephony node configmration i sedi eee eis ean yeeend kanayes 658 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Contents Page 11 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager 0000055 667 COMING 2cc00tbaose be
173. 70 Installation and configuration summary Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INGCIWION 2 ei ng idad cbse Mbe degree bedwde ew de daeded wer 195 Before yon DEON eee it he eee a i irit eee eieaseretiees 195 Installation SUMMIALY 6 046 0e eee eee teeR Reso Rese eR eae Ree eS 196 Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet 198 199 This chapter provides a summary of the procedures required to install a new IP Telephony node add cards to the node install the cards transmit data to the cards and install the IP Phones It also includes information on what is required before beginning the installation procedures Read Codecs on page 179 before installing an IP Telephony node Before you begin Ensure that the system meets the following minimum requirements e CS 1000 or Meridian 1 system running CS 1000 Release 4 0 software IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 196 of 770 Installation and configuration summary Installation summary The following summary of steps can be used as a reference guide to install and configure an IP Telephony node and Voice Gateway Media Cards on a system This summary is intended to serve as a pointer to the more detailed procedures contained in other chapters and to provide a sequential flow to the steps involved in the overall installation procedure Note Complete all installation and configuration steps befo
174. 79761 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 750 of 770 Orta oO fF Ww 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 179763 PINI INFO SMT Session End 179772 PPO9 INFO Password pass 179772 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin 179775 PINI INFO SMT Session End 179783 PPO09 INFO Password pass 179783 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin 179788 PINI INFO SMT Session End 179796 PPO9 INFO Password pass 179796 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin 179798 PINI INFO SMT Session End 179812 PPO09 INFO Password pass 179812 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin 179815 PINI INFO SMT Session End 179830 PPO9 INFO Password pass 179830 PINI INFO SMT Session Begin 179834 PINI INFO SMT Session End Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting Syslog Active No Syslog IP Address Log Facility Local 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle MODI Drop MOD Reset MO Manual C Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic System EM 21 Reboot System DEM 22 Command Mode all 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 751 of 770 4 Redirect to MODEM TCP IP 11 Internet Setup Test 12 Ping Host Enter Menu Selection Number Manual Call Remote Node N A Host IP Address N A Menu 24 7 System Maintenance Upload Firmware 1 Load RAS Code Loa
175. 83 Codec registration for IP PHONES s c 5 5500 ose ge sead ca eaneres 184 Codec hegisiration tov DAP Se ccerigdedeeoadieoieksmegiess 185 Voice Gateway codec registration 06505 e0e eee tenee 187 Codie MENINO oie occa ee dee bsedeeanwe Retdetnawardeea 188 COdeE s re reaver sevice eer CR Awe REeh RES TE SEO EEA 188 oder e e sd c234x052seradacceetsa gies TEETE 191 H 323s Masten Slave algorit cn sieeedcteidteaneeddae oe 192 Best Bandwidth Codec Selection algorithm 193 Introduction The IP Phones and Voice Gateway Media Cards support different codecs and codec parameters with different compression rates and audio quality The CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems select the appropriate codecs based on user configurable parameters IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 180 of 770 Codecs For instance an IP Phone to IP Phone call in the same zone within a LAN can be set up using G 711 at 64 Kbps For an IP Phone to IP Phone call over a WAN the call can be set up using G 729A or G 729AB at 8 Kbps These data rates and the Voice Gateway Channel Server on the Voice Gateway Media Card are for the voice stream only Packet overhead is not included Pre defined codec table The Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS and the Voice Gateway Channel Server on the Voice Gateway Media Card have a pre defined table of codec option sets that can be supported The first entry in the table has the highest quality audio BQ
176. 8D81AA cable Procedure 117 Installing an NTCW84JA filter and NT8D81AA cable 1 Install the NTCW84JA special IPE filter connector in the vacant I O panel slot using retained hardware Install the NT8D81AA ribbon cable connectors in the IPE module backplane shroud Be sure to install the connector so the label is facing right with the arrow pointing up and the connector is fully engaged into the shroud a Install connector 1 labeled UP14 into backplane shroud 1 b Install connector 2 labeled UP24 into backplane shroud 2 c Install connector 3 labeled UP3 into backplane shroud 3 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 730 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description 3 Dress the ribbon cables back individually inside the rear of IPE module and restore the original arrangement Start with the cables that are going to be underneath 4 Attach the NTCW84JA special IPE filter to the NT8D81AA 50 pin connector using bail clips Restore power to the IPE module 6 Replace the I O safety panel End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 731 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Contents This section contains information on the following topics Modin 4 gos a oto cd bRRLEE RoE dE REE LER ROLLE ELLERY 731 RM356 Modem Router security features 0 04 T32 Install the RM356 Modem Router ors scrissrersirrtesirtaverti 734 Configure the RM356 Mo
177. 9 NAT Traversal CaO co coun ciwenstougaseaeeteaeista eee 61 Firmware download using UNIStim FTP 4 83 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 93 IP Call Recormmne 5 cca 5 25 cd caecdengese agai abide adobe aetna s 94 pbx Link connection failure detection 6 4 bade bAd a odds HASSE OS 96 LD 117 STAT SERV enhancement c lt ics5 cise gecis aver ares 97 IP Phone Suppo sc oc ok eke bho ewdgeiwarededs ose duaion 102 Corpore Dacor 450008 nidda hen een gd eesdd eae rede ee 105 Element Manager suppott cscccc escuveries erie eserves awn 106 Call Statistics collectons occ kecsee ease daasw ttiki iria saan 107 User detined feature key labels ccc cvicasiscesasessedersavess 117 Private Zone ConMPuranion oc 0csendcsd ven esse reese eiiaes 118 Run time configuration Changes 2 5 ects cake poet eee een emene en 121 Network wide Vial QIC ijcceneniide ete aieee te to iiet 123 Branch Office and Media Gateway 1000B 126 SOLTO SUPPOR 6 o5 obec ecko darkeecedeaenenkyieeer swear dacs 127 Wate Pati Capitol errereen eare eaa 130 IP Phone HMIWale oc ee cse yee ek eeee eens seb eedeO RG ae 130 Gracel DisaDlE os sess aebeoe nidri eee geLereatong cas 135 Hardware watchdon MEE crrsrirricit remir eana 138 i ee 140 Set type checking and blocking 0 ee eee eee 140 Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes 0 00 0 ce ceeee 142 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 1
178. 9 Monitor progress in the Transmit control window Confirm the card firmware is transmitted successfully to all cards Note any error messages investigate correct any problems and repeat card firmware transmission until it is completed successfully on each Voice Gateway Media Card The IP Phones continue to run the old firmware until each telephone re registers with a Voice Gateway Media Card that contains the new IP Phone firmware Note Commands are available from the IPL gt command line to upgrade a single IP Phone immediately all IP Phones immediately or schedule all IP Phones to be upgraded at a later time Before doing this verify that each card has the correct firmware version and check the date and time on the node 10 Select an IP Phone for test purposes Telnet to the Voice Gateway Media Card Log into the IPL gt command line and enter the following iSetReset xxx xxx xXxXxX xXK where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP Address of the selected IP Phone 11 Monitor the display on the test telephone As it upgrades the firmware note the IP Address of the Voice Gateway Media Card from where the test telephone is receiving its upgrade 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 12 13 14 15 16 17 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 319 of 770 Press the Services key key with globe with arrow pointing East and West on the IP Phone The Services key provides access the Telephone Options list
179. AN WAN The value entered depends on the policy in the customer s data network Note Do not change DiffServ from the default values unless instructed by the IP network administrator Under QoS only modify the Control priority and Voice priority values as and when directed by the IP network administrator The recommended configuration values are as follows a Diffserv CodePoint DSCP Control packets A value of 40 Class Selector 5 CS5 The range is 0 63 This sets the priority of the signaling messaging b Diffserv CodePoint DSCP Voice packets A value of 46 Control DSCP Expedited Forwarding EF The range is 0 63 3 802 1Q enables Virtual LANs VLANs to be defined within a single LAN This improves bandwidth management and limits the impact of broadcast storms and multicast messages Enable 802 1Q support 802 1Q support is disabled by default 802 1Q Bits value 802 1p The priority field is a 3 bit value with a default value of 6 The range is 0 7 A value of 6 is recommended by Nortel Networks The p bits within the 802 1Q standard enables packet prioritization at Layer 2 improving network throughput for IP Telephony data End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 357 of 770 Configure ELAN IP address Active ELNK TLAN voice port and routes Small Systems and CS 1000S only The LAN configuration section is
180. Addr ELAN IP Addr Election Duratio Wait for Result Master Broadcast master tps Host Type TN ISP 1100 00 0 Next timeout AutoAnnounce Timer duration IP Addr TimeOut ELAN 001 10 00 47 11 151 148 0 002 00 00 47 11 151 144 73 All cards 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 47 11 221 48 47 11 221 38 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager of the output on a Signaling Server 541 No 10 days 3 hours 5 mins 30 secs 10 00 SMC 47 11 151 148 47 11 221 48 n 15 time 35 period 30 TLAN IP Addr 0 47 11 151 144 30 sec 3 1 60 Next timeout in 7 sec Host Type ELAN MAC TLAN IP Addr Up Time NumOfSets SMC 00 60 38 bd d1 01 010 03 05 30 0 ISP 1100 00 02 b3 c5 51 2c 010 05 24 41 0 in node configuration are Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 683 of 770 registered e When all cards configured in a node are registered the last part of the output displays the following All cards in node configuration are registered master tps PlatForm TN TLAN ISP 1100 0000 47 104 39 245 Next timeout 71 sec AutoAnnounce 1 Timer duration 60 Next timeout in 25 sec all tps Num Platform TN TLAN ELAN TimeOut 0 ITG SA 080c 47 104 39 243 47 104 39 115 0 1 ISP 1100 0000 47 104 39 246 47 104 39 118 0 2 ISP 1100 0000 47 104 39 245 47 104 39 117 0 3 ITG SA 0c04 47 104 39 244 47 104 39 116 1 i NAME ENTRY TID
181. BIN must be renamed to i2002 fw e 0604Dnn BIN must be renamed to IPP2SETS fw To configure the file server follow the steps in Procedure 47 on page 363 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 363 of 770 Procedure 47 Configuring access to the file server 1 Click Firmware See Figure 106 Figure 106 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Firmware Firmware download server IP address 47 11 216 194 Firmware file path uweb upload User ID ftarget Password 2 Specify the parameters needed to connect to the file server a Firmware download server IP address Enter the IP address of the file server where the firmware will be downloaded b Firmware file path Enter the path for the location of the firmware files See page 133 for the default location of firmware files for the CS 1000 system User ID Enter the User ID that is required to access the file server d Password Enter the Password that is required to access the file server End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 364 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Configure loss and level plan The loss and level plan determines parameters such as transmission gain that vary from country to country Dynamic Loss Plan A Dynamic Loss Plan has been implemented to define the gateway loss value per endpoint connection type T
182. C Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 61C CP PII Meridian 1 PBX 81 Meridian 1 PBX 81C Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PII 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 About this document Page 17 of 770 Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Transmission Parameters 553 3001 182 Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Branch Office Installation and Configuration 553 3001 214 Optivity Telephony Manager Installation and Configuration 553 3001 230 Features and Services 553 3001 306 Emergency Services Access Description and Administration 553 3001 313 Optivity Telephony Manager System Administration 553 3001 330 Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Software Input Output System Messages 553 3001 411 Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Planning and Engineering 553 301 1 120 Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering 553 3021 120 Communication Server 1000S Planning and Engineering 553 303 1 120 Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration 553 303 1 210 Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures 553 3031 258 Communication Server 1000S Maintenance 553 3031 500
183. Call Server 1p Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support Tools A Logout gt SIP Proxy V cards Card 0 0 0 0 Properties remove Role Unknown Management LAN ELAN IP address pooo e Management LAN ELAN MAC address foo 00 00 00 00 00 Voice LAN TLAN IP address pooo e Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address poor o Hostname Hostname i Card TN Lo ETES e Card processor type Succession Media Card H323 ID frer_qubie Enable set TPS m System name System location 4d System contact a xa Signaling Servers jasa Save and Transfer Cancel Mandatory fieids of current configuration Enter the Card Properties data for Leader 0 and Follower cards The fields with green asterisks are required fields a Role The role is assigned based on the information that Element Manager reads from the card configuration This is a read only field Management LAN ELAN IP address This is the ELAN subnet IP address for the card Element Manager and the system use this address to communicate with the card Management LAN ELAN MAC address This is the motherboard Ethernet address from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 199 Voice LAN TLAN IP address This is the TLAN subnet IP address for the card Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN subn
184. Card in every node there is a line in the table For example a line in the table can look like this ITG_IP_PHONE 192 9 200 1 MySite_MySystem_Leader_1 The following is a description of each field in the table Device Type a dedicated receive string or name used as an index for the IP Line application The Device Type must be ITG_IP_PHONE IP Address the source IP address on the Voice Gateway Media Card from which the traps are coming either the card Voice IP address TLAN or card Management IP address ELAN By default the SMNP traps are issued from the card Voice IP address TLAN If a card routing table entry on the IP Telephony node was previously configured pointing to the IP address of the OTM then the SMNP trap issues from the Management IP address ELAN of the card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 328 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Device Name the device name can be any string Nortel Networks recommends that abbreviations for the site and system the card functions and the Terminal Numbers TNs are used such as Site_System_Leader Follower_TN Note Spaces should not be used in the Device Name Use an underscore _ as a separator The Leader card has two IP addresses the card voice IP address TLAN and the node IP address The Follower cards have only a single IP address the TLAN IP address End of Procedure Assemble and install an IP Phone To assem
185. Card using Virtual Terminal from Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 95 Procedure 95 Accessing a Voice Gateway Media Card using Telnet 1 Click System Status from the navigation tree 2 Click IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens 3 Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card 4 Click the Virtual Terminal button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 186 on page 552 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 552 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 186 Virtual Terminal Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information Total gt Node Node IP elements 1 1D 451 192 168 2 91 Total elements 1 Vode Node IP Ip 400 192 168 2 100 Index ELAN IP Type TN ELAN Total gt t Node Node IP elernents 1 1D 450 192 168 2 90 Total gt a Node Node IP elements 2 ID 4414 192 168 2 81 Click buttons to invoke a command The Virtual Terminal window opens and automatically connects to the Voice Gateway Media Card by using the TLAN or ELAN IP Address See Figure 187 on page 553 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 553 of 770 Figure 187 Virtual Terminal window irtual Terminal Microsoft Internet Explorer Terminal Edit view irtual Terminal 1 00 ost 192 166 1 15 Ml false nr a Connect
186. Changes to the DSP Profile tab settings are applied immediately when the card properties are transmitted Procedure 79 Disabling and re enabling the Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Log into LD 32 on the Call Server and use the DISI command to disable the Voice Gateway Media Card In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the IP Telephony node from the list in the upper part of the main window All Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node are displayed in the lower part of the window Select the node from the node list and press function key F5 or View gt Refresh gt Selected to refresh the card status of all cards in the selected node In the IP Telephony window click the Configuration menu option and then select Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window appears Select the Transmit to selected cards radio button Click the Start transmit button Verify that the transmit is successful under Transmit Control and then click Close Login to the Call Server and go to LD 32 Type the ENCL command to enable the Voice Gateway Media Card End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 497 of 770 Retrieve command The Retrieve command sends information from the Voice Gateway Media Cards to the OTM IP Telephony node The Retrieve command is used for the following downlo
187. Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 351 of 770 2 Under VGW Profile leave the values at their default settings unless directed to change them by Nortel Networks Field Support a Enable Echo canceller The echo canceller is enabled by default Do not uncheck this box Never disable echo canceller unless directed by Nortel Networks Field Support Echo canceller tail delay Select the maximum value available The default value is 128ms Never reduce the echo canceller value unless directed by Nortel Networks Field Support Voice activity detection threshold The default value is 17db The range is 20db to 10db Idle noise level The default value is 65db The range is 327db to 327db DTMF Tone detection Ensure this is checked to enable DTMF tone detection This is enabled by default Enable V 21 FAX tone detection Ensure this is checked to enable V 21 FAX tone detection This is enabled by default FAX maximum rate The FAX maximum rate is one of the following values 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 or 14400 The default value is 14400 bps FAX playout nominal delay The default value is 100 ms The range is Oms to 300ms FAX no activity timeout The default value is 20 secs The range is 10secs to 32000 secs FAX packet size Select the packet size The default value is 30 bytes The range is 20 to 48 bytes IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 352 of 770 Configu
188. Control of the IP Phone s 80210 oe ct ocexewen dior neeeadia ks 129 802 1Q and the Voice Gateway Media Cards 130 Data Path Captire tool 224 0 3 20400 e este hese idiwon eins 130 IP Phone DUWAG tors se Hercctavenicd as eeenswedriawensead 130 Mimmum firmware VOINON oad ce nites ede eons CER denorwerad 130 Firmware downl pid 09 2225 5220p ec eer eres edincaasnn gene 130 ooku i E Suton ae eee ee GUN EET TEE 132 CS 1000 systemig 6 ci 0 eu bee hres eedeeene es Aher wae SRS 133 Oracolul Disab oth biidndeeereeeebeadeseerodues ENRERE 135 Operation or the LIPS DISI oiciast veeStasneeeenieeeusees 136 Feature operation of the Voice Gateway DISI 137 Hardware WatChdae MME ai ese ee old Coke Pea er eee eri 138 Watchdog Timer and Voice Gateway Media Card firmware 139 e e isc sioonitelg akeaeadebhseweecdu Ger ewaaewas TE 140 mel pe checking and blocking iserctacege er dradedeeduseed 140 Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes 0 5 142 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 59 of 770 Introduction Table 12 outlines the features available for CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems with CS 1000 Release 4 0 software Table 12 IP Line 4 0 feature support Part 1 of 3 eo ee ae a Samoma we fee fee Support of the following IP Phones e IP Phone 2001 e IP Phone 2002 e IP Phone 2004 Support of the following software clients e IP Softphone 2050
189. Directories Restore IP Telephony v Configuration P Call Server gt ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching Y System Utility P call Server 2 ip Telephony 2 Click Personal Directories Restore The Personal Directories Restore window opens See Figure 27 on page 164 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 164 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Figure 27 Personal Directories Restore window Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility gt Personal Directories Restore Action FTP from Remote Site gt Submit Cancel Remote backup IP address Remote backup userid Remote backup password Remote backup path Remote backup file name 3 From the Action drop down list select FTP from Remote Site if the backup is save on a remote server If the backup is saved locally go to Step 7 4 _ Enter the data for the Remote backup IP address Remote backup userid Remote backup password Remote backup path and Remote backup file name fields 5 Click Submit After the file is transferred by FTP to the local drive a Switch over button appears 6 Click the Switch over button 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 165 of 770 7 Ifthe backup is saved locally select Restore All Users from the Action drop down list and click Submit End of Procedu
190. ED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit replace the card Observe the faceplate maintenance display to see start up self test results and status messages A display of the type F xx indicates a failure Refer to Table 64 on page 569 for a listing of the ITG P 24 port line card s display codes and to Table 65 on page 571 for a listing of the Media Card s display codes 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 653 of 770 19 Inthe OTM IP Telephony window select View gt Refresh and verify that the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card state is showing Unequipped End of Procedure Verify the Voice Gateway Media Card loadware and firmware To verify the loadware on the Voice Gateway Media Card and the firmware on the IP Phone follow the steps in Procedure 104 CAUTION This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 104 Verifying the Voice Gateway Media Card software and firmware Note Refer also to Procedure 34 Verifying card loadware and IP Phone firmware using OTM 2 2 on page 306 1 Check the Nortel Networks Customer Support web site for the latest IP Line software and IP Phone firmware releases Download the appropriate IP Line 4 0 file See Appendix F on page 763 e Download the IP Line 4 0xx sa zip for the Media Card T
191. EE REDE H ETRE 147 Media Gateway VOQ0B 2055432554002 s54ee arse deasedecies 148 User key for Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 148 Personal Directory sicer sinke hese kite gi tes OREERT 149 CUSED oa ten weceek gAcrels Rese adore eanwalw ieee ES ETET 149 Call log oploeses renra ee eo R ES EHR EISE EA 150 Pedil Ti eeri nne aR EENE E EER RERA 152 IP Phone Application Server configuration and administration 152 Configure the IP Phone Application Server and remote backup 153 Configure IP Phone Application Server on a separate Signaling Server 156 PANG E E E E E T EE 159 IP Phone Application Server database maintenance 160 IP Phone Application Server database backup 160 Poll databdse REGOVORy 2 i2chs tak dicen te veek Be pihacaeeed 162 Selective database recovery for a single user 165 Fee EUA oi ine erate tose ag ieee ise ENR 168 Call Server conugurauen cosy ce eed eee ekeew ee cee aw adoari tes 168 Password administiavion s oesi cessed bseh en sseaeeew er sauenes 169 Mnal Passwort 2 pocedadicasibeakiwagi skeet ee iak etei 169 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 146 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Password PuCssio POISCHON osc cu xcie wks tneianvar EEEREN 170 FOreouen password 6scccaave es eee seers es ees bauer sedan ss 171 User prone mangement ssr nckaceteendsededcoeneoreanenes 171 User profile management in El
192. Finished See Figure 129 on page 399 and Figure 130 on page 399 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 399 of 770 Figure 129 Loadware Upgrade Progress upgrade status Loadware Upgrade Progress Upgrade in Progress Please Wait O card f Status 47 11 221 48 Starting Figure 130 Loadware Upgrade Progress completion status Microsoft Internet Explorer X AN Upgrade Ended 8 Click OK 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for the other card s that have to be upgraded End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 400 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Reboot the Voice Gateway Media Card Follow the steps in Procedure 59 to reboot a Voice Gateway Media Card Procedure 59 Rebooting the Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Disable the Voice Gateway Media Card 2 Click System Status and then IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens 3 Expand the node containing the card to be rebooted 4 Click the Reset button to reboot the card Note 1 The cards remain in the Disabled state after the upgrade soa Reset command can be used The cards can also be reset by using a pointed object to press the Reset button on the card s faceplate Note 2 Reboot the Leader card only if the node is using the Voice Gateway Media Card as the Leader that is the Signaling Server is not the Leader 5 Click the
193. Forgotten password If the user forgets his or her IP Phone password the administrator can reset the retry counter and change the user s password in Element Manager Once the administrator changes the password the lock is released automatically User profile management The User Profile screen s in Element Manager are used to perform all administer related maintenance functions for a user These functions include e erasing databases for a user e viewing a user profile e resetting the password Once a user profile is selected a user identification number ESN DN must be entered to retrieve a user profile from the datbase When a user profile has been retrieved from the database an administrator can perform the following functions e move copy the following to another user user profile Personal Directory Callers List Redial List e delete Personal Directory e delete Callers List e delete Redial List IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 172 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List e delete user preferences e delete all user related databases e reset user s SCPW to the default e unlock the user s SCPW Note If auser s Personal Directory Callers List Redial List and User Preferences are all removed individually this has the same effect as selecting the Delete all user related databases option Either way all the data related to that user is deleted from the
194. General Commands Element IP 47 11 221 38 Element Type SS Signaling Server Command pbxLinkShow gt RUN IP address 47 11 221 41 Number of Pings E PING eae nodePwdSet Graceful Disable Command disServices Click a button to invoke a command Note The first section shown on the top of the General Commands window under Element IP is ITGL Commands or Signaling Server Command The section display depends on whether a card or Signaling Server was selected in the IP Telephony Information window 4 Inthe ITGL Commands or Signaling Server Command section select the CLI command from the drop down list box and click RUN The output of the command is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the General Commands window End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 681 of 770 Sample Output of Element Manager CLI commands cardRoleShow Card Role Follower disiAll There is no output or message returned in the text area from the disiAll command disiTPS There is no output or message returned in the text area from the disiTPS command dspSWVersionShow DSP software version R8 01 DSPNumShow Number of DSPs 8 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 682 of 770 electShow The following is an example oam gt electShow Node ID Node Master Up Time TN Host Type TLAN IP
195. Hostname refers to the either IP address of the FTP host or the Voice Gateway Media Card itself or another Voice Gateway Media Card when a PC Card in the A drive of the Voice Gateway Media Card contains the software binary file Example IPL gt swDownload 47 82 32 346 anonymous guest software VxWorks mms 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 72 File Transfer commands Part 2 of 4 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 591 of 770 Signaling IPL gt Commands Description Server configFileGet Sends an updated CONFIG INI file from OTM to the Voice X hostname Gateway Media Card Prensa i Updates the CONFIG INI file on the Voice Gateway Media oa ath Card with the CONFIG INI file on the specified host a yP i account and path The configFileGet task on the ITG host filename E f initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system The CONFIG INI file also contains the gatekeeper IP address gateway password and gateway DN port mapping table Example IPL gt configFileGet ngals042 anonymous guest configDir config ini bootPFileGet Updates the BOOTPtab file on the Voice Gateway Media X hostname username password directory path filename Card with the BOOTPtab file on the specified host account and path The bootpFileGet task on
196. I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 719 of 770 Figure 218 NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN and RS 232 serial maintenance I O cable Mounting Screw gt Shielded 25 pair Amphenol Connector gt Shielded RJ 45 Mating Coupler To Switch lt A Shielded RJ 45 Cable N To Switch lt 9 Pin D Sub Female gt 553 ITGOO006 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 720 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Connector pin assignments Table 95 shows the I O connector pin designations for the Voice Gateway Media Card Table 95 Voice Gateway Media Card I O Panel Pinout Part 1 of 2 Normal ITG Normal ITG Assignment Assignment i Assignment Assignment 2 R1 Not Used 26 TO Not Used 3 R2 Not Used 27 T1 Not Used 4 R3 Not Used 28 T2 Not Used 5 R4 Not Used 29 T3 Not Used 6 R5 AGND 30 T4 AGND 7 R6 Not Used 31 T5 Not Used 8 R7 Not Used 32 T6 Not Used 9 R8 Not Used 33 T7 Not Used 10 R9 AGND 34 T8 AGND 11 R10 PGTO 35 T9 PGT1 12 R11 PGT2 36 T10 PGT3 13 R12 PGT4 37 T11 PGT5 14 R13 PGT6 38 T12 PGT7 15 R14 PGT8 39 T13 PGT9 16 R15 PGT10 40 T14 PGT11 17 R16 SGNDA 41 T15 BDCDA 18 R17 BSINA 42 T16 BSOUTA 19 R18 BDTRA 43 T17 SGND 20 R19 BDSRA 44 T18 BRTSA 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 721 of 770 Table 95
197. IP address then active calls are released Note If the non active Call Server is changed for example survivable side IP address then the calls are not affected When the Call Server s ELAN network interface is re initialized to implement the configuration change the IP Phones and gateway channels registrations are unregistered on the Call Server The Call Server releases the calls When the link is re established the LTPS synchronizes the call states and releases the active calls Service is interrupted during this re establishment period and the following are affected New IP Phones cannot register 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 123 of 770 Registered IP Phones cannot establish new calls The Voice Gateway Media Card s faceplate displays S009 Once the ELAN link comes back up the Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS re registers the IP Phone s with the Call Server and all service is resumed e Ifthe codec list is changed the Voice Gateway Media Card s DSPs might need to be reloaded For instance one DSP image contains G 711 FAX and G 729A G 729AB The other DSP image contains G 711 FAX and G 723 1 If the user has a node configured with the G 729AB codec and the user performs an administrative change to use G 723 1 or vice versa the DSPs must be reloaded After the CONFIG INI file containing the administrative change is downloaded to a Voice Gateway Media Card the card s DS
198. IP addresses of the IP Phones that downloaded firmware number of bytes downloaded Figure 13 on page 89 is an example of output from the uftpShow command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 89 of 770 Figure 13 uftpShow command output gt uftpShow UFTP Server Configuration UFTP server IP address 47 1 1 24 158 port 5105 Concurrent downloading limit 5 sets Total IP Set firmware 5 FirmWare TermType PolicyName FileName 0602B59 12004 DEFAULT 12004 ums i2004 fw 0603B59 12002 DEFAULT_12002 ums i2002 fw 0604C00 1200 DEFAULT_IPPH2 ums IPP2SETS fw 0604C00 12002 Ph2 DEFAULT_IPPH2 ums IPP2SETS fw 0604C00 12004 Ph2 DEFAULT_IPPH2 ums IPP2SETS fw Run Time Data Last UFTP reset 19 12 03 18 50 18 Cumulation Period 0000 19 07 22 Successful downloads Fail downloads Active downloads Current downloading sets 5 TermType IP Address 12004 7 11 2 157 122 12004 7 11 2 168 71 12004 215 4l 12002 7 11 5 157 26 12001 7 11 3 158 15 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 90 of 770 Features uftpRunTimeDataReset The uftpRunTimeDataReset command is used to reset the run time data field in the UFTP data block Figure 14 is an example of output from the uftpRunTimeDataReset command Figure 14 uftpRunTimeDataReset command output oam gt uftpRunTimeDataReset Run time data reset OK Run Time Data Successful downloads 0 00000 ccc0ees Fail downloads activeDlogS
199. M 2 2 There is one firmware file each for the Phase I IP Phone 2002 and 2004 There is one firmware file for the Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 There is limited space on the Voice Gateway Media Card running IP Line 4 0 to store the firmware files Therefore the firmware is stored on a file server or on the Master card s RAM device Note A firmware download does not occur with IP Phones performing a Virtual Office login or Branch Office login to a remote system No firmware upgrade takes place during a Virtual Office Login or MG 1000B User registration with the LTPS The registration is allowed because the IP Phone firmware version must be 1 33 or later to do a Virtual Office login or MG 1000B User registration The umsUpgradeAll command has no impact on Virtual Office Login IP Phones These IP Phones are not reset If the Virtual Office Login is on the same Call Server then the IP Phone firmware is upgraded after the user logs out If the Virtual office Login is between different Call Servers then the IP Phone just registers back to its home LTPS and follows the normal firmware rules for regular registration When the umsUpgradeAll command is executed MG 1000B User IP Phones that are on an active call are flagged After the IP Phone becomes idle the IP Phones are switched by the Call Server back to the MG 1000B for the firmware upgrade Requirements If a file server is used to store the firmware file th
200. M 2 2 Page 311 of 770 Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card software To upgrade the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 35 If Procedure 34 has just been completed the correct software should have been verified and obtained for the Voice Gateway Media Card and the files transferred to the OTM PC Note A node can contain a mix of Media Cards 32 port and 8 port line cards and ITG P 24 port line cards Each card type has a different software version If a node contains a mix of cards the software upgrade must be performed separately for each card type That is upgrade the ITG P 24 port line card software and then the Media Card line card s software Procedure 35 Upgrading Voice Gateway Media Card software from the OTM 2 2 PC 1 Open the OTM Navigator and click on the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the Voice Gateway Media Cards that are to be upgraded from the main card list view Upgrade all the cards in the node together unless a spare card that has older software is being installed Disable all Voice Gateway Media Cards to be upgraded Use the LD 32 DISI command from OTM Maintenance Windows the OTM System Passthru terminal or a system management terminal directly connected to a TTY port on the system Note Nortel Networks recommends that a Voice Gateway Media Card be disabled prior to upgrading the software However it is po
201. M 2 2 Page 325 of 770 Figure 86 Open dialog box Open 2 x Look in Sy Control Files ct Ee Config Devices sample_an_script eyices VICES Files of type Device Files twt z __ Cancel y A The Devices txt file opens See Figure 87 on page 326 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 326 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 87 Devices txt file TT oo xx File Edit Format Help This file contains a list of specific devices to be monitored by Alarm Notification As this file may be replaced during a software upgrade it is suggested that any changes be made in a copy and the copy used The following are example definitions Meridianl 192 9 200 1 my m1 Meridianl 192 9 200 2 meridian sample_m1 82 40 57 32 164 69 82 45 161 82 46 64 114 40 31 114 40 31 47 49 4 78 47 49 4 80 235 12 85 32 164 80 49 4 20 24 42 12 44 u z150 CALL_SERVER 47 147 SIGNALLING_SERVER i7 32 KOI 90 MEDIA_CARD 47 147 SUCCESSION 47 147 4 SI user provided devices should be added below this line meridian 47 114 45 3 SUCCESSION 47 114 45 8 6 For each Voice Gateway Media Card in each monitored IP Telephony node add a line consisting of three fields separated by spaces as shown in Table 57 on page 327 Enter the first line under the last line that begins with a 7 Click File gt Save As Save the template as
202. M 2 2 Page 665 of 770 Retrieve IP Line configuration from the IP Telephony node Procedure 107 is an optional procedure that can be used in the following cases e when adding an IP Telephony node on OTM by retrieving an existing node e when there is a possibility that the IP Telephony node configuration on the Voice Gateway Media Card differs from the OTM IP Telephony database for example during maintenance and fault isolation procedures e when there are multiple OTM IP Line PCs with multiple instances of the database administration CAUTION This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 107 Retrieving IP Line configuration data from the IP Telephony node Use the OTM IP Line Configuration gt Synchronize gt Retrieve command to retrieve the IP Line configuration information from the IP Telephony node 1 Inthe OTM Navigator select the Services folder and then double click on the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select Leader 0 or any card from the node 3 Inthe IP Telephony window click Configuration gt Synchronize gt Retrieve The Retrieve Options window opens IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 666 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 4 Leave the defaulted Node Properties option selected or click the Card Properties depending upon the situation a Leave the defaulted Node
203. M 2 2 and Element Manager have two fields for setting 802 1Q support e Enable 802 1Q support A checkbox that when checked sets the priority bits to the value specified by the next item If the checkbox is unchecked the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 sends out the default priority of 6 e 802 1Q Bits value 802 1p A 802 1Q priority bit value field that sets the value the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 sent out in the priority field The range is 0 7 Password security The following password security features must be configured and administered in IP Line 4 0 1 SNMP community name strings 2 IPL gt CLI Shell password 3 Call Server s Level 1 Password PWD1 4 IP Phone Installer Password The SNMP community name strings IPL gt CLI Shell password and Call Server s Level 1 Password PWD1 operate at the card level The IP Phone Installer Password works at the node level e The SNMP community name strings are contained in the card properties that were transmitted to each card e The IPL gt CLI Shell password is set on each individual card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 421 of 770 e The Level 1 Password PWD1 is set at the Call Server and is sent to all cards in the node e The IP Phone Installer Password is first applied to one card in the node and then is applied to all the cards in the node SNMP community names strings SNMP co
204. M and Element Manager is for the control of the priority bits in the 802 1Q header sent by the IP Phones only Data Path Capture tool IP Line 4 0 contains the Data Path Capture tool a built in utility used to capture audio information This tool helps debug audio related gateway problems and allows after the fact analysis of what the user heard The Data Path Capture process is controlled by a set of CLI commands IP Phone firmware Minimum firmware version Refer to the ReadmeFirst documentation to determine the IP Phone minimum firmware F W versions supported by IP Line 4 0 Firmware download The firmware files for the IP Phones are downloaded from OTM 2 2 or Element Manager to the node Master They are compressed as they are stored on the node Master card s C drive File compression reduces the firmware file to less than 900 K However the C drive Flash disk space is limited on the ITG P 24 port line card The IP Phone normally does not have to be pre loaded with the firmware file because during normal operation the IP Phone s firmware is automatically upgraded as part of the registration to the LTPS If the firmware cannot be upgraded perhaps due to firewall restrictions then the IP Phone must be upgraded with the current firmware version before distributing the IP Phone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 131 of 770 Firmware filenames The IP Phone firmware files are released on CD ROM
205. Mbps 10100 enables auto negotiation e tLanDuplexSet duplexMode this command immediately sets the duplex mode of the TLAN network interface while operating when auto negotiate is disabled and speed has been fixed to 10 Mbps or 10BaseT mode The duplex mode is saved in NVRAM and read at start up The parameter duplexMode is set to the following 0 enables full duplex mode 1 enables half duplex mode If the auto negotiation is disabled and the speed and duplex mode are forced using the CLI commands Nortel Networks recommends that half duplex mode be used to inter operate with the far end when the far end is set to auto negotiate If the duplex mode is set to full duplex the far end must be set to full duplex and auto negotiate must be turned off Half duplex mode works with either half duplex or auto negotiate at the far end However full duplex at the near end only operates with full duplex at the far end For the IP Line 4 0 application half duplex has ample bandwidth for a Voice Gateway Media Card even with 24 busy channels VAD disabled and G 711 codec with 10 Mbps voice payload size 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 443 of 770 Display the number of DSPs The DSPNumShow command displays the number of DSPs on the Voice Gateway Media Card At the IPL gt prompt type DSPNumShow Display IP Telephony node properties The IPInfoShow command displays information ab
206. N subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask used along with the TLAN IP address to identify the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs 7 Click the Configuration tab and continue with Procedure 22 on page 269 End of Procedure Configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Card If the IP Network Administrator provides IP addresses and subnet masks in CIDR format for example 10 1 1 10 24 convert the subnet mask to dotted decimal format See Appendix E on page 761 Note 1 On the Configuration tab cards can be added changed or deleted in the node one at a time Note 2 The Leader 0 card cannot be deleted in the Configuration tab It is necessary to delete the node to delete Leader 0 Follow the steps in Procedure 22 on page 269 to configure card properties for the Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 269 of 770 Procedure 22 Configuring card properties for the Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Click the Configuration tab in the New Node window See Figure 64 Figure 64 New Node Configuration tab New Node General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Define the list of cards for this node To create the list enter the values and click Add Select a card in the list for change or delete m Card properties
207. N IP Trunks Data Buffering amp Access ITG M1 IP Trk my Sites Consolidated Call Cost Reports Ee al BELLEVILLE Clients a sample Ea al Sample Site al sample123 E Sample123 Meridiani Displays the Alarm Notification window The OTM Alarm Notification window opens 2 Select Configuration gt Run Options The Alarm Notification Run Options dialog box opens 3 Click the Control Files tab See Figure 85 on page 324 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 324 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 85 Alarm Notification Run Options Control Files tab Alarm Notification Run Options General Control Files Notification These files contain the notification scripts and configuration information Click the browse button to open and edit individual files Please see help for more information Note Changes to the control files will not take effect until the next start or restart Scripts Alarm Notifications Control Files scripts tx Browse Configuration d Nortel Common Data Alarm Notificatio Browse Devices d Nortel Common DataAlarm Notificatio Browse 4 Click the Browse button located to the right of the Devices text box The Open dialog box opens 5 Select the Devices file from the Control Files folder and click Open See Figure 86 on page 325 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OT
208. N network interfaces of all cards are connected with access to the IP network IP Line 4 0 data has been configured in OTM 2 2 OTM 2 2 server is connected to the local ELAN subnet or to a remote subnet with IP router access to the ELAN and TLAN subnets The IP Telephony node and card properties are configured using OTM 2 2 s IP Line 4 0 application The configuration data is converted to text files by OTM 2 2 and is then transmitted to the Voice Gateway Media Cards The process consists of the following steps 1 Set the Leader 0 IP address from a TTY connected to the local RS 232 maintenance port See Procedure 31 on page 296 2 Reboot Leader 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 296 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 3 Transmit the node and card properties from the OTM IP Line 4 0 application to Leader 0 See Procedure 32 on page 298 4 Reboot Leader 0 5 Transmit card properties to all cards in the node See Procedure 33 on page 300 Set the Leader 0 IP address Follow the steps in Procedure 31 to set the IP address of a factory new Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card If the card is being re used from an existing installation enter the commands NVRClear followed by clearLeader at the card s CLI Procedure 31 Setting the Leader 0 IP address 1 Access the IPL gt CLI by connecting the COM port of an OTM 2 2 PC to the RS 232 serial maintenance port on the faceplate of th
209. N subnet IP address In an IP Telephony node all cards must be assigned an address on the same TLAN subnet The card Voice IP address must be distinct from the node IP address Voice LAN gateway IP All cards in the IP Telephony node must be on the TLAN subnet therefore they all share the same Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 484 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 f Card TN It is mandatory that the Card TN format match both the machine type and the card slot where the card resides Otherwise the voice gateway channels do not function If trying to change the card TN format first record the node configuration data Delete the node Change the card TN format to the correct machine and rebuild the node For Large Systems systems enter Card TN I s c information For Small Systems and CS 1000S systems enter only the card slot number between 1 50 The card TN format is determined by the CS 1000 system type which is configured in the OTM navigator The correct system type must be entered in the OTM Navigator before adding the node Card Type Select Pentium for the ITG P 24 port line card or Strong Arm for the Media Cards 10 For each card a Click the Change button The changes are reflected in the working list at the bottom of the tab b Then click Apply to save the changes to the card in the database Select the next card to be changed from the
210. Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Document Number 553 3001 365 Document Release Standard 3 00 Date September 2004 Copyright 2003 2004 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Page 3 of 770 Revision history September 2004 Standard 3 00 This document is up issued for Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 May 2004 Standard 2 00 This document is up issued to support the Nortel Networks Mobile Voice Client 2050 MVC 2050 October 2003 Standard 1 00 This document is anew NTP for Succession 3 0 It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document now retired ZP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 204 Content from P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 204 also appears in e Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Planning and Engineering 553 301 1 120 and e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large
211. Options sub tab See Figure 154 on page 495 Up to four codecs can be selected Note The T 38 Fax and G 711 Clear Channel Fax codecs are not counted in this limit The G 711 codec type is mandatory and is automatically selected 5 Under Codec Options the following parameters are user configurable on a per codec basis Note Leave the values at their default settings unless directed to change them as follows or by Nortel Networks Field Support a Law type The law type is applicable to G 711 only The default is mu law b Voice Activity Detection The default is VAD disabled The VAD value is stored in the Config ini file under the entry VadEnabled VAD is not supported for G 711 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 494 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 c Voice payload size The default is the maximum supported This parameter is not configurable for the following e G 723 1 e 7 38 Fax e G 711 Clear Channel Fax The payload size is stored in the Config ini file under the entry VxPayload d Voice playout nominal delay nominal jitter buffer Voice playout maximum delay maximum jitter buffer The default values and the range of allowed values are displayed in the drop down lists 6 Click OK 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 495 of 770 Figure 154 ITG Node Properties DSP Profile tab Codec Options sub tab with G 729 AB codec
212. P Line 4 0 OM reports give a quantitative view of system performance such as jitter OTM is used to support Operational Measurements on the systems The OM reports are a collection of data from all the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the network OM data is written to a file every hour At midnight the OM file is copied to a backup file and the new day starts with a new file 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 455 of 770 OTM uses the following naming convention for the IP Line 4 0 OM file names ipline31_MM_YYYY_filel csv Note The MM month portion of the filename is only one character for the months of January to September 1 9 The remaining three months appear as two digit numbers 10 11 and 12 An example is ipline40_10_2002_file1 csv This comma delimited file opens in a program that interprets the csv file such as Microsoft Excel or any other comma delimited file reader OM reports are generated on demand or on a pre selected schedule When a report is generated the application retrieves the latest OM data from each Voice Gateway Media Card defined in OTM Under certain conditions the OM report is not available as follows e the first hour after a Voice Gateway Media Card reboot e the first hour after installing a new Voice Gateway Media Card The following error messages are generated when requesting the OM report during the first hour e on OTM fails to tran
213. P Line Description Installation and Operation Page 648 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Where reference is made to OTM the latest version OTM 2 2 is assumed CAUTION This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card Replace the Voice Gateway Media Card when the card is removed or when the following conditions occur e Ifthe Voice Gateway Media Card displays a code of the form F xx on the faceplate LED following a reboot this indicates an unrecoverable hardware failure The card cannot register with the systems The exception is the F 10 code which indicates that the Security Device is missing from the card e If the Management ELAN Ethernet interface or the Voice TLAN Ethernet interface on the Voice Gateway Media Card has failed This is indicated by failing to show a link pulse on the voice IP interface status LED or on the switch It can also be indicated if the maintenance port continuously prints InIsa0 Carrier Failure messages after determining that the hub or switch port and ELAN cable are good e Ifa voice channel on the Voice Gateway Media Card has a consistent voice quality fault For example persistent noise or lack of voice path even after resetting the card and retransmitting the card properties Note There are separate procedures for replacing a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card and a Follower Voice Gateway Medi
214. P Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 With two IP Phone KEMs attached the IP Phone 2004 can have up to 60 lines feature keys while the IP Phone 2002 can have up to 52 lines feature keys Note The IP Phone 2004 can also have up to 60 lines feature keys using the shift key and one IP Phone KEM With two IP Phone KEMs attached the shift key does not affect the IP Phone KEMs since the maximum number of lines feature keys is already available The IP Phone 2002 does not support shift key functionality dard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 105 of 770 When an IP Phone KEM is installed on an IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 the controls on the IP Phone affect both the IP Phone itself and the IP Phone KEM The IP Phone KEM must be configured in LD 11 before it can be used For information on using the IP Phone KEM refer to IP Phone Key Expansion Module User Guide Corporate Directory The Corporate Directory feature is based on the M3900 telephone Corporate Directory feature The Corporate Directory database is created using OTM 2 2 and is generated from one of the following e the configured DN information from the Call Server e the data from a corporate LDAP server The database is downloaded and stored on the Call Server It is then accessible to the IP Phones The Signaling Server can support Corporate Directory access for the same number of IP Phones that are registered The Directory key on the IP Phone is used to access the direc
215. P Server Parameters gt SNTP Client Parameters Mode 270E Mode passive 7 Interval 256 a Interval Pott 20001 a Pott SNTP Server IP Cancel Apply Help SNTP Server parameters The following are the parameters for the SNTP Server e Mode Can be configured as active or passive The default is active e Intervals seconds The range is 0 2147483646 The default is 256 e Port The range is 0 99999 The default is 20000 the Node number 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 295 of 770 Note The Node number is the same value as the value stored in the Node number field in the main IP Telephony application window SNTP Client parameters The following are the parameters for the SNTP Client Mode Can be configured as active or passive The default is passive Intervals seconds The range is 0 2147483646 The default is 256 Port The range is 0 99999 The default is 20000 the Node number SNTP Server IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 Note The Node number is the same value as the value stored in the Node number field in the main IP Telephony application window Transmit node configuration from OTM 2 2 to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Before transmitting the node configuration to the Voice Gateway Media Cards ensure the following Voice Gateway Media Cards and cables have been installed ELAN and TLA
216. P Softphone 2050 and MVC 2050 are also restricted by the IP Phone License setting IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 244 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Table 54 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 2 of 3 Prompt Response Deecriton O Format for Large System and CS 1000E system where loop s shelf c card u unit Enter loop virtual loop shelf card and unit terminal number where unit 0 31 Format for Small System CS 1000S system Media Gateway 1000B and Media Gateway 1000T where c card and u unit Enter card slot virtual slot and unit Note See Table 52 on page 242 for virtual superloop to virtual card slot mapping for Small Systems ODAS telephone designator Customer number as defined in LD 15 Zone number to which this IP Phone belongs The zone prompt is applied only when TYPE i2001 i2002 i2004 or i2050 Note Verify that the zone number exists in LD 117 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 245 of 770 Table 54 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 3 of 3 Prompt Response Deeeriton ADD Automatic Digit Display default for IP Phone For a complete list of responses refer to Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 31 1 xx aaa yy Telephone function key assignments where i es xx keys 0 5 and
217. PE module Option 11C CS 1000M Cabinet orCS 1000 Media Gateway 1000S Media Gateway 1000S Expander To do this a Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate b Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 650 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Note 1 When cards are installed the red LED on the faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point the red LED turns off If the LED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit replace the card Note 2 Observe the faceplate maintenance display to see start up self test results and status messages A display of the type F xx indicates a failure Refer to Table 64 on page 569 for a listing of the ITG P 24 port line card s display codes and to Table 65 on page 571 for a listing of the Media Card s display codes Follow the steps in Procedure 31 Setting the Leader 0 IP address on page 296 to configure the new card as a Leader card In the OTM Navigator select the Services folder Double click on the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the node in the upper part of the window Click on L
218. PL gt command Description Server loadBalance Causes the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling X Server to attempt to balance the registration load between this card server and the rest of the node components IP Phone Loss Plan UK commands These commands set and adjust the gains for the UK or other places where loss plan adjustment of IP Phones is needed Table 84 IP Phone Loss Plan commands Signaling IPL gt command Description Server UKLossPlanSet Increases the Tx level of the IP Phone to match the X requirement for the UK UKLossPlanCir Removes the loss plan adjustment and returns the IP X Phone to the default loss plan levels lossPlanPrt Prints the current IP Phone loss plan settings lossPlanSet Allows a variable offset from the default loss plan to X lt transducer gt be entered for the specified transducer handset lt rlrOffset gt lt slrOffset gt handsfree or headset The rlrOffset adjusts the level heard at the IP Phone The slrOffset adjusts the level transmitted from the IP Phone Positive numbers reduce the level add loss Negative numbers increase the level add gain lossPlanClr Removes the loss plan adjustment and returns the IP X Phone to the default loss plan levels IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 616 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Nortel Networks recommends that the loss plan commands be entered on the node s Leader
219. PRT ES2 cho Server IP Address gt PRT NKT NAT Keep alive time out 30 seconds CLI commands The following CLI commands provide information about IP Phones behind a NAT device and the Echo Servers IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 74 of 770 Features isetShow When the isetShow command is used a NAT column lists the NAT type if an IP Phone is behind a NAT where e C Cone NAT e S Symmetric NAT e U Unknown Behind a NAT of unknown type response received from only Echo Server 1 e P Pending Waiting for response from the IP Phone or the IP Phone never received a response from Echo Server 1 e Blank space Indicates the IP Phone is not behind any kind of NAT normal case For example partial output from the left side of the screen IP Address NAT Type RegType 47 11 215 183 i2001 Regular 47 11 179 168 C i2004 Regular 47 11 179 167 C 12004 Regular isetReset The isetReset command resets an IP Phone based on the entered IP address or TN The IP address must be the Public IP address for IP Phones behind a NAT If the entered IP address identifies an IP Phone that is behind a NAT and no other IP Phone are sharing the address then the IP Phone is reset However if the entered IP address identifies multiple IP Phones multiple IP Phones behind a NAT sharing the same public IP address then an error message is printed This message indicates there is more than one IP Phone
220. Page 281 of 770 Check the Synchronize with PBX system during Update System Data check box Click Apply Click OK to exit the window End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 282 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Configure the Call Server ELAN IP address and the TLAN voice port Follow the steps in Procedure 26 to configure the Call Server IP address Active ELNK and the TLAN voice port Procedure 26 Configuring the Call Server ELAN IP address Active ELNK and the TLAN voice port 1 Click the Ports tab See Figure 70 Figure 70 New Node Ports tab x General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Enter the IP addresses and signaling ports Changes must be transmitted to each card MELAN Call Processor IP je 123 124 119 Survival Cabinet IP CC es Signaling port fisooo Broadcast port fisoor TLAN Signaling port eooo Voice port 5200 Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 283 of 770 Enter the following ELAN settings a Call Processor IP Enter the Call Processor ELAN IP Address Active ELNK Note The Call Processor ELAN IP address must correspond to the Active ELNK IP address configured in LD 117 It must be in the same subnet as the ELAN for the IP
221. Page 676 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager a m Role The role is assigned based on the information that Element Manager reads from the card configuration This is a read only field Management LAN ELAN IP address This is the ELAN subnet IP address for the card Element Manager and the system use this address to communicate with the card Management LAN ELAN MAC address The MAC address is the Motherboard Ethernet address labeled on the faceplate of the Voice Gateway Media Card Voice LAN TLAN IP address This is the TLAN subnet IP address for the card Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN subnet Hostname This is the Host name Card TN Enter the card slot number between 1 50 Card processor type Choose either Pentium or Media Card Select Pentium if using the ITG P 24 port line card dual slot card Select Media Card if using the Media Card 32 port or 8 port line card single slot card H323 ID The H323 ID within IP Line 4 0 is for the Virtual Office Media Gateway 1000B feature Keep the H323 ID the same for all the elements within one node Enable set TPS Select the check box System name Enter the name of the system System location Enter the location where the system resides System contact Enter a contact name and telephone number 10 Click Save and Transfer The Node Summary window opens 11 Click t
222. Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 as IPP2SETS fw Then at card bootup time if the firmware file is not retrieved from the external server or the A drive the C FW directory is accessed and the firmware files present in the directory are loaded into memory and uncompressed Firmware file management with IP Line 4 0 The firmware file is stored and retrieved from the local C FW directory The IP Line 4 0 application searches for the firmware first at the file server then in the A FW directory and finally in the C FW directory e Normally the file server is not configured in OTM 2 2 OTM 2 2 places IP address 0 0 0 0 in the CONFIG_INI file for the file server address If an address of 0 0 0 0 the default is read from the file the IP Line 4 0 application ignores the file server settings As a result the normal search ends with the firmware file being retrieved from the C FW directory e Ifa file server address is configured the file is downloaded into the ums directory in memory In order for all the Voice Gateway Media Cards to get the same firmware files it is necessary to ensure that the configured file server is up and running before any of the cards boot up The A drive faceplate PC Card slot of the Voice Gateway Media Card can also be used with a PC Card containing the firmware files The card is specified as the server and the file directory specifies the A FW drive 5
223. Phone connects to both the Gateway and the LTPS functions through the TLAN network interface Gateway functionality on the CS 1000 systems A Signaling Server is always present in the CS 1000 systems The LTPS executes on the Signaling Server and the Voice Gateway executes on the Voice Gateway Media Cards The Voice Gateway Media Cards only provide the voice gateway access Active Master The LTPS maintains a count of the number of IP Phones registered to the card Each IP Telephony node has one active Master The active Master broadcasts to all Voice Gateway Media Cards and requests a response if it has room for another IP Phone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 45 of 770 The Election function uses a selection process to determine the node s Master The Census function determines the Voice Gateway Media Cards within an IP Telephony node IP Phone registration IP Phone registration on a Meridian 1 system Table 8 describes the maximum number of IP Phones that can be registered to each type of line card in a Meridian system Table 8 Maximum number of IP Phones that can register to a Voice Gateway Media Card in a Meridian 1 Card type Maximum number Media Card 32 port Media Card 8 port ITG P 24 port For more information refer to System capacities in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering 553 3021 120 Communication Server 1000M
224. Phones in the Private Zone Do not configure more channels than are required in the Private Zone as the Shared Zone IP Phones cannot access these channels Run time configuration changes IP Line 4 0 enables most changes to be made without disabling or rebooting the Voice Gateway Media Cards After adding configuration information for anew Voice Gateway Media Card and downloading the BOOTP file to the Leader a new Voice Gateway Media Card can be added to an existing node without rebooting the other cards IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 122 of 770 Features The following exceptions require a reboot a role change that is changing a Leader to Follower or changing Follower to Leader changing the node IP subnet masks or gateway IP addresses requires a reboot of all cards in the node changing the AudioPort parameter in the config ini file on the Voice Gateway Media Card requires a reboot of the card changing the IP address of a particular card so it can retrieve its new IP address information Supported run time changes Therefore IP Line 4 0 supports only run time changes for the following changes to the CONFIG INI file add card or delete card changes to the BOOTP TAB file Configuration changes have an effect only on new calls Existing calls are not interrupted However there are exceptions If the active Call Server ELAN link s configuration data is changed for example a changed
225. Phones use UNIStim File Transfer Protocol UFTP to transfer the firmware therefore the customer s network must support UFTP The customer s network must open port 5105 Note If the firmware cannot be transferred due to firewall restrictions such as when the IP Phone is behind a firewall that has port 5105 blocked then upgrade the IP Phone with the current firmware version before distributing the telephone Default location of firmware files The default location of the firmware files is different depending on the system configuration due to limitations of the various platforms e Signaling Server The firmware file is stored on the Signaling Server in the u fw directory 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 385 of 770 e node using a Voice Gateway Media Card as the Leader card the files can be located in any of the following locations The firmware files can be retrieved from the system s Signaling Server Ifthe Voice Gateway Media Card is a Media Card the files are placed in the C fw directory on the card Ifthe Voice Gateway Media Card is an ITG P 24 port line card the files attempt to store in the C fw directory on the card If there is not enough storage space the files can be stored on a PC Card plugged into the card faceplate A drive The files can be placed on an alternate file server IP Phone Firmware
226. Ps are reloaded as they become idle For instance if all DSPs are idle on the card the new image is loaded to all of them at once If one or more DSPs have active calls the DSP is not reloaded until the active calls have been released This can cause some DSPs to be reloaded later than others This functionality is supported by both Element Manager and OTM 2 2 Network wide Virtual Office Network Wide Virtual Office is supported for the CS 1000 systems IP Line 4 0 provides the Network Wide Virtual Office feature This feature enables a user to use any IP Phone within the network The Virtual Office feature provides a call service to travelling users who want to use a different physical IP Phone other than the IP Phone they normally use Users can log into another IP Phone using their DN and pre configured Station Control Password SCPW IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 124 of 770 Table 33 Features Once logged in users have access to their DNs autodial numbers key layout feature keys and voice mail indication access that are configured on their own home office IP Phones For example if users go to another office or to a different location within the same office they can log into any available IP Phone and have all the features of their home office IP Phone When the user logs off the IP Phone the features that were transferred to that IP Phone are removed Network Wide Virtual Offi
227. RS 232 maintenance port There are two ways to access the IPL gt Command Line Interface CLI 1 Use the NTAG8I1CA cable to connect the DIN8 pin connector on the faceplate or the NTAG81BA cable to connect the DB9 I O breakout cable to the COM port of a local PC Use a null modem adapter to connect a modem for remote dial up access 2 Telnet to the card from the OTM IP Telephony window This automatically Telnets to the IP address of the Management interface ELAN of the card Alternatively use the Telnet application on a PC and manually enter the Management ELAN IP address Voice TLAN IP address or the node IP address if trying to connect to the active Leader CAUTION Do not connect two maintenance terminals to both the faceplate and I O panel serial maintenance port connections at the same time Telnet to a Voice Gateway Media Card To access the CLI on a Voice Gateway Media Card from the OTM PC follow the steps in Procedure 82 Procedure 82 Accessing a Voice Gateway Media Card using Telnet 1 Inthe window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Right click on the Voice Gateway Media Card to be accessed IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 504 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 3 Select Telnet to ITG card from the popup menu The OTM PC opens a Telnet window and automatically connects to the Voice Gateway Media Card by us
228. RV response fields and description Part 1 of 3 NODE ID Identifies the related node Value is a number from 0 9999 HOSTNAME Identifies the alias that the host has been given by the system Value is a string ELANIP Identifies the element s IP connection to the Call Server Value is an IP address Specifies if the element is the Leader for the related node Value is YES or NO Specifies the element type Values are e SMC Media Card 32 port card e ITGP ITG P 24 port card e SS Signaling Server Specifies the application running on the element Values are e LTPS e VTRK 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 101 of 770 Table 20 STAT SERV response fields and description Part 2 of 3 PBXLINK STATE Specifies the element s current pbxLink state Values are LINK UP LOST FAILED INV CONN element is connected but its configuration was not found on the Call Server indicating that this element might be connected to the wrong Call Server PBXLINK DATE TIME Specifies when the element s pbxLink state last changed CONNECTED Specifies the element s connection ID sets Values are e reg the number of IP Phones registered to the element busy the number of IP Phones that are currently busy vgws Values are e reg how many voice gateways DSP resources are configured on the element e busy how many voice gateways DSP resources are active busy on the element IP Line Des
229. Reset Station Control Password window opens See Figure 32 on page 174 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 174 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Figure 32 Reset password window Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration Personal Directories User Profile Configuration Customer Number Directory Number DN UserlD Reset Station Control Password M Sub Cancel 2 Enter the User ID 3 Click Submit or click Cancel to cancel the action End of Procedure Copy a Personal Directory to another user To copy a user s Personal Directory to another user follow the steps in Procedure 8 on page 175 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 175 of 770 Procedure 8 Copying a Personal Directory to another user 1 Figure 33 Select Copy Personal Directories from the drop down list from the drop down list in the Personal Directories User Profile Configuration window The Copy Personal Directories window opens See Figure 33 Copy Personal Directories window N RTEL E NETWORKS v System Status gt call Server op Telephony v Configuration gt call Server ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support F Tools A Logout Site 192 168 1 52 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration
230. RoleShow command Note f the card role is not a Follower as expected Telnet to the card s IPL gt CLI using Virtual Terminal and enter the clearLeader command to remove the clearLeader flag 22 Inthe Node Summary window click the Transfer Status button This action downloads the node information to the card 23 Click System Status in the navigation tree Click IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens 24 Expand the node containing the new card s that were added 25 Click the Status button for each Voice Gateway Media Card that was added IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 530 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 26 27 28 29 Figure 174 The card status should display as Enabled or Disabled If the status message of WEB3003 Destination IP address cannot be reached initial RPC failure is displayed then verify the network connection and the proper configuration of the network equipment Verify that all the new Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node have a signaling link to the Call Server Click System Status gt IP Telephony Information Go to the General Command window In the Group drop down list click pbxLink See Figure 174 General Commands gt pbxLink group Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt General Commands Element IP 192 168 1101 Element Type SS Command Select A Group
231. System Planning and Engineering 553 3021 120 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 4 of 770 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 5 of 770 Contents About this document 0 cece cena 13 UDEL retr Wwiwd Apes eUede dee Ted Me EEEDOALR ESOS 13 Applicable syes essea nir boss GOS eh eae ee eee eee eL ERS 14 CONVENHONS 20 255 ocriiaxsndayenaegieietereeseoean eres bar se 16 Related 10 Gran 41 06 6 0 06a die eda EARE REES te DGSCHDNON css titre eres cesta deeeseereeus 19 COMING ine E E E E dee He ee eRe aR ETETE 19 eean o e 20 2 ben ddd etek eZee eweasadhegeehaed anes 20 Pierw kn o 5554 erred 5 dads ooh ene eee ieeeeeendiees 21 Applicable SyS e 6 05 ccc snes eb aY ee E Lee Re ReW eS HERE KS 23 System Tegemeo rrei EEEa e E 23 Sse eNOS aia a a ERS 24 Sofware delve y 6 2240 neo RG anti aR EAA A 26 Required package eirdi diirei na krenk sal ko ak Eea 21 IP Line package components ists cssirirvirornirari irite sau 28 Voice Gateway Media Cards 1 5 2 cc0cev ise aevee eee iaeeesen a 31 Virtual superloops virtual TNs and physical TNs 50 Wc ce ee a ee ee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee eS ee 52 LONE 265 5 0 8 0S SADIE RUSE EEO ALS ERE REPRESS ROSES 53 A e e ache chokes dkoa lak ha Veron weeazenaneckede nade 54 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 6 of 770 Contents eo ee ee ee er ee 57 CONS gt S405 hee og aE Gol eL ena se a todi esc ace h eee ele R Ee Nery oRta Ree RTS 5
232. System Properties xi General Communications System Data Applications Customers Network System Name Short Name System Type aa 41 jorrat Meridian 1 J Transmit SNMP Parameters during Update System Data m System Location J Same as Site Address City State Province Country Zip Postal Code m Contact Information I Same as Site Name Phone Number Job Title Comments gt SNMP Community System Mgmt Read System Mgmt Read Write fotmt 23 Jotm321 Admin 1 Admin 2 Admin 3 publict Jadmingroup2 Jadmingroup3 Cancel Apply Help 2 Enter the System Name data 3 Select the Configure SNMP parameters using OTM data in this tab during Update System Data check box IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 286 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 4 Change the default System Mgmt Read System Mgmt Read Write Admin 1 Admin 2 and Admin 3 community names Enter the System Location and Contact Information data Click Apply Click OK to exit the window N O A To update the system data from the System Window menu bar click File gt Update System Data The Update System Data dialog box opens See Figure 72 Figure 72 Update System Data dialog box Test Site 134 177 222 155 Update System Data x Compare the data stored in the PC with the actual system data and log differences in the PC Event Log Cancel Update the data stored i
233. T Traversal feature Configuring NAT Traversal in Element Manager To configure and print the Echo Servers IP addresses port numbers and NAT Keep Alive time out setting using Element Manager select Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Network Address Translation Parameters Configuring NAT Traversal in LD 117 Commands have been added to LD 117 to configure and print the Echo Servers IP addresses port numbers and NAT Keep Alive time out setting No configuration is required for the Echo Servers to work The default IP address of 0 0 0 0 means that Echo Server 1 uses the TLAN network interface IP address The default IP address of 0 0 0 0 means that Echo Server 2 uses the Node IP address 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 71 of 770 Note An IP address of 0 0 0 0 means the default local Echo Server will be enabled IMPORTANT The NAT Traversal feature is essentially automatic Changing the IP addresses or ports should only be done in exceptional cases when an Echo Server external to the CS 1000 system is used If IP addresses are specified they must be for servers external to the system The IP addresses cannot be the same Duplicate IP addresses can only be used if the default of 0 0 0 0 is used If the IP addresses are the same and not 0 0 0 0 an error message is generated and the input is not accepted Table 17 LD 117 commands for NAT Part 1 of 2 Command Description CHG ES1 lt Echo Serve
234. TG P 24 port line card cannot be plugged into slot 7 because the XPEC card is situated between slots 7 and 8 To enable a module to hold the maximum number of ITG P 24 port line cards install each card with the left slot of the card inserted into an even numbered slot CAUTION WITH ESD DEVICES Wear an ElectroStatic Discharge Strap ESDS when handling ITG P 24 port and Media Card line cards As an additional safety measure handle all cards by the edges and when possible with the loosened packaging material still around the component WARNING The CAT5 Ethernet cable between the ITG P 24 port line card TLAN network interface and the Layer 2 switch must have a length of 50 meters or less for proper operation of the TLAN network interface To install an ITG P 24 port line card follow the steps in Procedure 10 on page 208 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 208 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Procedure 10 Installing the ITG P 24 port line card 1 For each ITG P 24 port line card in the node identify the IPE card slot selected for the ITG P 24 port line card Use the information from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 198 and Table 42 on page 199 Table 46 ITG P 24 port line card installation by module type Meridian 1 Modules ITG P 24 port line card NT8D37BA EC IPE modules All available IPE card slots NT8D37AA DC IPE module
235. TG1005 X Message queue error lt operation gt lt object gt lt errno gt lt errtext gt GO006 ITG1006 X Unexpected state encountered lt file gt lt line gt lt state gt G007 ITG1007 X Unexpected message type lt file gt lt line gt lt msg gt G008 ITG1008 X Null pointer encountered lt file gt lt line gt Name of pointer G009 ITG1009 X Invalid block lt file gt lt line gt Type of block 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 575 of 770 Table 67 Critical ITG Error messages Part 2 of 4 Corresponding Maintenance Critical Signaling Display Error Message Server Description G010 ITG1010 X Unable to locate data block lt file gt lt line gt Type of block G011 ITG1011 X File transfer error lt operation gt lt file gt lt host gt G012 ITG1012 X Module initialization failure lt moduleName gt G013 ITG1013 Ethernet receiver buffer unavailable packet s discarded G014 ITG1014 X Ethernet carrier lt ifName gt lt state gt G015 ITG1015 Ethernet device failure lt ifName gt G017 ITG1017 X Invalid or unknown SSD message lt ssdType gt lt TN gt lt msg gt G019 ITG1019 DSP channel open failure lt channel gt G020 ITG1020 X Configuration error lt param gt lt value gt lt reason gt G021 ITG1021 DSP successfully reset lt dsp gt G022 ITG1022 DSP channel not responding channel disabled lt chan
236. Telephony node in Element Manager 537 Restart a Voice Gateway Media Card 0 004 547 Restart all the Voice Gateway Media Cards 550 Update other node properties 24 4ic6cices ewer ere eoerewnsaes 551 Telnet to a Voice Gateway Media Card using Virtual Terminal 551 Check the Voice Gateway Channels 6002s440se56eieeaeieas 554 Setting the IP Phone Installer Password 0 000 558 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 506 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Introduction This chapter explains how to administer IP Line 4 0 and the Voice Gateway Media Card on CS 1000 systems using Element Manager Element Manager administration procedures This section describes the administration procedures that can be performed using Element Manager Turn off browser caching Internet Explorer caching interferes with the Element Manager application in that users cannot see real time changes as they occur For this reason Nortel Networks recommends that Internet Explorer s caching be turned off prior to using Element Manager Follow the steps outlined in Procedure 39 on page 333 to prevent caching of web windows by the Internet Explorer browser 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 507 of 770 IP Line Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation Operational Measurement OM reports provide
237. Telephony node in OTM by retrieving an existing node IP Line CLI access using Telnet or local RS 232 maintenance port Telnet to a Voice Gateway Media Card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 454 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Introduction This chapter explains how to administer IP Line 4 0 and the Voice Gateway Media Card on the systems using OTM 2 2 Optivity Telephony Manager OTM provides a graphical user interface to the Voice Gateway Media Card OTM can be used to Telnet to the card install and upgrade software configure alarm event reporting view and update card property and configuration data add new cards to a node schedule reports and other related tasks WARNING The only support provided for nodes which reside on a CS 1000 system is the retrieval of OM reports Refer to Procedure 66 on page 456 through Procedure 70 on page 467 OTM administration procedures This section describes the OTM administration procedures using the OTM IP Line 4 0 application All references to OTM in the following procedures assume the latest OTM version Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation Operational Measurement OM reports provide important statistical and traffic information and feedback to the system administrator to better engineer the system The information stored in the OM file applies only to the calls routed over the IP network by way of I
238. The files are also available from the Nortel Networks web site The IP Phone firmware files are labelled as follows e 0602Bnn BIN is the filename for the Phase I IP Phone 2004 firmware where Bnn F W version 1 nn e 0603Bnn BIN is the filename for the Phase I IP Phone 2002 firmware where Bnn F W version 1 nn e 0604Dnn BIN is the file name for the Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 where Dnn F W version 4 nn If the external file server option is used in OTM 2 2 or Element Manager for firmware distribution with a node the files must be renamed before being placed on the server e 0602Bnn BIN must be renamed to i2004 fw e 0603Bnn BIN must be renamed to i2002 fw e 0604Dnn BIN must be renamed to IPP2SETS fw For the external file server options e see Procedure 29 on page 291 for OTM 2 2 e see Procedure 47 on page 363 for Element Manager IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 132 of 770 Features Meridian 1 Default location of firmware files The firmware files for the IP Phones are stored in the C FW directory The firmware files are downloaded and saved to this directory when the user checks the firmware download checkbox in the OTM Synchronize Transmit dialog and presses the Transmit button The IP Line application saves the firmware file for the Phase I IP Phone 2004 as 12004 fw the firmware file for the Phase I IP Phone 2002 as 12002 fw and the firmware file for the
239. Timer Yes Yes Yes Password Guessing Protection Ringer and buzzer volume adjustment Set based installation Maintenance Audit enhancement Multi language support Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes IP Softphone 2050 user selectable codec not applicable to MVC 2050 as it only supports G 711 codec Yes Yes Yes Small Systems only Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Small Systems only Yes Yes Yes a Node level patching is not provided by OTM 2 2 The patching CLI command of the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG Pentium 24 port line card can be used introduced in IP Line 4 0 NAT Traversal feature Network Address Translation NAT provides the following benefits e the ability to network multiple sites with overlapping private address ranges e added security for servers on a private network e conservation of public IP address allocation A NAT device router exists between a private network and a public network The NAT device maps private addresses to public addresses IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 62 of 770 Features With the CS 1000 Release 4 0 NAT Traversal feature several IP Phones are now supported behind a single Cone NAT router with or without Virtual Private Network VPN capabilities This support enables large scale deployment of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP in teleworking and Small Of
240. Unreg Att 0 3Pi2050Aud_Setup 0 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 513 of 770 3Pi2050Jitter_Avg 0 0 3Pi2050Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2050Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2050Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs ChanAud_ Setup 0 ChanJitter_Avg 0 0 ChanJitter_Max 0 ChanPkt_Lost 0 00 ChanVoice Time 0 mins 0 secs Each collection period provides the following information e The date and time for the collection period hour e LTPS information for IP Phones that are registered to the LTPS on the Voice Gateway Media Card during that hour During normal operation the LTPS values for the Voice Gateway Media Card can be zeros as the IP Phones normally register to the LTPS on the Signaling Server e Voice Gateway channel information accumulated during the hour The Voice Gateway data is prefixed by Chan e Notes indicating whether the machine has been rebooted during the hour e Virtual Trunk statistics display only for a Signaling Server that has been running the VTRK H 323 Signaling Server in the last hour The OM file relates to the omreport xxx file on the Voice Gateway Media Card where xxx indicates the numbers of days since December 31 In general no relationship exists between the IP Phones registered on a card and the Voice Gateway channels on the card if two or more cards are used in the node If only one card is used with multiple IP Phones a partial correlation might exist between the
241. V Enable 25 FAX Modem Tone detection IV Enable echo canceller IV V 21 FAX tone detection enabled Echo canceller tail delay 128 x ms FAX maximum rate 14400 7 bps Idle noise level s5 dBm FAX playout nominal delay 100 ms Voice activity detection threshold 17 dB FAX no activity timeout 20 s FAX packet size 20 bytes Reset Defaults OK Cancel Apply Help ema Table 63 lists the configurable DSP parameters the range of the values and the default values r Loss and Level Plan Country Table 63 DSP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Default value Enable DTMF tone detection checked or unchecked checked Enable echo canceller checked or unchecked checked Echo canceller tail delay 64 or 128 ms 128 ms Idle noise level 327 to 327 dB 65 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 493 of 770 Table 63 DSP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Default value Voice activity detection 20 to 10 dB 17 dB threshold Enable V 25 FAX Modem checked or unchecked checked tone detection Enable V 21 FAX tone checked or unchecked checked detection FAX maximum rate 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 bps 12000 14400 bps FAX playout nominal delay 0 300 ms 100 ms FAX no activity timeout 10 32000 seconds 20 seconds FAX packet size 20 48 bytes 30 bytes 4 Click the Codec
242. VLAN Without a relay agent a DHCP server must exist on each subnet At least two IP address pools are used on the DHCP server one for the Voice VLAN subnet and another for the Data VLAN subnet Additional pools can be added as required as long as one IP address pool per subnet and VLAN is used A relay agent is required if it is a PC only network Control of the IP Phone s 802 1Q The 802 1Q header in the outgoing packets from the IP Phones is enabled by one of the following If the IP Phone s VLAN GUI response is set to 1 then the 802 1Q functionality is enabled All packets from the IP Phone have the 802 1Q header as part of the Ethernet frame If the IP Phone s VLAN GUI response is set to 2 then the 802 1Q functionality is enabled after the DHCP response is received with the VLAN ID oe If the OTM or Element Manager configuration enables the use of the p bits once downloaded to the IP Phone the 802 1Q functionality is enabled IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 130 of 770 Features 802 1Q and the Voice Gateway Media Cards The ITG P 24 port and Media Card line cards cannot send the 802 1Q header because the cards operating system does not support it The switch ports connecting the Voice Gateway Media Card s TLAN network interface should be configured for untagged operation so if a 802 1Q header is present it is stripped before a packet is passed to the card The configuration in OT
243. Virtual Office The IP Phone Virtual Office feature uses the Station Control Password SCPW feature The SCPW password can be maintained either through LD 11 administration or by the user if Flexible Feature Code FFC code access is configured If the SCPW is not configured for a TN registering by means of the Virtual Office feature the login is rejected An appropriate error message is displayed to alert the user that a password must be configured Enable the SCPW in the Customer Data Block CDB by setting the length of the SCPW scpl The SCPW must be at least four digits To login using Virtual Office the TN associated with the current IP Phone registration must be configured with the CLS VOLA Virtual Office Login Allowed The TN associated with the user ID for the login must be configured with the CLS VOUA Virtual Office User Allowed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 417 of 770 Two CLSs restrict Virtual Office usage The two classes of services are e VOLA VOLD defines whether this TN physical IP Phone allows disallows a Virtual Office login option e VOUA VOUD defines if a specific remote user can log onto this TN allows disallows a particular user to login using Virtual Office IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 418 of 770 Table 59 IP Line 4 0 administration Table 59 shows the CLS for LD 11 LD 11 Virtual Office Login for IP Phones Pro
244. Voice Gateway Media Card I O Panel Pinout Part 2 of 2 Normal ITG Normal ITG Assignment Assignment i Assignment Assignment R20 BCTSA T19 BSINB R21 BSOUTB T20 BDCDB R22 BDTRB T21 BDSRB R23 DI T22 DI no connect DO T23 DO R1 no connect no connect no connect IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 722 of 770 Table 96 NTMF94EA cable pin description I O Panel P1 Signal Name BSOUTB P2 P3 P4 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description RED BDTRB GREEN SGRND BROWN BSINB BLUE BDCDB ORANGE BDSRB YELLOW SHLD GRND SHLD GRND GREEN WHITE ORANGE WHITE WHITE GREEN WHITE ORANGE GREEN WHITE ORANGE WHITE RX WHITE GREEN TX WHITE ORANGE SHLD GRND BARE SHLD GRND 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 BARE Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 723 of 770 Prevent ground loops on connection to external customer LAN equipment The shielded RJ 45 coupler is the connection point for the customer s shielded CATS LAN cable to the hub switch or router supporting the TLAN and ELAN subnets Use shielded CATS RJ 45 cable to connect to the customer s TLAN ELAN equipment Follow the steps in Procedure 115 to prevent ground loops when connecting to external customer LAN equipment
245. Voice Gateway Media Card configuration data from the Call Server Identify the TN of the Voice Gateway Media Card In LD 20 enter the LTN List Terminal Number command where TYPE VGW to list the TNs on the Voice Gateway Media Card TN This returns a list of units equipped on the card Verify the number of units that are equipped on the card Take note of the first unit equipped on the card c In LD 14 use the Out n command where n equals the number of units that are equipped on the card At the TN prompt enter the TN for the first unit that was equipped on the card as determined in Step 15 in Procedure 72 on page 469 As the units are deleted verify that the intended units are outed End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 478 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Delete the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card from the node A node s Leader 0 card cannot be deleted using OTM Telnet to the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card and enter a command to remove the Leader 0 card Follow the steps in Procedure 74 to delete the Leader 0 card CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 74 Deleting the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card from the node 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 1 Select the node in the upper port
246. X 51C CS 1000M Half Group Meridian 1 PBX 61C CS 1000M Single Group Meridian 1 PBX 61C CP PIl CS 1000M Single Group Meridian 1 PBX 81 CS 1000M Multi Group Meridian 1 PBX 81C CS 1000M Multi Group Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PIl CS 1000M Multi Group For more information see one or more of the following NTPs e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Upgrade Procedures 553 3011 258 e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade Procedures 553 3021 258 e Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures 553 3031 258 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 16 of 770 About this document Conventions Terminology In this document the following systems are referred to generically as system Communication Server 1000S CS 1000S Communication Server 1000M CS 1000M Communication Server 1000E CS 1000E Meridian 1 The following systems are referred to generically as Small System Communication Server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M Chassis Communication Server 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet The following systems are referred to generically as Large System Communication Server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M HG Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG Communication Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG Meridian 1 PBX 51
247. Y YY YY 2Z 2Z 2Z 22 The three parameters must each be enclosed in double quotation marks Ensure that there is a space after the command and before the first parameter Put commas and no spaces between the following parameters XX XX XX XX IP address Enter the same IP address that was entered in the Management LAN IP field for Leader 0 in the Configuration tab of the Node Properties window yy yy yy yy Gateway IP address Enter the same address that was entered in the Management LAN gateway IP field in the General tab of the Node Properties window If there is none enter the following 0 0 0 0 2Z 2Z 2Z 2Z Management LAN subnet mask Enter the same address that was entered in the Management LAN subnet mask field in the General tab of the Node Properties window Note This step assumes that the new IP Telephony node has already been configured in OTM 2 2 7 Reboot the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card At the IPL gt prompt enter cardReset or press the Reset button on the faceplate of the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card 8 Check the maintenance display for T 22 to confirm a successful reboot IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 298 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 9 From the OTM IP Telephony Gateway IP Line 4 0 application select View gt Refresh to show the card status Otherwise verify LAN connections and IP configuration End of Pro
248. a Card Be aware of the role the card is to play before replacing the card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 649 of 770 Replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card To replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 102 CAUTION This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 102 Replacing a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Locate the faulty card in the OTM IP Telephony database by the TN MAC address and IP address Disable the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card in LD 32 with the DISI command The system displays NPR0011 when the card has been completely disabled by the DISI command Use the disiTPS command at the IPL gt CLI to disable the LTPS on the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card Note This forces all Internet Telephones registered on this card to re register If there are sufficient resources this can take up to several minutes If there are not sufficient resources Internet Telephones can remain unregistered indefinitely Use the isetShow command to monitor the status of the card and the reregistration of the IP Phone The Voice Gateway Media Card card is completely disabled when no IP Phones are registered on the card Remove the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card from the system Install the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slots in the Meridian 1 CS 1000M I
249. a message during the start up sequence and appears in the SYSLOG file The following are examples of reset reasons e JAN 04 12 17 45 tXA Info Last Reset Reason Reboot command issued Output after card reset using the CLI command cardReboot 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 139 of 770 JAN 04 12 17 45 tXA Info Last Reset Reason Watchdog Timer Expired Output after card reset due to watchdog timer expiration JAN 04 12 17 45 tXA Info Last Reset Reason Manual reset Output after card reset due to either the faceplate reset button press or a power cycle to the card JAN 04 12 17 45 tXA Info Last Reset Reason Unknown Output after card reset due either the card F W not supporting the reset reason or a corruption of the reset reason code The last reset reason can also be displayed at any time by entering the lastResetReason CLI command Watchdog Timer and Voice Gateway Media Card firmware The application starts the Watchdog Timer as part of the application start up process The timer is started only if the application s check of the firmware version indicates the card s firmware supports the Watchdog Timer function Required Voice Gateway Media Card firmware version A firmware upgrade can be required on the Voice Gateway Media Cards to invoke the Watchdog Time functionality ITG P 24 port line card Version 5 3 of the firmware file is the required minimum to enable the Watchdog Timer functionalit
250. a new card never used before then reboot the card End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 382 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware WARNING Before beginning the upgrade ensure that a PWD1 user name and password has been configured on the Call Server If there is no PWD1 user name and password configure them in LD 17 This is necessary to enable login to the Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server Before beginning ensure that the following software is installed on the PC e Software to extract zipped files WinZip or equivalent e Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 02 or later NetScape Navigator is not supported Upgrade procedure steps The following steps are required to upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card loadware and IP Phone firmware 1 Determine the version of the software currently installed on the Voice Gateway Media Card See Procedure 54 on page 386 2 Determine the version of the IP Phone firmware that is currently running on the Voice Gateway Media Card See Procedure 55 on page 389 3 Download the most up to date version of the software and firmware files from the Nortel Networks web site See Appendix F Download IP Line 4 0 files from Nortel Networks web site on page 763 4 Upload the software and firmware files using the File Upload system utility in
251. a shelf that already has ITG P 24 port line cards then the ITG P 24 port line card s EMC requirements supersedes the Media Card EMC requirements For Large Systems there is no limit to the number of Media Cards that can be installed on a shelf to meet CISPR 22 Class A and FCC Part 15 Class A limits To meet CISPR 22 Class B limits there is a limit of ten Media Cards that can be installed on one shelf If the Media Cards are to be installed in a shelf that already has ITG P 24 port line cards then the ITG P 24 port line card s EMC requirements supersedes the Media Card s EMC requirements IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 758 of 770 Appendix D Product integrity Table 104 lists Electro magnetic emissions regulations met by the Voice Gateway Media Card along with the country s standard that lists each regulation Table 104 Electro Magnetic emissions Regulation Identifier FCC part 15 Class A Regulatory Agency United States Radiated Emissions CSA C108 8 Canada Radiated Emissions EN50081 1 European Community Generic Emission Standard EN55022 CISPR 22 CLASS B Radiated Emissions Basic Std BAKOM SR 784 103 12 4 1 1 EMC Safety Switzerland SS 447 20 22 Sweden EMC standard AS NZS 3548 EMC Australia New Zealand NFC 98020 France EMC standard Table 105 lists Electro magnetic immunity regulations met by the Voice Gateway Media Card al
252. aO Carrier Failure 668 log files 636 loopback test 636 LUC 243 LUU 243 M maintenance hex display 37 Maintenance Audit 627 Mapping 63 mean time between failures 754 MICB regulatory standards 756 Mute 66 MVC 205 243 418 MVC 2050 44 59 61 102 124 125 243 250 273 315 321 352 418 425 463 510 MVC 2050 upgrading 321 MVC 2050 software upgrading 321 N NAT 63 65 IP Line Index Page 767 of 770 NAT Keep Alive time out setting 70 NAT Mapping Keep Alive 66 NAT Mapping Keep Alive Time out setting 72 Network Address Translation 61 nodePwdShow 434 NPROO11 671 NT8D02 Digital Line Card connector pin assignments 720 NT8D37BA IPE Modules 726 NT8D37EC IPE Modules 726 NT8D37 IPE Modules cable connections 727 NT8D81BA cable 726 NTCW84JW special IPE filter 726 O Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation 454 operational parameters 451 operational report 454 507 Optivity Telephony Manager 23 OTM 23 254 overrides 434 P Package 365 240 password 373 Patching 616 phantom superloops 241 physical TNs 234 port 5200 65 primary Signaling Server 106 Private Zone 118 Proactive Voice Quality Management 70 77 PRT DNIP 604 PRT ES1 71 Description Installation and Operation Page 768 of 770 Index PRT ES2 71 PRT ESS 71 PRT IPDN 604 PRT TYPE SUPL 242 PRT ZONE 231 PRT ZONE ALL 231 PRT ZONE xxx 231
253. ach SNMP management address that is added to the SNMP traps list Click Apply To transmit the information to the node from the menu select Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit On the SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab on the right side of the window under Card routing table entries enter the IP address and Subnet mask for any host that is not on the ELAN subnet but requires access to the Voice Gateway Media Card across the ELAN A Telnet session for maintenance from a remote PC is an example of when this would be needed The address of the remote PC would be added in the Route list IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 278 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 The default route on the card causes packets for unknown subnets to be sent out on the TLAN network interface Packets from an external host arrive on the ELAN network interface and responses are sent on the TLAN network interface This can cause one way communication if the TLAN subnet is not routed to the ELAN subnet It is necessary to add an entry in the Route list to correct the routing so that response packets are sent on the ELAN network interface Each entry creates a route entry in the card s route table that directs packets to the ELAN network interface See Figure 68 on page 279 CAUTION Use caution when assigning card routing table entries Do not include the IP address of an IP Phone Otherwise voice traffic to this IP P
254. ad file w log UFTPLOGO TXT Space remaining 399755 Inactive F W download file u log UFTPLOGIL TXT wlog UFTPLOGI TXT 27 03 19 58 41 fw dnid success 47 11 217 11 12002 27 03 20 24 30 fw dnid success 47 11 217 12 12002 27 03 21 42 11 fw dnid success 47 11 217 15 12002 27 03 22 17 40 fw dnid success 47 11 217 20 12004 dnidFailShow The dnidFailShow command displays the download failed status logged in the active and inactive files When no parameter is entered the output displays the all the failed UFTP download information in the active and inactive files When a line number is entered dnldFailShow numOfLine the output displays the download fail status in the active and inactive files by the number of lines Figure 17 on page 93 is an example of output from the dnldFailShow command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 93 of 770 Figure 17 dnidFailShow command output oam gt dnidFailShow Active F W download file uw log UFTPLOGO TXT 29 03 19 58 41 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 11 12004 F W not exist 29 03 20 24 30 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 12 12004 F W size is 0 29 03 21 42 11 F W dnld fail 47 1 1 217 15 12002 RUDP connection down 29 03 22 17 40 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 20 12004 Response time out inactive F W download file u log UFTPLOGI TXT 28 03 19 58 41 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 11 12004 RUDP connection down 28 03 20 24 30 F W dnld fail 47 11 217 12 120
255. ading a node or card configuration by a remote OTM user Note This can also be performed by using the Add Node command and selecting the Retrieve the active configuration from an existing node option copying node information from one node to another restoring accidentally changed OTM information and downloading information to a fictitious dummy node that has been created for this purpose in order to view the configuration of the Voice Gateway Media Card and the IP Telephony node CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Follow the steps in Procedure 80 to use the Retrieve command Procedure 80 Using the Retrieve command 1 In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the card s from which to retrieve information Click Configuration gt Synchronize gt Retrieve The Retrieve Options window opens See Figure 155 on page 498 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 498 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 155 Retrieve Options window Retrieve Options This window is used to retrieve configuration data from one or more nodes The retrieve applies to the nodes you have selected in the main window This operation replaces data stored in OTM The card properties are retrieved from the active leader card These should
256. ager however it cannot be changed there Element Manager displays the card role based on the setLeader status of the card Follow the steps in the Procedure 90 on page 536 to first select a new Leader card and then to delete the current Leader Voice Gateway Media Card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 536 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Procedure 90 Deleting the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click System Status in the navigation tree and then click IP Telephony In the IP Telephony Information window expand the node containing both the Leader card to be deleted and the card that will become the new Leader Select a card in the node to become the new Leader Card A Click the Telnet button to the right of the Card A and log into the card Enter the setLeader command Card A becomes the new Leader In the IP Telephony Information window expand the node containing the old Leader card Card B which is to be deleted Click the Telnet button to the right of the Card B and log into the card Enter the clearLeader command This command removes the IP address information from NVRAM and also clears the Leader flag Remove the old Leader card Card B from the Media Gateway Reboot Card A Wait for the card to come up as the Leader Click Configuration and then IP Telephony On the Node Summary window click Edit for the node In the
257. ager Page 339 of 770 Manually add an IP Telephony node Follow the steps in Procedure 41 to add an IP Telephony node using Element Manager Procedure 41 Adding an IP Telephony node manually 1 To manually add a new IP Telephony node click Configuration in the navigation tree 2 Inthe Configuration menu click IP Telephony The Node Summary window opens See Figure 93 Figure 93 Element Manager Node Summary Adding a new node Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt N RTEL NETWORKS Node Summary V System Status New Node to Add Call Server gt IP Telephony Import Node Files v Configuration 2 call Server 1p Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Node 400 Node IP 192 168 2 100 gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt Node 450 Node IP 192 168 2 90 gt System Utility gt Administration gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 gt Support 2 Tools d Logout gt Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 If this is the first node to be added the No nodes are configured message is displayed There are two options New Node to Add or Import Node Files IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 340 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager The Node Summary window shows a list of all the configured nodes To expand a node and view its elements click the arrow gt to the left of the Node information Figure 94 shows o
258. aintenance Figure 196 IDU command output gt LD 32 du 61 0 12004 TN 061 00000 V TN ID CODE i2004 ISET MAC ADR 00 60 38 76 C7 9D ISET IP ADR 30 1 1 10 5200 LTPS IP ADR 47 11 216 49 MANUFACTURER CODE NAME MODEL NT CODE NT2K00GI COLOR CODE 66 RLS CODE 0 SER NUM 76C79D FW SW VERSION 0602B59 du 61 12004 TN 06100001 V TN ID CODE i2004 ISET MAC ADR 00 60 38 76 38 E0 ISET IP ADR 30 1 1 100 1250 192 168 1 13 LTPS IP ADR 47 11 216 50 MANUFACTURER CODE NAME MODEL NT CODE NT2K00GI COLOR CODE 66 RLS CODE SER NUM 7638E0 FW SW VERSION 0602B59 Any information about attached IP Phone KEMs is also displayed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 585 of 770 In the example in Figure 196 on page 584 the first IP Phone is not behind a NAT device the second IP Phone is behind a NAT device The ISET IP ADR field displays the IP Phone s signaling IP address as seen by the LTPS If the IP Phone is behind a NAT device the ISET IP ADR field displays the public address the address seen by the LTPS followed by the private IP address the address configured at the IP Phone in parenthesis This format applies only for IP Phone Virtual TNs If the IP Phone is not registered with the Call Server an NPR0048 message is generated If the IP Phone is registered but idle the system prints the IP Phone s IP address and Voice Gateway Media Card
259. al Directory Callers List and Redial List Note In anode composed of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server s IP Phones only register to the Voice Gateway Media Cards when the Signaling Server s are not present due to a failure condition Five minutes after a node election is completed each Voice Gateway Media Card with IP Phones registered to it checks to see if a Signaling Server is present in the node If a Signaling Server is present any idle IP Phones that are found are reset server switched back to S1 Server 1 so they can re register to the Signaling Server If an IP Phone is busy a one minute timer is started Every one minute the process comes back to check for idle IP Phones and idle phones are reset This checking continues until no IP Phones remain registered to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Configure IP Phone Application Server on a separate Signaling Server If the IP Phone Application Server must support more than 1000 users follow the steps in Procedure 2 on page 157 to configure the IP Phone Application Server on a separate Signaling Server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 157 of 770 Procedure 2 Configuring the IP Phone Application Server on a separate Signaling Server 1 In Element Manager configure a new node Enter a unique Node ID in the New Node field Click the to Add button See Figure 21 Figure 21 Add a new node Site 207
260. al configuration of an IP telephony node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 253 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Contents This section contains information on the following topics ICONS cs kode cake bersadsw desde daw endaeseudeieee 254 Configure IP Line data using OTM 0 0000 enasenserrveeeswes 254 Launch OTM and the IP Line 4 0 application 256 Add a site system and CUSIOMET ssie 460s scare eaks ood en 258 Manually add an IP Telephony node 0 264 Configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Card 268 Configure DAP profile dala 2 ccichcasannekontependigear eres 271 Configure SNMP traps and ELAN gateway routing table 275 Configure node synchronization with the Call Server 219 Configure the Call Server ELAN IP address and the TLAN voice port 282 Configure security for SNMP access 0000008 284 Configure SNMP access and community name strings 284 Configure SNMP trap destinations for an IP Telephony node 287 Configure Hle server ACCESS r i204 2 521 deegbibardiew debs acnes 290 CON IIS init eo arieadalbe dhe bebe esarnaweeened 292 Conie SNI Prasec ie rere ETE 294 Transmit node configuration from OTM 2 2 to the Voice Gateway Media Cards o serressisisscciaoeriesivia 295 Set the Leader O IP address cscs sc cache haweeetnge eeeeuedewe 296 Transmit node and card properties to Leader 0
261. al maintenance port connections at the same time IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 34 of 770 Description Capacity The Virtual TN VTN feature allows each Voice Gateway Media Card to support more IP Phones than there are physical bearer channels There are 24 bearer channels on each ITG P card and 8 or 32 channels on each Media Card Both cards support a 4 1 concentration of registered IP Phones IP Phones type 2002 and 2004 IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 to gateway channels The ITG P supports 96 registered IP Phones The Media Card supports 32 registered IIP Phones when the card has 8 channels or 128 registered IP Phones when the card has 32 channels The IP Phones require the services of the bearer channels only when they are busy on a call that requires a TDM circuit such as an IP Phone to digital telephone trunk voice mail conference When an IP Phone is idle or there is an IP to IP call no gateway channel is required When the total number of IP Phones that are registered or are attempting to register reaches the limit 96 on the ITG P 32 or 128 on the Media Card the Voice Gateway Media Card recognizes this and no more IP Phones are assigned to the card Each Voice Gateway Media Card is restricted to a total of 1200 call attempts per hour distributed across all the IP Phones associated with the card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 35 of 770 Me
262. aling IPL gt command Description Server disServices Causes the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling X Server to gracefully switch the registered resources to the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers located in the same node This command does not interrupt established calls disiAll Gracefully disables both the LTPS and voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card Gracefully disables the LTPS on the Signaling Server disiTPS Gracefully disables the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card Prevents new IP Phones registering on the card and all registered IP Phones are redirected to another card when idle disiVGW Gracefully disables voice gateway service enaAll Enables both the LTPS and voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card Enables the LTPS on the Signaling Server enlServices Enables all the Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers to accept registrations of resources enaTPS Enables the LTPS service enaVGW Enables the voice gateway service forcedisServices Forces all registered resources on the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server to re register with the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers in the node This command will interrupt established calls 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 615 of 770 Table 83 Graceful Disable commands Part 2 of 2 Signaling I
263. aller Password It also reset the uses and time parameters to zero 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 601 of 770 Voice Gateway commands Table 79 lists the Voice Gateway commands used on the Voice Gateway Media Card Table 79 Voice Gateway commands Signaling IPL gt command Description Server vgwPLLog Toggles gateway packet loss logging on and off vgwShow Displays information about the active non idle and equipped gateway channels Entering this command with the IP address of an IP Phone at the Command Line Interface of any node s Voice Gateway Media Card displays the identification of the card that has a gateway channel in use by the IP Phone This information is useful when there is a need to identify from which card to collect gateway statistics for example packet loss vgwShowALL Displays information about all gateway channels vgwShow The vgwShow command can be issued with no parameters or with the IP address of an IP Phone using one of the Voice Channels vgwShow x x x x where x x x x is the IP address of one of the IP Phones The IP address x x x x is the PUBLIC IP address of the IP Phone If there are multiple IP Phones using the same public IP address the output will be similar to the example shown in Figure 197 on page 602 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 602 of 770 Voice Gateway Med
264. already exists on the Call Server See Figure 135 on page 411 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 411 of 770 Figure 135 Duplicate node information Microsoft Internet Explorer WEB2504 Node files for this node already exist on the Call Server SEVERITY Minor If the node does not exist Element Manager tries to write the configuration to the Call Server If it succeeds a message indicating the import was successful appears See Figure 136 on page 412 If Element Manager cannot write the configuration to the Call Server a fail reason appears in the text area of the Import Node Files window If the import is successful information appears in the text area of the Node Import Files screen See Figure 136 on page 412 A message box also appears In the message box click the OK button to proceed to the Node Summary window The node information can then be viewed and if necessary edited If the node import is not successful an error message appears in the text box area IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 412 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 136 Import Node Files successfully imported node Import Node Files Management LAN ELAN IP address of the leader from where fav 11 216 135 to retrieve the node files 47 11 216 135 _Inport BOOTP TAB and CONFIG INI files f
265. also includes identifying information for the software and firmware files such as the date and time size and checksum 2 Locate the saved file and double click the zipped file The zipped file opens in a compression utility program and the uncompressed files are listed 3 Compare the latest software and firmware versions available from the Nortel Networks web site with the software and firmware version currently on the Voice Gateway Media Card a In the IP Telephony window double click the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card in the bottom of the window to open the Card Properties window Leave the defaults in the Maintenance tab of the Card Properties window Click the Configuration tab Verify that the S W version shows the latest recommended Voice Gateway Media Card software version 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 655 of 770 d Verify that the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 F W version is the latest recommended release of the IP Phone 2002 or IP Phone 2004 firmware Click OK 4 Ifthe card s software and firmware are not up to date transfer the downloaded files p2 sa and firmware file s from an Internet enabled PC to the OTM PC 5 Upgrade the software and or firmware if required Refer to Upgrading Voice Gateway Media Card software from the OTM 2 2 PC on page 311 and Upgrading the IP Phone firmware on page 316 End of Procedure
266. anager Page 393 of 770 The readme file also includes identifying information for the loadware and firmware files such as the date and time size and checksum 2 Compare the latest software and firmware versions available to the loadware and firmware versions currently installed on the Voice Gateway Media Card and the IP Phones 3 If more recent files are available download the SSE 4 00 xx Signaling Server CD Image file End of Procedure Upload the software and firmware files to the file server The next step is to upload the files from the Element Manager PC to the file server The Centralized file upload window enables software and firmware to be uploaded and stored on the Signaling Server These files can then be downloaded to the IP Phones and the Voice Gateway Media Cards using the firmware and software upgrade functions available from the Software Upgrade menu The Signaling Server can be used as a central distribution point to load and activate software firmware and patches To upload the files follow the step in Procedure 57 on page 394 Note For patches Element Manager does not need to upload to Signaling Server first The Signaling Server obtains the patch file from the Element Manager PC directly IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 394 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Procedure 57 Uploading software and firmware files 1 Click Software Upgrade in the navigati
267. anced Setup No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Menu 3 Ethernet Setup 1 General Setup 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Enter Menu Selection Menu 3 1 General Eth Number ernet Setup Input Filter Sets 2 Output Filter Sets Press ENTER to Confirm or Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP ESC to Cancel Ethernet Setup 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 745 of 770 DHCP Setup DHCP None Client IP Pool Starting Address N A Size of Client IP Pool N A Primary DNS Server N A Secondary DNS Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 47 177 16 254 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP 2B Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle Menu 12 Static Route Setup 1 DefaultGW 2s 38 4 Enter Menu Selection Number Menu 12 1 Edit IP Static Route Route 1 Route Name DefaultGW Active Yes Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 47 177 16 1 Metric 2 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 746 of 770 Private No Press ENT ER to Confirm or Appendix C RM356 Modem Router ESC to Cancel Menu 13 Default Dial in Setup Telco Options CLID Authen None PPP Options Recv Authen PAP Compression No Mutual Authen No PAP Login N A PAP Passw
268. and Meridian 1 Small System Planning and Engineering 553 3011 120 and Communication Server 1000S Planning and Engineering 553 3031 120 IP Phone registration on a CS 1000 system On a CS 1000 system the IP Phones register with the LTPS on the Signaling Server If a secondary Signaling Server exists the IP Phone registrations are split between the primary and secondary Signaling Servers to aid in load balancing In that case the IP Phone registrations alternate between the primary and secondary Signaling Servers IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 46 of 770 Description If the primary Signaling Server fails the secondary Signaling Server takes over if it exists and the IP Phones that were registered with the failed Signaling Server re register with the LTPS on the secondary Signaling Server If there is no secondary Signaling Server or the secondary Signaling Server fails the IP Phones register with the LTPS on the Voice Gateway Media Cards IMPORTANT Each Signaling Server supports the registration of up to 5000 IP Phones For more information on Signaling Server failure and redundancy see Communication Server 1000S Planning and Engineering 553 303 1 120 Communication Server 1000E Planning and Engineering 553 3041 120 and Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Virtual Terminal Manager The Virtual Terminal Manager VTM performs the following functions e arb
269. annels is reduced to 24 This is a limitation of the DSP software The unused channels are not registered therefore the Call Server software does not access them Minimum codecs The minimum number of codecs registered for DSPs is four e G 711 a law e G 711 mu law e T 38 e G 711 Clear Channel Maximum codecs The maximum number of codecs registered for DSPs is five e G 711 a law e G 711 mu law IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 186 of 770 Codecs e T 38 e G 711 Clear Channel e one of G 729AB G 729A or G 723 1 Example 1 A user configures four codecs 1 G711 a law codec with a 10 msec payload 2 G 729A codec with 50 msec payload 3 G 729AB codec with 30 msec payload 4 G 723 1 codec with a 30 msec payload The following six codecs are actually registered G 711 a law 10 msec G 711 mu law 10 msec G 729AB 30 msec G 729A 50 msec T 38 G 711 Clear Channel aA an A U N e The G 729AB codec is selected as it is the first in the order of preference of the BB codecs The G 723 1 codec does not get registered Example 2 A user configures three codecs 1 G 711 mu law codec with a 20 msec payload 2 G 729A codec with 30 msec payload 3 G 723 1 codec with a 30 msec payload 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 187 of 770 The following five codecs are actually registered 1 2 3 4 5 G 711 mu law 20 msec G 711 a law 20 msec G 729A 30 msec T 38
270. anonymous guest filename bootpDir bootpFile Example hostFilePut Transfers any file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to hostname the OTM PC username password directory path IPL gt hostFilePut ngals042 anonymous guest filename hostDir hostFile C CONFIG CONFIG1 INI ITGFileName Example omFilePut Sends the current Operational Measurements OM file to hostname the specified host username password directory path IPL gt OMFilePut ngals042 anonymous filename lhostDir omFile ITGFileName Example guest IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 594 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance IP configuration commands Table 73 Table 73 lists the IP configuration IPL gt commands IP Configuration commands IPL gt Command Description Signaling Server NVRIPSet Sets the IP address in NVRAM NVRGWSet Sets the default gateway address in NVRAM NVRSMSet Sets the subnet mask in NVRAM NVRIPShow Prints the values of the IP parameters that reside in NVRAM NVRClear Clear IP parameters in NVRAM nvramLeaderSet Sets the Leader bit in NVRAM nvramLeaderClr Clears the Leader bit in NVRAM but does not erase the IP parameters in NVRAM setLeader Sets a Lead
271. ansfer node configuration from Element Manager te the Voice Gateway Media Cards 0icc cicwdectseedes aces as Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone MOWA e rega dare prsdregdesQankvateresarens Configure Alarm Management to receive IP Line SNMP TAPS 1c cad g ose twat beri POSURE ee oe RETA ERTS Assemble and install an IP Phone 5 4 40 4 0 0ss00ceeeanes Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords Import node configuration from an existing node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 253 254 254 382 408 408 409 Contents Page 9 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration 000 413 Cs eee ee ee ree eee ee ee ere er ere eee 413 INGOHNCTON casio a erod aera epedeeny REER dee 414 IP Line feature administration 365 coal o caw bee eeeeae seeds eras 415 Password SCCM voi rr eit a ene ied HORST EEE eee rete 420 IP configuration Commands i 4csccaese cee seca si erento ntanes 441 TLAN configuration commands 00 00 e eee ee eee ee 44 Display the number ot DSPS sirreeriri ttikiei ie entre Siri 443 Display IP Telephony node properties os c0i0sarcveasees evaws 443 Display Voice Gateway Media Card parameters 445 Packer Gas ONO 3 cys dikes und eieds ees eraser eres 448 Transfer files using the CU 44 ceneacden stent iweeentw eter ds 449 Download the IP Line 4 0 error
272. ansferring the node information 1 Click the Save and Transfer button when all the node information is configured in the Edit window Clicking the Save and Transfer button saves and transfers the data to the Call Server The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens with the new node added See Figure 109 on page 369 Note 1 The Save and Transfer button can be clicked after each section is configured in the Edit window However each time the Save and Transfer button is clicked the Edit window closes and the Node Summary window is displayed To continue the node configuration click the Edit button to return to the Edit window Note 2 If the Cancel button is clicked all information that has been configured is discarded The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 369 of 770 Figure 109 Node added to Node Summary window la Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt NETWORKS Node Summary gt System Stati Pona New Node to Add v Configuration er pi Call Server Import Node Files gt IP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Node 450 Node IP 192 168 2 90 Transfer Status gt Support Tools gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 Logout gt Node 451 No
273. ansmit to selected cards Node Properties to Active Leader J Card properties to all cards in node Tl Card software Software location Browse F Intemet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware location Browse J SNMP rw Community String rm Transmit control izl Start transmit View last transmit Close Help 36 Click the Start transmit button Monitor the progress in the Transmit Control window 37 When the transmission is complete click the Close button 38 Verify that all the new Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node have a signaling link to the Call Server 39 Telnet to each Voice Gateway Media Card and log in 40 Atthe IPL gt command line enter the pbxLinkShow command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 476 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Alternatively observe the display on the card and ensure it is displaying FOOO 41 At this point verify the card software and firmware version Upgrade the software and the firmware if necessary using Procedure 34 on page 306 Procedure 35 on page 311 and Procedure 37 on page 316 However apply these procedures only to this card End of Procedure Delete a Voice Gateway Media Card from the node To delete a Voice Gateway Media Card from the node follow the steps in Procedure 73 To delete the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card from the node follow the steps in Procedure 74 on page 478 CAUTION
274. aracters long 7 characters long Feature Keys No 4 soft keys 6 soft keys soft labeling soft labeling 10 characters long 10 characters long Transducers Handset HD Headset HS Headset HS Handset HD Handset HD Handsfree HF Handsfree HF o Navigation keys Left and right Up down left and Up down left and right right IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 104 of 770 Features Table 21 Comparison of the P Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 Part 2 of 2 Feature IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 Voice codec support G 711 G729A G 711 G729A G 711 G729A G729AB G 723 1 G729AB G 723 1 G729AB G 723 1 Firmware download 3 port unmanaged Layer 2 switch for data and voice Automatic firmware Automatic firmware Automatic firmware version checking and version checking and version checking and download download download No Built in Built in Note Earlier models have an external switch Corporate Directory No Yes Yes access IP Phone Key Expansion Module 553 3001 365 Stan IP Line 4 0 supports the Nortel Networks IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM The IP Phone KEM is a hardware component that attaches to the Nortel Networks IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 and provides additional line appearances and feature keys Note The IP Phone KEM is not supported on the Nortel Networks IP Phone 2001 Up to two IP Phone KEMs can be attached to an I
275. are then placed to retain the ferrites in the correct position This applies to Small Systems and Large Systems Figure 46 ITG EMC Shielding Kit Deployment ITG Card Adapter ELAN TLAN Serial maintenance cable ELAN vA cable ToLAn hub p5 cable tie snap on ferrite EMC Kit Deployment Follow the steps in Procedure 15 on page 228 to install the ITG EMC shielding kit NTVQ83AA on the ELAN and TLAN network interface cables IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 228 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Procedure 15 Installing the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter onto the Media Card 1 Install the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter into the card connector 1 2 3 or 4 where the Media Card is located 2 Connect a shielded Cat 5 cable from the customer s TLAN switch equipment to the port labeled TLAN 3 Connect a shielded Category 5 cable from the customer s ELAN hub or switch equipment to the port labeled ELAN 4 Install the NTAG81CA serial cable into the faceplate Maintenance port End of Procedure Initial configuration of IP Line 4 0 data Before beginning the configuration Ensure the system is running CS 1000 Release 4 0 software Verify the License system limit in LD 22 The License system limit must have sufficient unused units to support the number of IP Phones
276. ary window opens In the Node Summary window click the Edit button of the IP Telephony node to which the converted cards will be added as Followers The Edit window opens In the Edit window click the Add button in the Card field The card properties fields are displayed Enter the data for the following fields e card ELAN IP address e ELAN MAC address e card TLAN IP address e card TLAN gateway IP address e card TN e select the card processor type ITG P or Media Card e enable the IP Phone LTPS 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 699 of 770 The following is an example of the card properties data Table 94 Example of card properties data ELAN IP address ELAN MAC address TLAN IP address TLAN gateway IP address Card Processor Type System location 7 Repeat the previous step for each card that is to be added to the node 8 When the card property data has been entered for all the cards click the Save and Transfer button This action saves the configuration changes to the Call Server and transfers the changes to the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node The BOOTP and CONFIG INI files are saved on the Call Server and transferred to the Signaling Server Leader The BOOTP table is updated so that the converted cards can receive their IP address configuration The Transfer Progress window opens Note t might be necessary to
277. ases on the Nortel Networks Customer Support web site follow the steps in Procedure 56 Procedure 56 Downloading loadware and firmware from the Nortel Networks web site 1 Check the Nortel Networks Customer Support web site for the latest IP Line 4 0 software and IP Phone firmware releases See Appendix F Download IP Line 4 0 files from Nortel Networks web site on page 763 Note The IP Line 4 0 software and IP Phone firmware files are contained in the SSE 4 00 xx Signaling Server CD Image file in the CS 1000 product list on the Nortel Networks web site The file contains e The IPL400xx p2 and IPL400xx sa software files The IPL400xx p2 file is the IP Line application for the ITG P 24 port card and the IPL400xx sa is the IP Line application for the Media Card e The 0602Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2004 0603Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2002 and 0604Dnn BIN Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware files For example a firmware version can be labelled 0602B38 or 0603B38 This means IP Phone firmware version 1 38 The 02 represents the IP Phone 2004 and 03 is the IP Phone 2002 The letter B represents the version number 1 38 represents the release number 38 e A readme txt file The readme txt file explains important considerations for installing the new loadware and firmware versions 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element M
278. asks Element Manager Element Manager is a web server that provides a GUI using the Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or later web browser Element Manager is used to Telnet to the card install and upgrade software and firmware configure alarm event reporting view and update card property and configuration data add new cards to a node schedule reports and other related tasks IPL gt Command Line Interface CLI Use the CLI to display card and node status change passwords check software versions view channel states and other card information The CLI is also used for expert level support and debug The prompt for the CLI on the Voice Gateway Media Card is IPL gt Access the CLI through a direct serial connection to the I O panel serial port the Maint Port on the faceplate or through a Telnet session Use a VT 100 terminal emulation program set to 9600 baud 8 bits no parity one stop bit 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 415 of 770 e Overlays Use the same LDs commands and messages for the Voice Gateway Media Card as for any other line card IP Line feature administration Corporate Directory LD 11 accepts Class of Service CLS CRPA CRPD for IP Phones Table 58 Corporate Directory LD 11 configuration Response Description NEW CHG Add new data or change existing data i2002 Enter terminal type i2004 i2050 Is Enter IP Phone TN CRPA CRPD Enable Disable the Corporate
279. assword protection is turned off If a default password has been defined for the user then the user can enable or disable password protection and change the password The changed password is updated on the Call Server and can be viewed in LD 20 Other applications that use this password such as Virtual Office and Remote Call Forward are affected by the password change Initial password When an IP Phone first registers with the system by default the password protection is turned off SCPW must be initially configured for each user If no SCPW has been defined password protection for the IP Phone cannot be enabled The prompt DFLT_SCPW in LD 15 specifies that a default SCPW is assigned to an IP Phone user when an IP Phone is added or changed in LD 11 See Table 38 Table 38 LD 15 Enable a default SCPW Part 1 of 2 Response Description Change existing data Change Flexible Feature Code parameters Customer number Range for Large System and CS 1000E system Range for CS 1000M Small System Meridian 1 Small System CS 1000S system Media Gateway 1000B and Media Gateway 1000T IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 170 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Table 38 LD 15 Enable a default SCPW Part 2 of 2 Response Description FFCS Change Flexible Feature Code end of dialing indicator ADLD Auto Dial Delay in seconds DFLT_SCPW Default Station Control Password NO
280. at of PRT IPDN 47 0 0 A sample of IP Phones has been configured in the following manner IP Address 47 11 216 138 47 11 216 140 47 11 215 39 47 11 215 38 47 11 215 41 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 608 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Example 1 To print the information on the IP Phones whose IP address starts with 47 11 215 enter the following gt prt ipdn 47 11 215 The following output is printed IP 47 11 215 38 CUST 01 TN 063 00 TYPE i2004 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4100 I2004_Cust_1 VLN63_00 IP 47 11 215 39 CUST 00 TN 061 00 TYPE i2004 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4000 I2004 _Cust_0 VLN61_00 IP 47 11 215 41 CUST 01 TN 063 01 TYPE i2001 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4101 I2001_Cust_1 VLN63_01 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 609 of 770 Example 2 Alternatively to print the information on the IP Phones whose IP address starts with 47 11 215 enter the following gt prt ipdn 47 11 215 0 The following output is printed IP 47 11 215 38 CUST 01 TN 063 00 TYPE i2004 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4100 I2004 _Cust_1 VLN63_00 IP 47 11 215 39 CUST 00 TN 061 00 TYPE i2004 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4000 I2004 _Cust_0 VLN61_00 IP 47 11 215 41 CUST 01 TN 063 01 TYPE i2001 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4101 I2001_Cust_1 VLN63_01 IP Line D
281. ata as well as the BOOTP TAB and CONFIG _INI files for each node configured in the system These files are stored on the Call Server for the IP Telephony nodes configured in the system This Backup function can also be performed on the Call Server by entering the EDD CLI command using LD 43 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 517 of 770 During the Backup function the BOOTP TAB and CONFIG INI files of all registered nodes are copied so that they can be restored in case of system failure Follow the steps in Procedure 85 to back up the Call Server Procedure 85 Backing up the Call Server data 1 Click System Utility gt Call Server in the navigation tree See Figure 161 Figure 161 System Utility gt Call Server NORTEL eee KS Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt Call Server System Utility V System Status Backup gt call Server gt Restore gt IP Telephony Date amp Time v Configuration gt Call Server ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan V Software Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card LW op Telephone FW File Upload gt Patching V System Utility gt Call Server 1p Telephony gt Administration gt Support Tools Logout 2 Click Backup The Call Server Backup window opens See Figure 162 on page 518 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 518 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Mana
282. ate messages are ignored e loss of contact detection 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 49 of 770 When a data sequence is packetized and sent from source A to receiver B RUDP adds a number to each packet header to indicate its order in the sequence e If the packet is successfully transmitted to B B sends back an ACK to A acknowledging that the packet has been received e If A receives no message within a configured time it retransmits the packet e If B receives a packet without having first received its predecessor it discards the packet and all subsequent packets and a NAK no acknowledge message which includes the number of the missed packet is sent to A A retransmits the missed packet and continues UNIStim The Unified Network IP Stimulus protocol UNIStim is the single point of contact between the various server components and the IP Phone UNIStim is the stimulus based protocol used for communication between an IP Phone and an LTPS on the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server ELAN TCP transport Although TCP is used for the signaling protocol between the Call Server and the Voice Gateway Media Card RUDP remains for the Keep Alive mechanism for the link This means RUDP messages are exchanged to maintain the link status between the Call Server and the Voice Gateway Media Card There is no change to UNIStim signaling IP Phones continue to use the RUDP transport protoco
283. ate on the card is labeled J2 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 38 of 770 Description ITG P 24 port card controls indicators and connectors Figure 3 shows the ITG P 24 port card faceplate components Figure 3 ITG P 24 port card faceplate Not used ITG P LED card status O ITG P Reset Button 8 Reset MAC Address label NWK motherboard and daughterboard addresses Status O O t TLAN Ethernet Activity LED s lt _ PC Card Slot Drive A i E lt q _ _ _ Four character LED based 5 Matrix Maintenance Display NTVQ55AA RS 232 ______ Maint Maintenance Port Pog Inboard Type III PCMCIA slot ATA Drive B i Onboard Flash Drive C 553 9150 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 39 of 770 Faceplate components The components on the faceplate of the ITG P 24 port line card are described in the following sections NWK The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9 pin sub miniature D type connector The connector is not used for the IP Line 4 0 application WARNING The NWK connector looks like a 9 pin serial connector Do not connect a serial cable or any other cable to it If a cable is connected to the NWK connector the TLAN is disabled ITG P LED card status The red status faceplate LED indicates the enabled disabled status of the 24 card ports The LED is on red durin
284. ated documentation such as Readme First documents can be downloaded from the Nortel Networks web site Required packages The IP Phones require the software packages listed in Table 4 Table 4 Required packages Package Package number M2000 Digital Sets DSET Aries Digital Sets ARIE Note To configure IP Line 4 0 in groups 5 7 on Option 81C CP PII or CS 1000M MG the Fiber Network FIBN software package 365 is required IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 28 of 770 Description IP Line package components lists CS 1000 and Meridian 1 package components Table 5 lists the IP Line 4 0 package components for CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems Table 5 IP Line 4 0 Media Card 32 port line card package components Part 1 of 2 Media Card 32 port IP Line 4 0 Voice Gateway Systems Package includes NTDU41DB the following e Media Card 32 port assembly NTVQ01BB e IP Line 4 0 Voice Gateway CompactFlash NTM403AB e ITG EMC Shielding Kit NTVQ83AA e Readme First Document e Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adaptor e PC Maintenance cable NTAG81CA e IP Line 4 0 NTP CD ROM e TG specific Meridian 1 Backplane 50 pin I O Panel Filter Connector NTCW84JA see Note 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 29 of 770 Table 5 IP Line 4 0 Media Card 32 port line card package components Part 2 of 2 IP Line 4 0 Voice Gateway NTP CD ROM includes NTDW81AF IP Li
285. ation If an IP Phone cannot be installed because the prompt for the node ID or TN does not display follow the steps in Procedure 98 Procedure 98 Troubleshooting an IP Phone installation 1 Log into one Voice Gateway Media Card in the node 2 Type the nodePwdShow command at the IPL gt prompt 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 637 of 770 3 If the administrative password is enabled PwdEna Yes and there is a null zero length password the Pwd field is blank then the IP Phone cannot be installed on that Voice Gateway Media Card Nodel PwdEn Pwd TmpPw Uses Timeout 123 Yes 4 Use the nodePwdSet password command to set the administrative password and to enable IP Phones to be installed Ensure the password parameter is included End of Procedure Maintenance telephone An IP Phone functions as a maintenance telephone when the CLS is defined as MTA Maintenance Telephone Allowed in the Multi line Telephone Administration program LD 11 A maintenance telephone enables commands to be sent to the system however only a subset of the commands that can be entered from a system terminal can be used To access the system using the maintenance telephone a Special Service Prefix SPRE code defined in the Customer Data Block is entered and followed by 91 To enter commands press the keys that correspond to the letters and numbers of the command for example to en
286. ation N RTEL 3 NETWORKS System Status gt Call Server ip Telephony Configuration Network Numbering Plan Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information m Total Node IP O elements index ELAN IP Type TN ELAN Total gt 7 Node Noge IP elements 1 D 400 192 168 2100 Total gt 3 Node Node IP elements 1 1D 450 192 168 2 90 gt Ni Total Node Node IP P m 441 192 168 281 Slements Click buttons to invoke a command 4 Click the OM RPT button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The View OM File window opens See Figure 159 on page 509 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 509 of 770 Figure 159 System Status gt IP Telephony gt IP Telephony Information gt View OM File Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt View OM FileType Signaling Server ELAN IP 192 168 1 101 View OM File a o fuiom OMREPORT 183 SAT JUL 03 00 00 00 2004 om OMREPORT 184 SUN JUL 04 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 185 MON JUL 05 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 186 TUE JUL 06 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 187 WED JUL 07 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 188 THU JUL 08 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 189 FRI JUL 09 00 00 00 2004 uiom OMREPORT 190 FRI JUL 09 11 00 00 2004 AOA AA ALA collection time 7 2 2004 1 00 izOO04Reg Att 0 izO
287. attempting to download new software onto the card Table 64 ITG P 24 port line card faceplate maintenance display codes Part 1 of 2 Initialization IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 570 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 64 ITG P 24 port line card faceplate maintenance display codes Part 2 of 2 T 12 Programming PCI FPGA Testing EEPROM o Testing EEPROM o T 18 F 18 Booting processor waiting for response with self test information T F Waiting for application start up messages from processor T 20 CardLAN enabled transmitting BootP requests If this display persists then the ITG P 24 port line card is running in BIOS ROM mode due to card software failure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 571 of 770 If a test fails on the Media Card F XX appears on the Hex display for three seconds after T 13 message Testing SEEPROM For example if the 8051 co processor test failed F 05 is displayed on the Media Card faceplate If more that one test fails the message indicates the first failure Table 65 Media Card faceplate maintenance display codes Part 1 of 2 response with selftest information IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 572 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 65 Media Card faceplate maintenance display codes Part 2 of 2 T 20 F 20 To o _ for application star
288. ault is G 711 mu law e Only the jitter buffer can be changed for the G 711 Clear Channel codec Up to three additional codecs can be optionally selected G 729A G 729AB and or G 723 1 codecs e If the G 729A or G 729AB codec are selected the payload and jitter buffer can be changed The payload defaults are the maximum supported payload e Ifthe G 723 1 codec is selected only the jitter buffer can be changed The payload size of 30 msec is the only supported payload Note The supported G 723 1 codec has bit rates of 5 3 Kbps and 6 3 Kbps 4 Expand the selected Codec See Figure 101 Figure 101 Selected Codec Codec Name G711 Voice payload size msecs frame 20 Voice playout jitter buffer nominal delay 40 Changing the value above may cause automatic adjustment Voice playout jitter buffer maximum delay Changing the value above may cause automatic adjustment VAD mE Element Manager performs some jitter buffer adjustments on the browser side The following are the jitter buffer adjustment that are made in Element Manager e A change of payload resets the Nominal Voice Playout NVP and Maximum Voice Playout MVP values to the default recommended values IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 354 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager NVP 2 payload MVP NVP 2 payload e A change of NVP value changes the MVP value to the default MVP NVP 2
289. ayer 2 or Layer 3 switch port to the RJ 45 port labeled TLAN Connect a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable from the customer s ELAN Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch port to the RJ 45 port labeled ELAN Install the NTAG81CA serial cable into the faceplate Maintenance port This connection is used to configure the IP address for Leader O If required use the NTAG81BA maintenance extender cable Note Alternatively for a permanent connection to the maintenance port use the DB9 female connector on the NTMF94BA breakout cable to connect a modem using a null modem or directly to a local TTY terminal WARNING The serial maintenance ports presented at the faceplate and at the backplane are identical Do not connect a terminal to both access points simultaneously This results in incorrect and unpredictable operation of the Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 225 of 770 Note 1 The switch LEDs and the faceplate link LEDs light when the card is connected to the WAN LAN through the TLAN network interface Note 2 Refer to Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 for more information about engineering and connecting the LAN WAN End of Procedure Install the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter The Media Card can support a single connector solution for access to the TLAN and ELAN network interfaces This connector see Fi
290. ays IP address information X serialNumShow Displays card serial number This command displays the same Voice Gateway Media Card serial number that is displayed in the LD 32 IDC command firmwareVersionShow Displays firmware version number X numChannelsShow Displays number of available channels swVersionShow Displays software version X logFileOn Turns on error logging to the syslog file logFileOff Turns off error logging to the syslog file logShow Displays information about the current logging configuration Indicates whether logging is on or off logConsoleOn Turns on error logging to the console 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 71 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance General purpose commands Part 4 of 4 IPL gt Command Description Page 589 of 770 Signaling Server logConsoleOff Turns off error logging to the console isetShow Displays general information for all registered IP Phones For example the command displays the IP address of the IP Phone the VTN that the IP Phone is associated with indicates the type of IP Phone such as IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 or IP Softphone 2050 and provides the type of registration and the new registration status isetShowByTN Displays general information about all registered IP Phones sorted by TN isetShowByIP Displays general information about all registered IP Phones sorted b
291. be updated with the Watchdog reset message However the LTPS sends a soft reset message to the IP Phone redirecting it to the Connect Server The disabled LTPS does not accept new registrations so the IP Phone must register with another LTPS in the node Eventually as all of the IP Phones on the LTPS become idle they are registered with other LTPSs The Voice Gateway Media Card can then be restarted with no impact to any users End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 490 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Restart all Voice Gateway Media Cards All Voice Gateway Media Cards cards have to be restarted if there has been a change to one of the following e node IP address these changes affect the whole node and as a result all cards must be restarted e subnet of either the TLAN or ELAN by changing the subnet mask or the subnet fields of the IP address if the Management ELAN IP address of Leader 0 has changed all cards have to be restarted Even though this is a change to a single card this change affects all cards as OTM uses this address to transmit properties to the node Follow the steps in Procedure 77 to restart all the Voice Gateway Media Cards Procedure 77 Restarting all the Voice Gateway Media Cards 1 Telnet to the card from OTM 2 Use the setLeader command to set the new IP address Leader 0 uses this new IP address when it reboots 3 Reboot the Leader 0 using t
292. ble and install an IP Phone refer to ZP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password The IPL gt CLI is password protected for Telnet access and access to the local maintenance port The same user name and password also protects FTP access to the Voice Gateway Media Card The IPL gt CLI has a default user name of itgadmin and a default password of itgadmin Refer to IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password on page 421 and Node password synchronization on page 423 for more detailed information on the passwords Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords The IP Phone Installer Password protection required for changing the TN on the IP Phone controls registration with a virtual line TN on the Call Server See page 425 for more information about the IP Phone Install Passwords To enable and set the administrative IP Phone Installer Password see Procedure 63 on page 435 If needed enable and configure a temporary IP Phone Installer Password See Procedure 64 on page 438 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 329 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Contents This section contains information on the following topics Eole aE E E on 6c EEE ee dese eee eeaaueea s TLAC ETET 330 Upgrade the ITG P 24 port line cards to IP Line 4 0 331 Configure IP Line 4 0 data using Element Manager 331 Inter
293. boot and then enable each card before performing the 8051 XA firmware upgrade on the next card ITG P 1 Access the www nortelnetworks com website firmware version is less than 5 7 2 Select Support gt Software Downloads gt Product Family gt CS 1000 gt IP Line 3 Download the ITG Pentium Rel 5 7 Firmware Upgrade and Instruction document 4 Download ITG Pentium Release 5 7 Firmware Follow the procedures in the ITG Pentium Rel 5 7 Firmware Upgrade and Instruction document to upgrade the 8051XA firmware and reboot the ITG P card Note Disable the IP Trunk cards gracefully one by one Upgrade the firmware reboot and then enable each card before performing the 8051 XA firmware upgrade on the next card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 697 of 770 9 If part of the IP trunk node is being retained then the IP Trunk cards that are being converted must be deleted from the existing IP Trunk node in OTM The IP Trunk node properties must be transmitted from OTM to the Leader of the IP Trunk node If none of the IP Trunk node is being retained delete the node in OTM 2 2 End of Procedure Add the converted cards to an IP Telephony node Before adding the converted cards to an IP Telephony node ensure the following the Signaling Server is functioning properly the ELAN and TLAN connections are properly configured the Signal
294. by entering the following command PRT ELNK Enter the following command Update DBS Go to LD 137 Check the status of the Ethernet interface by entering the command STAT ENLK If the ELNK is disabled enable it by entering ENL ELNK End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 230 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Configure VoIP bandwidth management zones LD 117 Up to 256 zones can be defined in LD 117 The Call Server uses the zones for VoIP bandwidth management For more information see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 The term Intrazone means within the same zone Interzone means between two different zones Table 49 on page 231 lists the zone parameters as follows pl total bandwidth Kbps available for Intrazone calls p2 defines the codec for Intrazone calls that is preserve voice quality or preserve bandwidth BQ provides the best voice quality but uses the most bandwidth BB uses the least amount of bandwidth but reduces voice quality p3 total bandwidth available for Interzone calls p4 preferred strategy for the choice of the codec for Interzone calls p5 zone resource type The type is either shared or private LD 117 also includes the DIS and ENL commands to disable or enable a zone When a zone is created its default state is enabled CAUTION Zone 0 must be configured in LD 117 first before oth
295. c is 0 Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500 88686 packets received 15027 packets sent 78030 multicast packets received 5044 multicast packets sent 0 input errors 0 output errors 0 collisions 0 dropped 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 685 of 770 IPInfoShow Maintenance Interface ixpMacl Maintenance IP address 47 104 39 115 Maintenance subnet mask 255 255 255 128 Voice Interface ixpMac0 Voice IP address 47 104 39 243 Voice subnet mask 255 255 255 128 ROUTE NET TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use 0 0 0 0 47 104 39 129 3 0 675 47 104 39 0 47 104 39 115 101 0 0 47 104 39 128 47 104 39 243 101 0 0 ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 5 0 0 ipstatShow total 128099 badsum 0 tooshort 0 toosmall 0 badhlien 0 badlen 0 infragments 0 fragdropped 0 fragtimeout 0 forward 0 cantforward 486 redirectsent 0 unknownprotocol 0 nobuffers 0 reassembled 0 outfragments 0 noroute 0 Interface ixpMac0 ixpMacl ixpMac0 Interface loU IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 686 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager isetShow Set Information No sets registered itgCardShow Index 2 Type EXUT Role Follower Node s 541 Leader IP s 47 11 151 145 Card IP s 47 11 151 148 Card TN Slot 10 Card State ENBL Uptime 10 days 3 hou
296. c or D zz z Telephone function key assignments The following key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone Note that KEY is prompted until just a carriage return lt CR gt is entered Where xx key number For IP Phone 2002 where XX 0 31 when KEM 0 xx 0 55 when KEM 1 xx 0 79 when KEM 2 For IP Phone 2004 where Xx 0 31 when KEM 0 xx 0 79 when KEM 1 Xx 0 79 when KEM 2 Note Type xx NUL to remove a key function or feature aaa key name or function yyyy additional information required for the key 2z Z additional information required for the key aaa The cccc or D entry deals specifically with the Calling Line Identification feature where cccc CLID table entry of 0 N where N the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1 You can enter a CLID table entry if aaa ACD HOT d HOT L MCN MCR PVN PVR SCN or SCR D the character D When the character D is entered the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up to find a DN key with a CLID table entry The CLID associated with the found DN key will then be used IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 248 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 3 of 4 Response Description Note The position of the cccc or D field varies depending on the key name or functi
297. cation of the firmware files m File Server Parameters File Server IP a7 46 121 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 8 User ID Password Location of the firmware files home PLine fimware Cancel Apply Help 2 Under File Server Parameters specify the parameters needed to connect to the file server a File Server IP Enter the IP address of the file server b Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the file server c User ID Enter the user ID that is required to access the file server d Password Enter the password that is required to access the file server e Location of the firmware files Enter the path for the location of the firmware files See page 132 for the default location of firmware files for the system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 292 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 3 Click Apply End of Procedure Configure QoS Configure QoS by enabling 802 1Q and NAT support configuring DiffServ CodePoint DSCP settings and configuring OM QoS thresholds Procedure 30 Enabling 802 1Q and configuring DSCP settings 1 Click the QoS tab See Figure 76 Figure 76 New Node QoS tab xi General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Securty File Server QoS SNTP For 802 10 support specify the priority bits value 802 1 For NAT support specify the time interval of the keepalive message that is sent in
298. ce and the Gatekeeper Network Wide Virtual Office is limited to a single Gatekeeper zone As long as Virtual Offices share the same Gatekeeper a Virtual Office login can redirect an IP Phone to any of the systems Requirements A Signaling Server or stand alone gatekeeper is required in the network Supported IP Phones Virtual Office is supported for the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 the IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 An IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050 users can log in from an IP Phone 2002 under certain conditions See Set type checking and blocking on page 140 Table 33 shows which users can log in to particular IP Phones Virtual Office login from various IP Phones Part 1 of 2 IP Phone User An IP Phone 2001 user An IP Phone 2002 user Virtual Office login can Virtual Office log in from another IP Phone 2001 an IP Phone 2002 an IP Phone 2004 an IP Softphone 2050 and an MVC 2050 can Virtual Office log in from another IP Phone 2002 an IP Phone 2004 an IP Softphone 2050 and an MVC 2050 can log in under certain conditions when the user attempts a Virtual Office login from an IP Phone 2001 See Set type checking and blocking on page 140 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 125 of 770 Table 33 Virtual Office login from various IP Phones Part 2 of 2 IP Phone User Virtual Office login An IP Phone 2004 can Virtual
299. cedure Transmit node and card properties to Leader 0 To transmit the node and card properties to Leader 0 follow the steps in Procedure 32 CAUTION OTM 2 2 does not support transmitting node and or card properties to a node or any of the card within the node which resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 32 Transmitting node and card properties to Leader 0 1 Log into LD 32 on the system Disable the card in order to transmit the card properties 2 Open OTM From the OTM Navigator window click on the Services folder to expand the menu Double click on IP Line 4 0 The IP Telephony Gateway IP Line 4 0 window opens 3 Fromthe list of IP Telephony nodes in the upper part of the window select the node to which configuration data is to be transmitted 4 Select the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window appears See Figure 78 on page 299 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 299 of 770 Figure 78 Transmit Options dialog box Transmit Options x This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards and or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware m Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Transmit to selected cards Node Properties to Active Leader I Card properties to all cards in node
300. cessary to enable OTM 2 2 to transmit the IP Line 4 0 application to the trunk cards that are to be converted Before you begin Before beginning the conversion procedure ensure that all IP Trunk 3 0 cards have received their IP address configuration data from the Active Leader Leader 0 or Leader 1 and are functioning in the role of Active Leader Backup Leader or Follower Convert the IP Trunk cards Follow the steps in Procedure 112 on page 695 to convert the IP Trunk cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 695 of 770 Procedure 112 Converting IP Trunk card to Voice Gateway Media Cards 1 Download the CS 1000 Release 4 0 IP Line 4 0 software IPL400xx p2 and IPL400xx sa from the Nortel Networks Software Download web page to the OTM Server Alternatively place the Signaling Server Installation CD in the drive of the OTM Server or use FTP to obtain the IP Line 4 0 software from the Signaling Server Use the OTM 2 2 ITG ISDN Trunk service to select the node or to select all cards in the node of the same host type Media Card or ITG P Right click and select Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit Click the appropriate radio buttons for selected node or selected cards and for the card software Click Browse and locate the IP Line 4 0 loadware file for the appropriate card type Media Card or ITG P Click Open gt Star
301. ck the Edit button associated with the node containing the card to be replaced The Edit window opens Expand the Cards section Select the Voice Gateway Media Card from the list of cards in the node See Figure 207 on page 670 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 673 of 770 Figure 208 Cards Y cards ga Card 207 179 153 109 Properties Role Leader Management LAN ELAN IP address 207 179 153 109 Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 60 38 bd 56 66 Voice LAN TLAN IP address 92168 2538 Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address f92168 2531 Hostname Card TN Card processor type Pentium Card 7 H323 ID Enable set TPS ra System name Test Lab System location System contact Card 207 179 153 111 Properties 15 Change the Management LAN ELAN MAC address field to the MAC address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The MAC address is the Motherboard Ethernet address labeled on the faceplate of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card 16 Follow the steps in Procedure 58 on page 396 to download the latest software to the Voice Gateway Media Card 17 Follow the steps in Procedure 59 on page 400 to reboot the card and run the new software 18 Follow the steps in Procedure 60 on page 401 to update the card s firmware End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 674 of 770 Voice Gateway Me
302. cked e Percent average inter intra zone bandwidth used e Percent maximum inter intra zone bandwidth used e Total inter intra zone bandwidth threshold exceeded count The counters are reset after the data is printed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 113 of 770 The Total inter intra zone bandwidth threshold exceeded count prints the number of times a user configured bandwidth threshold was exceeded for the zone during the collection period LD 2 commands that are related to setting the system threshold are used with a value defined for the bandwidth threshold Table 27 System threshold commands Command Description TTHS TH tv Prints the current system thresholds STHS TH tv TV Sets the system thresholds Note 1 ATH value of 5 is used for the zone bandwidth threshold Note 2 The system thresholds TV value is the percentage of the zone s maximum bandwidth The range values are 000 999 where 000 corresponds to 00 0 and 999 corresponds to 99 9 The default is 90 0 The following examples first set the system bandwidth to 75 and then print the actual value STHS 5 750 TTHS 5 Table 28 describes the intrazone IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 output data Table 28 IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 intrazone data output Part 1 of 2 number of the zone cmi intrazone calls made successful cbi intrazone calls blocked ae intrazone peak bandwidth IP Line D
303. cription Installation and Operation Page 102 of 770 Features Table 20 STAT SERV response fields and description Part 3 of 3 VTRK Values are e reg how many VTRK channels are configured on the element e busy how many VTRK channels are active busy on the element Signaling Server capacity IP Phone support The IP Line 4 0 application supports the following IP Phones e IP Phone 2001 e IP Phone 2002 e IP Phone 2004 e IP Softphone 2050 e Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 For detailed information about IP Phones see the following guides e IP Phone 2001 User Guide e IP Phone 2002 User Guide e IP Phone 2004 User Guide e Nortel Networks IP Softphone 2050 User Guide e IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 103 of 770 Table 21 shows a comparison of the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 Table 21 Comparison of the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 Display size and 1 line display 1 line display 3 line display f t pima 24 characters 24 characters 24 characters on each line Information Line 1 line 24 characters 1 line 24 characters 3 lines 24 characters on each line Dedicated Data Time field Keys Soft Keys 4 soft keys 4 soft keys 4 soft keys soft labeling soft labeling soft labeling 6 characters long 6 ch
304. cription Installation and Operation Page 678 of 770 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager e rudpShow e umsPolicyShow e ping e nodePwdSet e nodeTempPwdSet e isetResetAll e umsUpgradeAll e vgwShowAll IPstatShow isetInfoShow isetResetAll isetReset isetShow itgCardShow loadBalance nodePwdDisable nodePwdEnable nodePwdSet nodePwdShow nodeTempPwdClear nodeTempPwdSet pbxLinkShow ping routeShow rping RTPStatShow rTraceRoute rudpShow servicesStatusShow SIPgwShow SIPgwShowch SIPgwShownum umsPolicyShow umsUpgradeAll virkShow Refer to IP Line CLI commands on page 585 for descriptions of these commands To access these commands in Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 111 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 679 of 770 Procedure 111 Accessing the CLI commands from Element Manager 1 Select System Status and then IP Telephony from the navigation tree The IP Telephony Information window opens 2 Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card 3 Click the GEN CMD button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The General Commands window opens See Figure 210 on page 680 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 680 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Figure 210 System Status gt IP Telephony gt GEN CMD button gt General Commands
305. crosoft Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or later Element Manager is not supported on the Netscape Navigator browser The PC should be a PIII with a 500 MHz processor at minimum IMPORTANT Internet Explorer caching interferes with the Element Manager application in that users cannot see real time changes as they occur For this reason Internet Explorer caching must be turned off Follow the steps outlined in Procedure 39 on page 333 to prevent caching of web pages by Internet Explorer 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 333 of 770 Procedure 39 Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer 1 Launch Internet Explorer 2 Click Tools gt Internet Options The Internet Options window opens See Figure 88 Figure 88 Internet Explorer Internet Options Internet Options IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 334 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 3 On the General tab under the Temporary Internet files section click the Settings button The Settings window opens See Figure 89 Figure 89 Temporary Internet files Settings window Settings A Check for newer versions of stored pages ci E Every time you start Internet Explorer C Automatically C Never m Temporary Internet files folder Current location C Documents and Settings nibovd Local Settings Temporary Internet Files Amount of d
306. ction for the procedure to replace a Voice Gateway Media Card Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card on page 668 End of Procedure Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node To add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node follow the steps in Procedure 88 Procedure 88 Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node 1 2 3 Figure 167 Cards Add button gt canis Choose a card slot for the new card Note the TN Configure IPTN in LD 14 at the Call Server Install the I O cables for connection to the ELAN and TLAN subnets on the selected card slot Click Configuration in the navigation tree In the Configuration menu click IP Telephony The Node Summary window opens Click the Edit button for the node that is receiving the new Voice Gateway Media Card The Edit window opens Click the Add button to the right of the Cards section See Figure 167 Add IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 524 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 8 Observe that the Cards section expands See Figure 168 Figure 168 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Add Card 9 gt SIP CD Services d Cards Card 207 179 153 109 Properties Card 207 179 153 111 Properties v Card 0 0 0 0 Properties Remove Role Unknown Management LAN ELAN IP address pooo Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Voice LAN TLAN IP address pooo n e Voice LAN TLAN gat
307. curs the first time and sets the duration to expire by the end of the weekend The password access automatically ends before Monday morning or sooner if the number of uses expires e A telecommuter needs to install an IP Phone The technician provides the temporary password that expires the next day or after two uses When the IP Phone Installer Password protection is enabled the Set TN is not displayed as part of the Set Info sub menu of the Telephone Option menu The IP Phone s TN can be retrieved on the core CPU through the LD 20 PRT DNB and LD 32 IDU or LD 80 TRAC or PDT gt rlmShow It can also be found on the Voice Gateway Media Card through IPL gt isetShowByIP IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 428 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Registration screens with TN password feature The following screens shows the existing TN entry screen that appears when the IP Phone registers e Figure 137 displays the screen on the IP Phone 2004 if password protection is disabled or not configured e Figure 138 on page 429 displays the screen on the IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2001 if password protection is disabled or not configured Figure 137 IP Phone 2004 registration with no password checking BKSpace Clear Cancel 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 429 of 770 Figure 138 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2001 registration with no password checking BKSpace Cance
308. d 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 631 of 770 Maintenance audit CLI commands There are five CLI commands that support the maintenance audit function as outlined in Table 89 Table 89 Maintenance audit commands Part 1 of 2 Command Description auditShow Displays the following information e whether a card reboot is enabled e the time a card reboot will occur if a non critical task is found suspended e alist of all tasks being monitored and their designation critical or non critical Example IPL gt auditShow Reboot when detect a suspended task Disabled Critical Task tTPS tVTM tSET tVTI tUMS tUMC tRDP tPBX tVGW tRTP tRTCP tELC baseMMintTask tA07 tShell tNetTask tExcTask tTelnetd Non Critical Task tTest auditHistoryShow Displays the contents of the audit his file auditRebootSet 0 1 Globally disables the card reboot from this audit task By default this is set to 1 If it is set to 0 no card reboot occurs when a suspended task is found for critical or non critical tasks The debug information is dumped however recovery requires a manual reset of the card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 632 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 89 Maintenance audit commands Part 2 of 2 Command Description auditRebootTimeSet timeString Sets the reset time for non critical tasks to the value defined by the timeString para
309. d KeyOffset the KEY xx prompt displays followed by KEMOFST prompt This loop continues until no values lt CR gt only are entered at the KEMOFST prompt Note 1 Applies to an IP Phone 2002 if lt CR gt was entered at the KEY prompt Note 2 Applies to an IP Phone 2004 with KEM 2 and where lt CR gt was entered at the KEY prompt Edit the IP Phone KEM key number specified by KEMOFST where xx the number of the key for example KEY 36 Enter lt CR gt to keep the current setting IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 250 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node IP Phone dedicated soft keys Table 55 describes the features that can be assigned to dedicated soft keys 16 26 on the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050 Remove unused feature keys by configuring the dedicated soft keys to NUL Some features depend on the given Class of Service If an attempt is made to configure anything other than the permitted response the system generates an error code For related error messages see SCH messages in Software Input Output System Messages 553 3001 411 Table 55 LD 11 IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment Part 1 of 2 IP Phone key number Response s Allowed Key 16 MWK NUL MWK Message Waiting key Key 17 TRN NUL TRN Call Transfer key Key 18 A03 A06 NUL AO3 3 party conference key
310. d ROM File Enter Menu Selection Number 1 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 752 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 753 of 770 Appendix D Product integrity Contents This section contains information on the following topics Miodio serseri kartan SEs oe eLeSRRARwE REE DRG EYE OM doo READY ia ard ee bew oss Keigi ERGO A Ode SS RSE Rea KER TEES 333 Mean Time Between Failures MTBF 00005 754 Voice Gateway Media Card power consumption 754 Bavitouniental specifications si acvircsensenedeo eens edeasen 754 Tempertature related conditions 4 12 04 25444440a0isearinod J55 Electrical regulatory Standards svoriesiiirerceterii to dtikeerai 756 DUC Ki ini driieiida tira ekra akrein ta eoan 756 Electro Magnetic Containment rsesiresiiceriareriineetttd 757 Introduction This chapter presents information about the Voice Gateway Media Card s reliability environmental specifications and electrical regulatory standards Reliability Reliability is measured by the Mean Time Between Failures MTBF IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 754 of 770 Appendix D Product integrity Mean Time Between Failures MTBF The Mean Time Between Failure MTBF is 46 years for Voice Gateway Media Cards Failures per 10 hours of operation are 2 483 based on 40 degrees C 140 degrees F Voice Gateway Media Card power consu
311. d based on BOOTP TAB e platform e TN e ELAN network interface MAC e TLAN network interface IP Address e ELAN network interface IP Address 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 447 of 770 Example The following is an example of the output on a Signaling Server oam gt electShow Node ID 678 Node Master Yes Up Time 1 days 3 hours 1 mins 58 secs TN 00 00 Host Type ISP 1100 IP TLAN 47 11 215 55 IP ELAN 47 11 216 139 Election Duration 15 Wait for Result time 35 Master Broadcast period 30 master tps Host Type TN TLAN IP Addr ISP 1100 00 00 47 11 215 55 Next timeout 3 sec AutoAnnounce 1 Timer duration 60 Next timeout in 17 sec Num TN Host Type ELAN MAC TLAN IP Addr ELAN IP Addr Up Time NumOfSets TimeOut 001 00 00 ISP 1100 00 02 B3 C5 50 C2 47 11 215 55 47 11 216 139 001 03 01 58 5 0 002 03 00 ITG P 00 60 38 8E 71 5C 47 11 215 37 47 11 217 157 006 05 30 13 0 0 Cards in node configuration that are not registered Num TN Host Type ELAN MAC TLAN IP Addr ELAN IP Addr 001 7 0 SMC 00 60 38 BD C1 C1 47 11 215 54 47 11 216 49 value 27886252 0x1la982ac IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 448 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration When all cards configured in a node are registered the last part of the output displays the following All cards in node configuration are registered
312. d belongs This is the IP address of the router interface on the ELAN subnet if present If the subnet does not have a Management LAN gateway enter 0 0 0 0 e When a Management LAN gateway is added to the ELAN subnet it must restrict access so that only authorized traffic is permitted on the ELAN subnet e The router must disable the BootP relay agent for the ELAN network interface e The router must block all broadcast and multicast traffic from the ELAN subnet and enable only proper access that is only authorized traffic and users coming through the ELAN gateway 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 539 of 770 d Management LAN ELAN subnet mask Enter the Management LAN subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask that is used along with the ELAN IP address to identify to which subnet the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs When changing these subnet masks consider the possibility of conflict between the ELAN and TLAN IP addresses Consult with the IP administrator before making any changes to subnets Refer to Codecs on page 179 When changing the Management LAN ELAN subnet this must be coordinated with the IP address on the Call Server Active ELNK subnet Changes must also be co ordinated with the following e Management LAN gateway and other IP devices on the ELAN subnet e any other devices on the ELAN subnet and customer s enterp
313. d by Caller N A Callback Phone N A Rem CLID Idle Timeout 500 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Type in the User Name such as itgadmin Toggle Active Yes No for security purposes Type in a Password for PAP The DUN client on the remote OTM 2 2 PC must provide the user name and password defined here when dialing up the Modem Router Set Callback Yes No according to the customer s network security policy and practices Nortel Networks Customer Technical Services CTS does not currently accept Callback security calls from the Modem Router Set Rem CLID to the PSTN Calling Number that is displayed when the remote OTM 2 2 PC dials up the Modem Router if CLID authentication is required for the user profile CLID depends on providing a C O line subscribed for CLID service for the Modem Router s telephone line connection Set Idle Timeout 1200 where 1200 seconds provides 20 minutes idle timeout disconnect for Nortel Networks remote support purposes Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM then press Esc to return from the sub menu to the RM356 Main Menu Enter menu selection number 23 under the Advanced Management section of the RM356 Main Menu 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 38 39 40 41 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 743 of 770 Menu 23 System Password is displayed Menu 23 System Password old Password New Password Retype to confirm Enter here to CONFIRM
314. d click Save End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Index Numerics 802 1Q Support 127 911 419 A Active Leader 694 alarm files 636 backplanes connectors 726 T O panel connections 727 backup 467 516 bandwidth used 107 blocked calls 107 BOOTP 106 BOOTP parameters 670 676 Branch Office 126 C caching 332 call attempts and completions 107 Call Server configuration using OTM 284 Call Statistics 107 CHG ES1 71 CHG ES2 71 CHG NKT 72 Page 765 of 770 CISCO RTP header compression 487 CLI commands informational 677 CLI commands for Succession Signaling Server 677 CLI Commands for Voice Gateway Media Card 677 Codec 140 community name 345 CompactFlash 209 CONFIG INI 107 CONFIG INI file 671 677 connector pin assignments NT8D02 Digital Line Card 720 connectors 726 convert IP Trunk cards 694 Corporate Directory 105 415 CRPA CRPD 415 D Data Path Capture tool 130 define the physical TNs 234 DISI 695 DSP daughterboard self test 635 E e911 419 echo cancellation 44 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 766 of 770 Index Echo Server 70 echoServerShow 79 echoServerShow 99 79 ECNT CARDS 107 ECNT SS 108 ECNT ZONE 107 EDD 425 electro magnetic compatibility 757 electro magnetic emissions 758 electro magnetic immunity 758 electShow 446 588 Element Manager 23 106 Emergency Services Acces
315. d the Cards section Select the Voice Gateway Media Card from the list of cards in the node See Figure 207 on page 670 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 670 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Figure 207 Cards V cards Card 207 179 153 109 Properties Role Follower Management LAN ELAN IP address 207179153109 o Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 60 38 bd 56 66 Voice LAN TLAN IP address figz168 2538 e Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address fisz168 2537 Hostname Card TN Card processor type H323 ID Enable set TPS System name System location System contact Card 207 179 153 111 Properties 13 Change the Management LAN ELAN MAC address field to the MAC address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The MAC address is the Motherboard Ethernet address labeled on the faceplate of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card 14 Click Save and Transfer The Node Summary window opens 15 Click the Transfer Status button associated with the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card 16 After the transfer is complete restart the new card Restarting the card causes the follower card to obtains its BOOTP parameters from the Leader and also establishes ELAN and TLAN connectivity 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 671 of 770 17 18 19 20 Follow the steps i
316. de IP 192 168 2 91 Transfer Status gt Node 400 Node IP 192 168 2 100 2 Click the Transfer Status button for the node The Transfer confirmation dialog box opens 3 Click OK to confirm the transfer See Figure 110 Figure 110 Transfer confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer Q re you sure you want to transfer the node configuration to the selected elements After a few seconds the Transfer Progress window opens and displays each of the Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node See Figure 111 on page 370 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 370 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager The Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the Call Server A check mark is added to each field as the card receives its CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files When the transfer is complete click OK in the Progress Check Complete dialog box e Ifthe transfer is successful for a card the Status column displays Complete and a check mark is displayed e Ifthe transfer is unsuccessful the Status column displays Fail A failed transfer can be caused by several situations including the following improper cabling Check cable connections improper card configuration Ensure all information is configured correctly the card running an older version of the software than the Signaling Server Verify the software version on
317. ded by one of the following e NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable see Figure 44 on page 223 e A0852632 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter see Figure 45 on page 226 The ITG P 24 port line card uses the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable The Media Card uses the A0852632 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter The ELAN network interface supports 10BaseT operation and the TLAN network interface supports 10 100BaseT operation To support the 100BaseT operation on Large Systems the TLAN network interface requires specialized I O panel mounting connectors These replace the standard connectors provided on the system Cables and connectors for the ELAN and TLAN network interface functions include the following e the NTCW84JA I O panel filter block e NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable e A0852632 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter Standard shielded CATS LAN cables lt 100 meters are recommended to attach the LAN ports to the local network IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 222 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node CS 1000S systems For information on Voice Gateway Media Card ELAN and TLAN network interfaces on a CS 1000S system refer to Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration 553 3031 210 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004
318. default network route pointing to the Management GW IP address on the local ELAN subnet Alternatively define up to four different static network routes or host routes in the Modem Router to limit routing access from the Modem Router to the customer s enterprise network Note 2 To prevent access from the Modem Router to the TLAN subnet through the Management GW router on the ELAN subnet disable RIP by setting RIP Direction None and remove all static routes or disable a particular static route by setting Active No Enter menu selection number 1 to edit the first static route Menu 12 1 Edit IP Static Route is displayed Menu 12 1 Edit IP Static Route Route 1 Route Name DefaultGWw Active Yes Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 47 177 16 1 Metric 2 Private No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Type in a descriptive Route Name using no spaces for example DefaultGW Toggle Active Yes No for security purposes The Gateway IP Address is the Management GW IP address on the ELAN where the Modem Router is connected Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM then press Esc to return from the sub menu to the RM356 Main Menu IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 740 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 18 Enter menu selection number 13 under the Advanced Applications section The Menu 13 Default Dial in Setup sub menu is displayed M
319. dem Router from the manager menu 735 RM356 Modem Router manager menu description 743 Introduction Management and support of the IP Line network depend on IP networking protocols including SNMP FTP and Telnet Install a Modem Router on the Meridian 1 CS 1000 site LAN subnet called the Embedded LAN or ELAN subnet as opposed to the customer s data network subnet in order to provide remote support access for IP Line and other P enabled Nortel Networks products WARNING Nortel Networks strongly recommends that the RM356 Modem Router be installed for management and support IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 732 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router The Netgear RM356 Modem Router integrates the functions of a V 90 modem a PPP remote access server an IP router and a 4 port 10BaseT Ethernet hub and provides a range of security features configured to comply with the customer s data network security policy Do not install a Modem Router on the ELAN subnet without the explicit approval of the customer s IP network manager The RM356 Modem Router is not secure unless it is configured correctly according to the customer s network security policy and practices Figure 222 on page 733 shows an example of a remote network RM356 Modem Router security features The security features of the RM356 Modem Router include Password Authentication Protocol PAP for dial in PPP connection RM356 manager
320. dia Card begins to be captured to the circular queue captureStop Stops the audio data capture captureSaveLocal Dumps the contents of the circular queue to the specified file on the memory PC Card inserted in the A drive on the Voice Gateway Media Card s faceplate captureSaveRemote FTPs the contents of the circular queue to the specified file on the remote server captureFree Frees the capture queue IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 604 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Translation IP DN commands Table 81 Table 81 lists the LD 117 commands to translate an IP Phone s DN to its IP address and its IP address to its DN Translation IP DN commands IPL gt command Description Signaling Server PRT DNIP Prints a list of IP addresses for every IP Phone lt DN gt registered with the specified DN lt CustomerNo gt PRT IPDN Prints a list of DNs configured for the specified lt IPAddress gt IP address es Search criteria If a customer number is entered only that customer is searched for the designated DN If no customer number is entered the database for all customers on the system is searched The PRT DNIP command accepts a partially defined DN that is a DN entered with only partial leading digits For example entering a DN of 34 with no customer number results in output for any DN in the system starting with 34
321. dia Card 32 port and 8 port line cards Part 2 of 2 ltem ITG P 24 port line card Media Card 32 port line card Page 33 of 770 Media Card 8 port line card C drive On board Flash 2 x 4Mb Plug in CompactFlash 16Mb Plug in CompactFlash 16Mb Upgrade Two images files One image file One image file no backup no backup Note f a Voice Gateway Media Card is used in a CS 1000 system then the IP Phones register to the Signaling Server instead of the Voice Gateway Media Card and are not subject to these restrictions A Signaling Server can register a maximum of 5000 IP Phones Voice Gateway Media Cards have an ELAN network interface 10BaseT and a TLAN network interface 10 100BaseT on the I O panel Note The ELAN Embedded LAN subnet isolates critical telephony signaling between the Call Server and the other components The ELAN subnet is also known as the Management LAN subnet The TLAN Telephony LAN subnet carries telephony voice signaling traffic The TLAN subnet also known as the Voice LAN subnet connects to the customer network and the PSTN There is an RS 232 Maintenance Port connection on the faceplates of both the ITG P 24 port line card and the Media Card line card The ITG P 24 port line card has an alternative connection to the same serial port on the I O backplane CAUTION Do not connect maintenance terminals to both the faceplate and the I O panel seri
322. dia Card controls indicators and connectors Figure 2 shows the Media Card 32 port and 8 port card faceplate Figure 2 Media Card faceplate lt _ Reset Button ae Enable LED lt PC Card Slot Drive A gt lt MAC Address label TLAN and ELAN addresses e Lock Latches 553 SMC0001 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 36 of 770 Description Faceplate components The components on the faceplate of the Media Card 32 port and 8 port card are described in the following sections Reset button Use the Reset button on the faceplate to manually reset the Media Card This enables the card to be reset without cycling power to it The Reset button is used to reboot the card after a software upgrade or to clear a fault condition Enable LED The faceplate red LED indicates the following e the enabled disabled status of the card e the self testing result during power up or card insertion into an operational system PC Card slot This slot accepts the Type I or Type II standard PC Flash Cards including ATA Flash cards 3 Mb to 170 Mb The slot is labeled A Nortel Networks supplies PC Card adaptors that enable CompactFlash cards to be used in the slot WARNING Do not format the PC Card using a Windows application As well only format the PC Card using the type of card on which it will be running For example a PC Card formatted using a Small System Controller SSC
323. dia Card maintenance using Element Manager Verify Voice Gateway Media Card software and firmware The following steps are required to verify and upgrade the card software and IP Phone firmware 1 Check the version of the software currently installed on the Voice Gateway Media Card Refer to Procedure 54 on page 386 Check the version of the firmware that is currently running on the Voice Gateway Media Card Refer to Procedure 55 on page 389 Download the most up to date version of the software and firmware files from the Nortel Networks web site Refer to Procedure 56 on page 392 Upload the software and firmware files using the File Upload system utility in Element Manager Refer to Procedure 57 on page 394 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software Refer to Procedure 58 on page 396 Restart the Voice Gateway Media Card Refer to Procedure 59 on page 400 Upgrade and distribute the firmware to the IP Phones on the Voice Gateway Media Card Refer to Procedure 60 on page 401 Add another Voice Gateway Media Card Follow the steps in Procedure 110 to add another Voice Gateway Media Card to the system Procedure 110 Add another Voice Gateway Media Card to the system 1 Install and cable the Voice Gateway Media Card as described in Install the hardware components on page 204 Go to the VxWorks shell Set the Voice Gateway Media Card as a Follower using the ELAN IP address and subnet mask Restart the card Th
324. dian 1 systems Table 39 Supported codecs G 711 a law G 711 mu law NOVAD Payload size 10 20 and 30 ms G 729A 10 20 30 40 and 50 ms G 729AB 10 20 30 40 and 50 ms G 723 1 1 30 ms T 38 2 supported for fax calls on gateway channels G 711 Clear Channel 2 supported for fax calls on gateway channels Note 1 The G 723 1 codec has bit rates of 5 3 Kops and 6 3 Kbps In IP Line 4 0 the G 723 1 codec can only be configured with a 5 3 Kbps bit rate however the system accepts both G 723 1 5 3Kbps and 6 4Kbps from the far end Note 2 T 38 is the preferred codec type for fax calls over virtual trunks However the G 711 Clear Channel codec is used if the far end does not support the T 38 codec Note The MVC 2050 supports only the G 711 codec with 30 ms payload Note If there are multiple nodes on a system and the same codec is selected on more than one node ensure that each node has the same voice payload size configured for the codec IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 182 of 770 Codecs Codec configuration Configure the codec in the DSP Profile sections of OTM 2 2 and Element Manager Codec selection in OTM 2 2 Figure 35 shows the list of codecs available on the DSP Profile tab within OTM s IP Line 4 0 application The Codec Options sub tab presents a table of different sets of codec options identified by a codec set
325. ds at the VxWorks shell prompt Copy the F W binary file on a PC Card plugged into the card s faceplate to the card s C drive or to a network server accessible by the card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 639 of 770 Procedure 99 Upgrading the ITG P 24 port 8051 XAConiroller firmware 1 Check if the 8051 XAController firmware upgrade is required Check the firmware version by entering the firmwareVersionShow command IPL gt firmwareVersionShow Firmware Version ITG Firmware Rls 4 0 value 40 0x28 IPL gt Note f the F W version is version 5 7 vintages earlier than NTVQ01AB do not require the upgrade There is no need to download the Version 8 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Card NTVQO1AB as the software is pre loaded at the factory 2 Depending on the location of the firmware file enter one of the following commands as shown in Table 91 The file name for the 8051 XAController firmware for the ITG P 24 port line card is ITGPFW57 BIN Table 91 Upgrade command based on file location File is located on the card s C drive The file was previously FTP d to C upgradeXa 127 0 0 1 userid password lt C path gt lt fw_filename gt File is located on a PC Card plugged in the card s faceplate upgradeXa 127 0 0 1 userid password lt A path gt lt fw_filename gt File is located on anoth
326. e IPL gt currOMFilePut ngals042 anonymous guest currDir omFile prevOMFilePut Sends the previous Operational Measurements OM file to X hostname username password directory path filename the specified host The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card s Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host Example IPL gt prevOMFilePut ngals042 anonymous guest prevDir omFile 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 593 of 770 Table 72 File Transfer commands Part 4 of 4 Signaling IPL gt Commands Description Server LogFilePut Sends the syslog file from the Voice Gateway Media Card hostname to OTM username password directory path filename The LogFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card s log file to the specified location on the host Example IPL gt LogFilePut ngals042 anonymous guest currDir logFile bootPFilePut Sends the BOOTPtab file from the Voice Gateway Media hostname Card to OTM username password directory path IPL gt bootPFilePut ngals042
327. e Help Select the Transmit to selected cards radio button 6 Click the Start transmit button The transmission status is displayed under Transmit control Confirm that Card Properties are transmitted successfully 7 When the transmission is successful click Close 8 Use the LD 32 ENLC command to re enable the Voice Gateway Media Card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 658 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 9 Verify that the card is enabled in the IP Telephony window Locate the card in the list at the bottom of the screen Look under the Card state column and verify that the status of the card is Enabled 10 Update the Installation Summary Sheet with the new MAC address See Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 198 11 Verify the TN management interface MAC address and IP address for each Voice Gateway Media Card Compare the displayed values with those on the Voice Gateway Media Card Installation Summary Sheet End of Procedure Access the IPL gt CLI from OTM To access the IPL gt CLI from OTM follow the steps in Procedure 82 Accessing a Voice Gateway Media Card using Telnet on page 503 Add a dummy node for retrieving and viewing IP Telephony node configuration Follow the steps in Procedure 106 on page 660 to create a dummy IP Telephony node for retrieving and viewing the IP Telephony node configuration without
328. e download summary of each node This includes the configured cards in the node that are not responding Each node summary contains the following information e Index e TN LLSCCorCC e Host Type e TLAN IP Address e Data Period e Active Download Count Act e Server Up Time Srv Up Time e Successful Download Count Ok e Failure Download Count Fail Figure 12 on page 88 is an example of output from the uftpNodeShow command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 88 of 770 Features Figure 12 uftpNodeShow command output oam gt uftpNodeShow Retrieving information form the peer s please wait UFTP IP Phone Firmware Download Summary for Node 5488 Index TN Host Type TLAN IP Addr Act Srv Up Time Ok Fail Ol ISP 1100 47 11 213 83 002 0000 01 36 12 00070 00001 02 100115 SMC 47 11 213 79 001 0000 02 25 10 00050 00001 20 1 2 ITG P 47 11 213 103 001 0000 05 23 10 00048 00001 00168 00003 card in node configured that are not responding Index TN Host Type TLAN IP Addr 04 2017 SMC 47 11 213 158 uftpShow The uftpShow command displays the following information e configuration information about UFTP e count of successful downloads since the Signaling Server Voice Gateway Media Card reboot e count of downloads that failed or prematurely ended since the Signaling Server Voice Gateway Media Card reboot e number of active downloads and a list of each including type of IP Phone
329. e follow the steps in Procedure 58 Procedure 58 Upgrading the card software 1 Click Software Upgrade from the navigation tree 2 Click Voice Gateway Media Card LW from the expanded Software Upgrade menu The Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade window opens See Figure 127 on page 397 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 397 of 770 Figure 127 IP Telephone FW Upgrade window Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade l Open al nodes p Node ID Node IP 192 168 253 7 Total elements 3 Hostname ELAN IP TN Type Role E gt NODES m 4 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower LW Version 207 179 153 100 Signaling Server Leader Lwversion Succession Media Card Unknown LW Version m 2 207 179 153 111 Click a button to invoke a command File Name l Create Time PL40001 P2 i D JUN 30 14 07 10 2004 IPL40004 P2 ITG Pentium TUE JUL 06 16 41 38 2004 ee TG Pentium MON JUL 26 11 29 16 2004 PL40009 P2 ITG Pentium WED JUL 28 11 08 56 2004 1PL 40012 P2 ITG Pentium WED AUG 04 13 56 56 2004 JPL40001 SA Succession Media Card MED JUN 30 14 07 18 2004 IPL40004 SA Succession Media Card TUE JUL 06 16 41 46 2004 IPL40008 SA Succession Media Card MON JUL 26 11 29 24 2004 IPL40009 SA Succession Media Card WED JUL 28 11 09 04 2004 1PL40012 SA Succession Media Card WED AUG 04 13 57 04 2004 Loadware Upgrade AOOWAaapapapapaya
330. e 33 Transmitting card properties to all cards in the node 1 Toverify installation and configuration of the node properties observe the displays on the card faceplate e After successfully rebooting the Leader 0 card is now fully configured with the Node Properties of the node and enters a state of active Leader The card faceplate display shows Lxxx where Xxx the number of IP Phones registered with the LTPS on the Leader card L000 means that no IP Phones are registered e The Leader 1 card and any Follower cards receive their configuration from the Leader 0 card The faceplate display shows Fxxx where Xxx the number of IP Phones registered with the LTPS on the Leader card F000 means that no IP Phones are registered 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 301 of 770 2 Inthe IP Telephony window select the new IP Telephony node from the list in the upper part of the window All Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node are displayed in the lower part of the window See Figure 79 Figure 79 IP Telephony window RE Fie Edit Yiew Maintenance Configuration Help a smg a Ba x Ele ee ee ee a Ce eae pala JILLE TR 541 ae 3 1 47 11 151 145 Retrieved 47 11 220 1 OPT41 47 11 151 166 Not defined 47 11 220 1 Card role Card state Card synch status Management IP r E E TN Leader0 Unknown Retrieved i 47 11 151 144 47 11 151 129 00 02 leaderi Unknown Ret
331. e 379 Follower In OTM 2 2 Procedure 22 on page 269 In Element Manager Procedure 49 on page 365 In OTM 2 2 Procedure 32 on page 298 Procedure 33 on page 300 In Element Manager Procedure 52 on page 375 Identify the IPE card slots on a CS 1000M or Meridian 1 Depending on the module that is used the ITG P 24 port line card must be installed in a specific slot Use Table 45 to identify the IPE card slots selected for the Voice Gateway Media Card Table 45 Voice Gateway Media Card installation by module type C 1000M Meridian 1 modules ITG P 24 port line card slots All available IPE card slots NT8D37BA EC IPE modules NT8D37AA DC IPE modules 0 4 8 and 12 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 207 of 770 Note EMC restriction must be considered when installing the Voice Gateway Media Cards For more information see Electro Magnetic Containment on page 757 Installing and cabling the ITG P 24 port line card Each ITG P 24 port line card requires two slots in the CS 1000 or Meridian 1 Only the left slot of the card connects to the IPE backplane and I O panel A maximum of eight ITG P 24 port line cards can be installed in an IPE shelf in a Large System The ITG P 24 port line card can occupy any two adjacent slots in an IPE shelf with the left slot of the card plugging into slots 0 to 6 and 8 to 15 The left slot of an I
332. e Clear Cancel 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 433 of 770 IP Line CLI commands for password control The IP Phone Installer Passwords are configured on any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node The IP Phone Installer Password is configured and administered using a set of six IPL gt CLI commands e nodePwdSet password e nodePwdShow e nodePwdTempPwdSet temppwad uses lt time gt e nodeTempPwdClear e nodePwdEnable e nodePwdDisable The commands begin with node as they work at the node level For detailed information about these commands see Table 78 IP Phone Installer Password commands on page 598 When an IP Telephony node is first installed the IP Phone Installer Password is not defined or enabled by default To prevent users from inadvertently re configuring the Node ID and TN on their IP Phones enable the IP Phone Installer Password after the IP Phone is initially installed and the system is in service Password security controls access to an IP Phone s TN for the purpose of registering to a different virtual line TN on the Call Server after the IP Phones have been installed A password is not encrypted by the telephone or the Voice Gateway Media Card By default when a node is initially installed the administrative password and the temporary password are not defined and the password feature is disabled IP Line Description Installation and Operat
333. e Description Installation and Operation Page 32 of 770 Description e reduces the slot count from a dual IPE slot to a single IPE slot e supports up to 128 IP Phones for the 32 port version while 32 IP Phones are supported on the 8 port version if a Signaling Server is not present in the network configuration The 8 port version is typically intended for the Media Gateway 1000B used with the Branch Office feature in branch office locations Table 7 provides a comparison of the ITG P 24 port line card and Media Card 32 port and 8 port line cards Table 7 Comparison of ITG P 24 port and Media Card 32 port and 8 port line cards Part 1 of 2 ITG P 24 port Media Card 32 port Media Card 8 port line card line card line card Total DSP Channels 24 32 8 Number of slots the card 2 1 1 occupies Operating System VxWorks 5 3 VxWorks 5 4 VxWorks 5 4 Processor Pentium IXP1200 IXP1200 DSP 8 x TI5409 4x 715421 1 x T15421 Telogy version 7 01 8 1 High Density 8 1 High Density version 8 ports for each DSP version 8 ports for each DSP Number of IP Phones that 96 128 32 can register on each Voice in a Meridian 1 in a Meridian 1 in a Meridian 1 Gateway Media Card see note see note see note Image file name prefixes IPL P IPL SA IPL SA shown by swVersionShow command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 7 Description Comparison of ITG P 24 port and Me
334. e IP Phone If the labels are found they are sent to the IP Phone when the key map download occurs If the labels are not found the Call Server sends out the key number strings or key functions IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 118 of 770 Features For more information about programmable line DN feature keys self labeled refer to IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Private Zone configuration Private Zones are available for the CS 1000 and Meridian systems Lack of DSP resources DSP resources for each customer are placed in one common pool A DSP channel is allocated to an IP to circuit switched call based on a round robin searching algorithm within the pool If an available resource cannot be found the overflow tone is given For most installations this approach works because all IP Phone users share the IP Line DSP resources The DSPs can be provisioned using a DSP to IP Phone ratio similar to trunk resources since the DSPs are used only for circuit switched access or conference calls When IP to PSTN calls are used such as with ACD agents or other users who consistently are using trunk resources when making calls it becomes difficult to provision the system in a way that guarantees an available DSP channel when these users need it If the other users suddenly make a lot of conference calls or trunk calls the DSP resources can deplete and as a result calls cannot
335. e IP Telephony node from the list in the upper part of the main window All Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node are displayed in the lower part of the window While the node is selected from the node list press function key F5 or View gt Refresh gt Selection to refresh the card status of all cards in the selected node The card status should display as Enabled or Disabled If the status is Not responding verify the network connection and the proper configuration of the network equipment In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the IP Telephony node in the upper part of the window Select the new card s in the lower part of the window Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple cards Click the Configuration menu option and then select Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window appears Click the Transmit to selected cards radio button See Figure 148 on page 475 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 475 of 770 Figure 148 Transmit Options Transmit to selected cards Transmit Options This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards and or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware r Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Tr
336. e Installer Password has never been set The nodePwdShow command should display the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 No Od Oh Om Os where NodelD the IP Phone Installer Password configuration applies to all Voice Gateway Media Cards on the same TLAN that belong to this Node ID PwdEna by default the cards should be in disabled state PwdEna No The PwdEna setting specifies the enabled Yes or disabled No state of the IP Phone Installer Password IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 436 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Pwd this is the Administrator IP Phone Installer Password In the default state the Administrator password is null zero length TmpPwd this is the temporary IP Phone Installer Password In the default state the temporary password is null Uses the Uses parameter applies to the temporary IP Phone Installer Password In the default state this setting is null If the card is not in the default state the Uses parameter is a numeric value from 0 1000 This number specifies the remaining number of uses for the temporary password If zero is entered for the Uses parameter when setting the temporary password the Time parameter is mandatory When the Time parameter is in effect the password expiration is based on time instead of the number of uses Timeout the Timeout heading corresponds to the Time parameter of the temporary IP Phone Installer Password
337. e Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card Use an NTAG81CA PC Maintenance cable If required use an NTAG81BA Maintenance Extender cable between the PC Maintenance cable and the OTM PC Alternatively connect the NTAG81BA Maintenance Extender cable to the female DB 9 connector of the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Ports cable for a more permanent connection to the Voice Gateway Media Card serial maintenance port Note Never connect two terminals to the faceplate and I O panel breakout cable serial maintenance port connectors at the same time 2 Use the following communication parameters for the TTY terminal emulation on the OTM PC e 9600 baud e 8bits e no parity e one stop bit 3 Observe the Leader 0 card faceplate maintenance display window 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 297 of 770 When the display reads T 20 it begins to send BootP requests on the ELAN A series of dots is printed on the TTY If the card does not display T20 or has stopped printing the series of dots on the TTY reboot the card and wait for T20 to be displayed 4 Type to escape from the BootP request 5 Atthe Login prompt enter the default user ID and password of itgadmin and itgadmin to access the IPL gt CLI itg Login itgadmin Password itgadmin 6 When the maintenance window displays T 21 at the IPL gt prompt enter setLeader XxX XX XX XX VY Y
338. e Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 Support of the IP Phone Key Expansion Module KEM Network Address Translation NAT Traversal Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List with password protection a Node level patching is not provided by OTM 2 2 The patching CLI command of the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG Pentium 24 port line card can be used introduced in IP Line 4 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 60 of 770 Features Table 12 IP Line 4 0 feature support Part 2 of 3 UNIStim File Transfer Protocol UFTP for IP Phone firmware downloads IP IP Call Recording IP Call Recording ill al oa detection ed enhancement Dynamic Loss Plan Dynamic Loss Plan Plan a e ona capweic wes e E a a a User defined Feature Key Labels Private Zone Yes Yes Yes Graceful TPS Disable Yes Yes Yes Run time download Yes Yes Yes Codec selection configuration Yes Yes Yes and registration enhancements a Node level patching is not provided by OTM 2 2 The patching CLI command of the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG Pentium 24 port line card can be used introduced in IP Line 4 0 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 12 IP Line 4 0 feature support Part 3 of 3 Feature Meridian 1 Features CS 1000M Page 61 of 770 CS 1000S Watchdog
339. e backup password Simt coe 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 a7 11 214 223 K fao feuicjetherset fopa fetherset Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 155 of 770 Table 37 provides a sample IP Phone Application Server configuration Table 37 Sample IP Phone Application Server configuration Server Configuration Server IP Address 92 168 10 12 IP address of the database server for example the Leader Signaling Server s ELAN network interface IP address Backup Configuration Perform scheduled remote Checkbox is selected Select checkbox to enable backup scheduled remote backups Remote backup time of day 00 00 the time of day to perform the hh mm backup default is 00 00 midnight Remote backup IP address 47 11 22 11 remote backup server s IP address Remote backup path auto etherset remote path where the back up file will be saved Remote backup file name ipldb db file name of the backup file Remote backup userid etherset login name for the remote backup Remote backup password password for remote backup The Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List features are not available to the user if the Voice Gateway Media Cards to which the IP Phones are registered lose contact with the Signaling Server The features become available again when contact with the Signaling Server is re established IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 156 of 770 Person
340. e card obtains the ELAN IP address and subnet mask In Element Manager click Configuration in the navigation tree In the Configuration menu click IP Telephony The IP Telephony window opens 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 675 of 770 Figure 209 Click Node Summary The Node Summary window opens Click the Edit button associated with the node containing the card to be replaced The Edit window opens Expand the Cards section Click Cards and then click the Add button See Figure 209 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Cards NORTEL NETWORKS gt System Status v Configuration gt Call Server op Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support gt Tools d Logout gt SIP Proxy Vea Role Unknown Management LAN ELAN IP address pooo e Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Voice LAN TLAN IP address pooo Le Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address paon oo Hostname Hostname d Card TN eS Ss ae Card processor type Succession Media Card gt H323 1D frer_qubi2 Enable set TPS Vv System name a System location as System contact 4 gt signaling Servers w Save and Transfer Cancel Mandatory fields of current configuration Enter the Card Properties data IP Line Description Installation and Operation
341. e cards can perform two separate functions depending on the system in which the card is located 1 The card acts as a gateway between the circuit switched voice network and the IP network 2 The card acts as a Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS or virtual line card for the IP Phones based on whether a Signaling Server is used in the configuration or not IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 44 of 770 Description Gateway functional description The Gateway performs the following functions e registers with the system using the TN Registration messages e accepts commands from the system to connect disconnect audio channel e uses Realtime Transport Protocol Realtime Conferencing Protocol RTP RTCP protocol to transport audio between the gateway and the IP Phone e encodes decodes audio from PCM to and from the IP Phone s format e provides echo cancellation for the speaker on IP Phones for echoes originating in the circuit switched voice network not applicable to the IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050 as they have no handsfree capability Gateway functionality on the Meridian 1 Since there is no Signaling Server each Voice Gateway Media Card functions as both the LTPS and Voice Gateway The Gateway portion of the card connects to the Meridian through the DS 30X backplane The Gateway portion also receives call speech path setup and codec selection commands through the ELAN network interface The IP
342. e eee 441 Display the ntimber of DSPSi coscccenssgordsad viren Enano AREN 443 Display IP Telephony node properties 0004 443 Display Voice Gateway Media Card parameters 445 Packet loss MODNO i554 c255 ed cise n ERRER TRANE ERER EA 448 Transfer files using the CLI sersisissicisserisartiiieth itiiti 449 Download the IP Line 4 0 error log o ssicrririeriiradritipsesas 451 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 414 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Reset the Operational Measurements file 451 Introduction This chapter explains how to administer IP Line 4 0 and the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 systems Administration procedures include activities such as monitoring the system status operational reports performing upgrades changing configuration and adding changing and removing cards Administration does not include engineering provisioning initial installation and configuration maintenance or troubleshooting The Voice Gateway Media Card provides four administration interfaces Optivity Telephony Manager OTM 2 2 OTM s IP Line 4 0 application provides a GUI to the Voice Gateway Media Card OTM 2 2 is used to Telnet to the card install and upgrade software and firmware configure alarm event reporting view and update a card s property and configuration data add new cards to a node schedule reports and other related t
343. e failure to load the IP Line software into RAM persists then the flash device is faulty Replace the Voice Gateway Media Card Case 3 The escape sequence xxx is rarely transmitted Reboot the card Warm reboot of the Voice Gateway Media Card The cardReset IP Line CLI command performs a warm reboot of an out of service Voice Gateway Media Card Test the Voice Gateway Media Card DSPs At the IPL gt CLI the following two tests can be performed on the IP Line DSPs e Torun a self test on the DSP daughterboard DSPselfTest IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 636 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Note If the DSP self test fails the Voice Gateway Media Card must be replaced e Torun a PCM loopback test a Send loopback test or a Receive loopback test on the DSP daughterboard respectively DSPPcmLpbkTestOn DSPPcmLpbkTestOff to stop the test DSPSndLpbkTestOn DSPSndLpbkTestOff to stop the test DSPRcevLpbkTestOn DSPRcvLpbkTestOff to stop the test Note The DSPs and all associated ports must be disabled before performing these tests Work with alarm and log files Alarm and log file output is turned on using the IPL gt CLI The following commands can be performed at the IPL gt prompt e To turn on or turn off the error log file type logFileOn or logFileOff e To display the modes of all log files and alarms type logFileShow Troubleshoot an IP Phone install
344. e following items are required to access the firmware e IP address of the file server e routing table e file path to the file server e user name and password required to access the file server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 305 of 770 This information is configured in the OTM 2 2 IP Line 4 0 application If using OTM 2 2 this information is configured in the File Server tab of the Node properties See Figure 75 on page 291 IMPORTANT All IP Phones in a system must use the same version of firmware as is on the Voice Gateway Media Card s The same version of firmware for a specific IP Phone type must reside on all Voice Gateway Media Cards in a system If retrieved from an external server ensure all Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the same firmware files The IP Phones use UNIStim File Transfer Protocol UFTP to transfer the firmware therefore if the customer s network has a firewall port 5105 must be explicitly opened in the firewall to enable IP Phone firmware downloads to take place For more information refer to Firmware download using UNIStim FTP on page 83 CAUTION The OTM PC should not be used as the file server for the firmware download IP Phone firmware upgrade from a new Voice Gateway Media Card Meridian 1 When the Voice Gateway Media Card is received from the factory the IP Line 4 0 software is located on the CompactF
345. e gateway channels is output 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Output example Page 511 of 770 An example of a single hour s OM report is as follows gt ommShow collection_time i2004Reg_Att 0 i2004Reg Fail 0 i2004Unreg_Att 0 i2004Aud_Setup 0 i2004Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2004Jitter Max 0 i2004Pkt_Lost 0 00 12004Voice_Time i2002Reg_Att 0 i2002Reg Fail 0 i2002Unreg_Att 0 i2002Aud_Setup 0 i2002Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2002Jitter Max 0 i2002Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2002Voice_Time i2001Reg_Att 0 i2001Reg Fail 0 i2001Unreg_Att 0 i2001Aud_Setup 0 i2001Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2001Jitter Max 0 i2001Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2001Voice_Time IP Line 9 5 2003 1 00 0 mins 0 secs 0 mins 0 secs 0 mins 0 secs Description Installation and Operation Page 512 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager i2050Reg_ Att 0 i2050Reg_Fail 0 i2050Unreg_Att 0 i2050Aud_Setup 0 i2050Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2050Jitter Max 0 i2050Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2050Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2004Reg_Att 0 3Pi2004Reg Fail 0 3Pi2004Unreg Att 0 3Pi2004Aud_Setup 0 3Pi2004Jitter_Avg 0 0 3Pi2004Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2004Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2004Voice_ Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2002Reg_Att 0 3Pi2002Reg Fail 0 3Pi2002Unreg Att 0 3Pi2002Aud_Setup 0 3Pi2002Jitter_Avg 0 0 3Pi2002Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2002Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2002Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2050Reg_Att 0 3Pi2050Reg_Fail 0 3Pi2050
346. e if aname stored in the Personal Directory that is associated with the incoming call s DN is displayed instead of the name transmitted by the Call Server e what three area codes should be displayed after the DN rather than before it for example local area codes Follow the steps in Procedure to access the call log options for the IP Phone Procedure 1 Accessing the call log options 1 Press the IP Phone s Services key The Telephone Options menu displays 2 From the Telephone Options menu select Call Log Options 3 Select the desired options End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Table 36 summarizes the call log options Table 36 Call log options Call log option Log all unanswered incoming calls Description Configures the Callers List to log all incoming calls or only the unanswered incoming calls Page 151 of 770 Default value Log all calls New Call Indication see note When New Call Indication is turned on a message is displayed on the IP Phone to inform the user of a new incoming call If not configured nothing is displayed Preferred Name Match Configures whether the caller name displayed is the CPND from the Call Server or the name associated with the DN stored in the Personal Directory CPND from the Call Server is displayed Area code set up Configures how the incoming DN is displayed
347. e leader and by default acts as a Master for the node Signaling Server redundancy There are several methods of redundancy for a Signaling Serve See Table 3 Table 3 Methods of Signaling Server redundancy Part 1 of 2 e e EO With a backup Signaling Server A backup Signaling Server can be configured in a normal configuration IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 26 of 770 Description Table 3 Methods of Signaling Server redundancy Part 2 of 2 Stage Description If the primary Signaling Server fails the backup Signaling Server takes over and all IP Phones register with the backup Signaling Server If the backup Signaling Server fails one of the Voice Gateway Media Cards is elected to be the node Master 4 The IP Phones then register to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Without a backup Signaling Server 1 If there is no backup Signaling Server and the primary Signaling Server fails one of the Voice Gateway Media Cards is elected to be the node Master The IP Phones then register to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Software delivery IP Line 4 0 supports software delivery through the following formats 1 CompactFlash 2 Signaling Server CD ROM 3 Download from the Nortel Networks web site Note Stand alone IP Line 4 0 software is not available through CD ROM 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 27 of 770 The IP Line 4 0 software and rel
348. e phones and wants to schedule the reset time of the IP Phones check the time on all the cards If necessary reset the time to ensure all cards have the same time Then issue the umsUpgradeAll hh mma p command where hh mma p represents the time when the upgrade will occur At the IPL gt prompt verify that the IP Phones are upgraded for each Voice Gateway Media Card by entering the following command isetShow Inspect the list to ensure all IP Phones have the correct firmware version 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 321 of 770 20 For any IP Phones that did not upgrade successfully try one of the following in order e use the isetReset IP Address command e enter the following combination of keystrokes on the IP Phone release mute up down up down up mute 9 release e power the IP Phone off and then on again If the upgrade was unsuccessful on any of the IP Phones this is probably due to one of the following reasons e one of the Voice Gateway Media Cards did not upgrade the software successfully e an IP Phone is loaded with a firmware version that was unable to be upgraded by the Voice Gateway Media Card in the normal manner e the umsUpgradeAll command was not issued e one of the cards has not been reset If the upgrade was unsuccessful re do the appropriate procedure If the upgrade is still unsuccessful contact the technical s
349. e properties to Leader 1 If changes are made to the node or card configuration data ensure the data is saved to the Call Server by clicking the Submit button A confirmation dialog box opens See Figure 113 Figure 113 Confirm Submit Microsoft Internet Explorer x Please be advised to reboot the Gatekeeper after the submission and following transmission are done if there are changes to a Gatekeeper configuration especially its IP related parameters IP Address etc Are you sure you want to Save this Node Cancel 2 Click OK to confirm the save of the node data The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens 3 Inthe Node Summary window click the Transfer Status button associated with the node See Figure 114 on page 376 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 376 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 114 Transfer Node NORTEL NETWORKS Node Summary gt System Status v Configuration gt call Server 2 ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Node 450 Node IP 192 168 2 90 gt Support 2 Tools gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 A Logout gt Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 gt Node 400 Node IP 192 168 2 100 Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt New Node C to Add Transfer S Transfer S
350. e requirements 383 Hetault location of firmware Mes sss cdsntsoe apsdeseetadbe ds 384 IP Phone Firmware upgrade from a new Voice Gateway Media Card 385 Determine Voice Gateway Media Card software version 386 Determine the IP Phone firmware version 389 Download the current software and IP Phone firmware 392 Upload the software and firmware files to the file server 393 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software 396 Reboot the Voice Gateway Media Card 400 Uperade the IP Phone fmiWatesc 4 jap occinacseetdeaeaave 400 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card firmware 407 Configure Alarm Management to receive IP Line SNMP traps 408 Assemble and metal an IP Phone cess chests aieen be eot es 408 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password 408 Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords 4 408 Import node configuration from an existing node 409 Introduction This chapter explains how to configure IP Telephony nodes and Voice Gateway Media Cards using Element Manager Element Manager is accessed using a PC with Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or later The PC must be connected to a LAN that has access to the Signaling Server s Node IP address either directly or routed through the network Note The ELAN subnet IP address might be required instead of the Node IP address to access the Ele
351. e to public mapping for the signaling port for each IP Phone behind it to support multiple IP Phones The TPS uses fixed port numbers for signaling The NAT device must perform consistent private to public mapping for these port numbers Table 13 lists the UDP port number used Table 13 Signaling UDP Ports UDP Port Device IP Phone incoming signaling messages to the IP Phones including UFTP messaging incoming call processing messages to the LTPS incoming UFTP packets to the UFTP server incoming registration message to Connect Server incoming registration messages to node Master Port numbers on the Voice Gateway Media Card use a fixed numbering scheme where the starting number for the port range is configurable The first port on the card uses the configured starting port number the rest of the port numbers follow in sequence Each port has two sequential numbers one for RTP and one for RTCP 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 65 of 770 Do not change this port at any time Map this port to port 5200 on the IP Phones Table 14 IP Line UDP Ports UDP Port Device 5200 5262 Media Card RTP packets configurable starting port number IP Phone s port matches it 5201 5263 Media Card RTCP packets into Media Card port number is RTP port number 1 5200 5246 ITG P 24 port line card RTP packets configurable starting port number IP Phone s port matches i
352. e values of the IP parameters that reside in NVRAM TLAN configuration commands Auto negotiate mode can be disabled if the ports on some data network switches and routers are manually configured For example configuring a port for 100BaseT full duplex can disable auto negotiation on the signaling link The Voice Gateway Media Card and the IP Phone default to half duplex mode when no auto negotiation signaling occurs The result is that the Voice Gateway Media Card and the IP Phone operate in half duplex mode while the switch is in full duplex mode Communication continues but random packet loss can occur which affects the correct operation and voice quality IMPORTANT Configure ports for auto negotiation auto sense IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 442 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Configure the speed and duplex setting of the TLAN connection using the following commands e tLanSpeedSet speed this command sets the speed of the TLAN network interface By default the interface auto negotiates to the highest speed supported by the switch If the switch is 10 100BaseT the network interface negotiates to 100BaseT Use this command to debug Ethernet speed related problems by forcing the interface to 10BaseT operation immediately The duplex mode setting is saved in NVRAM and read at start up The parameter speed is set to the following 10 disables auto negotiation and sets speed to 10
353. eader 0 or any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node Click Configuration gt Node gt Properties The Node Properties window opens Click the Configuration tab Select the card to be replaced Change the Management MAC to the MAC address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The MAC address is the Motherboard Ethernet address labeled on the faceplate of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card Click Change and then OK Select Leader 0 or any Voice Gateway Media Card in the node in the IP Telephony window Use the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options window opens Under Transmit options select the Transmit to Selected Nodes radio button and check the Node Properties to Active Leader check box Click Start transmit This updates the node properties on the active Leader card with the MAC Address of the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card The results of the transmit are displayed under Transmit control When the transmit is successful click Close 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 651 of 770 19 Inthe OTM IP Telephony window select View gt Refresh and verify that the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card state is showing Unequipped End of Procedure Replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card Follow the steps in Procedure 103 to replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card Procedure 103 Replacing a Follower
354. ed to manually add and configure IP Telephony nodes OTM 2 2 includes an IP Line 4 0 application that is used to configure nodes on CS 1000 or Meridian 1 systems Multiple IP Telephony nodes for IP Phones are configured and managed from the same OTM PC 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 255 of 770 Node definition A node is defined as a collection of Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards ITG P 24 port line cards and Media Card 8 port and 32 port line cards Each node in the network has a unique Node ID This Node ID is an integer value A node has only one primary or Leader Voice Gateway Media Card All the other Voice Gateway Media Cards are defined as Followers Note 1 All IP addresses and subnet mask data must be in dotted decimal format Convert subnet mask data from Classless Inter Domain CIDR format Note 2 Refer to Table 42 on page 199 for IP addresses and information required in this procedure WARNING OTM 2 2 does not support configuration of nodes which reside on a CS 1000 system However since OTM 2 2 is required for retrieval of Operational Measurement OM reports from nodes on these systems OTM is capable of being configured with basic network connection information of the node The necessary configuration to retrieve the OM reports is covered in Procedure 19 on page 256 through Procedure 23 on page 271 In these procedures pay special at
355. eeeaintelesageaeageses 710 Time out configurations 65 28h 4 ACR OR eee eRe 711 Cla PMNMINE te hec ache iae ead ehe gs Sebel ese aa 711 Unidirsciional packet HOW s gt idodeteadsitersisanatressaseed 712 Firmae VEO 6 cccescxced ieeeniagca EEN A EEREN 713 INStCheck OUI vio ko we eka eriei ee hand kire tikeh 714 This appendix describes the requirements of a Network Address Translation NAT router to enable it to support the CS 1000 Release 4 0 NAT Traversal feature For a NAT device to work correctly between an IP Phone and the CS 1000 system the following requirements must be met 1 A cone NAT must be used 2 The Private to Public mapping should have a long time out configured 3 If multiple IP Phones will be supported behind the same NAT router hairpinning must be supported IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 710 of 770 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature 4 The Private to Public mapping created by a NAT router must be kept alive by packets in only one direction standard in most NAT routers 5 The IP Phone must be running the correct minimum firmware version not a NAT device requirement but still important Most of the issues encountered can be confirmed using either an IP Phone behind the NAT device or a PC running the third party tool natcheck Note Nortel Networks is not affiliated in any manner with the natcheck tool and therefore is not liable or responsible for any pr
356. ement Manager 172 Introduction Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are supported on the IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 The IP Phone 2001 is not supported An IP Phone must be registered to a Signaling Server to access the Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List features The IP Phone Application Server ELAN interface IP address must be configured see IP Phone Application Server configuration and administration on page 152 IMPORTANT CPND must be configured as a Class of Service on the system to enable Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Personal Directory is controlled by the user who can enter or copy names to their personal directory delete entries or delete the entire list Callers List and Redial List are call log features The content of these lists is generated during call processing CPND must be configured as a Class of Service to generate the names in the logs Content cannot be changed however a user can delete or in some cases copy entries or lists Note Personal Directory is not a call log feature 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 147 of 770 Table 35 compares the Personal Directory with the Callers List and Redial List features Table 35 Comparison of Personal Directory with Callers List and Redial List Personal Callers Li
357. ename gt 3 If the upgrade process is successful the following is displayed Upgrade packet 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 100 0 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 tUpgradeXa 8051XA Upgrade completed OK tUpgradeXa Reboot the pack to run new loadware Note f the upgrade is not successful these messages do not display Repeat step 5 again 7 Reboot the card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 644 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance When the card boots up with version 8 0 software for instance the following messages are printed MC Firmware Rls 8 0 8051XA Firmware Version 4 11 05 November 2003 C Nortel Inc 2001 EPLD Version 1 0 64K External RAM detected 8K DPRAM detected All FPGAs are configured No security Device detected Bank 0 Checksum CAA3H SRAM test okay SDRAM Addr test okay SDRAM blank over End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 645 of 770 Replace the Media Card s CompactFlash The Media Card must have the CompactFlash card installed in order to be used as a Voice Gateway Media Card If the CompactFlash card is removed from the Media Card another CompactFlash card must be installed before using the Media Card If it is necessary to remove the CompactFlash card follow the steps in Procedure 101 To re install a CompactFlash card see Procedure 11 on page 2
358. enu 13 Default Dial in Setup Telco Options IP Address Supplied By CLID Authen None Dial in User No IP Pool Yes IP Start Addr 47 177 16 253 PPP Options Session Options Recv Authen PAP Input Filter Sets Compression No Output Filter Sets Mutual Authen No Idle Timeout 1200 PAP Login N A PAP Password N A Callback Budget Management Allocated Budget min Period hr Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle 19 Under Telco Options toggle CLIDAuthen None Preferred Required CLID requires a CO line subscribed for CLID service where available e Preferred means some dial in user profiles require CLID but others do not e Required means no dial in call is connected unless CLID is provided and user profiles require CLID for authentication 20 Under PPP Options toggle Recv Authen PAP Windows 9x Dial up Networking DUN is not compatible with CHAP PAP or CHAP on the Modem Router Calls are disconnected after a few minutes 21 Toggle Compression No Windows 9x DUN is not compatible with software compression on the Modem Router Calls are randomly disconnected 22 Toggle Mutual Authen No 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 741 of 770 Under IP Address Supplied By toggle Dial in User No and IP Pool Yes For IP Start Addr type in the ELAN IP address that will be assigned to the Dial
359. ephone FW from the expanded Software Upgrade menu The IP Telephone FW Upgrade window opens See Figure 131 IP Telephone FW Upgrade window N RTEL NETWORKS v System Status 9 Call Server Pip Telephony gt Configuration gt Network Numbering Plan V Software Upgrade 9 Voice Gateway Media Card LW 9 IP Telephone FW File Upload gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support Tools amp Logout 553 300 1 365 Site 192 168 1 50 gt Software Upgrade gt IP Telephone FW Upgrade Distribute to Nodes Distribute to Elements Open all nodes Close Allnodes Clear all Node IP 192 168 2 91 Total elements 1 Node IP 192 168 2 100 Total elements 1 Node IP 192 168 2 90 Total elements 1 Node IP 192 168 2 81 Total elements 2 Click a button to invoke a command Select File Expand the node containing the cards that are to receive the IP Phone firmware upgrade Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 403 of 770 6 Click the Distribute to Elements radio button in the upper right of the window 7 Select the card s to upgrade by selecting the check box to the left of the card information See Figure 127 on page 397 Note Element Manager can upgrade the firmware on a maximum of four cards at the same time 8 Inthe lower part of the window click the radio button next to the most current version of the
360. eptember 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 215 of 770 Figure 42 CompactFlash card locked into position End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 216 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Install the Media Card To install a Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 12 Procedure 12 Installing the Media Card 1 For each Media Card in the node identify the IPE card slot selected for the Media Card Use the information from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 198 and Table 42 on page 199 Table 47 Media Card installation by module type Meridian 1 Modules Media Card NT8D37BA EC IPE modules All available IPE card slots NT8D37AA DC IPE modules 0 4 8 and 12 2 Remove any existing I O panel cabling associated with any card previously installed in the selected card slot 3 Insert the Media Card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices Note 1 The red LED on the faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point the LED turns off Note 2 The card faceplate display window displays start up self test results T xx and status messages A display F xx indicates a failure of the self test Some failures indicate that the card must be replaced Note 3 Refer
361. er OS Time Date 04 03 2004 Time 09 07 43 Use logout to logout Idle session timeout 20 minutes IPL gt Password Guessing Protection IP Line 4 0 provides protection against password guessing This protection blocks a hacker from attempting to log into the Voice Gateway Media Card s shell by making repeated attempts to guess the shell user ID and password The password guessing protection is applicable to either a tip session direct maintenance port connected TTY session or a Telnet session The password guessing protection feature is described as follows e There is a login failure threshold of 3 and a lockout period of 10 minutes This is not user configurable e Password guessing protection is enabled by default when the card starts the first time The protection can be disabled and re enabled at the VxWorks shell Entering the shellLoginProtectSet 0 command disables the protection and shellLoginProtectSet 1 enables it 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 423 of 770 e When the login failure threshold is exceeded by 3 consecutive failed login attempts the system raises an ITG1038 critical alarm This alarm is sent to indicate the card s login has been locked due to too many incorrect password entries Alarm value ITG alarm 38 perceivedSeverity Critical probableCause Unauthorized maximum access attempts Alarm text IPL login protection login locked
362. er SNMP Configuration 2 ip Telephony gt Network Address Translation NAT gt Network Numbering Plan Since a backup and restore of the IP Phone Application Server s database can be performed it is necessary to configure information to support the backup restore functionality The following parameters are configured see Figure 20 on page 154 e ELAN interface IP address of the IP Phone Application Server where the database is located e checkbox to turn on off the remote backup functionality e IP address of the server where the backup is saved e path filename user ID and password to support the backup restore functionality IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 154 of 770 Figure 20 Personal Directories Server Configuration window NORTEL NETWORKS v System Status gt Call Server gt ip Telephony V Configuration gt Call Server Pip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support gt Tools Logout Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Site 47 11 214221 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Personal Directories Server Configuration Server Configuration Server IP Address Backup Configuration Perform scheduled remote backup Remote backup time of day hicmm Remote backup IP address Remote backup path Remote backup file name Remote backup userid Remot
363. er zones are configured or all calls associated with zone 0 are blocked 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 231 of 770 Table 49 LD 117 bandwidth management zone configuration Command Description NEW ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Create a new zone where xxx zone number 0 255 p1 Intrazone available bandwidth 0 10000 100000 Kbps p2 Intrazone preferred strategy BQ Best Quality or BB Best Bandwidth p3 Interzone available bandwidth 0 10000 100000 Kbps p4 Interzone preferred strategy BQ for Best Quality or BB for Best Bandwidth p5 Zone resource type shared or private New ZONE xxx Create a new zone with default values for the parameters p1 10000 Kbps p2 BQ p3 10000 Kbps p4 BQ p5 shared CHG ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Change parameters of a zone All parameters must be re entered even those that are unchanged OUT ZONE xxx Remove a zone DIS ZONE xxx Disable a zone When a zone is disabled no new calls are established inside from or toward this zone ENL ZONE xxx Enable a zone PRT ZONE xxx Print zone and bandwidth information where xxx specifies a zone If no zone is specified information for all zones is printed PRT ZONE ALL also prints information for all zones PRT ZONE ALL IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page
364. er 0 0 0 0 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 345 of 770 d Management LAN ELAN subnet mask Enter the Management LAN subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask that is used along with the ELAN subnet IP address to identify to which subnet the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs e Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask Enter the Voice LAN subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask that is used along with the TLAN IP address to identify the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs Note Do not click Submit until all the node information has been entered If the Submit button is clicked prematurely the Node Summary window reappears To continue the configuration click the Edit button to return to the Node Edit window End of Procedure Configure SNMP trap destinations and community name string access For more information on SNMP refer to Simple Network Management Protocol Description and Maintenance 553 3001 519 Configuring SNMP trap destinations To configure the SNMP trap destinations for the Signaling Server and Voice Gateway Media Cards in Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 42 on page 346 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 346 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Procedure 42 Configuring SNMP trap destinations 1 On the Node gt Edi
365. er can run on the same Signaling Server as Element Manager If more than 1000 users are supported then the IP Phone Application Server must run on a separate Signaling Server preferably a Follower with no co located applications Therefore it is necessary to configure in Element Manager the ELAN interface IP address of the specific Signaling Server where the IP Phone Application Server is installed Note The IP Phone Application Server can be shared across multiple IP Telephony nodes on the same Call Server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 153 of 770 Configure the IP Phone Application Server and remote backup Note If the IP Phone Application Server must support more than 1000 users refer to Configure IP Phone Application Server on a separate Signaling Server on page 156 The IP Phone Application Server and remote backup configuration are configured in Element Manager by clicking in the navigation tree Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Personal Directories Server Configuration See Figure 19 Figure 19 Personal Directory Server Configuration NE RTEL NETWORKS Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration V System Status gt call Server gt ip Telephony Node Summary Personal Directories Server Configuration Personal Directories User Profile V Configuration Quality Of Service Thresholds QoS gt call Serv
366. er card s C drive The file was previously FTPed to C upgradeXa lt ITG ELAN IPaddr gt userid password lt path gt lt fwfilename gt File is located on the OTM PC ou 33 66 99 upgradeXa lt PC s IP addr gt itguser itguser lt fw_filename gt File is located on a network FTP server upgradeXa lt server s IP addr gt lt uid gt lt pswd gt lt path gt lt fw_filename gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 640 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance If the upgrade process is successful the following is displayed Upgrade packet 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 tUpgradeXa 8051XA Upgrade completed OK tUpgradeXa Reboot the pack to run new loadware Note f these messages do not display the upgrade was not successful Repeat step 2 again Do not continue with steps 4 and 5 3 Reboot the card if both of the following are true e the download is successful e the software version on the card that was checked in step 1 is version 4 0 or later However if the software version is prior to version 4 0 enter the following commands xaSend 0 0x11 W 05555 AA W 02AAA 55 W 05555 80 W 05555 AA W 02AAA 55 W 05555 30 Note 1 There is a space after xaSend and the letter W No other spaces are allowed All letters are in uppercase Note 2 Ignore any syntax error messages that print out after the xaSend co
367. er card including the IP address gateway subnet mask boot method to static and Leader bit in NVRAM This one command does all the necessary actions to make a Leader clearLeader Clears the Leader information in NVRAM sets the boot method to use BOOTP and removes the old configuration files This command makes a Leader card into a Follower card tLanDuplexSet Sets the TLAN Ethernet duplex mode tLanSpeedSet Sets the TLAN Ethernet speed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 595 of 770 Reset commands Table 74 lists the Reset IPL gt commands Table 74 Reset commands Signaling IPL gt Command Description Server cardReset Resets a Voice Gateway Media Card This command performs a warm reboot of the Voice Gateway Media Card The card must be in the OOS state to use this command isetReset tn 1s cu Resets the IP Phone on Option 51C 61C 81 81C isetReset tn c u Resets the IP Phone on Small Systems and CS 1000 systems isetResetAll Resets all registered IP Phones resetOM Resets the operational measurement file timer This command resets all operational measurement parameters collected since last log dump lastResetReason Displays the reason for the last card reset IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 596 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance DSP commands Table 75 lists the
368. er number Also ensure that all IP Telephony nodes connected to the same TLAN subnet have a unique node number regardless of the OTM site Meridian 1 system and customer number e Active leader management ELAN IP Enter the active Leader management IP address field for the existing node f SNMP community read write name Enter the SNMP read write community name Note The SNMP read community name cannot be used 5 Click Start retrieve The results of the retrieval are shown under Retrieve control The node properties are retrieved from the active Leader The card properties are retrieved from Leader 0 6 Click Close when the download is complete 7 Inthe IP Telephony window select the newly added node in the top part of the window 8 Refresh the card status View gt Refresh and verify that the cards in the newly added node are responding A new node has been created by retrieving data from another node 9 Double click on the new node in the IP Telephony window The Node Properties window opens for the newly added node 10 Inspect each tab in the node properties and verify the data is correct and consistent with the node from which the data was retrieved 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 503 of 770 11 Click the Configuration tab and ensure the Host names information IP addresses and TN are consistent End of Procedure IP Line CLI access using Telnet or local
369. erloops to virtual cards is the same as mapping phantom superloops to phantom cards See Table 52 Table 52 Virtual superloop virtual card mapping for Small Systems CS 1000S systems Table 53 lists the virtual superloop and virtual card mapping for the CS 1000S system Table 53 Virtual superloop virtual card mapping for CS 1000S systems LD 97 PRT TYPE SUPL prints the implicit virtual phantom or DECT cards for a virtual phantom or DECT superloop 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 243 of 770 LD 21 LUU allows the user to list unused units of a specified type iset vtrk phantom DECT in a specified range of TNs for example Virtual TNs Similarly LUC of a specified type virtual phantom or DECT prints a list of unused cards on configured superloops Configure IP Phone features in LD 11 The existing License header that is printed at the start of LD 11 includes the new License limit for the IP Phone Refer to Table 43 on page 200 to configure the IP Phone features in LD 11 Table 54 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 1 of 3 Prompt Response Description New Change Print Out Copy Move For IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050 The system accepts this response if it is equipped with packages 88 and 170 The IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 I
370. erring the configuration second node For a second or subsequent node the process to transfer the node configuration to the cards consists of the following steps 1 Set the Leader IP address See Procedure 51 on page 373 2 Transmit the node properties Procedure 52 on page 375 3 Configure the Follower card See Procedure 53 on page 379 Setting the Leader IP address Follow the steps in Procedure 51 to set the IP address of the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 373 of 770 Procedure 51 Setting the Leader IP address for a second or subsequent node 1 Access the IPL gt CLI by connecting the COM port of a PC to the RS 232 serial maintenance port on the faceplate of the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card with an NTAG81CA PC Maintenance cable If required use an NTAG81BA Maintenance Extender cable between the PC Maintenance cable and the PC Alternatively connect the NTAG81BA Maintenance Extender cable to the female DB 9 connector of the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Ports cable for a more permanent connection to the Voice Gateway Media Card serial maintenance port Note Never connect two terminals to the faceplate and I O panel breakout cable serial maintenance port connectors at the same time Use the following communication parameters for the TTY terminal emulation on the PC e 9600 baud e 8bits e no parity e o
371. erties window configure the following a b c Site Name Enter the name of the site Short Name Enter a short name for the site Under Site Location add the Address City State Province Country and Zip Postal Code of the site Under Contact Information add the Name Phone Number Job Title and any Comments for the site contact person s IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 260 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 3 Click Apply The Add System button located in the upper right corner of the New Site Properties window is enabled 4 Click the Add System button The Add System dialog box opens See Figure 58 Figure 58 Add System Add System f System T CSE 1000 Succession 1000 Succession 1000M Generic 5 Inthe Add System dialog box select the system and click OK The New System Properties window opens See Figure 59 on page 261 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 261 of 770 Figure 59 New System Properties window New System Properties E MyCompany Main Office 6 Inthe New System Properties window configure the following a System Name Enter the name of the system b Short Name Enter a short name for the system 7 Click Apply The System Properties window opens 8 Click the Customers tab and then click the Add button The Add Customer dialog wind
372. escription Installation and Operation Page 114 of 770 Features Table 28 IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 intrazone data output Part 2 of 2 e en oO e Table 29 describes the interzone IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16output data Table 29 IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 interzone data output Part 1 of 2 number of the zone interzone calls made interzone calls blocked fpo o interzone peak bandwidth pao interzone average bandwidth usage 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 115 of 770 Table 29 IP Phone Zone Traffic Report 16 interzone data output Part 2 of 2 e en o ooo IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 116 of 770 Features The following is an example of the output from Traffic Report 16 gt ld 2 TFC000 invs 16 0000 TFS016 ZONE 003 INTRAZONE 00005 00000 00002 00000 00000 00051 00000 00020 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 INTERZONE 00003 00000 00007 00006 00000 00006 00000 00006 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 ZONE 006 INTRAZONE 00008 00000 00001 00000 00000 00050 00000 00048 00001 00000 00000 00000 00000 00002 00025 00000 INTERZONE 00003 00000 00007 00006 00000 00007 00000 00007 00001 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00007 00000 All other commands SOPS COPS TOPS function in the normal manner Table 30 shows the SOPS COPS and TOPS commands Table 30 SOPS COPS TOPS commands tops 1234514 display the current s
373. escription Installation and Operation Page 610 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Example 3 To print the information on the IP Phones whose IP address starts with 47 11 216 enter the following gt prt ipdn 47 11 216 The following output is printed IP 47 11 216 138 CUST 01 TN 063 20 TYPE i2002 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4120 I2002_Cust_1 VLN63_20 IP 47 11 216 140 CUST 00 TN 061 02 TYPE i2002 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4002 I2002_Cust_0 VLN61_02 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 611 of 770 Example 4 Alternatively to print the information on the IP Phones whose IP address starts with 47 11 216 enter the following gt prt ipdn 47 11 216 0 The following output is printed IP 47 11 216 138 CUST 01 TN 063 20 TYPE i2002 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4120 I2002_Cust_1 VLN63_20 IP 47 11 216 140 CUST 00 TN 061 02 TYPE i2002 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 00 SCR 4002 I2002_Cust_0 VLN61_02 Graceful TPS commands Table 83 and Table 84 on page 615 lists the commands used to gracefully disable the LTPS and Voice Gateway services and the commands to enable these services after they have been disabled IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 612 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance The following Graceful TPS CLI commands are available at the IP Line shell Table 82 Graceful TPS commands
374. et Hostname This is the Host name 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 367 of 770 k l m Card TN Enter the card slot number between 1 50 Card processor type Choose either Pentium or Media Card Select Pentium if using the ITG P 24 port line card dual slot card Select Media Card if using the Media Card 32 port or 8 port line card single slot card H323 ID The H323 ID within IP Line 4 0 is for the Virtual Office Media Gateway 1000B feature Keep the H323 ID the same for all the elements within one node Enable set TPS Select the check box System name Enter the name of the system System location Enter the location where the system resides System contact Enter a contact name and telephone number 3 To add additional cards to the node click the Add button again and enter the new card information Repeat this step for each card that is being added to the node New cards appear under the Cards menu as they are added See Figure 108 Figure 108 Cards added to the system Card 47 11 221 48 Properties Remove End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 368 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Submit and transfer the node information To submit node changes and transfer the changes to the Call Server follow the steps in Procedure 50 Procedure 50 Submitting and tr
375. ete a Voice Gateway Media Card from the node on page 476 e Delete the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card from the node on page 478 e Change the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in OTM on page 479 e Replacing a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card on page 649 End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 469 of 770 Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node To add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node follow the steps in Procedure 72 CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 72 Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node 1 Choose a card slot for the new card Note the TN 2 Configure IPTN on the system in LD 14 at the Call Server 3 Install the I O cables for connection to the ELAN and TLAN subnets on the selected card slot 4 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder 5 Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 6 Double click the node in the upper portion of the window The Node Properties window opens 7 Click the Configuration tab See Figure 146 on page 470 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 470 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 146 Node Properties Configuration tab Node Properties Bellville OPT41 Customer 0 Node 550 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Rou
376. etwork Australia JATE Safety Network Japan 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix D Product integrity Page 757 of 770 Electro Magnetic Containment Electro Magnetic Containment EMC compliance requirements depend on the regulations in effect for the country where the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 system is located CISPR 22 Class B defines more stringent EMC limits than CISPR 22 Class A requirements that is equipment that meets CISPR 22 Class B exceeds CISPR 22 Class A requirements and can be used globally The ITG P 24 port line card and the Media Cards are approved for CISPR 22 Class A and FCC Part 15 Class A limits and approved to CISPR 22 Class B limits with the following configurations e ITG P 24 port line card For Small Systems there is no limit to the number of ITG P 24 port line cards that can be installed on a shelf to meet CISPR 22 Class A and FCC Part 15 Class A limits However to meet CISPR 22 Class B limits there is a limit of two cards for each shelf For Large Systems there is no limit to the number of ITG P 24 port line cards that can be installed on a shelf to meet CISPR 22 Class A and FCC Part 15 Class A limits and CISPR 22 Class B limits e Media Card For Small Systems there is no limit to the number of Media Cards that can be installed on a shelf to meet CISPR 22 Class A and FCC Part 15 Class A limits and CISPR 22 Class B limits If the Media Cards are installed in
377. ew atinwisks 694 Add the converted cards to an IP Telephony node 697 Manually add converted Voice Gateway Media Cards to the existing IP Telephony NOS ccscsetee eededeadengeaw as kok iain 698 Import all converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into a new IP Telephony MOUS a 5 Sai cee ae hake eG kh a Reena ee we ee kee ehe adobe 702 Media Card 32 port trunk cards and ITG P 24 port trunk cards that are no longer being used as IP Trunk cards can be converted to Voice Gateway Media Cards running the IP Line 4 0 application Recommendation Nortel Networks recommends using the OTM 2 2 ITG ISDN trunk service used to manage the trunk node to download the IP Line 4 0 application loadware to the existing trunk cards IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 694 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Post conversion After the trunk cards have been converted to run the IP Line 4 0 application perform the following actions e manually add the converted Voice Gateway Media Cards to an IP Telephony node e configure the corresponding VGW TNs on the Call Server To perform these actions using OTM 2 2 refer to Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node on page 469 To perform these actions using Element Manager refer to Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node on page 523 Note ITG Trunk 2 x nodes that contain Media Cards must be upgraded to IP Trunk 3 0 and rebooted This is ne
378. eway IP address foo Hostname Hostname Card TN Card processor type Succession Media Card gt H323 ID Enable set TPS System name System location System contact gt Signaling Servers Save and Transfer Cancel Enter the Card Properties data a Role Element Manager reads the role from the card configuration b Management LAN ELAN IP address This is the ELAN IP address for the card Element Manager and the system use this address to communicate with the card c Management LAN ELAN MAC address This is the motherboard Ethernet address from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 199 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 10 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 525 of 770 Voice LAN IP TLAN address This is the TLAN IP address for the card Voice LAN gateway TLAN IP address This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN subnet Card TN Enter the card slot number between 1 50 Card processor type Choose either Pentium or Media Card Select Pentium if using the ITG P 24 port line card dual slot card or select Media Card if using the Media Card single slot card H323 ID The H323 ID in IP Line 4 0 is for the Virtual Office MG 1000B feature Keep the H323 ID the same for all the elements within one node System name Enter the name of the system System location Enter the location where the system resides System contac
379. f 770 Additional CLI commands have been added enabling any task to be marked as critical or non critical regardless of its default designation This could be used for example to mark a misbehaving task as non critical to avoid a card reset This would enable the problem to be debugged The maintenance audit is available only for the IP Line 4 0 application running on the ITG P 24 port and Media Card line cards It is not available on the Signaling Server as it does not have the exception handler stack dump and syslog file functions of the other cards Critical task list All application tasks default to the critical task list These applications include TPS VTM SET VTILIB UMS UMC RDP VGW RTP RTOP ELC baseMMintTask and A07 The following VxWorks system tasks are also on the critical task list tShell tNetTask tExcTask and tTelnetd All other tasks are on the non critical task list The monitor task is called tMonTask Any data entered at the CLI that deviates the operation from the default is saved in the C CONFIG AUDIT INI text file The contents of the file are loaded as the application boots up and provides the required non volatile storage for entered settings It is applicable only to the card on which it resides It can be manually copied from one card to all other cards in the node if desired History file A history file is created when the card starts The text file is called audit his and it is sto
380. f 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager 6 10 11 12 13 14 Install the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slot in the system To do this a Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate b Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push the card until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices Note 1 When cards are installed the red LED on the faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point in turns off If the LED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit replace the card Note 2 Observe the faceplate maintenance display to see start up self test results and status messages A display of the type F xx indicates a failure Refer to Table 64 on page 569 for a listing of the ITG P 24 port line card s display codes and to Table 65 on page 571 for a listing of the Media Card s display codes Go to the VxWorks shell Set the Voice Gateway Media Card as a Leader using the ELAN IP address and subnet mask Restart the card The card obtains the ELAN IP address and subnet mask In Element Manager click Configuration in the navigation tree In the Configuration menu click IP Telephony The IP Telephony window opens Click Node Summary The Node Summary window opens Cli
381. failure of the IP Phone the Voice Gateway Media Card or the IP connection is detected Network Signaling Diagnostics Network Signaling Diagnostics can be run as part of the midnight routines defined in LD 30 Fore more information refer to Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 IP Phone Keep Alive When the Voice Gateway Media Card detects that the IP Phone has been disconnected the Voice Gateway Media Card logs the event and sends an UNREGISTER message to the system for that IP Phone Card or ELAN subnet failure When the Call Server detects a loss of connection with the Voice Gateway Media Card the Call Server logs a message and unregisters all the IP Phones and gateway channels associated with that Voice Gateway Media Card Maintenance audit IP Line 4 0 provides a background audit that watches for tasks that go into a suspended state Under normal operation a task should not go into a suspended state However if it occurs the card s processing is affected IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 628 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance If the audit task finds a suspended task it performs the following actions e outputs a stack and register dump to the debug port e outputs a file on the C drive e resets the card This function provides an automatic way to return the card to service and provides critical debug information The information is output to the EXCPLOG n files where n is
382. fic from the IP Phone By lowering the NAT Keep Alive Timer value in the Call Server keep alive messages are sent more frequently to keep the mapping alive gt ld 117 gt chg nkt 20 If lowering the NAT Keep Alive Timer value to the minimum value of 20 seconds doesn t stop the time outs try replacing the NAT device Hairpinning Hairpinning occurs when an IP Phone behind a NAT router can send packets to the Public IP address and Port of another IP Phone connected to the same NAT router Determine if hairpinning is supported on the NAT router IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 712 of 770 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Confirm using natcheck Run the natcheck program Look for the message UDP loopback translation YES GOOD for peer to peer If this messages prints then a two way speech path should be available between two IP Phones behind the NAT device See Figure 216 Figure 216 Speech path Packet from Packet from 192 163 1 2 1402 69 156 96 28 572384 to to 69 156 96 28 57285 NAT 69 156 96 28 57285 PC Router IP Address Private IP 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 1 Facket from Public IP 69 155 96 28 57284 69 156 96 28 to 192 168 1 2 1403 Confirm using IP Phone Connect two IP Phones to the same NAT device and call from one phone to the other Confirm that a two way speech path is achieved during the call Unidirectional packet flow Conf
383. fice Home Office SOHO environments Supported Cone NAT routers include e Full Cone e Restricted Cone e Port Restricted Cone Note A Cone NAT router with more than one IP Phone connected to it must support hairpinning Hairpinning occurs when an IP Phone behind a NAT router can send packets to the Public IP address and port of another IP Phone connected to the same NAT router IMPORTANT Symmetric NAT routers are not supported If the IP Phone is behind a Symmetric NAT IP Phone registration is unsuccessful and the IP Phone displays a NAT Error ITG3053 message Echo Servers NAT Traversal is a function of the CS 1000 Release 4 0 software and not a function of the NAT router NAT Traversal uses two Echo Servers residing on the Signaling Server Echo Server 1 detects the presence of a NAT router while Echo Server 2 detects the type of NAT router Both Echo Server 1 and Echo Server 2 are required for the NAT Traversal feature to function properly If a compatible NAT router is detected successful IP Phone registration occurs and the software invokes the NAT Mapping Keep Alive function to prevent loss of the IP connection If a non compatible NAT is detected an error is displayed on the IP Phone s display and the IP Phone is not allowed to register 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 63 of 770 Mapping When an IP Phone is used in a private network behind a NAT device the NAT router str
384. for Leader in the Cards menu of the Edit window yy yy yy yy Gateway IP address Enter the same IP address that was entered in the Management LAN gateway IP address field in the Node menu of the Edit window If there is none enter the following 0 0 0 0 2Z 2Z 2Z 22 Management LAN subnet mask Enter the same address that was entered in the Management LAN subnet mask field Node menu of the Edit window Note 2 This step assumes that the new IP Telephony node has already been configured in Element Manager 7 Reboot the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card At the IPL gt prompt enter cardReset or press the Reset button on the faceplate of the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card WARNING Do not use a pencil to reset the Voice Gateway Media Card The graphite carbon can create an electrical short circuit on the board Check the maintenance display for T 22 to confirm a successful reboot 9 In Element Manager click System Status gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information pages opens 10 Expand the node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 375 of 770 11 Click the Leader card s Status button to check the status of the card Otherwise verify LAN connections and IP configuration End of Procedure Transmit node properties To transmit the node properties to the Leader follow the steps in Procedure 52 Procedure 52 Transmitting nod
385. for a card the Status column displays Complete If the transfer is unsuccessful the Status column displays Fail 7 Reset the Leader card in the following situations e ifthe Leader card is a new card out of the box e ifthe Leader card is a card that is being configured for the first time as a Leader card e ifthe Leader card s IP address has changed In the navigation tree click System Status gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information pages opens Click the Reset button associated with the Leader card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 378 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Note 1 If any of the Signaling Server IP address information is changed the Signaling Server must be rebooted Note 2 Alternatively restart the card by entering the cardReset command at the IPL gt prompt or by pushing the Reset button on the card s faceplate WARNING Do not use a pencil to reset the Voice Gateway Media Card The graphite carbon can create an electrical short circuit on the board End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 379 of 770 Configure the Follower cards To configure a Follower card follow the steps in Procedure 53 Procedure 53 Configuring the Follower cards 1 Check the displays on the card faceplate e After successfully rebooting the Leader card is now fu
386. g Element Manager Page 409 of 770 Element Manager can also be used to configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords See Setting the IP Phone Installer Password on page 558 Import node configuration from an existing node It is possible to import a node and its configuration data from an existing node into Element Manager For example if Node 151 exists but does not exist on the Call Server then Node 151 can be imported into Element Manager Once imported the node configuration data can be updated and edited Procedure 62 Importing node files 1 Inthe navigation tree click Configuration and then IP Telephony 2 Click Node Summary The Node Summary window opens 3 Click the Import Node Files button The Import Node Files window opens See Figure 134 on page 410 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 410 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 134 Import node files Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt Import Node Files Management LAN ELAN IP address of the leader fram where to retrieve the node files Click a button to invoke a command 4 Enter the Management LAN ELAN subnet IP Address of the Leader in the text box This address is used to retrieve the node files 5 Click the Import button If the node already exists on the Call Server a message appears indicating that the node
387. g the Media Card on page 216 Replacing the existing I O Panel Filter Connector on page 218 Installing the NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN serial interface cable on page 224 for the ITG P Line Card Installing the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter onto the Media Card on page 228 for the Media Card Configuring the ELAN network interface IP address for the active ELNK on page 229 Equipment considerations This section lists the required and optional equipment that can be used to install configure and maintain the Voice Gateway Media Cards and IP Phone products Required equipment The required equipment includes the following a PC to manage IP Line 4 0 with the following installed OTM 2 2 must be installed for a Meridian 1 system Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or later to run Element Manager for CS 1000 systems local TTY or terminal in a switch room This is required for Leader configuration two shielded CAT 5 Ethernet cables to connect the Voice Gateway Media Card to an external switch recommended or hub equipment 10 100BaseT network interface optional auto sensing to support TLAN and 10BaseT ELAN network connections 10 100BaseT network interface optional auto sensing in each location where an IP Phone resides serial cables IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 204 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Optional equipment The op
388. g the power up or reset sequence The LED remains lit until the card is enabled by the system If the LED remains on the self test failed the card is disabled or the card rebooted Reset button Press the Reset button to reset the card without having to cycle power to the card This button is normally used after a software upgrade to the card or to clear a fault condition IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 40 of 770 Description MAC address label The MAC address label on the card s faceplate shows the motherboard and daughterboard addresses The ELAN network interface address corresponds to the Management MAC address The Management MAC address for each card is assigned during manufacturing and is unchangeable The ELAN network interface MAC address is the MOTHERBOARD Ethernet address found on the label The MAC address label on the ITG P 24 port line card is similar to the following example ETHERNET ADDRESS MOTHERBOARD 00 60 38 8c 03 d5 DAUGHTERBOARD 00 60 38 01 b3 cb TLAN network interface activity LEDs labeled NWK Status LEDs The two NWK Status LEDs display TLAN network interface activity e Green the LED is on if the carrier link pulse is received from the TLAN network interface switch e Yellow the LED flashes when there is data activity on the TLAN network interface During heavy traffic the yellow LED can stay continuously lit Note There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN
389. ger Figure 162 System Utility gt Call Server Backup Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt Call Server System Utility gt Call Server Backup Action Backup x Submit Cancel 3 Select Backup from the Action drop down list Click the Submit button or click Cancel to cancel the backup The window displays messages indicating Backup in progress Please wait 5 Click OK in the EDD complete dialog box See Figure 163 on page 519 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 519 of 770 Figure 163 EDD complete Microsoft Internet Explorer x AN EDD is complete Click OK to view the results The Backup function then displays information in a tabular form indicating the actions that were performed End of Procedure Restore the backed up files The Call Server Restore function restores the backed up files from the internal backup device to the primary device The Restore function performs the same task as the RIB CLI command in LD 43 To restore the Call Server data follow the steps in Procedure 86 Procedure 86 Restoring the Call Server data 1 Click System Utility in the navigation tree 2 Click Restore The Call Server Restore window opens See Figure 164 on page 520 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 520 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 164 System Utility gt Restore Site 192 168
390. git The IP Phones are distributed among the nodes by programming different S1 and S2 IP addresses into the IP Phones The IP Phones register to the primary Connect Server the S1 IP address if possible If a network outage or equipment failure prevents the registration to the primary Connect Server the IP Phone can register to a secondary Connect Server the S2 IP address This feature enables a node s registered IP Phones to spread across the spare IP Phone registration capacity of the other nodes in the system in the event of a network outage or equipment failure Example For example the installer configures two nodes on a system with Node IDs 3431 and 3432 An IP Phone configured with Node ID 343 can register with either node If the IP Phone presented one of the following Node IDs it would be rejected for registration e 3 e 34 e 3433 The TN must still match before the IP Phone is allowed to register If the customer does not want to use the Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes feature programming 2 or 4 digit Node IDs retains the exact match requirement IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 144 of 770 Features 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 145 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Contents This section contains information on the following topics rodicio 3 ein og Nese eka odadse eadreeanweederseweeteea 146 Wiel CCE ep ese e hos thd CESRNWEROT
391. gsscen420845h0deines 250 Node electian THIEN ceecd any ekad itmir esi i eeu teas 251 Introduction This chapter explains how to install and perform the initial configuration of new IP Telephony nodes Voice Gateway Media Cards ITG P 24 port and Media Card line cards and associated cables Before installing an IP Telephony node refer to Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 for information on IP network engineering guidelines IMPORTANT The maximum number of Voice Gateway Media Cards that can be installed in each node is 30 When more than 30 Voice Gateway Media Cards are needed on a single CS 1000 system then multiple nodes must be used The maximum number of Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards that can be combined within a node is 35 Meridian 1 If configuring IP Line 4 0 on a Meridian 1 the remainder of the configuration of IP Line data is completed using Optivity Telephony Manager OTM 2 2 CS 1000 If configuring IP Line 4 0 on a CS 1000 system the remainder of the configuration of IP Line data is completed using Element Manager Installation and configuration procedures The following is a list of procedures in this chapter e Installing the ITG P 24 port line card on page 208 e Installing the CompactFlash card on the Media Card on page 210 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 203 of 770 Installin
392. gt Personal Directories User Profile Configuration Customer Directory Number Number DN UserID EF rsd Copy to L Mm UserID Submit Copy Personal Directories Cancel Enter the User ID of the user from which the Personal Directory is being copied and the User ID of the user who will receive the Personal Directory copy Click Submit Click Cancel to cancel the action End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 176 of 770 Figure 34 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Delete a Personal Directory Callers List Redial List or user preferences To delete a Personal Directory Redial List Callers List or User Preferences follow the steps in Procedure 9 Procedure 9 Deleting a Personal Directory Callers List Redial List or user preferences 1 Select Delete Personal Directories from the drop down list from the drop down list in the Personal Directories User Profile Configuration window The Delete Personal Directories window opens See Figure 34 Delete Personal Directories window NORTEL NETWORKS v System Status gt Call Server ip Telephony v Configuration gt Call Server gt ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support Tools A Logout 2 Site 192 168 1 52 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Personal Directories
393. gure 45 on page 226 is called the A0852632 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter It replaces the single NTMF94EA ELAN TLAN RS 232 Serial Maintenance I O interface cable octopus cable The adapter breaks out the signals from the I O connector to the following e ELAN network interface e TLAN network interface e one RS 232 local console port IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 226 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 45 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter TLAN Ru 45 port ELAN RJ 45 port RS 232 Connector Identification Label 50 pin connector On Large Systems the NT8D81AA cable is used to bring all 24 Tip and Ring pairs to the I O panel The NTCW84JA I O panel mounting block must be installed on Large Systems before the A0852632 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter is installed Refer to Figure 45 To ensure proper connection install the adapter securely otherwise connectivity could be lost 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 227 of 770 EMC Shielding Kit An ITG EMC shielding kit NTVQ83AA must be installed on the ELAN and TLAN network interface cables to meet regulatory requirements at the installation site As shown in Figure 46 a ferrite must be placed on both the ELAN and TLAN network interface CATS Ethernet cables during installation Cable ties
394. gure 63 New Node General tab ew Rode IUO General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Node Location m Network Connections OTM site A OTM system x Voice LAN Node IP Customer Management LAN gateway IP a ee Management LAN subnet mask System Type Meridian 1 Unknown Voice LAN subnet mask IPL release IPL 4 0 SNMP parameters Last modified IV Synchronize with PBX system during Update System Data Last downloaded SysName l Node sync status SysLocation l Converts SysContact l OK Cancel Apply Help ok 5 On the General tab under Node Location a From the drop down lists select an OTM site OTM system and Customer number 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 267 of 770 b Type in a Node number one to four digits The Node Number field in the tab corresponds to the Node ID field in the IP Phone configuration When defining the node number determine if the Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line Nodes functionality is required see Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes on page 142 If it is required factor the requirement into the node number assignment process CAUTION The Voice Gateway Media Cards identify themselves with a node using the node number If there are multiple IP Telephony nodes shar
395. h increment of this counter indicates an IP Phone never received the Discover Port Mapping Ack response from the Echo Server all 10 attempts failed The two peg counts give an indication of the interaction this LTPS is having with the Echo Server It is not a direct sign of the health of the Echo Server network conditions for IP Phones registered to this LTPS may be preventing communication with this Echo Server while another LTPS s IP Phones have no problem The echoServerShow command helps understand why a particular IP Phone registered toa LTPS may be having difficulties or to uncover patterns of communication problems between IP Phones and Echo Servers A sample output is shown in Figure 8 on page 81 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Figure 8 echoServerShow sample output echoserverShow Configured Actual LTPS request sent Failed resp rec d Configured Actual LTPS request sent 82201 Failed resp rec d D NAT Timeout 30 seconds Features Page 81 of 770 TLAN IP this card 47 11 212 60 10000 node IP other card When the echoServerShow command with the reset parameter 99 is entered the counter values are displayed and then reset If the echoServerShow command is entered again and no requests have since been sent the counter values are displayed as 0 A sample output is shown in Figure 9 on page 82 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 82 of 770 Features Figure 9
396. hanges must also be co ordinated with the following e Management LAN gateway and other IP devices on the ELAN subnet for example OTM if it is local e any other devices on the ELAN subnet and the customer s enterprise network that could need to communicate with IP Line e devices that are looking to receive SNMP traps Voice LAN subnet mask Coordinate with Voice LAN gateway router When changing the Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask the change must be coordinated with changing the subnet mask of the Voice LAN TLAN gateway router interface Click Apply Select the Configuration tab See Figure 150 on page 482 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 482 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 150 Node Properties Configuration tab Node Properties Bellville OPT41 Customer 0 Node 550 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Define the list of cards for this node To create the list enter the values and click Add Select a card in the list for change or delete m Card properties Card role Card TN fos Management IP faz 11 221 20 Card Type SMC TG 54 gt Management MAC 90 26 D8 D6 88 FO Host name a Voice IP Juz 11 151 238 Voice LAN gateway IP Juz 11 151 129 Syne status Transmitted Add Change Delete MAC address Leader 47 11 221 20 00 20 D8 D0 88 FO 47 11 151 238 47 11 151 1
397. he prompt IPIE pbxLink connection failure detection IP Line 4 0 introduces pbxLink connection failure detection The pbxLink connection failure detection feature provides a means of detecting the link status of Voice Gateway Media Cards An alarm is generated if the pbxLink is not detected after a warm or cold start of the Call Server The Call Server monitors the pbxLink The Call Server maintains a list of all known registered elements Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards When booted a Call Server has a 5 minute delay to enable these known elements to re establish contact with the Call Server If a known element fails to register with the Call Server an ELANO0028 alarm is generated If an unknown Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card registers with the Call Server an ELAN0029 alarm is generated 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 97 of 770 Displaying pbxLink information Element Manager For CS 1000 systems use the Element Manager System Status gt IP Telephony gt Node gt Gen Cmds gt Group pbxLink gt Command pbxLinkShow window to display the pbxLink information CLI For a Meridian or CS 1000 system use the LD 117 STAT SERV command at the Command Line Interface CLI of the Call Server to display the pbxLink information LD 117 STAT SERV enhancement The suite of STAT SERV Statistic Services commands enables a technician to display link status information for
398. he IP Line application Case 2 The following excerpt from the booting sequence indicates the Voice Gateway Media Card locating and loading the IP Line loadware from flash memory Cookie array value 0x111111100 Checksum Validation at Bank Address 0xF9800000 Checksum in ROM 35582602 Length of bank 0004FEF8 Calculated Checksum 35582602 Checksum array value 0x11111100 Loading code from address F9800010 Verifying ROM to RAM copy ROM to RAM copy completed OK Jumping to VxWorks at 0x00E00000 EIP 0x00E0011E Jumping to romStart at 0x00E00300 In the event of a software load failure the boot sequence indicates that the BIOS is being loaded Cookie array value 0x11111111 Booting from BIOS ROM 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 635 of 770 Case 3 The boot sequence indicates that the xxx sequence has been entered and the BIOS is being loaded Solutions Case 1 If a SIMM is missing install a 16 MB SIMM into the SIMM slot which is underneath the daughterboard If the SIMM is present check that the SIMM is properly seated Otherwise the SIMM is faulty and needs replacement Case 2 Re attempt a software download from the OTM host Use the following commands upgradeErase upgrade hostname hostAccount hostPassword hostDirectoryPath hostSwFilename After the software loads to flash reboot the card sysReboot If th
399. he IP Phones The Voice Gateway Media Card is completely disabled when there are no IP Phones registered on the card Remove the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card from the system Install the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slot in the system To do this a Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate b Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push the card until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices Note 1 When cards are installed the red LED on the faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point it turns off If the LED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit replace the card Note 2 Observe the faceplate maintenance display to see start up self test results and status messages A display of the type F xx indicates a failure See Table 64 on page 569 for a listing of the ITG P 24 port line card s display codes and to Table 65 on page 571 for a list of the Media Card s display codes In Element Manager click Configuration in the navigation tree In the Configuration menu click IP Telephony The IP Telephony window opens Click Node Summary The Node Summary window opens Click the Edit button associated with the node containing the card to be replaced The Edit window appears Expan
400. he IP addressing and routing have been set up initially from the local manager port Use the following keys in the RM356 manager menu the arrow keys to navigate the spacebar key to toggle pre defined configuration values for a field the Enter key to save data changes to ROM and exit the current menu the Esc key to exit the current menu without saving changes enter menu selection number when prompted to display a sub menu configuration form or command prompts Follow the steps in Procedure 119 to configure the RM356 Modem Router Procedure 119 Configuring the RM356 Modem Router 1 2 Press the Enter key from the terminal or manager menu The Enter Password prompt is displayed for 10 seconds Enter the default RM356 manager password 1234 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 736 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router The RM356 Main Menu is displayed See page 743 for a complete view of the RM356 Modem Router menus RM356 Main Menu Getting Started Advanced Management 1 General Setup 21 Filter Set MODEM Setup Configuration 2 3 Ethernet Setup 4 Internet Access Setup 23 System Password 24 System Maintenance Advanced Applications 11 Remote Node Setup 12 Static Routing Setup 13 Default Dial in Setup 14 Dial in User Setup 99 Exit Enter Menu Selection Number 3 At the Enter Menu Selection Number prompt enter menu selection number 1 to access the General Setup under Getting Sta
401. he TLAN network interface IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 486 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Under SNMP Traps up to eight SNMP trap destinations can be defined Under Card routing table entries use caution when assigning card routing table entries Do not include the IP address of an IP Phone Otherwise voice traffic to these IP Phones is incorrectly routed through the ELAN and ELAN gateway To avoid including the wrong IP address Nortel Networks recommends that Host IDs be defined for the card routing table entries 12 Click Apply if any changes are made on the SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab 13 Select the Ports tab See Figure 152 Figure 152 Node Properties Ports tab Node Properties BELLE ILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Enter the IP addresses and signaling ports Changes must be transmitted to each card gt ELAN TLAN Call Processor IP Sree soo Survival Cabinet IP peono Voice port o Signaling port fso Broadcast port psom Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Help 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 14 15 16 17 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 487 of 770 Under ELAN a Call Processor ID A change to this IP address must be co ordinated with the Call Server Active ELNK subnet b Survival Cabinet
402. he Transfer Status button associated with the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card 12 After the transfer is complete restart the new card Restarting the card causes the follower card to obtain its BOOTP parameters from the Leader and also establishes ELAN and TLAN connectivity 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager 13 14 15 16 Page 677 of 770 Follow the steps in Procedure 53 on page 379 to load the CONFIG INI file onto the card Follow the steps in Procedure 58 on page 396 to download the latest software to the Voice Gateway Media Card Follow the steps in Procedure 59 on page 400 to reboot the card and run the new software Follow the steps in Procedure 60 on page 401 to update the card s firmware End of Procedure Access CLI commands from Element Manager The following list of informational CLI commands are available from Element Manager Voice Gateway Media Card CLI Commands cardRoleShow disiAll disiTPS dspSWVersionShow DSPNumShow electShow i ifShow IPInfoShow ipstatShow isetShow itgCardShow nodePwdDisable nodePwdEnable nodePwdShow nodeTempPwdClear pbxLinkShow routeShow IP Line Signaling Server CLI Commands cardRoleShow DCHstatus disiAll disiTPS disServices disTPS disVTRK electShow enlServices enlTPS enlVTRK forceDisServices forceDisTPS forceDisVTRK help i ifShow IPinfoShow Des
403. he cardReset command The Leader 0 card reads the new IP address from NVRAM 4 Restart all the other cards End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 491 of 770 Update Voice Gateway Media Card card properties Some basic Voice Gateway Media Card configuration must be performed from the Node Properties window To update the card properties in the DSP Profile follow the steps in Procedure 78 CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 78 Updating card properties DSP Profile tab 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Click Configuration gt Node gt Properties Click the DSP Profile tab The DSP Options sub tab appears See Figure 153 on page 492 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 492 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 153 Node Properties DSP Profile tab DSP Options sub tab Node Properties BELLE ILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Select the DSP profile for all cards in this node Changes to the DSP profile must be transmitted to each card DSP Options Codec Options r General m FAX options IV Enable DTMF tone detection
404. he date timestamp and the task that is printing the message is displayed End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 516 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Backup and restore data All data is stored on the Call Server Element Manager accesses the data for the elements being maintained Element Manager does not store data There is no Element Manager specific data that needs to be backed up All data is retrieved from the Call Server and elements The c u db node directory is populated on the Call Server when the node configuration is saved The BOOTP TAB and CONFIG_INI files are saved in this directory as c u db node nodexxxx btp and c u db node nodexxxx cfg where xxxx is the node ID e nodexxxx btp is the BOOTP TAB file e nodexxxx cfg is the CONFIG INI If a node is removed the associated files are also removed For every node that is created a nodeyyyy btp and nodeyyyy cfg file are created in the C u db node directory WARNING Do not manually edit or delete the node files Manually editing or deleting these files can cause corruption of Element Manager Backup The Backup command invokes the Equipment Data Dump EDD operation on the Call Server to back up all Call Server data Within Element Manager the Call Server Backup function invokes a data dump and writes the Call Server data to the primary and internal backup drives The backup includes all Call Server d
405. he firewalls and TFTP CS 1000 Release 4 0 implements a UNIStim File Transfer Protocol UFTP download solution UFTP enhances security because it is a proprietary protocol as opposed to TFTP which is an open protocol It enables customers to improve their firewall security by closing port 69 to block TFPT in their firewall and policy based switches and routers IMPORTANT For the UFTP IP Phone firmware download to work it is necessary to explicitly open port 5100 UNIStim signaling and port 5105 UFTP signaling If a network firewall is in use ports 5100 UNIStim signaling and 5105 UFTP signaling must be explicitly opened in the IP Phone to UFTP server direction Opening these ports enables UNIStim and UFTP firmware download messages to travel through the firewall Both of these ports can be safety enabled by firewalls See Table 18 Table 18 Source destination port usage on either side of the connection Pot IP Phone signaling IP Phone UFTP UFTP Server Source port 5000 see note 5000 see note 5105 Destination port 5100 5105 5000 see note Note The UFTP firmware download is compatible with the NAT Traversal feature If the IP Phone is behind a Network Address Translation NAT device then a different public signaling port is used The public signaling port is assigned dynamically See Figure 11 on page 85 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 85 of 770 Figure 11 Using NAT with UFTP
406. he list type in the new values and click Add Select an item in the list to change or delete SNMP traps r Card routing table entries IV Enable SNMP traps IP address Juz 51 14 22 IP address Juz 25 112 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Subnet Mask IP Address 47 51 14 22 255 255 0 0 47 25 112 1 255 255 255 0 2 On the left side of the window under SNMP traps a Enable SNMP traps Check the Enable SNMP traps checkbox if configuring one or more SNMP management IP addresses to receive SNMP traps from cards in the IP Telephony node b IP address If SNMP traps are enabled this is the IP address of the destination where the SNMP traps are sent c Subnet mask If SNMP traps are enabled this is the subnet mask of the destination where SNMP traps are sent 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 277 of 770 To add a trap destination IP address enter the IP address in the SNMP IP address fields and click Add Add SNMP Manager IP addresses for the following local or remote OTM server PPP IP address configured in the router on the ELAN subnet for the remote support OTM PC SNMP manager for remote alarm monitoring Note 1 Up to six SNMP trap destinations can be defined Note 2 A net route or host route through the ELAN gateway is added to the Voice Gateway Media Cards IP Routing Table for e
407. he lookup key for the IP Phone s Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List data For the HLOC if a CLID table entry exists CLID yes in LD 15 for the Primary DN PDN or the first non ACD key DN the CLID table s HLOC is used When no CLID entry exists the HLOC defined in LD 15 s Network Data section is used it might be 0 s if HLOC is not configured The PNI ensures the HLOC PDN is unique across customers on a system if the system is multi customer Since the user s PDN and HLOC are used then to identify a specific user a user s primary DN and HLOC must be unique to the network to support their own specific Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List If using Multiple Appearance DN MADN for a group of users and it is necessary to provide users with their own Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List do not configure the Primary DN PDN as MADN If the MADN is used as the PDN for a group of users this results in a shared Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List This means that a call arriving on any IP Phone sharing the PDN MADN appears in the Callers List Calls to a secondary DN on another IP Phone in the shared group appear in the Callers List for all IP Phones even though the call did not ring on the other IP Phone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 149 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List Personal Directory
408. he loss plan adjusts the Voice Gateway Media Card gateway channel s loss for each call by sending pad values to the card Loss plan values are now configured through LD 73 Default values The default values in the system are for the North American loss plan Non North American countries Installation of IP Line 4 0 in any other country requires setting the pad values in Table 15 to that country s loss plan If the system is installed in other countries the GPRI package International 1 5 2 0 Mb s Gateway package 167 must be used and the NTP specified values must be entered in LD 73 At the PDCA prompt enter Table 15 Refer to Transmission Parameters 553 3001 182 for more information United Kingdom In addition when a system is installed in the UK the CLI command UKLossPlanSet is entered at the CLI of one card in each node This adjusts the loss plan of the IP Phones to the higher transmit levels required in the UK Follow the steps in Procedure 48 to set the loss plan for the UK Procedure 48 Setting the loss plan for the UK 1 Telnet to the card connect to the maintenance port or use OTM 2 2 or Element Manager to access the Voice Gateway Media Card 2 Log into the IPL gt shell 3 Atthe IPL gt CLI enter the command UKLossPlanSet Press lt CR gt 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 365 of 770 5 Exit from the login session End of Procedure
409. he near end list is the codec list of the local unit The far end list is the codec list received from the far end e Each codec list can contain more than one payload size for a given codec type The codec list depends on the codec configuration e Each codec list is sorted by order of preference The first codec in the near end list is the near end s most preferred codec and the first codec in far end list is the far end s most preferred codec and so on IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 192 of 770 Codecs Once the above conditions are met a codec selection algorithm is used to select the codec to be used for a call There are two different codec selection algorithms 1 H 323 s Master Slave algorithm 2 Best Bandwidth codec Selection algorithm H 323 s Master Slave algorithm The codec selection algorithm proposed by the H 323 standard involves a Master Slave negotiation initiated each time two nodes exchange their capabilities TCS message The Master Slave information decides that one node is Master and the other node is Slave The outcome of the Master Slave negotiation is not known in advance it is a random result one node could be Master then Slave or Slave then Master during the same call e The Master node uses its own codec list as the preferred one From the far end list it finds the common codec The Master gets the first codec in its own list Codec1 The Master then checks the
410. he pane in the center of the Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade window under the list of cards See Figure 122 In this example the software version displayed is for the ITG Pentium card Figure 122 LW version for the ITG Pentium Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade Oven anodes Close anodes clara Select Card s k Node ID Node IP 192 168 253 7 Total elements 3 Hostname ELAN IP TN Type Role E gt NODES m 4 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower LW Version 207 179 153 100 Signaling Server Leader LWW Version M gt 207 179 153 111 oo Media Unknown LW Version Installed Image IPL IPL 4 00 1 ITG P Thursday June 17 13 00 56 EDT 20044 off ct File aaa Create Time PL40001 P2 TG Pentium D JUN 30 14 07 10 2004 T PL40004 P2 ITG Pentium UE JUL 06 16 41 38 2004 IPL40008 P2 ITG Pentium ON JUL 26 11 29 16 2004 5 Note the software version for the card End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 389 of 770 Determine the IP Phone firmware version To determine the version of firmware on the Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 55 Procedure 55 Determining the IP Phone firmware version 1 Click Software Upgrade from the navigation tree 2 Click IP Telephone FW from the expanded Software Upgrade menu The IP Telephone FW Upgrade window opens See Figure 123 on page 390 At the top of the
411. he poos command is issued without a parameter enter a handle when prompted pout Removes a patch from DRAM memory The patch must be taken out of service using the poos command before it can be removed from the system Syntax pout handle If the pout command is issued without a parameter enter a handle when prompted pstat Gives summary status information for one or all loaded patches For each patch the following information is displayed patch handle filename reference number whether the patch is in service or out of service the reason why the patch is out of service if applicable and whether the patch is marked for retention or not Note Patch retention means that if a reset occurs then the patch is automatically reloaded into memory and its state active or inactive is restored to what it was prior to the system going down Syntax pstat handle If the handle is provided only the information for the specified patch is displayed If the pstat is issued without a parameter information for all the patches is displayed IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 620 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 85 Patch commands Part 3 of 3 Command Description plis Gives detailed patch status information for a loaded patch Syntax plis handle If the pout command is issued without a parameter enter a handle when prompted Creates memor
412. he system administrator In general use the default value of 5200 If however numerous IP Phones are working over low bandwidth WAN links using CISCO RTP header compression then change the voice port to a number in the range of 16384 to 32767 Coordinate this value change with the IP network administrator Note The TLAN Voice port range is 1024 to 65535 The default Voice ports are 5200 5295 A check is performed to prevent the TLAN Voice and signaling UDP ports from having the same range If entries must be made to the card routing table click the Add button to the right of Routes The Routes fields expand See Figure 183 Figure 183 Routes 14 Enter the IP address and Subnet mask for any host that is not on the ELAN subnet but requires access to the Voice Gateway Media Card across the ELAN subnet A Telnet session for maintenance from a remote PC is an example of when this would be needed The address of the remote PC would be added in the Route list IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 546 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager The default route on the card causes packets for unknown subnets to be sent out the TLAN network interface Packets from an external host arrive on the ELAN network interface Responses are sent on the TLAN network interface This process can cause one way communication if the TLAN subnet is not routed to the ELAN subnet It is necessary to add an entry in the Ro
413. hing Tool commands Signaling IPL gt command Description Server pins Puts a patch into service that has been loaded into X memory using the pload command plis Gives detailed patch status information for a loaded patch pload Loads a patch file from the file system on Flash memory into DRAM memory pnew Creates memory patches for the Voice Gateway Media Card poos Deactivates a patch by restoring the patched procedure to its original state pout Removes a patch from DRAM memory pstat Gives summary status for one or all loaded patches 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 623 of 770 General trace tool commands IMPORTANT A warm boot of the system causes all tracing to cease Traces must be re entered after the system has restarted Table 87 lists the general trace tool commands applicable to the Voice Gateway Media Cards They are issued from the LTPS prompt of the Voice Gateway Media Cards Table 87 General trace tool commands Part 1 of 2 Signaling CLI Command Description Server traceShow Displays the names of active traces in the system X traceAllOff Causes all traces that use the monitorLib server to X stop their output This is a temporary disabling function tracePrintOff Blocks all logging of information received by the X monitorLib service to the TTY output This does not include traces directed through the moni
414. his zipped file contains the IP Line 4 0 loadware for the Media Card the IP Phone firmware and a readme txt file e Download the IP Line 4 0xx p2 zip for the ITG P card This zipped file contains the IP Line 4 0 loadware for the ITG P card the IP Phone firmware and a readme txt file IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 654 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 See Appendix F on page 763 for information on downloading files from the Nortel Networks web site Note The IP Line software and IP Phone firmware files are contained in the IP Line 4 0 xx SA file in the Internet Telephony Gateway product list on the Nortel Networks web site The zipped file contains the IPL400xx p2 and IPL400xx sa software files The IPL400xx p2 file is the IP Line application for the ITG P 24 port line card and the IPL400xx sa is the IP Line 4 0 application for the Media Card the 0602Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2004 0603Bxx BIN Phase IP Phone 2002 and 0603Dnn BIN Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware files For example a firmware version labelled 0602B38 means IP Phone firmware version 1 38 where The 02 represents the IP Phone 2004 The letter B represents the Version number 1 38 represents the Release number 38 A readme txt file The readme txt file explains important considerations for installing the new software and firmware versions The readme file
415. hone is incorrectly routed through the ELAN and ELAN gateway To avoid including the wrong IP address Nortel Networks recommends that Host IDs be defined for the card routing table entries 6 Toaddanet route or host route type the IP address and subnet mask in the entry field of the card routing table and click Add 7 Click Apply 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 279 of 770 Figure 68 Specifying additional ELAN routes ELAN route TLAN route A ELAN a lt additional routes ee 5 default router TLAN subnet lt __ gt gt subnet MAA Meridian 1 or 1000 Management Workstation In this diagram an additional ELAN route is required to reach the management workstation which is accessible through the ELAN interface but is not on the ELAN subnet 8 Click OK to exit the window End of Procedure Configure node synchronization with the Call Server The SNMP MIB II parameters are configured as a node property in the group box SNMP parameters on the New Node General tab See Figure 69 on page 280 The check box enables disables synchronization of the SNMP parameters with the Call Server The default value is selected During Update System Data the SNMP parameters are propagated to all existing IP nodes that have the Synchronize with PBX system option selected Status of the node is set to changed CHG IP Line Description I
416. hony Configuration gt SNMP Configuration gt SNMP Configuration Input Value Navigation Site Name NAV_SITE Belleville Navigation System Name NAV_SYSTEM fS_cs50 Contact Person for this machine SNMP_SYSCONTACT System Contact Physical Location of this machine SNMP_SYSLOC System Location Name assigned to this machine by the administrator Belleville S_CS50 SNMP_SYSNAME Belleville S_CS50 System Management Read community string im123 SYSMGMT_RD_COMM gw System Management Write community string m3721 SYSMGMT_WR_COMM Admin Group community string ADMIN_COMM 1 z Admint Submit Refresh Cancel 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 349 of 770 2 Obtain the following information from the system administrator and enter it in the appropriate fields Navigation Site Name NAV_SITE Navigation System Name NAV_SYSTEM Contact person for this machine SNMP_SYSCONTACT Name assigned to this machine by the administrator SNMP_SYSNAME System Management Read community string SYSMGMT_RD_COMM System Management Write community string SYSMGMT_WR_COMM e Admin Group community string ADMIN_COMM Select 1 2 or 3 from the drop down list 3 Click Submit to save the configuration or Cancel to cancel the entry Note Click Refresh to retrieve the current information from the system End of Procedure Synchronization of community name
417. how The activeDlogShow command displays the active log file information for UFTP IP Phone firmware downloads When no parameter is entered the output displays the contents of the entire active log file When a line number is entered activeDlogShow numOfLine the output displays the active log file by the number of lines Figure 15 on page 91 is an example of output from the activeDlogShow command 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 91 of 770 Figure 15 activeDlogShow command output oam gt activeDlogShow Active F W download file u log UFTPLOGO TXT Space remaining 55 wlog UFTPLOGO TX1 29 03 19 58 41 fiw dnid success 47 11 217 11 12004 29 03 20 24 30 fw dnid success 47 11 217 12 12004 29 03 21 42 11 fiw dnid success 47 11 217 15 12002 29 03 22 17 40 fw dnid success 47 11 217 20 12004 inActiveDlogShow The inActiveDlogShow command displays the non active dlog file information for UFTP IP Phone firmware downloads When no parameter is entered the output displays the contents of the entire file When a line number is entered inActiveDlogShow numOfLine the output displays the non active dlog file by the number of lines Figure 16 on page 92 is an example of output from the inActiveDlogShow command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 92 of 770 Features Figure 16 inActiveDlogShow command output oam gt inactiveDlog Show inactive DlogShow Active F W downlo
418. i2004 e 3Pi2050 Finally the data for the gateway channels is output IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 464 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Output example An example of a single hour s OM report is as follows collection_time 9 5 2003 1 00 i12004Reg Att 0 i2004Reg Fail 0 i2004Unreg_Att 0 i2004Aud_Setup 0 i2004Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2004Jitter Max 0 i2004Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2004Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs i2002Reg Att 0 i2002Reg Fail 0 i2002Unreg_Att 0 i2002Aud_Setup 0 i2002Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2002Jitter Max 0 i2002Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2002Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs i2001Reg_ Att 0 i2001Reg Fail 0 i2001Unreg_Att 0 i2001Aud_Setup 0 i2001Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2001Jitter Max 0 i2001Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2001Voice_ Time 0 mins 0 secs i2050Reg_Att 0 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 465 of 770 i2050Reg_Fail 0 i2050Unreg_Att 0 i2050Aud_Setup 0 i2050Jitter_Avg 0 0 i2050Jitter Max 0 i2050Pkt_Lost 0 00 i2050Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2004Reg_Att 0 3Pi2004Reg Fail 0 3Pi2004Unreg Att 0 3Pi2004Aud_Setup 0 3Pi2004Jitter_Avg 0 0 3Pi2004Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2004Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2004Voice_ Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2002Reg_Att 0 3Pi2002Reg Fail 0 3Pi2002Unreg Att 0 3Pi2002Aud_Setup 0 3Pi2002Jitter_Avg 0 0 3Pi2002Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2002Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2002Voice_ Time 0 mins 0 secs 3Pi2050Reg_Att 0 3Pi2050Reg_Fail 0 3Pi2050Unreg A
419. ia Card across the ELAN subnet A Telnet session for maintenance from a remote PC is an example of when this would be needed The address of the remote PC would be added in the Route list The default route on the card causes packets destined for unknown subnets to be sent out on the TLAN network interface Packets from an external host arrive on the ELAN network interface and responses are sent on the TLAN network interface This process can cause one way communication if the TLAN subnet is not routed to the ELAN subnet It is necessary to add an entry in the Route list to correct the routing so that response packets are sent on the ELAN subnet Each entry creates a route entry in the card s route table that directs packets out the ELAN network interface See Figure 105 on page 361 CAUTION Use caution when assigning card routing table entries Do not include the IP address of an IP Phone Otherwise voice traffic to these IP Phones is incorrectly routed through the ELAN subnet and ELAN subnet gateway To avoid including the wrong IP address Nortel Networks recommends that Host IDs are defined for the card routing table entries 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 361 of 770 5 To add additional routes click the Add button again and enter the route information Repeat this step for each route to be added Figure 105 Specifying additional ELAN routes ELAN route
420. ia Card maintenance Figure 197 vgwShow command sample output IPL gt vgwShow 47 11 217 102 Found on Card TN 009 00 ELAN IP 47 11 217 21 TLAN IP 47 11 216 185 number of matches 2 Chan ChanState DspMode Codec Reg AirTime rxTsap txTsap Voice G 711 20 0x0804 yes 47 11 216 185 5200 47 11 217 102 10008 The number of IP Phones that use that public IP address is printed 2 in this example but only one of the IP Phones is displayed To see the other IP Phone determine the Public IP address and Public Media Port using the command isetNATShow Then enter vgwShow using the Public IP address and Public Media Port An example of the output is shown in Figure 198 Figure 198 vgwShow sample with Public information IPL gt vgwShow 47 11 217 102 10104 value 0 0x0 IPL gt Found on Card TN 009 00 ELAN IP 47 111 217 21 TLAN IP 47 11 216 185 number of matches 1 Chan ChanState DspMode Codec Reg AirTime rxTsap txTsap Voice G 711 20 0x0806 yes 856 47 11 216 185 5204 47 11 217 102 10104 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 603 of 770 Data Path Capture Tool commands Table 80 lists the commands used with the Data Path Capture Tool Table 80 Data Path Capture Tool commands Signaling IPL gt command Description Server captureStart Begins the capture operation When the command is entered data for the gateway channel lt tcid gt 0 23 for ITG P Line Card and 0 31 for Me
421. ial port to provide Card LAN communication and connects the processor with the external RS 232 port Troubleshoot a software load failure Symptoms OTM cannot establish connection with the Voice Gateway Media Card The faceplate LCD display reads BIOS Problem The Voice Gateway Media Card has booted the BIOS load Diagnosis In the event of a failure to load and run the IP Line 4 0 software the Voice Gateway Media Card defaults to the BIOS load This load consists of a prompt that enables commands to reload the IP Line loadware and reboot There are three known reasons for the failure to load the IP Line software e Not enough memory due to a faulty or missing SIMM e Corruption of the IP Line loadware image in flash memory e The escape sequence to boot from the BIOS has been inadvertently sent down the serial line due to noise To determine the cause of the IP Line load failure reboot and monitor the booting sequence through the serial port Capture the booting sequence to aid in communication with technical support personnel IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 634 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Examples of booting sequences Case 1 The following excerpt from the booting sequence indicates the amount of memory onboard Memory Configuration Onboard 4MB SIMM 16MB Total 20MB In the absence or failure of the SIMM the total memory is 4MB that is not enough memory to support t
422. ian 1 Option 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 Option 11C Chassis CS 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M Chassis or CS 1000S systems 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 31 of 770 Documentation The following documents are available on the IP Line 4 0 CD ROM and on the Nortel Networks web site IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 e IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 e IP Phone 2001 User Guide e IP Phone 2001 Quick Reference Card e IP Phone 2002 User Guide e IP Phone 2002 Quick Reference Card e IP Phone 2004 User Guide e IP Phone 2004 Quick Reference Card e IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide Voice Gateway Media Cards Voice Gateway Media Card is a term used to encompass the Media Card 32 port line card Media Card 8 port line card and ITG P 24 port line card These cards plug into an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment IPE shelf in the Meridian 1 and CS 1000M systems and into a Media Gateway 1000S and Media Gateway 1000S Expander in the CS 1000S system The ITG P 24 port line card occupies two slots while the Media Card line card occupies only one slot The Media Card comes in two versions 8 port and 32 port The Media Card has the following features e 32 port card s packet processing power is greater than that of the ITG P 24 port line card e increases the channel density from 24 to 32 ports for 32 port version IP Lin
423. ice Gateway Media Card can also be used with a PC Card containing the firmware files the Voice Gateway Media Card is specified as the server and the file directory specifies the A drive Graceful Disable The DISI command in LD 32 can be used to disable the Voice Gateway Media Card s gateway channels when they become idle This command removes gateway call traffic from a Voice Gateway Media Card however it does not remove the IP Phones registered to the Voice Gateway Media Card Even after the gateway channels are disabled all IP Phones registered to the card are impacted when the card is unplugged or reset Also if a Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server is the node Master when it is removed the IP Phone registration service is interrupted until the next election occurs IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 136 of 770 Features To overcome these problems the Graceful TPS enhancement provides a card level CLI command that disables the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server The Graceful TPS command e prevents new IP Phones from registering e soft resets any idle registered IP Phones Since the LTPS does not accept new registrations the IP Phones register with another card s LTPS after the reset Eventually all IP Phones are registered with other TPSs and the card can be removed without impact to any users Operation of the LTPS DISI The Graceful TPS Disable is con
424. ice Gateway Media Card software from the OTM 2 2 PC on page 311 and Procedure 37 Upgrading the IP Phone firmware on page 316 for detailed instructions on how to perform the upgrades Note All cards must be running the same version of the software End of Procedure Upgrade options Once the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware has been verified there are three upgrade options 1 Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software In this case perform Procedure 35 on page 311 only This is the most frequently used option is used however verify if an IP Phone firmware upgrade is also required 2 Upgrade both the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware In this case perform a combination of Procedure 35 on page 311 and Procedure 37 on page 316 Note Do not restart the Voice Gateway Media Cards until the end of Procedure 37 as restarting the cards restarts all the IP Phones 3 Upgrade the IP Phone firmware In this case perform Procedure 37 on page 316 only Note In this case restart all IP Phones instead of all Voice Gateway Media Cards To do this select a single test IP Phone and reset the firmware only on that test telephone before completing the procedure on all IP Phones If the upgrade works properly use the umsUpgradeAll command to complete the upgrade on all the IP Phones 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OT
425. ifferent cards Therefore the isetShow and isetNATShow now display the information similar to the following example Signaling Public Private gt Found on Card TN 009 00 ELAN IP 47 11 217 102 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 79 of 770 Notice how the Found on line is below the title and is displayed before every IP Phone Note If a PVQM command is entered with an IP address that multiple IP Phones are using then an error message is also printed WARNING There are 2 IP Phones that use the public IP address of 47 11 217 102 These PVQM commands include e RTPStatShow e RTPTraceShow e RTPTraceStop e Ping e rPingStop e rTraceRoute e rTraceRouteStop e eStatShow e RUDPStatShow e isetInfoShow echoServerShow The echoServerShow command provides both configuration information about the Echo Servers and information about interactions with the Echo Servers for the IP Phones on a specific LTPS Use this command on an LTPS card to investigate a problem with an IP Phone registered to that LTPS card This is a per card command that provides information on the Echo Servers from the viewpoint of the LTPS on the card where the command is entered The command has one optional parameter action the only valid value is 99 When echoServerShow 99 is entered the counter values are reset after they are displayed When just echoServerShow is entered the co
426. ific to that customer A card must be specified to enter a customer otherwise the count is across all customers e f no parameters are entered the count is printed for all zones A partial TN can be entered for the card L or L S which then prints the count per that parameter A customer cannot be specified in this case Example ECNT CARD 81 lt lt Card 81 gt gt Number of Registered Ethersets 5 Number of Unregistered Ethersets 27 ECNT ZONE Counts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified zoneNum zone lt customer gt e If lt customer gt parameter is specified the count is specific to that customer A zone must be specified to enter a customer otherwise the count is across all customers e f no parameters are entered the count is printed for all zones Example ECNT ZONE 00 lt lt Zone 0 Customer 0 gt gt Number of Registered Ethersets 4 Number of Unregistered Ethersets 17 ENLC Isc Enable the specified card where loop s shelf c card ENLUIscu Enable the specified unit where loop s shelf c card u unit 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 69 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 581 of 770 LD 32 Maintenance commands for the Voice Gateway Media Card Part 3 of 3 Command Description Print the Card ID information for the specified card where loop s shelf c card IDCIsc Note 1 This command d
427. ing These USM messages contain the IP address and port number information for the monitored IP Phone and the remote party in the active call By using a Layer 2 switch that supports port mirroring the call recording device can monitor the media stream for the active call and record it Administration LD 17 introduces the Enhanced Unsolicited Status Message USM IE enable IPIE prompt The IPIE prompt enables or disables IP Call Recording on a system wide basis The functionality is disabled by default When enabled a modified Application Module Link AML message that identifies the IP endpoint is sent for each call The IPIE prompt is added in LD 17 under system parameters PARM LD 17 IP Call Recording Part 1 of 2 Response Description CHG Change existing data PARM Change system parameters 96 7500 Low priority Input Buffers NO YES New Distinctive Ringing YES NO Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime feature allowed IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 96 of 770 Features LD 17 IP Call Recording Part 2 of 2 Response Description NO YES Enhanced Unsolicited Status Message USM IE enable YES Allow This Party IP IE and Other Party IE to send with USM NEFR OLFR Deny or allow access to incoming calls by FRE station OTM and Element Manager do not support LD 17 However OTM does support the corresponding print overlay LD 22 which prints t
428. ing Server is configured as the Leader in the node the Call Server software is upgraded to CS 1000 Release 4 0 Software all unused IP Trunk TNs have been removed from the Call Server database all IP Trunk cards have been converted to Voice Gateway Media Cards upgraded to the IP Line 4 0 application a PC is connected to the LAN Choose one of the following methods 1 Manually add converted Voice Gateway Media Cards to the existing IP Telephony node on page 698 Import all converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into a new IP Telephony node on page 702 Use this method if the entire IP Trunk node has been converted and the converted Voice Gateway Media Cards do not have to be added to a larger existing node IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 698 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Manually add converted Voice Gateway Media Cards to the existing IP Telephony node Follow the steps in Procedure 113 to add the converted Voice Gateway Media Cards to an existing IP Telephony node using Element Manager Procedure 113 Adding the converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into an existing IP Telephony node 1 Log in to Element manager from the web browser by entering the IP address of the Signaling Server Enter the User ID and password usually the same as the Call Server User ID and password When logged into Element Manager click Configuration gt IP Telephony The Node Summ
429. ing the Management ELAN IP address Enter a user name and password to access the IPL gt CLI Both the default user name and password are itgadmin However for security purposes the user name and password should have been changed during installation The IPL gt prompt appears if the login is successful Type at the prompt to display a list of available IPL gt CLI commands See IP Line CLI commands on page 585 for a detailed list of commands End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 505 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Contents This section contains information on the following topics aaar a sash E ESET endorse EAAS ETENEE TETT 506 Element Manager administration procedures 506 Tam St Drewser caching crracriesi d praris Er intipe ee 506 IP Line Operational Measurement report scheduling and generation 507 View P Lane log Tiles eck pase ieee heise Eihar Skea rees 514 Backup and restore dala och cuccwerw sige nirt t waegae awd eeeas 516 BAG 5 6634 pee tud Era SS HDRES AUWEHEISER EE GEIOEA 516 Restore the backed Up fles c4 215 0 46448e piina cinien 519 Update IP Telephony ode properties u 24 ciscees ee eanceewevas 520 Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node 523 Delete a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card from the node 533 Delete the Leader Voice Gateway Media Card from the node 535 Change the IP addresses of an IP
430. ing the same TLAN each node must have a unique ID Each system on the TLAN must have a unique node ID assigned to the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the system c Write down the node number which is used in the IP Phone configuration 6 Under Network Connections a Voice LAN Node IP Enter the Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address in dotted decimal format Press the space bar to move between each decimal point The Voice LAN Node IP is on the TLAN The Node IP address is the IP address used by the IP Phones to communicate with the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the TLAN If a Voice Gateway Media Card becomes the primary Leader during an election it assigns itself the Node IP address Management LAN gateway IP Enter the Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address in dotted decimal format This is the IP address of the gateway of the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs This is the IP address of the router interface on the ELAN if present If there is no management LAN gateway enter 0 0 0 0 Management LAN subnet mask Enter the Management LAN ELAN subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask that is used along with the ELAN network interface IP address to identify the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 268 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 d Voice LAN subnet mask Enter the Voice LAN TLA
431. ing tool commands 616 General tace TOO COMMARUS 2 45 ctn dee seek oe eee ERE E 623 Protocol trace tool commands for the Network Connection Service 625 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 568 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Lamp Audit and Keep Alive functions 004 627 MAMCHANCE QU oc ace ed eke dhe oss tA ar ENGE Shea ees 627 Voice Gateway Media Card self tests 0 00 633 Troubleshoot a software load failure 0 000 633 Warm reboot of the Voice Gateway Media Card 635 Test the Voice Gateway Media Card DSPs 635 Work wath alarm and log files 02s4s 00520 seis snes ew ewe vn 636 Troubleshoot an IP Phone installation 04 636 Muntnance telepho nc H ih 2S odcdiwisewddensesheesse conn died 637 Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card 8051 XAController firmware 638 Upgrade the ITG P 24 port line card 8051 XAController firmware 638 Upgrade the Media Card 8051 XAController firmware 642 Replace the Media Card s CompactFlash 645 Introduction This chapter provides information on maintenance functions of the Voice Gateway Media Card Note Check the Nortel Networks web site for information on the latest software firmware and application releases Faceplate maintenance display codes The Voice Gateway Media Card s maintenance display provides the
432. interface basis and is a global setting This means that all packets transmitted by the IP Phone have the same VLAN ID The VLAN ID is specified as follows e the default VLAN ID is 000 hex e the VLAN ID can be set during a manual configuration of the IP Phone using the IP Phone keypad or automatically retrieved using DHCP automatic VLAN discovery Note For more information about manual or automatic IP Phone configuration refer to IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 129 of 770 DHCP requirements Some implementation requirements of the Automatic VLAN Discovery using DHCP are 1 A DHCP server IP address pool must exist for each subnet also VLANs This is standard DHCP operation The requirement is the same for PCs or IP Phones A DHCP server should not exist in more than one VLAN at one time one subnet for each VLAN unless the link to the DHCP server is tagged and the DHCP server can recognize this With an untagged link to the DHCP server traffic could originate on one VLAN and end up on the other VLAN In this case the VLAN using DHCP feature does not work Voice and data subnets must be separate if the three port switch with VLANs is being used A Layer three switch or router with a relay agent must be used because traffic from the voice VLAN to the data VLAN must be routed Presumably the DHCP server is on the data
433. ion Page 434 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration The nodePwdSet password command sets and enables the password When the password is enabled and configured the screen on the IP Phone displays the four digit Node ID and a Password prompt instead of the Node ID and TN fields WARNING The nodePwdSet command with no password parameter enables the administrator password and sets a null zero length password Enabling the administrator password and setting a null password makes it impossible to install the IP Phones because the Node ID and TN prompts are not displayed on the telephone screen Always specify the password parameter when issuing the nodePwdSet command This password parameter is 6 14 digits The valid characters are 0 9 If the nodePwdEnable command is entered before the password is set using the nodePwdSet command the password is also enabled with a null zero length password and as a result the password and TN prompts are also never displayed on the IP Phones The administrator normally uses the Administrative IP Phone Installer Password if it is necessary to install a new telephone or change the configuration node ID and TN of an existing telephone Note If an IP Phone cannot be installed because a prompt for a node ID and TN does not appear log into a Voice Gateway Media Card and check the status of the password using the nodePwdShow command IMPORTANT The administrator can create a
434. ion Installation and Operation Page 12 of 770 Contents Replace the NT8D81BA cable with the NT8D1AA cable and install the NTCW84JW special IPE filter 726 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 731 RONNIE Line tee selee poke dab ee ite Sodeeh si SueuIeketasae 731 O a oie end bce SS edeS epee dew SN ETT EELT Tal RM356 Modem Router security features 04 732 Install the RM356 Modem Router 6 2 4 402s0s0seeapaenenseas 734 Configure the RM356 Modem Router from the manager menu 735 RM356 Modem Router manager menu description 743 Appendix D Product integrity 753 CHS i452 atin RSPAS E RRR eRe Leek Ee Se ekEs T T33 OJUO eanne dirae aA AETA 753 ReaD 2 44sccee1a Sh eew ek eee eee eh ee bee dade ks T33 Environmental specications sccccsccccenccetedcaeniaxeanes ag 754 Electrical regulatory standards oicc seduce otcte ei swandeeeness 756 Appendix E Subnet Mask Conversion from CIDR to Dotted Decimal Format 761 ACUI RAEAN SE PEET TEAT ETTA AEE AEE ke nahi 761 Appendix F Download IP Line 4 0 files from Nortel Networks web site 0 0008 763 COME bs in Ss ERASERS RSE RN ORATE ESSERE OE BORER 763 Tirdia oie he ned ee oe beware eee ee eeeRbena kee ee Reed 763 Download files from Nortel Networks web site 763 IGS ac culveveanatenan eke eee deweeen ae eee 765 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 13 of 77
435. ion refer to Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List on page 145 IP Call Recording IP Call Recording provides the IP address and port information for an IP Phone in new Information Elements IE over Application Module Link AML for Meridian Link Services MLS This information correlates the TN of a specific IP Phone with its associated IP address for a call recording application When enabled in LD 17 IP Call Recording sends a modified AML message for each call The modified message identifies the call s IP endpoint and makes it possible to correlate the RTP packets for that call to a particular IP Phone IP Call Recording introduces a new IE pair e This Party IP IE monitored party e Other Party IP IE remote party The IP IE pair is similar to the existing IE pairs e For DNs This Party DN IE Other Party DN IE e For TNs This Party TN IE Other Party TN IE 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 95 of 770 The IP IEs are optional in the Unsolicited Message Status USM Active and USM Restore messages Note the following e If the USM message applies to a monitored key on a digital telephone then the IP IEs are not sent e Ifthe USM message applies to a monitored key on an IP Phone then the IP IEs are sent one for the monitored party and one for the remote party A call recording application is provided with status update messages for the call keys of any IP Phone it is monitor
436. ion of the window 2 Inthe lower portion of the window right click on the Leader 0 card to be deleted Select Telnet from the pop up window Log into the card 4 Enter the clearLeader command from the IPL gt CLI This command removes the IP address information from NVRAM and clears the Leader flag End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 479 of 770 Change the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in OTM Prior to changing any IP address understand Codecs on page 179 and consult with the IP network administrator IP address configuration changes are completed on four tabs in the Node Properties window as follows e General tab Configure network connections in this tab See Figure 149 on page 480 e Configuration tab Card properties are set in this tab See Figure 150 on page 482 e SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab SMNP traps and card routing table entries are configured in this tab See Figure 151 on page 485 e Ports tab ELAN subnet settings are set in this tab See Figure 152 on page 486 To change the IP address of an IP Telephony node follow the steps in Procedure 75 CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 75 Changing the IP addresses of an IP Telephony node in OTM 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Teleph
437. ion window opens See Figure 91 on page 337 The navigation tree is located on the left side of the browser window The System Status menu is expanded in the navigation tree 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 337 of 770 Figure 91 Element Manager System Information NERT EL NETWORKS Site 192 168 1 50 gt System Information v System Status P Call Server SNMP System Information 1p Telephony gt Configuration gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration System Name Belleville S_CS50 SRVR_ELAN gt Support IP Address 192 168 1 50 3 Tools Type Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000S M A Logout Version 2121 Release 400 Redundancy State NOT APPLICABLE CPU and Health State NOT APPLICABLE System Name Belleville S_CS50 SRVR_ELAN System Location System Location System Contact System Contact Call Server Information gt Call Server Configuration and Trace Information Signaling Server Information Host Name 1 Software version sse 4 00 4 Role Leader Note 1 To log out of Element Manager click Logout at the bottom of the navigation tree Note 2 When a user is in the Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Node gt Edit window seen in Figure 95 on page 343 Element Manager times out after a period of inactivity Users are prompted with a warning five minutes before Element Manager time
438. ips the IP Phone s private IP address and private port number and assigns it a public IP address and public port number To support multiple IP Phones behind one NAT device it is necessary for NAT to map between public and private IP addresses and ports for each IP Phone behind it There is a mapping for both a signaling port and a media voice port Placing an IP Phone behind Multiple NAT devices is an unsupported configuration If it is necessary to have a configuration with multiple NATs between the IP Phone and the Voice Gateway Media Card all NATs on the path must follow the rules described in the following sections for signaling and media streams Mapping is configured and implemented using the NAT device The IP Line application does not implement any of the mappings NAT and signaling NAT hides the true identity of the IP Phone from the LTPS The LTPS is only aware of any IP Phone based on the public IP address and port of the signaling messages A signaling message originates from the IP Phone on the private side from port 5000 That signaling message is then mapped from the private side to a public IP and port and that is the IP address seen by the LTPS Signaling messages between the Voice Gateway Media Card and IP Phones are carried by RUDP Each RUDP connection is distinguished by its IP address and port number IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 64 of 770 Features The NAT device performs privat
439. iption is outlined in Table 97 Table 97 NTAG81CA maintenance cable pin description 8 pin Mini DIN 9 pin D Sub Signals MIX Side PC Side Signals MIX Side Male Female PC Side 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 725 of 770 NTAG81BA maintenance extender cable The NTAG81BA maintenance extender 3 m cable connects the NTAG81CA cable to a PC or terminal It has a 9 pin D type connector at both ends one male and one female See Table 98 The cable can also be used to extend the serial port presented by the NTMF94EA I O panel cable The extender cable is shown in Figure 220 Table 98 NTAG81BA Maintenance cable pin description 9 pin D Sub Male 9 pin D Sub Female i Figure 220 O OI NI OO a amp OJN oO WIN OO a amp B OJN NTAG81BA Maintenance Extender cable DB 9 male DB 9 female es Le IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 726 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Replace the NT8D81BA cable with the NT8D1AA cable and install the NTCW84JW special IPE filter This procedure explains how to replace the NT8D81BA cable with the NT8D81AA cable and how to install the NTCW84JA special IPE filter in the IPE module
440. irm using natcheck The natcheck tool cannot be used to determine if the private to public mapping created by the NAT device is being kept alive by a unidirectional packet flow 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Page 713 of 770 Confirm using IP Phone If an IP Phone behind a NAT device has a two way speech path immediately after being registered and continues to have a two way speech path 2 30 minutes later then the NAT device s address port mapping is being kept alive by the packets Ifa one way speech path occurs after this time period ensure that the IP Phone has the latest CS 1000 Release 4 0 firmware version If the IP Phone has the latest firmware then the problem lies with the NAT device Try replacing the NAT device with a different model If the one way speech path problem is fixed after rebooting the IP Phone it is likely that the NAT device does not meet the requirement of unidirectional packet flow As well ensure that the firmware on the IP Phone has the latest CS 1000 Release 4 0 firmware version older firmware versions can be a possible source of the one way speech path problem Firmware versions The IP Phone must have the correct minimum firmware version loaded Confirm using natcheck The natcheck tool cannot be used to determine the IP Phone firmware version Confirm using IP Phone On the IP Phone go to the Services gt Telephone
441. isk space to use 361 MB Move Folder View Files view Objects e 4 Click the Every visit to the page radio button This checks for new versions of stored pages on every visit to the web page 5 Click OK in the Settings window Click OK in the Internet Options window End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 335 of 770 Launch Element Manager Follow the steps in Procedure 40 to launch Element Manager Procedure 40 Launching Element Manager 1 Open Internet Explorer 2 Enter the Signaling Server Node IP address in the Address Bar url line of the browser window Click Go or press Enter on the keyboard Note The ELAN subnet IP address might be required instead of the Node IP address to access the Element Manager login window in secure environments 3 Element Manager opens and the Login window appears See Figure 90 on page 336 a Enter the User ID and Password of the Call Server b Enter the IP Address of the Call Server in the CS IP Address field c Click the Login button IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 336 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 90 Element Manager Login window NORTEL NETWORKS Lt Element Manager User ID Password CS IP Address 207 179 153 99 Preset 4 The System Informat
442. isplays the PEC Product Engineering Code and serial number for the card The IP Line PEC is NTZC80AA STAT Isc Print the Meridian 1 CS 1000M and CS 1000 software status of the specified card where loop s shelf c card STATIscu TNs Print the Meridian 1 CS 1000M and CS 1000S software status of the specified unit where loop s shelf c card u unit For Nortel Networks IP Phones there are two kinds of TNs to consider e physical TN represents a physical unit of the Voice Gateway Media Card e virtual TN configured on a virtual superloop and represents an IP Phone Physical TNs Physical TNs that are seen as trunk units are managed using existing LD 32 commands Virtual TNs Because virtual TNs are configured on a virtual superloop virtual TN maintenance has no meaning that is what is already provided by the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 for phantom loops IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 582 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance In LD 32 any command affecting a phantom loop leads to an NTP665 message because the loop does not physically exist LD 32 supports STAT DISU ENLU and IDU commands on an IP Phone Virtual TN All other commands generate the NPRO47 message Maintenance commands for the IP Phone Table 70 contains the maintenance commands in LD 32 for the IP Phone Table 70 LD 32 maintenance commands for IP Phones Command Description
443. itrates application access to the IP Phones e manages all the IP Phones between the applications and the UNIStim messaging to the IP Phone e maintains context sensitive states of the IP Phone for example display or lamp state e isolates IP Phone specific information from the applications for example the number of display lines number of characters for each display line tone frequency and cadence parameters Interactions with IP Phones The following information describes the process by which an IP Phone registers and unregisters with a Meridian 1 or CS 1000 system 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 47 of 770 Registration Table 9 describes the registration process Table 9 Registration process Step Description The IP Phone receives the IP address of the Connect Server co located with the LTPS through either DHCP or manual configuration The IP Phone contacts the Connect Server The Connect Server instructs the IP Phone to display a message on its display screen requesting the customer s IP Telephony node number and TN The node number and TN are entered The Connect Server redirects the IP Phone to the Node Master The IP Phone contacts the Node Master The Node Master redirects the IP Phone to the LTPS The IP Phone contacts the LTPS If the IP Phone is valid the LTPS registers it with the system Unregistration Table 10 describes the unregistra
444. k To create an IP Phone using VTNs create a virtual superloop in LD 97 e Upto 1024 VTNs can be configured on a single virtual superloop for Large Systems CS 1000M Cabinet and CS 1000M Chassis systems and CS 1000E systems e Upto 128 VTNs can be configured on a single virtual superloop for Meridian 1 Option 11C Cabinet and Meridian 1 Option 11C Chassis systems leading to support for a maximum of 640 VTNs for each of these systems 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 51 of 770 e Upto 1024 VTNs can be configured on a single virtual superloop for CS 1000S systems Table 11 describes the virtual superloop and virtual card mapping on a CS 1000S system Each superloop has two ranges of cards Table 11 Virtual superloop virtual card mapping for CS 1000S Each ITG P 24 port line card provides 24 physical TNs and each Media Card 32 port line card provides 32 physical TNs The physical TNs are the gateway channels DSP ports Configure the physical TNs IPTN in LD 14 They appear as TIE trunks without a Route Data Block RDB Virtual TNs Virtual TNs enable service data to be configured for an IP Phone such as key layout and class of service without requiring a physical IP Phone to be directly connected to the Call Server The concentration of IP Phones is made possible by dynamically allocating a port also referred to as a physical TN of the Voice Gateway Media Card for a circui
445. l BKSpace IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 430 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration When the TN password protection feature is configured with a non zero length password and is enabled e Figure 139 on page 431 shows the IP Phone 2004 TN entry screens Figure 139 on page 431 displays the Node ID and Password Note the Password entry input field is blank underscores are not displayed Therefore the maximum length of the password is not disclosed Ifthe correct password is entered the TN is displayed e Figure 140 on page 432 shows the IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2001 TN entry screens Figure 140 displays the Node ID The Node ID is entered and the user presses OK Figure 140 displays the Password entry window Note the Password entry input field is blank underscores are not displayed Therefore the maximum length of the password is not disclosed Ifthe correct password is entered the TN is displayed 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 431 of 770 Figure 139 IP Phone 2004 registration with password checking Page 1 Node __ __ __ Password BKSpace Clear Cancel Page 2 BKSpace Clear Cancel IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 432 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Figure 140 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2001 registration with password checking BKSpace Clear Cancel BKSpace Clear Cancel BKSpac
446. l to communicate with the Voice Gateway Media Card The TCP protocol enables messages to be bundled Unlike the RUDP transport that creates a separate message for every signaling message such as display updates or key messages the TCP transport bundles a number of messages and sends them as one packet IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 50 of 770 Description Handshaking is added to the Call Server and IP Line software so that the TCP functionality is automatically enabled A software version check is performed by the IP Line application each time before it attempts to establish a TCP link with the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 CPUs TCP transports messages while RUDP establishes and maintains the link If the version does not satisfy the minimum supported version CS 1000 Release 4 0 a RUDP link is used instead to maintain the link and all signaling Virtual superloops virtual TNs and physical TNs Virtual TNs VTNs enable configuration of service data for an IP Phone such as key layout and class of service without requiring the IP Phone to be dedicated hard wired to a given TN on the Voice Gateway Media Card Calls are made between an IP Phone and circuit switched telephone trunks using the full CS 1000 and Meridian 1 feature set Digital Signal Processor DSP channels are allocated dynamically for this type of call to perform the encoding decoding required to connect the IP Phone to the circuit switched networ
447. lan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching V System Utility P call Server 2 ip Telephony 2 Click Personal Directories Backup The Personal Directories Backup window opens See Figure 25 on page 162 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 162 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Figure 25 Personal Directories Backup window Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility gt Personal Directories Backup Action SEEM Submit Cancel Remote backup IP address Remote backup userid Remote backup password Remote backup path Remote backup file name 3 Enter the data for the Remote backup IP address Remote backup userid Remote backup password Remote backup path and Remote backup file name fields 4 Click Submit End of Procedure Full database recovery Follow the steps in Procedure 4 on page 163 to perform a full database backup for the IP Phone Application Server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 163 of 770 Procedure 4 Performing a full database recovery 1 Click System Utility gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony System Utility window opens See Figure 26 Figure 26 IP Telephony System Utility window NORTEL NETWORKS Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility System Status Personal Directories Backup gt Call Server Personal
448. lash card Go to the Nortel Networks web site and download the firmware for the IP Phones to the Leader card See Appendix F on page 763 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 306 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 As each IP Phone comes online its firmware version is automatically compared to the version that is stored on the Voice Gateway Media Card If they are different the new firmware is downloaded from the Voice Gateway Media Card to the IP Phones After the new firmware has been downloaded the IP Phone reboots and registers again with the Voice Gateway Media Card CS 1000M and CS 1000S For CS 1000M and CS 1000S systems it is not necessary to download software and firmware files to the card All required software and firmware files are on the Signaling Server Installation CD and are copied over at installation The Signaling Server is the Leader so all Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node go to the Signaling Server to obtain the IP Phone firmware files Note The IP Phone does not necessarily register with the same card as before the upgrade Verify card software and IP Phone firmware Before beginning ensure that the following software is installed on the PC e Software to extract zipped files WinZip or equivalent e A web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or later To verify the Voice Gateway Media Card software and the firmware on the IP Phone follow the
449. lash memory into DRAM memory The loaded patch is inactive until it is put into service using the pins command When a patch is successfully loaded the pload command returns a patch handle number The patch handle number is used as input to other patch commands pins poos pout and plis Syntax pload patch filename where patch filename is the filename or path of the patch file If a filename alone is provided the patch must be in the C u patch directory otherwise the full or relative path must be provided If the pload command is issued without a parameter enter the patch filename and other information when prompted pins Puts a patch that has been loaded into memory using the pload command into service This command activates a patch If issued successfully the pins command indicates that global procedures functions or areas of memory are affected by the patch When prompted choose to proceed or not to proceed Syntax pins handle where handle is the number returned by the pload command If the pins command is issued without a parameter enter a handle when prompted 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 85 Patch commands Part 2 of 3 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 619 of 770 Command Description poos Deactivates a patch takes it out of service by restoring the patched procedure to its original state Syntax poos handle If t
450. lation and Operation Page 488 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Transmit the node or card properties to the Leader 0 card Select the Leader 0 Voice Gateway Media Card in the IP Telephony window If changes are made to the then transmit tab properties General tab node properties Note f changes are made to the System Name System Location or System Contact in the Hostname Config window Host Names button the card properties must be transmitted Configuration tab node properties SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab card properties Ports tab card properties Click the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit To transmit to the node select the Transmit to selected nodes radio button Check the Node Properties to Active Leader check box Click the Start transmit button The results of the transmit appear in the box under Transmit control Verify that the properties are transmitted successfully If the transmit is unsuccessful click the Start transmit button again Log into LD 32 and disable the cards using the DISI command Click the Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit Select the Transmit to select cards radio button Click the Start transmit button The results of the transmit appear in the box under Transmit control Verify that the properties transmitted successfully If the transmit is unsuccessful click the Start transmi
451. le Note The firmware upgrade procedure does not apply to the IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 e In Procedure 34 on page 306 the correct software for the Voice Gateway Media Card should have been obtained and verified The files should have been transferred to the OTM PC e If using Procedure 35 on page 311 and Procedure 37 on page 316 together do not restart the Voice Gateway Media Card until Procedure 37 is completed All the cards must be restarted because the software has not been upgraded The new software will not run until the cards are rebooted because the new firmware is incompatible with the old software e Ifusing Procedure 37 on page 316 alone a firmware upgrade only it is only necessary to reboot the node IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 316 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 To upgrade the firmware on the IP Phone follow the steps in Procedure 37 This procedure has two major steps e placing the IP Phone firmware onto each card in the node e propagating the firmware from the card to each IP Phone registered on that card Procedure 37 Upgrading the IP Phone firmware 1 Open OTM Navigator and click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Inthe main card list view disable all Voice Gateway Media Cards that are to be upgraded with the new firmware All cards must have the same IP Phone firmware version
452. le data using OTM 1 Click the DSP Profile tab The DSP Options sub tab opens See Figure 65 on page 272 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 272 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 65 New Node DSP Profile tab lt lt i x General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Select the DSP profile for all cards in this node Changes to the DSP profile must be transmitted to each card DSP Options Codec Options m General m FAX options IV Enable DTMF tone detection IV Enable V 25 FAX Modem Tone detection V Enable echo canceller IV V 21 FAX tone detection enabled Echo canceller tail delay 128 ms FAX maximum rate 14400 7 bps Idle noise level 65 dBm FAX playout nominal delay 100 ms Voice activity detection threshold fa 7 a dB FAX no activity timeout 20 ots ize 30 r Loss and Level Plan FAX packet size bytes Country North America x Reset Defaults Table 56 lists the configurable DSP parameters the range of the values and the default values Table 56 DSP parameters Part 1 of 2 Parameter Default value Enable DTMF tone detection checked or unchecked checked Enable echo canceller checked or unchecked checked Echo canceller tail delay 64 or 128 ms 128 ms Idle noise level 327 to 327 dB 65 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 Septe
453. les e The LATEST button displays the most recent syslog information for the Voice Gateway Media Card e There are four SYSLOG buttons one for each of the four syslog files on the Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 515 of 770 Figure 160 System Status gt IP Telephony gt Syslog Site 47 11 216 167 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt Syslog Element IP 47 11 216 135 Elernent Type Succession Media Card Syslog File to View LATEST z VIEW LATEST SYSLOG 0 SYSLOG 1 SYSLOG 2 SYSLOG 3 IPL 3 0 54 Friday August 16 08 51 04 EDT 2002 Completed addition of ITG MIB tree 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 MMsend called by appl 9 before Meridian Manager Init ITGSOOO Card initialized all alarms cleared 202 ELAN IP 47 11 216 135 MMsend called by appl 9 before Meridian Manager Init MMsend called by appl 9 before Meridian Manager Init Card TN 8 01 XA Create MsgQ Pointer XA Register with M 1 Manager XA Spawn xaTask Task Spawned OK XA Query 8051Xa for Dongle ID Got Dongle Response 5 Click the LATEST button to view the most current syslog information that was written to the Voice Gateway Media Card or click the SYSLOG 0 3 buttons to view any of the syslog files The syslog file data is displayed in the window below the buttons The data can be error messages or information messages For each message t
454. lick a button to invoke a command 4 From the Group drop down list select nodePwd 5 From the Command drop down list select nodePwdShow and click the RUN button 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 561 of 770 The output of the nodePwdShow command is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the window If in the default state the IP Phone Installer Password has never been set The nodePwdShow output should display the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 No 0 Od Oh Om Os where NodelD the IP Phone Installer Password configuration applies to all Voice Gateway Media Cards on the same TLAN subnet that belong to this Node ID PwdEna by default the cards should be in disabled state PwdEna No The PwdEna setting specifies the enabled Yes or disabled No state of the IP Phone Installer Password Pwd this is the administrator IP Phone Installer Password In the default state the administrator password is null TmpPwd this is the temporary IP Phone Installer Password In the default state the temporary password is null Uses the Uses parameter applies to the temporary IP Phone Installer Password In the default state this setting is null If the card is not in the default state the Uses parameter is a numeric value from 0 1000 This number specifies the remaining number of uses for the temporary password If zero is
455. live The default value is 30 seconds The value can be decreased to 20 seconds or increased to 600 seconds Mute and Hold considerations IP Line 4 0 must handle two special situations when interworking with NAT Mute and Hold Mute Table 15 describes the Mute process Table 15 Mute process Part 1 of 2 Problem 1 When a user enables Mute the LTPS sends a Mute Transmit Tx command to the IP Phone That command forces the IP Phone to generate silence in the transmit direction If the IP Phone is using an evocator that implements silence suppression for example G 729AB the IP Phone sends one silence frame to the far end and then stops sending any further frames until Mute is cancelled Data sent from the IP Phone stops 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 67 of 770 Table 15 Mute process Part 2 of 2 4 The NAT device sees that the IP Phone s UDP connection is not active in the transmit direction and starts aging the translation 5 Depending on the length of time the call is muted and the duration of the NAT s translation aging timeout value the NAT device might time out the translation and drop the connection 6 All packets coming from the far end are dropped by the NAT device 7 When mute is cancelled the IP Phone starts transmitting again 8 NAT considers this to be a new connection and creates a new translation NAT sends data to the far end using
456. ll Server for one hour The Call Server lock can be removed by an administrator using an LD 32 command to disable and re enable that TN Refer to Communication Server 1000S Maintenance 553 3031 500 or Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 for more information Passwords and IP Phone Registration An IP Phone registers using the TN in its EEPROM A valid user ID and password are used to determine the Home LTPS for the IP Phone during the Virtual Office connection A Gatekeeper is required if the Home LTPS is not the LTPS where the IP Phone is registered when the Virtual Office login is initiated Virtual Office capabilities Virtual Offices provides the following capabilities 1 A network wide connection server Gatekeeper is equipped to provide addressing information of call servers based on a user s DN 2 A key sequence is entered at an IP Phone to initiate the login sequence Then the current network DN and a user level password is entered The password is the Station Control Password configured in LD 11 Ifa SCPW is not configured the Virtual Office feature is blocked 3 A user logs out when leaving the location For more detailed information about Virtual Office see IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Branch Office and Media Gateway 1000B The Media Gateway 1000B MG 1000B provides a means of extending CS 1000 Release 4 0 features to one or more remotely located branch offices
457. lly configured with the Node Properties of the node The card enters a state of active Leader The card faceplate display shows Lxxx where Xxx the number of IP Phones registered with the LTPS on the Leader card L000 shows that no IP Phones are registered e The Follower cards receive their BOOTP configuration information from the Leader card The Follower card faceplate display shows Fxxx where xxx the number of IP Phones registered with the Follower card s LTPS F000 shows that no IP Phones are registered 2 Reboot the Follower card if the card s faceplate does not display FXXX or FOOO 3 Once all the Follower cards have the correct display on their faceplates log into Element Manager 4 Inthe Node Summary window click the Transfer Status button associated with the node See Figure 117 on page 380 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 380 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 117 Transfer node information to the card NE Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt NETWORKS Node Summary gt System Status a asi New Node to Add v Configuration D 7 Call Server Import Node Files IP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Node 450 Node IP 192 168 2 90 gt Support Tools gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 amp Logout
458. log so 0 ceca desea scien eeanas 451 Reset the Operational Measurements file 451 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 453 CONG nc badass elas enue eerwe eed eens esses dadaes 453 INUGUNCUON pc doce ecngkeseiastigevaieeoereeeceresaadvasows 454 OTM administration procequres ccc 62cectt eed eenerte ered 454 Back upand restore OTM data i 0s c00s2004sseneesievasiuysaen 467 Update IP Telephony node properties using OTM 468 Update Voice Gateway Media Card card properties 491 Add an IP Telephony node in OTM by retrieving an existing node 499 IP Line CLI access using Telnet or local RS 232 maintenance port 503 IP Line administration using Element Manager 505 CONE Cab C4 batt eid emilee eee add eealet sures eiiads 505 INGOHMCNON cecc0 an tiode este ees AR ER 506 Element Manager administration procedures 506 Backup and restore dalie wi ered ee eid dees eeheade eeaP ewe 516 Update IP Telephony node properties 0 000 520 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 10 of 770 Contents Update other node iGperes occas eo cete ania g retier irrisa 551 Telnet to a Voice Gateway Media Card using Virtual Terminal 551 Check the Voice Gateway Channels a riciscsidaissdaireiisrai 554 Setting the IP Phone Installer Password 2 00 558 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance 567 i ee ee ee ee ee ee ere ee PE 5
459. m Normal Operation Recommended Relative humidity 15 C 20 30 C 55 non condensing Absolute Relative humidity 10 C 20 to 45 C 80 non condensing Short Term less than 72 hr 40 C 70 C Rate of change Recommended Relative humidity Less than 1 C for every 3 minutes 60 C 95 non condensing 40 C to 70 C non condensing Temperature Shock In 3 minutes In 3 minutes 25 C IP Line 40 to 70 C non condensing Description Installation and Operation Page 756 of 770 Appendix D Product integrity Electrical regulatory standards Table 103 Table 104 on page 758 and Table 105 on page 758 list the safety and Electro magnetic Compatibility regulatory standards by geographic region for the Voice Gateway Media Card Specifications for the Voice Gateway Media Card meet or exceed the standards listed in these regulations Safety Table 103 provides a list of safety regulations met by the Voice Gateway Media Card along with the type of regulation and the country region covered by each regulation Table 103 Safety regulations Regulation Identifier Regulatory Agency UL 1459 Safety United States CALA CSA 22 2 225 Safety Canada EN 41003 Safety International Telecom EN 60950 IEC 950 Safety International BAKOM SR 784 103 12 4 1 1 EMC Safety Switzerland AS3260 TS001 TS004 TSO06 Safety N
460. m 69 from 69 Server 2 reports my TCP nitiated TCP server 3 connection nitiated TCP loopback connection Connection from 69 156 96 28 57289 Loopback received 6 of 20 from 69 20 6 from 2 0 8 5 5 from 2038 from Request 10 of 20 from Request 11 of 20 from Request 12 of 20 from Request 13 of 20 from 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 address 69 29 9856 address as 69 as 156 96 28 port 156 96 28 port 156 96 28 port 156 96 28 port address as 69 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 56 96 28 port 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 pdos lcs mit edu at 18 26 4 9 9856 tears lcs mit edu at 18 26 4 77 9856 sure lcs mit edu at 18 26 4 29 9856 156 156 156 156 156 57285 57285 57285 57285 156 96 57285 57285 57285 57285 57285 57285 57285 57285 96 96 96 96 96 28 28 28 28 283 24 57283 57283 57283 57281 57281 57281 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Page 715 of 770 Request 14 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 15 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 16 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 17 of 20 Loopback packet from 69 156 96 28 port 57285 Request 18 of 20 Loopback
461. m Management to receive IP Line SNMP traps Alarm Management cannot be configured using Element Manager OTM 2 2 must be used to configure the Alarm Management feature to receive IP Line SNMP traps See Procedure 38 on page 322 Assemble and install an IP Phone To assemble and install an IP Phone refer to ZP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Change the default IPL gt CLI Shell password The IPL gt Command Line Interface CLD is password protected to control Telnet access and access to the local maintenance port The same user name and password also controls FTP access to the Voice Gateway Media Card The IPL gt CLI has a default user name of itgadmin and a default password of itgadmin The default user name and password must be changed as a preventative security measure See IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password on page 421 and Procedure 63 on page 435 Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords The IP Phone Installer Password used when changing the TN on the telephone controls registration with a virtual line TN on the Call Server Refer to page 425 for more information about the IP Phone Installer Passwords To enable and set the administrative IP Phone Installer Password see Procedure 63 on page 435 If required enable and set a temporary IP Phone Installer Password See Procedure 64 on page 438 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes usin
462. mber 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 273 of 770 Table 56 DSP parameters Part 2 of 2 Parameter Default value Voice activity detection 20 to 10 dB 17 dB threshold Enable V 25 FAX Modem checked or unchecked checked tone detection Enable V 21 FAX tone checked or unchecked checked detection FAX maximum rate 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 bps 12000 14400 bps FAX playout nominal delay 0 300 ms 100 ms FAX no activity timeout 10 32000 seconds 20 seconds FAX packet size 20 48 bytes 30 bytes 2 Click the Codec Options sub tab See Figure 66 on page 275 Up to four codecs can be selected Note The T 38 Fax and G 711 Clear Channel Fax codecs are not counted in this limit The G 711 codec type is mandatory and is automatically selected Recommendation Nortel Networks recommends that the system be configured with both G 711 and G 729A if there is a possibility that IP Softphone 2050 could be configured with the I use a modem to connect to the network check box checked If the node does not have G 729A and or G 723 configured IP Softphone 2050 users with that checkbox selected will have calls blocked Note This does not apply to the MVC 2050 For more information refer to JP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 in the Select Sound Devices tab section IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page
463. ment Manager login window in secure environments This chapter also provides instruction for transmitting files to Voice Gateway Media Cards upgrading card software and upgrading IP Phone firmware Read the information on IP network engineering guidelines in Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 before installing an IP Telephony node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 331 of 770 Upgrade the ITG P 24 port line cards to IP Line 4 0 Note Element Manager cannot be used with the Meridian 1 system as a Signaling Server is required in the system configuration Meridian 1 and CS 1000 systems require the ITG P 24 port line cards to be running IP Line 4 0 WARNING In CS 1000 systems the ITG P 24 port line card using an earlier release of the IP Line application must be upgraded to IP Line 4 0 or communication with Element Manager fails OTM 2 2 is required to upgrade an ITG P 24 port line card to IP Line 4 0 Once the card s software has been upgraded to IP Line 4 0 using OTM 2 2 configuration administration and maintenance tasks can be performed using Element Manager Refer to ITG P 24 port card upgrades in Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures 553 3031 258 for the procedure to upgrade an ITG P 24 port line card to IP Line 4 0 software Configure IP Line 4 0 data using Element Manager Element Manager can be used to man
464. meter The timeString is formatted as HH MM and is in 24 hour clock format By default the time is set to 02 00 2 AM auditTaskSet tTaskName 0 1 Forces a task to be considered critical or non critical This command overrides the audit s default setting for the task The tfaskName parameter specifies the task the VxWorks taskname as displayed by the i command The value of 0 marks the task as non critical the value of 1 marks it as critical Table 90 lists the Audit commands Table 90 Audit commands Signaling Command Description Server auditHistoryShow Displays the recent history of the audit task s activity auditRebootSet Distributes globally the audit task from resetting the card auditRebootTimeSet Sets the time of non critical task triggered card resets auditShow Displays audit task information such as a list of tasks and the time for non critical tasks triggered resets auditTaskSet Enables manual setting of a task to critical or non critical status 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 633 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card self tests During power up the Voice Gateway Media Card performs diagnostic tests to ensure correct operation The faceplate RS 232 port on the Voice Gateway Media Card can be used to monitor the progress of these tests When the processor responds correctly the 8051XA controller switches its ser
465. mmand is entered After the last command is entered the card automatically reboots 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 641 of 770 4 When the card boots up with firmware version x x the following messages are printed ITG Firmware Rls x x 8051XA Firmware Version x x Pentium lt date gt C Nortel Networks Inc 1996 2004 32K External RAM detected All FPGAs are configured No dongle detected 8K DPRAM detected Bank 0 Checksum 54A9H End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 642 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Upgrade the Media Card 8051 XAController firmware Upgrades of the Media Card 8051 XAController firmware can be required at times For instance the firmware can be upgraded to enable the display of the last reset reason If the Media Card is a Release 8 vintage or older it cannot be upgraded unless the 8051 OTP part is changed on the board Vintages of the card after Release 8 can be upgraded as described in this section The release label is on the faceplate below the Hex display Follow the steps in Procedure 100 to upgrade the Media Card 8051 XAController firmware Procedure 100 Upgrading the Media Card 8051 XAConiroller firmware 1 Determine if the firmware upgrade is required and if the card can have its firmware upgraded by this process IPL gt firmwareVersionShow Firmware Version ITG Firmware Rls 6 5
466. mmunity names strings are required to access the Voice Gateway Media Card There are three community names public admingroup2 and admingroup3 OTM 2 2 stores the community names for Meridian systems See Figure 71 on page 285 Procedure 27 on page 285 explains how to change the SNMP community names to control access to the IP Telephony node Element Manager stores the community names for CS 1000 systems See Figure 98 on page 348 Procedure 43 on page 348 is used to change the SNMP community name to control access to the IP Telephony node IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password The IPL gt Command Line Interface CLD is password protected to control Telnet access and access to the local maintenance port The same user name and password also controls FTP access to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Login banner The IP Line 4 0 login banner information includes the IP 4 0 line card software version ELAN IP address card type firmware version current time and date system name system location and system contact IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 422 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration The following information is an example of the login banner displayed on the Media Card Login Password Welcome to the IP Line command line Software Version IPL 4 00 01 Management IP 47 11 216 216 Host Type Media Card Firmware Version ITG Firmware Rls 5 7 SysName ITG Line SysLocation TN 10 0 SysContact design
467. mporary user access to the TN for configuration A temporary password removes the need to distribute the administrative node password and then the need to change it afterwards If there is a null administrator password set and you create a temporary password the temporary password overrides the null administrative password The syntax for temporary IP Phone Installer Password specifies the password the number of times that the password can be entered and the time that the password is valid To set a temporary IP Phone Installer Password follow the steps in Procedure 64 Procedure 64 Configuring the temporary IP Phone Installer Password 1 Type nodeTempPwdSet password uses lt time gt at the IPL gt prompt where password is the temporary password string 6 to 14 digits in length uses is the value from 0 to 1000 and time is between 0 and 240 hours For example nodeTempPwdSet 987654 15 3 2 Type nodePwdShow to see the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 987654 15 Od 3h Om Os 3 The temporary password is automatically deleted after it has been used the defined number of times Uses or when the duration expires Timeout whichever comes first However to delete the temporary password before the number of uses or time has expired type the nodeTempPwdClear command at the IPL gt prompt 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 439 of 770
468. mpt REQ TYPE CUST BUID MOTN CLS CLS 553 3001 365 Responses NEW CHG i2001 i2002 i2004 i2050 XX lt user id gt Iscu VOLA VOLD VOLA VOUD Description For IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050 The system accepts this response if it is equipped with packages 88 and 170 The IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 2002 IP Softphone 2050 and MVC 2050 are also restricted by the IP Phone License setting Customer number as defined in LD 15 Dialable DN main office user ID Enter X to delete Main Office Terminal Number Format for Large System and CS 1000E system where loop s shelf c card u unit Accept default for CS 1000S Media Gateway 1000B Media Gateway 1000T or Small System Main Office Virtual Office login operation is allowed denied on this TN Allow Disallow Virtual Office user on this TN using other IP Phone Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 419 of 770 e911 If 911 is dialed while logged into Virtual Office the LTPS re directs the 911 call to the local area 911 service PSAP not the remote Call Server 911 service Table 60 describes the process Table 60 e911 process The LTPS restarts the 911 call thus reaching the correct PSAP Note The extra processing adds 5 seconds to the call setup time After the emergency call ends the IP Phone remains registered to the Home LTPS as a no
469. mption The worst case current drawn by the Voice Gateway Media Cards from each Backplane voltage supply is provided in Table 100 on page 754 Table 100 Voice Gateway Media Card power consumption Card Type Power Consumption ITG Pentium 24 port 15 volt 19 3 watts gt 0 640 amps li mazan 5 volt 10 5 watts gt 2 1 amps Media Card 15 volt 6 watts gt 0 2 amps 5 volt 7 25 watts gt 1 45amps Environmental specifications Table 101 shows the environmental specifications of the Voice Gateway Media Card The Voice Gateway Media Card provides external interface protection to 52 V dc but does not provide lightning or hazardous voltage protection Table 101 Voice Gateway Media Card environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing Storage temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix D Product integrity Page 755 of 770 Measurements of performance in regards to temperature and shock were made under test conditions as described in Table 102 on page 755 Temperature related conditions Refer to Table 102 for a display of acceptable temperature and humidity ranges for the Voice Gateway Media Card Table 102 Voice Gateway Media Card environmental specifications Specification Minimum Maximu
470. munity names access for security See page 345 Configure DSP Profile data See page 349 Configure DiffServ CodePoint DSCP data 802 1Q support and NAT support See page 355 Configure Call Server ELAN network interface Active ELNK IP address TLAN Voice port RTP UDP port and the routing tables on the Voice Gateway Media Card See page 357 Configure file server access See page 362 Configure the loss plan See page 364 Configure Voice Gateway Media Care properties See page 365 Submit and transfer the node information to the Call Server See page 368 Transmit Voice Gateway Media Card configuration data to the Voice Gateway Media Cards a b Set Leader IP Address See Procedure 51 on page 373 Transmit node and card properties to the Leader See Procedure 52 on page 375 Upgrade the card software and IP Phone firmware Verify card software version See page 386 Verify card firmware release See page 389 Download software and firmware files from the Nortel Networks web site See page 392 Upload the software and firmware files to the file server See page 393 Upgrade the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card See page 396 Reboot the card See page 400 Upgrade the firmware on the card See page 400 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 198 of 770 Installation and configuration summary 9 Configure OTM alarm notification feature to receive IP Line SNMP traps See Procedu
471. n Browse m Transmit control Start transmit View last transmit Close Help 5 Under Transmit options click the Transmit to selected nodes radio button 6 Select the IP Phone firmware to Active Leader check box 7 Click on the Browse button to the right of the Firmware location text box to locate the IP Phone firmware that was previously verified as required for the Voice Gateway Media Card software version Select the firmware file and click Open IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 318 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 The path and file name of the IP Phone firmware appears in the Firmware location text box The IP Line 4 0 software determines the target IP Phone type 2001 2002 or 2004 based on the firmware filename A filename of the format xx02xxx BIN where x can be any alpha numeric character represents a firmware file for the Phase IP Phone 2004 Similarly a filename of the format xx03xxx BIN represents a firmware file for the Phase IP Phone 2002 A filename of the format xx04xxx BIN represents a firmware file for the Phase II IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 CAUTION Downloading an incorrect version of the IP Phone firmware can result in extended service interruptions and require special recovery procedures 8 Click the Start transmit button to begin upgrading the IP Phone firmware on the Voice Gateway Media Cards
472. n Installation and Operation Page 424 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration In order for the FTP process to work correctly all the cards in a node must be synchronized with the same user ID and password Once the Voice Gateway Media Cards are synchronized with the Call Server the user login is synchronized with the Call Server s PWD1 The cards can then only be accessed by using the Call Server s Level 1 Password PWD1 user ID and password A card uses its user ID and password when it tries to access another card to FTP files The FTP fails unless all the cards have the same user ID and password due to failed user authentication Therefore a unique user ID and password should be used within one system Since most applications except the Gatekeeper communicate directly with the Call Server the Call Server s Level 1 PWD1 user ID and password is the unique password among all platforms Level 1 Password PWD1 The minimum password length on the Call Server is four characters The minimum password on the Voice Gateway Media Card and the Signaling Server is eight characters To make the passwords match the PWD1 is padded at the end with spaces if the password is less than eight characters For example if the Call Server s PWD1 is 0000 it is padded to the right with the four space characters to become 0000 This is done automatically by the software It is not necessary to manually add the spaces Password Updates
473. n and Operation Page 662 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 4 In OTM Navigator click Configuration gt Add System The Add System window opens 5 Add a system named Dummy of type Meridian 1 under the site named Retrieve IP Telephony data Under System Type click Meridian 1 and then click OK The New System Properties window opens See Figure 205 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 663 of 770 Figure 205 System Properties General Tab New System Properties x General Communications System Data Applications Customers Network System Name Short Name System Type I Meridian 1 r System Location Same as Site Address City State Province Country Zip Postal Code m Contact Information J Same as Site Name Phone Number Job Title Comments Cancel Apply Help 6 Click the Customers tab See Figure 206 on page 664 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 664 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Figure 206 System Properties Customers tab Nortel Networks Pittsburg Demo Option System Properties FIoperties 7 Click Add Add Customer Number 99 on the dummy Meridian 1 system End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OT
474. n ERTER ETES 203 Optional QMipmlenl stores oricecagedeuteridee inte seen Ghs 204 Install the hardware Component 5 004 00 04 eteevecsawcante 204 Summary of installation Steps cc ccese padae neers arinnar 205 Identify the IPE card slots on a CS 1000M or Meridian 1 206 Installing and cabling the ITG P 24 port line card 207 Installing and cabling the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line cards 209 Installing the NTCW84JA ITG specific I O Panel filter connector fora Latge Syslet c voccweasenseebuerssnuen es 217 Voice Gateway Media Card ELAN and TLAN network interfaces 221 Initial configuration of IP Line 4 0 data 0 0 00 0 2 cs cece eee 228 Summary of PLOCCUUIES 0 03 eek eee hee eee ee bun bi iinis 228 Configure IP address for the system active ELNK Ethernet interface LD 117 22 0 0 2sia ecsse0s0a9e0es 229 Configure VoIP bandwidth management zones LD 117 230 Element Manager for Zone Configuration 232 Configure physical TNS LD 14 i crrerriroreisesiricterres 234 Using Element Manager for Voice Gateway channels 235 Configure virtual superloops for IP Phones LD 97 240 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 202 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Configure IP Phone features MLD Ve occe sca aware nd eatns 243 Confieure the IP Phone KEM ca 040senoer beawoar de eeewes 245 IP Phone dedicated soft KeySi c 540 c
475. n Procedure 53 on page 379 to load the CONFIG INI file onto the card Follow the steps in Procedure 58 on page 396 to download the latest software to the Voice Gateway Media Card Follow the steps in Procedure 59 on page 400 to reboot the card and run the new software Follow the steps in Procedure 60 on page 401 to update the card s firmware End of Procedure Replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card To replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 109 Procedure 109 Replacing a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 1 2 Locate the faulty card by the TN MAC address and IP address Disable the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card in LD 32 with the DISI command The system outputs NPROO11 when the card has been completely disabled by the DISI command Use the disiTPS command at the IPL gt CLI to disable the LTPS on the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card This forces all IP Phones registered on this card to re register If there are sufficient resources this can take up to several minutes If there are not sufficient resources IP Phones can remain unregistered indefinitely Use the isetShow command to monitor the status of the card and the re registration of the IP Phones The Voice Gateway Media Card is completely disabled when no IP Phones are registered on the card Remove the faulty Voice Gateway Media Card from the system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 672 o
476. n and Configuration 553 3001 214 802 1Q support The IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 support 802 1Q This support enables the definition of virtual LANs VLANs within a single LAN This improves bandwidth management limits the impact of broadcast and multicast messages and simplifies VLAN configuration and packet prioritization Configuration of 802 1Q on IP Phones The 802 1Q support for the IP Phones is configured and controlled using the IP Phone s user interface or DHCP The DHCP approach eliminates the need to manually configure the VLAN ID during the installation IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 128 of 770 Features To configure 802 1Q set the following ten p bits e VLAN ID Set the p bits By default the 3 bit field p bits are set to 110b 6 which is the value recommended by Nortel Networks The p bit value can be changed using either OTM or Element Manager Two fields in OTM 2 2 and Element 669 Manager are used to set the p bits 1 A checkbox that when selected means the priority bits should be set to the value specified by the 802 1Q priority bit value field If the checkbox is unselected the IP Phone sends out the default priority of 6 2 A 802 1Q priority bit value field This field sets the value that the IP Phones sends out The range is 0 7 Set the VLAN ID The contents of the VLAN ID field can be specified on a per
477. n text box 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 10 11 12 13 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 313 of 770 Select the appropriate file filter that is sa p2 mms from the Files of type drop down list Locate the Voice Gateway Media Card software that was verified to be the correct version in Procedure 34 on page 306 Select the file and click Open to save the selection The path and file name of the Voice Gateway Media Card loadware appears in the Software location text box Click Start transmit to begin the Voice Gateway Media Card software upgrade process The software is transmitted to each card in turn and burned into the flash ROM on the Voice Gateway Media Card Monitor progress in the Transmit control window Confirm that the card software is transmitted successfully to all cards Note any error messages investigate and correct any problems and repeat card software transmission until it is completed successfully for each Voice Gateway Media Card The cards continue to run the old software until they are rebooted Reboot each Voice Gateway Media Card that received the transmitted software This enables the new loadware to take effect Reboot Leader 0 first followed by the other cards These cards must remain in the Disabled state after the upgrade so that a Reset command can be issued from the Maintenance menu Alternatively click the Reset button o
478. n the ELAN for the remote support OTM PC e SNMP manager for remote alarm monitoring Note 1 Up to eight SNMP trap destinations can be defined Note 2 A net route or host route through the Management ELAN gateway is added to the Voice Gateway Media Cards IP Routing Table for each SNMP destination address that is added to the SNMP traps list Note 3 To remove an SNMP trap destination click the corresponding Remove button End of Procedure Configuring community name strings The SNMP community name strings control access to the IP Telephony node Element Manager uses the community name strings to refresh the Voice Gateway Media Card status and to control the transmitting and retrieving of configuration data files for database synchronization Note Ifthe community name strings are forgotten connect a TTY to the Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port Restart the card The card displays the community name on the TTY during start up IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 348 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager To configure the community name strings in Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 43 Procedure 43 Configuring the community name strings 1 Select Configuration gt IP Telephony gt SNMP Configuration See Figure 98 Figure 98 Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt SNMP Configuration window Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telep
479. n the Maintenance tab in the Card Properties window of each card to reboot the cards Also the cards can be reset by using a pointed object to press the Reset button on the card faceplate WARNING Do not use a pencil to reset the Voice Gateway Media Card The graphite carbon can create an electrical short circuit on the board IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 314 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 14 After all the Voice Gateway Media Cards have been reset have successfully rebooted and are responding again to the OTM 2 2 IP Line 4 0 application do a Status refresh disabled active disabled backup disabled 15 Double click each upgraded card and verify the card software version in the S W version field of the Configuration tab in the Card Properties window 16 Use the LD 32 ENLC command to re enable the Voice Gateway Media Cards Use LD 32 in the TTY or OTM Overlay passthru to re enable the Voice Gateway Media Card with one of the following commands e ENLC Is c for Meridian 1 and CS 1000M Large Systems e ENLC c for Meridian 1 and CS 1000M Small Systems and CS 1000S 17 Repeat the previous two steps for each Voice Gateway Media Card End of Procedure Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software The minimum versions of IP Line 4 0 software for the Voice Gateway Media Card vintages earlier than NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB are e Version 6 7 for the Media Card
480. n the PC a nep C Compare only Schedule the date and time Month Da Year Hour Minute fe 7 4 200 EY fe gz 9 Select Update the data stored in the PC 10 Click OK to update the system data End of Procedure SNMP community name strings passwords are required to access the Voice Gateway Media Card The community name strings are not configured on the 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 287 of 770 Security tab They are displayed as read only for information purposes See Figure 73 Community name strings are configured on the System Properties General tab See Procedure 27 on page 285 Figure 73 Node Properties Security tab Node Properties Belleville lab56 Customer O Node 1 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security Fie Server QoS SNTP The SNMP read write community name is required by OTM to access the card The system management read write community names can be configured from the system properties page and Update System Data must be performed to update the values in the IP Telephony nodes System management Read community public System management Readi Vrite community private Cancel Apply Help Configure SNMP trap destinations for an IP Telephony node Follow the steps in Procedure 28 on page 288 to use OTM to configure SNMP trap destinations for an IP Telephon
481. nabled The default value is 10 1 Transfer files using the CLI A number of special file transfer commands are available to Put Get files from the IPL gt CLI These commands are normally used as part of an expert support procedure if OTM or Element Manager are not available These commands listed in Table 62 are from the perspective of the Voice Gateway Media Card If Get is part of the command the file is transferred from the OTM PC to the Voice Gateway Media Card If Put is part of the command the file is transferred from the Voice Gateway Media Card to the OTM PC To transfer a file enter one of the commands in listed in Table 62 at the IPL gt CLI depending on what type of file transfer is to occur Table 62 lists the commands can be entered at the IPL gt CLI Table 62 IPL gt CLI Commands file transfer Part 1 of 2 Command Parameters swDownload lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt configFileGet lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt bootPFileGet lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt hostFileGet lt hostname gt lt username gt lt password gt lt directory path gt lt filename gt lt ITGFileName gt lt listener gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 450 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Table
482. naling Server where the IP Phone Application Server resides When contact with the IP Phone Application Server is made Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List access is resumed IP Phone Application Server database maintenance All IP Phone Application Server database maintenance is performed in Element Manager Backup can be configured to occur daily at a scheduled time Database recovery can be performed for the entire database of the IP Phone Application Server or for one user s entries IP Phone Application Server database backup Follow the steps in Procedure 3 to perform a manual backup of the IP Phone Application Server s database Note A scheduled backup of the database can also be configured Refer to Configure the IP Phone Application Server and remote backup on page 153 Procedure 3 Backing up the IP Phone Application Server database Server manually 1 Click System Utility gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony System Utility window opens See Figure 24 on page 161 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 161 of 770 Figure 24 IP Telephony System Utility window NORTEL NETWORKS Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility x System Status Personal Directories Backup gt Call Server Personal Directories Restore gt IP Telephony v Configuration P Call Server 2 1p Telephony gt Network Numbering P
483. nd or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware rm Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Transmit to selected cards JV Node Properties to Active Leader J Card properties to all cards in node J Card software Software location Browse Internet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware location Browse I SNMP r w Community String l m Transmit control E View last transmit Close Help 25 Click the Start transmit button Monitor the progress in the Transmit Control window Confirm that the node properties are transmitted successfully to Leader 0 26 When the transmission is complete click the Close button 27 Insert the new card The card starts and obtains its IP configuration from the node master This process takes several minutes IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 474 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 The Maintenance faceplate display shows an alarm of T 21 or S009 e 7 21 is displayed if the card is new and there is no CONFIG INI file e 009 is displayed if the card has been used before and has a CONFIG INI file that contains an IP address for the Call Server that is no longer correct In the OTM IP Line 4 0 application refresh the view of the card status in the node Verify the card is responding to OTM by selecting th
484. nd select a card in the node See Figure 121 on page 387 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 387 of 770 Figure 121 LW Version window Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade p Node ID Node IP 192 168 253 7 Total elements 3 Hostname ELAN IP TN r 207 179 153 100 Signaling Server Leader LW Version gt NODES m 4 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower Li Version Succession Media M 2 207 179 153 111 caa Unknown Click a button to invoke a command File Name Create Time E WG Bergan fue a 0s rea0 oon JUN 30 14 07 10 2004 Wlapooa pP2 P2 ITG Pentium TUE JUL 06 16 41 382004 Pentium UE JUL 06 16 41 38 2004 n P2 TG GPentium ON JUL 26 11 29 16 2004 PL40009 P2 cee Pentium D JUL 28 11 08 56 2004 PL40012 P2 O P2 TG Pentium D AUG 04 13 56 56 2004 IpLaooo1 sa Succession Media Card WED JUN 30 14 07 18 2004 IPL40004 SA Succession Media Card TUE JUL 06 16 41 46 2004 IPLa0008 SA Succession Media Card MON JUL 26 11 29 24 2004 IPL40009 SA Succession Media Card D JUL 28 11 09 04 2004 IPL40012 SA Succession Media Card WED AUG 04 13 57 04 2004 ppb ayaa IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 388 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 4 Click the LW Version button located to the right of the card information The software version running on the card is displayed in t
485. ne Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 IP Phone 2001 User Guide IP Phone 2001 Quick Reference Card IP Phone 2002 User Guide IP Phone 2002 Quick Reference Card IP Phone 2004 User Guide IP Phone 2004 Quick Reference Card IP Softphone 2050 and Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide Note The I O panel filter connector is not required for Meridian 1 Option 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 Option 11C Chassis CS 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M Chassis or CS 1000S systems IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 30 of 770 Description IP Line 4 0 Media Card 8 port card package components Table 6 lists the IP Line 4 0 Media Card 8 port card package components The Media Card 8 port card is intended for branch office configurations The card is applicable to the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems Table 6 IP Line 4 0 Media Card 8 Port card package components Media Card 8 port IP Line 4 0 Voice Gateway Systems Package includes e Media Card 8 port Assembly NTVQ01AB e IP Line 4 0 CompactFlash NTM403AB e ITG EMC Shielding Kit NTVQ83AA e Readme First Document e Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adaptor e PC Maintenance Cable NTAG81CA e IP Line 4 0 NTP CD ROM NTDW81AF e TG specific Meridian 1 Backplane 50 pin I O Panel Filter Connector NTCW84JA see Note NTDU41EB Note The I O panel filter connector is not required for Merid
486. ne card It increases the packet processing power of the ITG P 24 port line card increases the channel density from 24 to 32 ports and reduces the slot usage from a dual slot to a single IPE slot Both the Media Card 32 port and 8 port line card require only one slot in the IPE shelf CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Wear an ElectroStatic Discharge strap when handling Media Card line cards As an additional safety measure handle all cards by the edges and when possible with the loosened packaging material still around the component CompactFlash installation The Media Card package contains the following items e Media Card e CompactFlash card e retaining pin The CompactFlash card must be installed on the Media Card before installing the Media Card in the system Follow the steps in Procedure 11 on page 210 to install the CompactFlash card Note If it is necessary to remove the CompactFlash card follow the steps outlined in Procedure 101 on page 645 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 210 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Procedure 11 Installing the CompactFlash card on the Media Card 1 Remove the Media Card and CompactFlash card from the packaging CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Observe the necessary precautions for handling ESD sensitive devices Wear a properly connected anti static wrist strap while removing the cards from the packaging and work on a static
487. ne Description Installation and Operation Page 264 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Manually add an IP Telephony node Follow the steps in Procedure 21 to manually add an IP Telephony node Procedure 21 Adding an IP Telephony node manually 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click on the Services folder 2 Double click the IP Telephony icon See Figure 55 on page 257 The IP Telephony window opens 3 Click Configuration gt Node gt Add See Figure 61 Figure 61 IP Telephony main window EIP Telephony File Edit View Maintenance Configuration Help aj smD x sime x m B sms Ea x Card gt Delete Synchronize gt Properties BELLEVILLE D Upgrade BELLEVILLE Card state Card synch status Management IP Voice IP LeaderO Unknown Retrieved 47 11 221 38 47 11 151 144 Leader1 Unknown Retrieved 47 111 221 48 47 11 151 148 Open a new node property sheet for adding a node and cards The Add Node dialog box opens See Figure 62 on page 265 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 265 of 770 4 Ensure the Define node configuration manually radio button is selected Select the IP Line software release being installed Click OK Figure 62 Add Node The New Node window opens See Figure 63 on page 266 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 266 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Fi
488. ne expanded node The Node Summary window includes five buttons e to Add This button is used to add a new IP Telephony node Enter an unused Node ID and then click to Add e Import Node Files This button imports the configuration files from an existing node e Transfer Status This button is used to transfer obtain the status on the requested changes to the node The node then obtains its information CONFIG INI and BOOT P files from the Call Server Note f any element within the Node fails to transfer either BOOTP or CONFIG files the Transfer Status button is highlighted in red If the transfer status of the node elements is unavailable the Transfer Status button is highlighted in yellow Edit This button retrieves the node information from the Call Server and returns the information to the Edit window The node information can then be changed e Delete This button is used to delete the selected node and its information from the Call Server 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 341 of 770 Figure 94 Node Summary expand a node Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt NORT EL NETWORKS Node Summary V System Status H New Node to Add gt call Server D IP Telephony Import Node Files v Configuration Z Call Server V Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 dit Transfer Status IP
489. ne stop bit Observe the Leader card faceplate maintenance display window When the display reads T 20 the card begins to send BootP requests on the ELAN A series of dots is printed on the TTY Type to escape from the BootP request At the Login prompt enter the user ID and password to access the IPL gt CLI e Ifthe card is a new card out of the box then the user ID is itgadmin and the password is itgadmin e Ifthe card has been previously connected to the Call Server then the user ID and password are the PWD1 of the Call Server e Ifthe user ID and password are forgotten see Procedure 65 on page 439 to reset the IPL gt CLI Shell username and password IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 374 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 6 When the maintenance window displays T 21 login to the IPL gt CLI At the IPL gt prompt enter the setLeader command to set the Leader Management LAN ELAN subnet IP address Management LAN gateway IP address and the Management LAN subnet mask YY YY YY yy s Note 1 The three parameters must each be enclosed in double quotation marks There must be a space after the command and before the first parameter Put commas and no spaces between the following parameters setLeader xx xx XX XX ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ XX XX XX XX IP address Enter the same IP address that was entered in the Management LAN IP address field
490. nel gt G023 ITG1023 DSP device failure lt dsp gt lt errnum gt lt errtext gt G025 ITG1025 DSP download lt dsp gt lt reason gt G027 ITG1027 DSP memory test lt dsp gt lt reason gt G028 ITG1028 xX Voice packet loss lt channel gt lt packetLoss gt lt direction gt lt dstAddr gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 576 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 67 Critical ITG Error messages Part 3 of 4 Corresponding Maintenance Critical Signaling Display Error Message Server Description G029 ITG1029 Error in DSP task lt file gt lt line gt lt errno gt lt errtext gt G030 ITG1030 Allocation failure in DSP memory pool G031 ITG1031 X Invalid codec number lt Codec gt G032 ITG1032 Attempt to open a DSP that is already open lt channel gt G033 ITG1033 Failed to send data to DSP channel lt channel gt G034 ITG1034 DSP channel unexpectedly closed lt channel gt G035 ITG1035 Encountered and unexpected open DSP channel closed it lt channel gt G037 ITG1037 Wrong image downloaded Binary was created for lt cardType gt card G038 ITG1038 IPL login protection login available locked G039 ITG1039 Bad DSP channel lt channel id gt G040 ITG1040 Last reset reason for card lt reasonString gt where the reason String can be Reboot command issued by software or through CLI Watchdog Timer Expired Manual reset Inte
491. nes and the Voice Gateway Media Cards or failure of the IP Phones to register with the LTPS 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 543 of 770 h Click ADD to enter the IP address for another trap destination Add destination SNMP Manager IP addresses for the following local or remote OTM server PPP IP address configured in the router on the ELAN subnet for the remote support OTM PC SNMP manager for remote alarm monitoring Note 1 Up to eight SNMP trap destinations can be defined Note 2 A net route or host route through the Management ELAN gateway is added to the Voice Gateway Media Cards IP Routing Table for each SNMP management address that is added to the SNMP traps list To remove an SNMP trap destination click the corresponding Remove button Changes can be made to the SNMP trap destinations without affecting other IP addresses Change the SNMP trap destinations as required based on the trap destination to be reached 10 Expand the LAN Configuration section See Figure 182 Figure 182 LAN configuration VLAN configuration Management LAN ELAN configuration Call server IP address 47 11 221 41 Survivable Succession Media Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 Signaling port 15000 Range 1024 to 65535 Broadcast port 15001 Range 1024 to 65535 foice LAN TLAN configuration Signaling port 5000 Range 1024 to 65535 Voice port 5200 Range 1024 to 65535
492. net Explorer browser configuration 332 Launch Element Manager c4 eeitscaitesaie ees ches leks 339 Summary UE POCCHUIES 5 5 o sh dcsoU droent Dikena 338 Manually add an IP Telephony node 0 339 Configure SNMP trap destinations and community name string access 345 Configure Voice Gateway Profile data 349 Configure Quality of Servite sco case ncene deep ae eee derned 355 Configure ELAN IP address Active ELNK TLAN voice port and routes Small Systems and CS 1000S only 3S7 Configure iile server ACCESS i hace vcgeivwioes boseeaey es genes 362 Configure loss and level plan ceirerioricrorrircinirianetgd 364 Add card and configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Care 5 onic crackackeeneeeeaneeaniass 365 Submit and transfer the node information 368 Transfer node configuration from Element Manager to the Voice Gateway M dia Cards sie ea ope a cnwon cage eine veces 371 Setting the Leader IP addtess caveccerccedvcseeected enews 372 Transmit node properties sccc5eosece eee atandes esd nogen eiel Configure the Follower c fde scs rrorsrrsertisevesoiri setas 319 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 330 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware 382 IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmwar
493. network interface 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 41 of 770 PC Card slots The ITG P 24 port line card has one faceplate PC Card slot designated Drive A It is used for optional maintenance The ITG P 24 port line card also has one unused inboard slot designated Drive B The PC Card slots support high capacity PC flash memory cards WARNING Do not format the PC Card using a Windows application As well only format the PC Card using the type of card on which it will be running For example a PC Card formatted using a Small System Controller SSC card is only readable by the SSC card It is not readable by the ITG P 24 port card or the Media Card A PC Card formatted using a Voice Gateway Media Card ITG P 24 port card or Media Card is only readable by another Voice Gateway Media Card It is not readable by the SSC card Matrix maintenance display A four character LED based dot matrix display shows the maintenance status fault codes and other card state information For a list of the fault codes see Table 64 ITG P 24 port line card faceplate maintenance display codes on page 569 and Table 65 Media Card faceplate maintenance display codes on page 571 RS 232 maintenance port The ITG P 24 port line card faceplate provides a female 8 pin mini DIN serial maintenance port connection labeled Maint Port An alternative connection to the faceplate serial maintenance port exist
494. ng Server Refer to Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration 553 3031 210 for more information about survivability on the CS 1000S Refer to Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Installation and Configuration 553 3011 210 and Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration 553 3021 210 for more information about survivability on the Meridian 1 and CS 1000M Refer to Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration 553 304 1 210 for more information about survivability on the CS 1000E c Signaling port The default value is 15000 The range is 1024 to 65535 d Broadcast port The default value is 15001 The range is 1024 to 65535 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 545 of 770 12 Under Voice LAN TLAN configuration 13 a Signaling port The default value is 5000 The range is 1024 to 65535 Note The TLAN Signaling occurs on UDP ports 7300 4100 5100 and 5000 b Voice port Change the Voice port only as instructed by the IP network administrator to improve Quality of Service for the Internet Telephones This field displays the range for RTP packets sent to the IP Phones For example if RTP Header compression is used to reduce voice bandwidth on narrow band WAN links then the TLAN voice port range needs to be set to 16384 or higher The exact range is provided by t
495. ngle virtual superloop for a Large System For non blocking do not exceed 120 VTNs on a single virtual superloop for a Large System 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 241 of 770 Nortel Networks recommends that virtual superloops are configured starting in the highest non physically equipped group available Table 51 lists the prompts and responses required to configure virtual superloops in LD 97 Table 51 LD 97 Virtual superloop configuration for Large Systems Response Description CHG Change existing data SUPL Superloop VXXX V represents a virtual superloop and xxx is the number of the virtual superloop where e xxx 0 156 and multiple of four for a Large System without FIBN package 365 e xxx 0 252 and multiple of four for a Large System with FIBN package 365 Small Systems In Small Systems virtual superloops contend for the same range of superloops 96 112 with phantom superloops Up to 128 VTNs can be configured on a single virtual superloop for a Meridian 1 Option 11C Cabinet and Option 11C Chassis system for a maximum of 640 VTNs in each system A maximum of 1000 VTNs can be configured on a CS 1000M Cabinet and CS 1000M Chassis system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 242 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node In a Small System mapping virtual sup
496. not present on the type of IP Phone being used for the login the login is blocked Note The login from an IP Phone 2002 is blocked for users configured for ACD IP Phone 2002 login restrictions Because the IP Phone 2002 supports only 4 feature keys a restricted VO login is applied to IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050 TNs when they log in using an IP Phone 2002 When the IP Phone 2004 or IP Softphone 2050 user logs in from an IP Phone 2002 the login is blocked if the user s configuration has one of the following e key 0 defined as ACD e any key from key 4 to key 15 defined as AAK CWT DIG DPU GPU ICF MCN MCR MSB PVN PVR SCR or SCN IP Phone 2001 login restrictions Because the IP Phone 2001 does not support any feature keys a restricted VO login is applied to IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050 TNs when they log in using an IP Phone 2001 When an IP Phone 2002 IP Phone IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 142 of 770 Features 2004 or IP SoftPhone 2050 user logs in from an IP Phone 2001 the login is blocked if the user s configuration has one of the following e key 0 defined as ACD e any other key from key 1 to key 15 defined as AAK CWT DIG DPU GPU ICF MCN MCR MSB PVN PVR SCR or SCN Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes The Enhanced Redundancy for IP Line nodes feature relaxes the checking performed by a node on the Node ID that is presented by a registering
497. nstallation and Operation Page 280 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 When the check box is selected the fields are set to read only When the check box is not selected the fields are set to read write and synchronization does not occur for that node Follow the steps in Procedure 25 to configure node synchronization with the Call Server Procedure 25 Configuring node synchronization with the Call Server 1 Click the Node Properties General tab for the desired node See Figure 69 Figure 69 SNMP parameters Node Properties Bellville OPT41 Customer 0 Node 550 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP m Node Location m Network Connections OTM site Belve z OTM system oman i it i id Voice LAN Node IP Juz 11 151 238 Customer 0 v Management LAN gateway IP a7 11 220 14 Node number jso Management LAN subnet mask 255 255 254 0 System Type Meridian 1 11C Sooty ONEN Voice LAN subnet mask 255 255 255 128 IPL release IPL 4 0 5 SNMP parameters Last modified 07 08 04 02 20 45 IV Synchronize with PBX system during Update System Data Last downloaded 07 08 04 02 20 45 SysName Banik OP Tal Node syne status Transmitted Galeton a Comments SysContact m l Cancel Apply Help 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2
498. nstead of the Voice Gateway Media Cards To do this select a single test IP Phone and reset the firmware only on that test IP Phone before completing the procedure on all IP Phones If the upgrade works properly use the umsUpgradeAll command to complete the upgrade on all the IP Phones IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware requirements The IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 firmware can be upgraded in the field IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 384 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager The file server can be a dedicated external file server the Signaling Server or a Voice Gateway Media Card If a file server is used to store the firmware file the following items are required to access the firmware e IP address of the file server e routing table e file path to the file server e user name and password required to access the file server This information is configured in Element Manager under Firmware on the Edit window See Figure 106 on page 363 e Fora node using the Signaling Server as the Leader no Firmware Server configuration is necessary since the files are stored on the Signaling Server and by default the files are retrieved from the Signaling Server e For nodes that are not using the Signaling Server as the Leader configure the FTP access information for the Signaling Server or some other server as the Firmware server UFTP IP
499. ntenance Critical Signaling Display Error Message Server Description S004 ITS1004 X Invalid node ID lt ip gt lt hwid gt S005 ITS1005 x Corrupted node ID TN field lt ip gt lt hwid gt S006 ITS1006 X Received corrupted UNIStim message lt message dump gt S007 ITS1007 x Received unknown UNIStim message lt message dump gt S008 ITS1008 X Terminal connection status lt ip gt lt status gt S009 ITS1009 X Call Server communication link lt state gt S010 ITS1010 X Terminal doesn t support codec lt ip gt lt Codec gt S011 ITS1011 X lt IP Address gt Last reset reason for IP Phone lt reasonID gt lt reasonString gt 012 ITS1012 X User entered the wrong IP Phone Installer Password three times during Branch User Config The IP Phone is locked out from doing any User Configuration for one hour Action Wait for the IP Phone to unlock in one hour or use the IPL CLI command clearLockout to unlock the IP Phone 013 ITS1013 X User entered the wrong Craftsperson Node Level TN Entry Password three times The IP Phone is locked out Action To remove the lock use LD 32 to disable and then enable the IP Phone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 579 of 770 IP Line and IP Phone maintenance and diagnostics LD 32 Table 69 summarizes the system maintenance commands available in LD 32 For more information on the ECNT commands refer
500. ny node with no Signaling Server the CLI must be used to configure the Leader card of the IP Telephony node This enables OTM 2 2 and Element Manager to communicate with the Leader card and the node For more information about the CLI commands see IP Line CLI commands on page 585 Overlays For information on the overlays refer to Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 57 of 770 Features Contents This section contains information on the following topics INCOBCUON suc gh 8an cbse SE ree AAR ERG dee REM 59 MAT Tarena aE 34 0 ieiotrireri retar ekin hen atea 61 POhG Seryperes AA ITTA E IARA TTT 62 e AA EE T TEE E EET EN EE EET N EELE T 63 NAT Mapping Keep AlIVG lt s ciavicsseccnseseteeuee sortii 65 Mute and Hold considerauons 000 css00esaneseeca ese exdess 66 NAT and VLANGiocsb sc epee en aioe eas BEST eee ROE eS 68 NAT Traversal and Proactive Voice Quality Management 70 Configuring NAT Traversal in Element Manager 70 Configuring NAT Traversal in LD V7 4 00 ccc se eadewnswa eines 70 CET COMMAS 2557 4eus4 cou te Gente easd eens eibtaeewdess Ta Firmware download using UNIStim FTP 83 CEL comma e ia oe eek a cas genre de RE aeee ewes eee 87 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 93 IP Call Recording 6s i tuexwledke gi Suag i ehenitedgsgedaseianiged 94 AdminB sers irie ra SSE DESE Ewes o
501. ny remaining fields in the dotted decimal format they have a value of 0 Therefore the complete subnet mask in dotted decimal format is 255 255 240 0 End of Procedure Table 106 CIDR format remainders Remainder of CIDR format value divided by eight Binary value Dotted decimal value 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 1111 1110 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 763 of 770 Appendix F Download IP Line 4 0 files from Nortel Networks web site Contents This section contains information on the following topics GOI g 2 2 oe eed eh sod eweeaeee earch ee eees 763 Download files from Nortel Networks web site 763 Introduction This appendix provides instruction for downloading files from the Nortel Networks web site Download files from Nortel Networks web site Follow the steps in Procedure 121 to download IP Line 4 0 related software and firmware files from the Nortel Networks web site Procedure 121 Downloading files from the Nortel Networks web site 1 Connect to http www nortelnetworks com using any PC with Internet access 2 Click Software Downloads under Support The Software Downloads window opens and displays the list Product Family 3 Select Meridian or CS 1000 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 764 of 770 Appendix F Download IP Line 4 0 files from Nortel Networks web site a If Meridian
502. o all Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node Under DiffServ Codepoint modify the DSCP Control and Voice values only as directed by the IP network administrator The recommended configuration values are a Control packets A value of 40 Class Selector 5 CS5 This sets the priority of the signaling messaging b Voice packets A value of 46 Control DSCP Expedited Forwarding EF The DSCP determines the priorities of the management and voice packets in the IP Line network The range for both management and voice packet DSCP is 0 63 inclusive The DSCP value can be configured if required to obtain better QoS over the IP data network LAN WAN The value entered depends on the policy in the customer s data network Note Do not change DSCP from the default values unless instructed Click Apply and then click OK Note As described on the QoS tab NAT and QoS parameters are no longer configured here Therefore those areas are grayed out End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 294 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Configure SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP can be configured for an SNTP Server and SNTP Client See Figure 77 Figure 77 SNTP configuration tab New Node General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Specify the SNTP Server and Client Parameters gt SNT
503. oblems that may be encountered with this tool The natcheck tool can be downloaded at no cost from the Internet at http midcom p2p sourceforge net The natcheck tool runs in Windows on a PC connected to the internet through a NAT router Requirements Cone NAT The NAT Traversal feature cannot work unless the NAT device has a cone NAT implemented Confirm using natcheck Run the natcheck program Look for the following message UDP consistent translation YES GOOD for peer to peer If YES is displayed then the NAT router uses a cone NAT 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal feature Page 711 of 770 Confirm using IP Phone The NAT router uses a cone NAT if no error message is displayed when the IP Phone registers to the system The NAT device does not use a cone NAT if the IP Phone behind it displays the following error message NAT Error ITG3053 Please try upgrading firmware on the NAT device or replacing it with a different NAT device that has a cone NAT implemented Time out configuration Confirm using natcheck Time out configuration cannot be performed using natcheck Confirm using IP Phone If the IP Phone connection times out and the IP Phone reboots use LD 117 to lower the NAT Keep Alive Timer value on the Call Server The reboots could indicate that the NAT device s address port mapping is being cleared because there is no message traf
504. ode Summary window opens 4 Click the Edit button for the node that is having the IP address changes The Edit window opens 5 Expand the Node section if it is not already expanded See Figure 179 on page 538 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 538 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 179 Node properties Node ID 435 Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address 47 11 2151 34 Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address 4711 215 114 Management LAN ELAN subnet mask 255 255 2540 Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask 255 255 254 0 Node ID The Node ID appears automatically b Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address Enter Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address in dotted decimal format The Voice LAN Node IP is on the TLAN subnet The Node IP address is the IP address used by the IP Phones to communicate with the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the TLAN subnet If a Voice Gateway Media Card becomes the primary card Leader during an election it assigns itself the Node IP address e Ifthe node IP is changed this affects the configuration of the Connect Server IP address in the DHCP Server for the IP Phones e Ifthe IP Phones are using partial DHCP mode manually reconfigure the IP address of each IP Phone c Management LAN TLAN gateway IP address Enter the Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address in dotted decimal format This is the IP address of the gateway of the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Car
505. odes using Element Manager To schedule a specific reset time for the IP Phones instead of resetting them immediately check the time on all the cards Reset the time if necessary to ensure all cards have the same time and then issue the umsUpgradeAll hh mma p where hh mma p represents the time the upgrade is scheduled to occur 18 Atthe IPL gt prompt verify the IP Phones for each Voice Gateway Media Card are upgraded by entering the following isetShow 19 Inspect the list to ensure all IP Phones have the correct firmware version 20 For any IP Phones that did not upgrade successfully try one of the following in order e Use the isetReset IP Address command e Enter the following combination of key strokes at the telephone console release mute up down up down up mute 9 release e Power the telephone off and then on again If the upgrade was unsuccessful on any of the IP Phones the cause is probably due to one of the following e One of the Voice Gateway Media Cards did not upgrade its software successfully e An IP Phone s firmware version was unable to be upgraded by the Voice Gateway Media Card in the normal manner e The umsUpgradeAll command has not been issued e One of the cards might not have been reset If the upgrade was unsuccessful re do the appropriate procedure If the upgrade is still unsuccessful contact a technical support representative for further assistance End
506. of current configuration 6 To delete a Voice Gateway channel click the Delete button in the Gateway Channel summary window See Figure 50 on page 237 The Delete VGW channels for the Voice Gateway channel opens See Figure 53 on page 240 Select a gateway channel from the drop down list box and click Delete Figure 53 the Delete VGW channels window is the equivalent of LD 14 s OUT command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 240 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 53 Delete VGW channels window Delete VGW channels Selection Description Selection Value Set starting TN number to be deleted OUT TN 01000000 x Set total VGW channels to be deleted up to 32 1 B Delete Cancel End of Procedure Configure virtual superloops for IP Phones LD 97 One or more virtual superloops must be configured to support IP Phone Virtual TNs VTNs Large Systems In Large Systems virtual superloops contend for the same range of loops with phantom standard and remote superloops digital trunk loops and all service loops Virtual superloops can reside in physically equipped network groups or in virtual network groups Group maximums Without FIBN Package 365 there is a maximum of five network groups available 0 4 With Package 365 there are a maximum of eight network groups 0 7 For normal traffic engineering provision up to 1024 VTNs on a si
507. of the Connect Server IP address in the DHCP Server for the IP Phones e Ifthe IP Phones are using partial DHCP mode manually reconfigure the IP address in each IP Phone 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 481 of 770 Management LAN gateway IP This IP address is used to route to the ELAN subnet If OTM is not connected to the local ELAN subnet then it communicates with this node through the Management LAN gateway If changes are made to the gateway IP address and these changes are not coordinated properly OTM loses communication with the node e When a Management LAN gateway is added to the ELAN subnet the gateway must restrict access so that only authorized traffic is permitted on the ELAN subnet e The router must disable the BootP relay agent for the ELAN network interface e The router must block all broadcast and multicast traffic from the ELAN subnet and enable only proper access that is only authorized traffic and users can come through the Management LAN gateway OTM is one of these users Management LAN subnet mask When changing these subnet masks consider the possibility of conflict between the ELAN and TLAN subnet IP addresses Consult with the IP administrator before making any changes to subnets See Codecs on page 179 When changing the Management LAN ELAN subnet this must be coordinated with the IP address on the Call Server Active ELNK subnet C
508. oice Activity Detection 6 Repeat the last step for each of the selected codecs End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 355 of 770 Configure Quality of Service The Quality of Service QoS section includes the settings for the following e DiffServ CodePoint DSCP e 802 1Q support Follow the steps in Procedure 45 to configure QoS Procedure 45 Configuring QoS 1 Click QoS See Figure 102 Figure 102 Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Qos Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 8 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel Node gt snmp jas gt VGW Profile v QoS Diffserv Codepoint DSCP Control packets 40 Range 0 to 63 Diffserv Codepoint DSCP Voice packets 46 Range 0 to 63 Enable 802 10 support T 802 1Q Bits value 802 1p Range 0 to 7 gt LAN configuration IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 356 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 2 The Differentiated Service DiffServ CodePoint DSCP determines the priorities of the management and voice packets in the IP Line network The range for both management and voice packet DiffServ is 0 63 inclusive The DiffServ value can be configured if required to obtain better QoS over the IP data network L
509. ommand has no impact on Virtual Office Login IP Phones These IP Phones are not reset If the Virtual Office Login is on the same Call Server then the IP Phone firmware is upgraded after the user logs out If the Virtual office Login is between different Call Servers then the IP Phone just registers back to its home LTPS and follows the normal firmware rules for regular registration When the umsUpgradeAll command is executed MG 1000B user IP Phones that are on active calls are flagged After the IP Phones become idle the IP Phones are switched by the Call Server back to the MG 1000B for the firmware upgrade Follow the steps in Procedure 60 to upgrade IP Phone firmware Procedure 60 Upgrading the IP Phone firmware 1 Disable the Voice Gateway Media Cards before updating the firmware Use the LD 32 DISI command to disable the card 2 Verify that all Voice Gateway Media Cards that require a firmware upgrade have established a signaling link with the Call Server IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 402 of 770 Figure 131 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager To verify the link is available between the Call Server and the card Telnet to each card and log into the card From the command line type pbxLinkShow The status of the Call Server link appears If the link is active the window displays the following RUDPLinkState Up Click Software Upgrade on the navigation tree Click IP Tel
510. on PAGEOFST lt Page gt Automatically calculates the IP Phone KEM key based lt KeyOffset gt on the entered values This prompt enables the system administrator to enter a Page number of 0 or 1 and a Key Offset number from 0 23 Once entered the KEY prompt is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in Enter lt CR gt to terminate data entry Note 1 Applies to an IP Phone 2004 with KEM 1 and where lt CR gt was entered at the KEY prompt Note 2 Does not apply to an IP Phone 2002 When values are entered for Page and KeyOffset the KEY xx prompt displays followed by PAGEOFST prompt This loop continues until no values lt CR gt only are entered at the PAGEOFST prompt Edit the IP Phone KEM key number specified by PAGEOFST where xx the number of the key for example KEY 36 Enter lt CR gt to keep the current setting 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 249 of 770 LD 11 Configure the IP Phone KEM Part 4 of 4 Response Description KEMOFST lt KEM gt Automatically calculates the IP Phone KEM key based lt KeyOffset gt on the entered values This prompt enables the system administrator to enter a KEM number of 1 or 2 and a Key Offset number from 0 23 Once entered the KEY prompt is prompted with the appropriate KEY value filled in Enter lt CR gt to terminate data entry When values are entered for KEM an
511. on Page 462 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 145 Card Properties Maintenance tab Card Properties BELLEVILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 IP 47 11 221 38 TN 000 IP Telephony Maintenance Configuration Card state Not responding Reset Refresh States Open log file Open OM File Node time Set Node Time Cancel Apply Help 5 Click the Open OM File button A file called om txt opens in the WordPad application The file contains collection period information for each hour of the day that the card was running broken down for each model of IP Phone End of Procedure The file contains collection period information for each hour of the day that the card was running The collection periods start with the hour from midnight to 1 00 am As each hour passes OTM adds another collection period to the OM file therefore there is a maximum of 24 collection periods each day 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 463 of 770 Output The OM report output tracks the statistics for each IP Phone type Data is first output for the Nortel Networks versions of the IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050 Note The i2050 set type refers to both the IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 That output is followed by data for the 3rd party IP Phones labelled e 3Pi2001 e 3Pi2002 e 3P
512. on UDP ports 7300 4100 5100 and 5000 CAUTION Do not set the Voice port to a value that is already used for signaling 4100 5000 5100 7300 The Voice port defines the first port in a range spanning the gateway channels on the card this means a Voice port value of 5200 reserves the following e ports 5200 5263 on the Media Card 32 port line card e 5200 5215 on the Media Card 8 port line card e 5200 5247 on the ITG P 24 port line card If this value is changed from the default confirm the selected Voice port value does not range into one of the reserved signaling port values 4 Click Apply End of Procedure Configure security for SNMP access Change the SNMP community names to control access to the IP Telephony node OTM uses the community names to refresh the Voice Gateway Media Card status and to control the transmitting and retrieving of configuration data files for database synchronization Use OTM to configure SNMP on the Meridian 1 Call Server and Voice Gateway Media Cards Configure SNMP access and community name strings Follow the steps in Procedure 27 on page 285 to configure SNMP access for the system 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 285 of 770 Procedure 27 Configuring SNMP access and community name strings 1 Click the General tab on System properties See Figure 71 Figure 71 System properties General tab Bellville OPT41
513. on to the selected elements corel The Transfer Progress window opens and displays each of the Voice Gateway Media Card in the node See Figure 171 on page 527 The Voice Gateway Media Card s retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the Call Server A check mark is added to each field as the card receives its CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files 15 When the transfer is complete click OK in the Progress Check Complete dialog box e Ifthe transfer is successful for a card the Status column displays Complete e Ifthe transfer is unsuccessful the Status column displays Fail 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 527 of 770 Figure 171 Transfer Progress window Site 47 11 221 41 gt Configuration gt Node Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 541 gt Edit gt Transfer Progress a l conna 47 11 221 38 Complete Vv 47 11 22148 Complete Vv Checked means that file has transferred successfully 16 Insert the new card The card starts and obtains its IP configuration from the node master This process takes several minutes The Maintenance faceplate display shows an alarm of T 21 or S009 e 7 21 is displayed if the card is new and there is no CONFIG INI file e 009 is displayed if the card has been used before and has a CONFIG INI file that contains an IP address for the Call Server that is no longer correct 17 Select System Status gt IP
514. on tree 2 Click File Upload The Centralized file upload window opens See Figure 125 on page 395 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 395 of 770 Figure 125 System Utility gt File Upload gt Centralized file upload Centralized file upload IPL31010 P2 116 Pentium workfile FRI JAN 17 01 19 40 2003 1PL31048 P2 ITG Pentium workfile THU APR 17 12 01 44 2003 1PL31055 P2 ITG Pentium workfile THU MAY 29 17 26 04 2003 1PL31059 P2 ITG Pentium workfile TUE JUN 03 09 25 48 2003 1PL31063 P2 ITG Pentium workfile TUE JUL 15 17 27 08 2003 1PL31070 P2 ITG Pentium workfile FRI AUG 08 14 13 34 2003 1PL31075 P2 TG Pentium workfile TUE SEP 02 09 21 08 2003 1PL31010 SA Succession Media Card workfile FRI JAN 17 01 19 46 2003 1PL31048 SA Succession Media Card workfile THU APR 17 12 01 50 2003 1PL31055 SA Succession Media Card workfile THU MAY 29 17 26 12 2003 1PL31059 SA Succession Media Card workfile TUE JUN 03 09 25 54 2003 1PL31063 SA Succession Media Card workfile TUE JUL 15 17 27 14 2003 1PL31070 SA Succession Media Card workfile FRI AUG 08 14 13 40 2003 1PL31075 SA Succession Media Card workfile TUE SEP 02 09 21 14 2003 0602839 BIN 12004 THU APR 17 12 01 42 2003 10602B44 BIN 12004 THU MAY 29 17 25 58 2003 10602B50 BIN 12004 TUE JUL 15 17 27 06 2003 10602B56 B1N TUE SEP 02 09 21 06 2003 10603B39 B1N THU APR 17 12 01 40 2003 0603B44 BIN TUE JUL 15 17 27 04 2003
515. ong with the country s standard that lists each regulation Table 105 Electro Magnetic immunity Part 1 of 2 Regulation Identifier Regulatory Agency CISPR 22 Sec 20 Class B I O conducted noise IEC 801 2 level 4 ESD Basic Standard IEC 801 3 level 2 Radiated Immunity Basic Standard IEC 801 4 level 3 Fast transient Burst Immunity Basic Standard IEC 801 5 level 4 preliminary Surge Immunity Basic Standard 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix D Product integrity Page 759 of 770 Table 105 Electro Magnetic immunity Part 2 of 2 Regulation Identifier Regulatory Agency IEC 801 6 preliminary Conducted Disturbances Basic Standard BAKOM SR 784 103 12 4 1 1 EMC Safety Switzerland SS 447 20 22 Sweden EMC standard AS NZS 3548 EMC Australia New Zealand NFC 98020 France EMC standard IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 760 of 770 Appendix D Product integrity 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 761 of 770 Appendix E Subnet Mask Conversion from CIDR to Dotted Decimal Format Introduction Subnet masks are expressed in Classless InterDomain Routing CIDR format appended to the IP address such as 10 1 1 1 20 The subnet mask must be converted from CIDR format to dotted decimal format in order to configure IP addresses The CIDR format expresses the subnet mask as the number of bits co
516. ons Although IP Line 4 0 can be used in different system configurations and its use can vary in those configurations there are four basic system configurations See Table 2 Table 2 Possible system configurations a IP Line 4 0 can use the Signaling Server if the Signaling Server is deployed in the system configuration 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 25 of 770 Meridian 1 A Meridian 1 system does not have a Signaling Server in its configuration Each Voice Gateway Media Card functions as both a UNIStim Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS and voice gateway In this system configuration one line card is configured as the Leader IP Phones register with individual Voice Gateway Media Cards Note If a Media Card 32 port card a Media Card 8 port card or an ITG P 24 port card is running IP Line 4 0 software it is known as a Voice Gateway Media Card CS 1000 systems CS 1000 systems have a Signaling Server in their network configuration The Signaling Server is a server that provides signaling interfaces to the IP network The Signaling Server s central processor drives the signaling for IP Phones and IP Peer networking In IP Line 4 0 the LTPS executes on the Signaling Server and the voice gateway executes on the Voice Gateway Media Cards All IP Phones register with the Signaling Server The Voice Gateway Media Cards only provide access to the voice gateway The Signaling Server is the nod
517. ony icon The IP Telephony window opens Select the node in the upper portion of the window Select the card in the lower portion of the window Click Configuration gt Node gt Properties to update the Voice Gateway Media Card IP addresses as required The Node Properties window opens IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 480 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 149 Node Properties General tab Node Properties Bellville OPT41 Customer 0 Node 550 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP m Node Location r Network Connections OTM site Balile z OTM system orta z Voice LAN Node IP KTA k ie i T Customer fo z Management LAN gateway IP a7 11 220 1 seal 228 sso Management LAN subnet mask 255 255 254 0 System Type Meridian 1 TIC vale ca Baas Voice LAN subnet mask 255 255 255 128 IPL release IPL 4 0 2 SNMP parameters Last modified 07 08 04 02 20 45 IV Synchronize with PBX system during Update System Data Last downloaded 07 08 04 02 20 45 SysName E ellville OPT 41 Node sync status Transmitted SysLocation Comers SysContact I Cancel Apply Help 5 Select the General tab See Figure 149 Under Network Connections a Voice LAN Node IP This is also known as the TLAN subnet IP address e Changing the node IP affects the configuration
518. oo 01300009 ooo 01300010 000 01300011 000 01300012 000 01300013 000 01300014 ooo 01300015 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01300016 000 c Click Add if an Alert Box appears log into the CLI of the Call Server Use LD 22 to determine if Package 167 is enabled or restricted by entering 167 as a response to the TYPE prompt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 702 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards If Package 167 is restricted obtain a new keycode to enable GPRI Package 167 In LD 73 enter DDB at the TYPE prompt and press lt CR gt through the overlay accepting all the defaults End of Procedure Import all converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into a new IP Telephony node Follow the steps in Procedure 114 to import all newly converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into a new IP Telephony node using Element Manager Procedure 114 Importing all converted Voice Gateway Media Cards into a new IP Telephony node 1 Log in to Element Manager from the web browser by entering the IP address of the Signaling Server 2 Enter the User ID and password usually the same as the Call Server User ID and password 3 When logged into Element Manager click Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Node Summary The Node Summary window opens See Figure 212 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 703 of 770
519. or ESC to CANCEL Type in the Old Password Navigate down and type a New Password Navigate down to Retype to confirm and then retype the new password Press Enter to save the save the changes Note Never leave the RM356 system manager password defaulted to 1234 after the Modem Router has been installed and configured on the ELAN The Modem Router s security features are ineffective if the manager password is not changed on a regular basis according to good network security practices End of Procedure RM356 Modem Router manager menu description This section displays the various menus of the RM356 Modem Router RM356 Main Menu Getting Started Advanced Management 1 General Setup 21 Filter Set Configuration 2 MODEM Setup 3 Ethernet Setup 23 System Password 4 Internet Access Setup 24 System Maintenance Advanced Applications Li T2 L33 14 Remot Node Setup Static Routing Setup Default Dial in Setup Dial in User Setup 99 Exit IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 744 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Menu 1 General Enter Menu Selection Number Setup System Name Room_304 RCH Training Center Location Sherman Ave Richardson TX Contact Person s Name John Press ENTER to Confirm or Smith 972 555 1212 ESC to Cancel Menu 2 MODEM Setup Modem Name MODEM Active Yes Direction Incoming Phone Number Adv
520. or node 818 were retrieved from Voice Gateway Media Card 47 11 216 135 and stored on Call Server 47 11 216 167 The new node will appear on the Node Summary page Configuration gt IP Telephony Microsoft Internet Explorer x Q Import node files was successful Would you like to go back to the Node summary page and view this node Cancel End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 413 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration Contents This section contains information on the following topics INCUMION 3 cine cht ee eG bire MEe ce ede aK ERS WAL RE EYE PEM 414 IP Line feature Ba ddd oss ieee eek are tee eS 415 Corporate LINBO fo 5 eee SIRES EIR ORL AkS eee AERE ees 415 Private Zone configuro conc iw acted ei tee daar kedwnes 416 WU OME cet oon phos eee edo Rew RE TOEE SISO REAR 416 CULL csi grathagase eras ianeeeseeerepeeresueankiaiadeas 419 BOLTO 26h 2 obs he oa eee E RS ANYNE GREEN Reh ESSER 420 Password Sct ccs cee tneredanteeietagiamgistegia kagewse 420 SNMP community names SWINGS oot eke ee nreo krete 421 IPL gt CLI Shell user name and password 421 Node password synchroniZation ss siscro seice eid aweneawnws 423 IP Phone Installer Password 55420 0202 00e605ed45s0nb0 54 425 Default user name atid password csc duresae esas ewsawa vices 439 IP configiitation Commands 4 40vscsed see esses wens sneaks 441 TLAN configuration commands 0 00 c ee
521. ord N A Callback Budget Management Allocated Budget min Period hr Press ENT ER to Press Space Bar to Toggle IP Address Supplied By Dial in User No IP Pool Yes IP Start Addr 47 177 16 253 Session Options Input Filter Sets Output Filter Sets Idle Timeout 1200 Confirm or ESC to Cancel Menu 14 Dial in User Setup itgadmin 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Enter Menu Selection Number Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 747 of 770 Menu 14 1 Edit Dial in User User Name itgadmin Active Yes Password KKKKKKKK Callback No Phone Supplied by Caller N A Callback Phone N A Rem CLID Idle Timeout 500 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Filter Comments Set Comments NetBEUI WAN 7 NetBEUI LAN 8 9 10 11 12 Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Comments Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel IP Line Description Installation and Operation Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 748 of 770 PS RS SE EA re Menu 21 1 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules M 1 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 137 DA 0 0 0 0 N 2 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 138 DA 0 0 0 0 N 3 YEP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 139 DA 0 0 0 0 N 4 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 137 DA 0 0 0 0 N 5 Y BP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 SP
522. ote 2 T 38 is the preferred codec type for fax calls over virtual trunks However the G 711 Clear Channel codec is used if the far end does not support the T 38 codec For detailed information about codecs refer to Codecs on page 179 Set type checking and blocking If the registration is a regular request not a Virtual Office login the Call Server checks the configured TN type against the actual IP Phone type If the set types don t match the registration is blocked 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 141 of 770 However if the registration request is a virtual login this check is not performed All IP Phones are allowed to be registered onto any IP TN type when the login is through Virtual Office Special checking on the DN Feature keys is performed when an IP Phone 2004 or IP Softphone 2050 user logs in from an IP Phone 2002 or when an IP Phone 2004 IP Phone 2002 or IP Softphone 2050 user logs in from an IP Phone 2001 Special checking is required to prevent a user from logging in from an IP Phone that cannot display an incoming call because the IP Phone used to log in does not have the DN Feature key s to display the incoming call If the login were allowed to occur the IP Phone could ring without providing the user a way to answer the call The configuration of the logging in user is examined for DN Feature key types that receive incoming calls If DN Feature key types appear on any keys
523. other LTPS in the node Eventually as all of the LTPS s IP Phones become idle they are registered with other TPSs The Voice Gateway Media Card can then be removed with no impact to any users End of Procedure Procedure 93 Restarting a Voice Gateway Media Card in Element Manager 1 2 Click the System Status from the navigation tree Click IP Telephony The IP Telephony Information window opens Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card Click the Reset button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card See Figure 184 on page 549 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 549 of 770 Figure 184 Reset button IP Telephony Information Type TN Index ELAN IP ELAN TLAN ITG 4 ERT e Te Tee T 21 47 11 216 168 Biante o ON tese Aa LEAS EETA ITG 6 ep z E SYS OM RP tese Telne Telne Status 2 Shoe tGnite Pentium 0 5 Click OK to confirm the Voice Gateway Media Card reset See Figure 185 on page 550 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 550 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 185 Card Reset dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer x Q You are about to reset 47 104 39 115 you will lose connection with it for 5 minutes Are you sure you want to do this ah Cancel End of Procedure Restart all the Voice Gateway Media Cards All the Voice Gateway Media Cards must be restarted if the
524. ounts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified lt customer gt card e If the lt customer gt parameter is specified the count is specific to that customer A card must be specified to enter a customer otherwise the count is across all customers e f no parameters are entered the count is printed for all zones A partial TN can be entered for the card L or L S which then prints the count per that parameter A customer cannot be specified in this case Example ECNT CARD 81 lt lt Card 81 gt gt Number of Registered Ethersets 5 Number of Unregistered Ethersets 27 ECNT ZONE Counts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified zoneNum zone lt customer gt e If lt customer gt parameter is specified the count is specific to that customer A zone must be specified to enter a customer otherwise the count is across all customers e f no parameters are entered the count is printed for all zones Example ECNT ZONE 0 0 lt lt Zone 0 Customer 0 gt gt Number of Registered Ethersets 4 Number of Unregistered Ethersets 17 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 110 of 770 Features Table 22 LD 32 commands to count registered IP Phones Part 2 of 2 Command Description ECNT NODE Counts and prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified nodeNum node e If the nodeNum parameter is not entered the count is printed for all
525. out an IP Telephony node At the IPL gt prompt type IPInfoShow The following IP Telephony node information is displayed on the TTY IP addresses for the management and voice subnets default router for the management and voice subnets subnet mask for the management and voice subnets SNMP manager IP routing table IP configuration of the card which is related to the IP configuration of the node IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 444 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration The IPInfoShow command displays information similar to the following Maintenance Interface lnIsa0 Maintenance IP address 47 103 220 199 Maintenance subnet mask 255 255 255 224 Voice Interface lnPcil Voice IP address 47 103 247 221 Voice subnet mask 255 255 255 0 ROUTE NET TABLE destination gateway flags 0 0 0 0 47 103 247 1 3 47 103 220 192 47 103 220 199 101 47 103 247 0 47 103 247 221 101 47 103 247 0 47 103 247 221 101 ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 5 value 77 0x4d M 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Refcnt Refcnt Use Interface 5800883 InPcil 0 inIsa0 0 1InPcil 0 InPcil Use Interface 9 100 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 445 of 770 Display Voice Gateway Media Card parameters The following commands provide information about a Voice Gateway Media Card itgCardShow ifShow serialNumShow firmware VersionShow swVersionShow electShow
526. ow Help a ep MEE Sites Gatekeeper Zones Mave System E E Services Gatekeeper zone Managere IP Telephony System Modem Scripts ITG IP Phones ITG IP Telecommuter Event Notification ITG ISDN IP Trunks ITG M1 IP Trk OTM Regional Setting E Sample Site a k sample123 i Sample123 Meridian1 Adds a site to the tree 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using OTM 2 2 Page 661 of 770 2 The New Site Properties window opens See Figure 204 Figure 204 New Site Properties New Site Properties x General l Site Name Short Name Nortel Networks Ptttsburgh JNNOmegd Fag SUstern m Site Location ddress A fi 000 Omega Corporate Center Drive i State Province Pittsburgh JPA Countr ip Postal Code jusa 15205 r Contact Information Name Customer Contact Name Phone Number Job Title fiat 2 809 7400 Senior Engineer Comments Contact and Emergency Information Cancel Apply Help In the New Site Properties window set the following a Site Name Add a site named Retrieve IP Telephony data b Short Name Enter a short name for the site Under Site Location add the Address City State Province Country and Zip Postal Code of the site Under Contact Information add the Name Phone Number Job Title and any Comments for the site contact person s 3 Click Apply and then OK IP Line Description Installatio
527. ow appears See Figure 60 on page 262 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 262 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 60 System Properties window Add Customer 9 Select the Customer Number Click OK This adds a customer to the system and opens the New Customer n Properties window 10 Click OK The System Properties window opens 11 Click OK to save and close the System Properties 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 263 of 770 Note Only the Customer Number is required to add a system There is no need to enter any other customer data The other data in the Customer tab and other System Properties tabs is not required for the IP Line 4 0 application This data is used by other OTM applications End of Procedure The following is a summary of steps required to configure a Voice Gateway Media Card using OTM 2 2 1 Manually add an IP Telephony node on page 264 2 Configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Card on page 268 3 Configure DSP profile data on page 271 Configure SNMP traps and ELAN gateway routing table on page 275 5 Configure the Call Server ELAN IP address and the TLAN voice port on page 282 6 Configure security for SNMP access on page 284 7 Configure file server access on page 290 8 Configure QoS on page 292 IP Li
528. password CLID for dial in user authentication requires CO line with Calling Line ID Callback for dial in user authentication Dial in user profiles Static IP routing IP packet filtering Idle timeout disconnect for dial in PPP connection 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 733 of 770 Figure 222 Remote support using Netgear RM356 Modem Router J 7 Switch DHCP Server i Netgear RM 356 Modem Router IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 734 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Install the RM356 Modem Router Follow the steps in Procedure 118 to install the RM356 Modem Router Procedure 118 Installing the RM356 Modem Router 1 Place the Modem Router at a conveniently visible and physically secure location near an AC power outlet an analog telephone line and a 10BaseT Ethernet cable Up to four hosts or hubs can be connected to the integrated 10BaseT hub in the rear of the RM356 Modem Router 2 Use shielded CAT5 10BaseT Ethernet cables to connect the Modem Router to the ELAN switch Other IP enabled Nortel Networks products on the ELAN can be connected to the RM356 Modem Router including the Meridian 1 CS 1000M CS 1000 a local Optivity Telephone Manager OTM 2 2 PC Symposium Call Center Server and CallPilot Note The up link connection to an additional ELAN hub or optional gateway on the customer s enterprise network requires eithe
529. peration Page 728 of 770 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Figure 221 Backplane slot designations Segment3 Segment2 Segment1 Segmento L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 z 2 v 3 2 lt n Tools list The following tools are required to perform this procedure e Ty wrap cutter e Ty wraps e Needle nose pliers e Slotted screwdriver Remove the NT8D81BA cable Follow the steps in Procedure 116 on page 729 to remove the NT8D81BA cable 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description Page 729 of 770 Procedure 116 Removing an NT8D81BA cable 1 Identify the I O panel and backplane designation that corresponds to the LEFT slot of the pair of card slots viewed from the front in which the ITG ISL Trunk card is installed Disconnect the filter from the I O panel using a screwdriver and needle nose pliers Retain the fasteners Power down the IPE shelf Remove the IPE module I O safety panel To remove the ribbon cables from the IPE backplane apply gentle pressure on the tab on the right side of the shroud while pulling on the connector until it pulls free from the shroud Remove connector 1 first then remove connectors 2 and 3 Discard the NT8D81BA cable End of Procedure Install the NTCW84JA filter and NT8D81AA cable Follow the steps in Procedure 117 to install the NTCW84JA filter and NT
530. press the Reset button on the faceplate of the converted cards to trigger a new BOOTP request Do not continue with this procedure until all converted cards have received their IP addresses 9 Click the Transfer to Failed Elements button to transfer the bootp tab and config ini files to the converted cards IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 700 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards 10 Configure the new Voice Gateway TNs on the Call Server using one of the following methods a Use LD 14 from the Call Server CLI to configure the new Voice Gateway TNs or b Inthe Element Manager Navigator window click Configuration gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony Configuration window opens Click Node Summary The Node Summary window opens Expand the desired node by clicking on the arrowhead Click VGW CHANNELS next to the appropriate Voice Gateway Media Card The VGW Channels window opens See Figure 211 on page 701 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 701 of 770 Figure 211 VGW Channels window Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt VGW Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153 109 TN 13 TN Description Customer ZONE Ea Delete 01300000 ooo 01300001 000 013 0 00 02 000 013 0 00 03 000 01300004 000 01300005 000 013 0 00 06 000 013 0 00 07 000 013 0 00 08 o
531. r 1 IP Change Echo Server 1 s IP address and port number Address gt lt Echo Server 1 Port gt where e Default Echo Server 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 e Default Echo Server 1 Port number 10000 Note Echo Server 1 default IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the LTPS CHG ES2 lt Echo Server IP Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number Address gt lt Echo Server Port gt where e Default Echo Server 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 e Default Echo Server 2 Port number 10000 Note Echo Server 2 default IP address uses the node IP address on the node s master card PRT ES1 Print Echo Server 1 s IP address and port number PRT ES2 Print Echo Server 2 s IP address and port number PRT ESS Print both Echo Servers IP addresses and port numbers IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 72 of 770 Table 17 Features LD 117 commands for NAT Part 2 of 2 Command Description CHG NKT lt time out setting gt Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive Time out setting of port PRT NKT mapping for devices behind a NAT router where time out setting 20 30 600 seconds Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive Time out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router CHG ES1 CHG ES2 If the IP addresses entered for ES1 and ES2 are the same and both are not 0 0 0 0 or for external servers an error message is generated and the input is not accepted Any value between 1000 and 60000 can be entered fo
532. r a cross over 10BaseT Ethernet cable or a special up link port on the 10BaseT hub to which the RM356 is connected 3 Connect the Modem Router to the AC power source The power LED lights After several seconds the test LED flashes slowly four times then stays off For each of the four 10BaseT ports on the integrated hub there is a link data LED that lights steadily to indicate a good link connection if a cable is connected to a host or hub or is flashing to indicate data received on the LAN 4 Connect the RJ 45 plug end of the local manager cable to the RS 232 Manager port RU 45 jack on the rear of the Modem Router 5 Connect the other end of the manager cable to an RS 232 terminal or PC COM port configured for the following communication parameters e 9600 baud e 8bits e no parity bit e 1 stop bit 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 735 of 770 The local maintenance cable connects directly to Data Terminal Equipment DTE Note The analog telephone line must be either a CO line or a PBX extension with a Direct Inward Dialing DID number whichever complies with the customer s network security policy End of Procedure Configure the RM356 Modem Router from the manager menu This procedure can be performed from a terminal or PC connected to the local RS 232 manager port on the rear of the Modem Router Alternatively the manager menu can be accessed by Telnet after t
533. r are in By default when a zone is created in LD 117 e codecs are selected to optimize voice quality BQ Best Quality for connections between units in the same zone e codecs are selected to optimize voice quality BQ Best Quality for connections between units in different zones Each zone can be configured to e optimize either voice quality BQ or bandwidth usage BB Best Bandwidth for calls between users in that zone e optimize either voice quality or bandwidth usage within a zone and all traffic going out of a zone For more information about zones refer to the following e Shared and Private zones see Private Zone configuration on page 118 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 54 of 770 Description Administration Zones and Virtual Trunks see JP Trunk Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 363 Zones and branch office locations see Branch Office Installation and Configuration 553 3001 214 The Voice Gateway Media Card is administered using multiple management interfaces including the following the IP Line 4 0 application GUI provided by OTM 2 2 a Command Line Interface CLI administration and maintenance overlays of Call Servers a web browser interface provided by Element Manager Element Manager is used for administering Voice Gateway Media Cards in the systems that use a Signaling Server IP Line 4 0 application in OTM 2 2 For Meridian systems OTM 2 2
534. r by replacing provided Voice Gateway Media the standard IPE Module I O filter connector Card ITG specific filter connector that removes filtering from pairs 23 and 24 The installer installs the Voice Gateway Correctly install the Voice Gateway Media Media Card ITG specific filter connector on Card ITG specific filter connector by replacing top of the standard IPE module O filter the standard IPE Module I O filter connector connector The installer encounters an IPE module that Order new IPE Module Backplane I O ribbon is equipped with standard filter connectors cable assemblies that have interchangeable molded onto the backplane I O ribbon cable I O filter connectors if it becomes necessary to assemblies The installer does not replace the use one of the IPE Modules with molded on IPE module backplane I O ribbon cable I O filter connectors assemblies with the ones that have interchangeable I O filter connectors The UTP cabling from the TLAN network Always ensure that UTP cabling from the interface to the Layer 2 switch does not meet TLAN network interface to the Layer 2 switch the UTP CAT5 termination and impedance is CAT5 compliant uniformity standards 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 221 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card ELAN and TLAN network interfaces CS 1000M and Meridian 1 systems The ELAN and TLAN network interfaces are provi
535. r the port If the port value is outside of that range an error message is generated Just the port and not the IP addresses can also be configured This is accomplished by entering data similar to the following gt chg es1 0 5400 The value 0 for the IP address is interpreted as 0 0 0 0 This means the Echo Server runs locally using the configured port value The port values both default to 10000 If an IP address is configured it is also necessary to configure the port An error message is generated if no port is configured but an IP address is configured If both Echo Servers are not configured then the LTPS on the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media Card uses two local instances of the Echo Server If both Echo Servers are configured then the LTPS uses the external Echo Servers If an external Echo Server fails that functionality is lost unless the external Echo Server implements a transparent redundancy scheme The external Echo Server is responsible for its redundancy and reliability 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 73 of 770 PRT commands Figure 6 is an example of the output of the PRT commands when the defaults are used If other IP addresses or port numbers have been configured then these appear in place of the 0 0 0 0 or 10000 in the examples in Figure 6 Figure 6 PRT commands output gt PRT ESS Echo Server IP Acdiress 1 Time out 30 seconds gt PRT ES1 cho Server gt
536. ration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 96 IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Node Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 451 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel V Node Node ID 451 Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address fisziea291 e Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address ha216811 00 Management LAN ELAN subnet mask 255 255 2550 8 Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask 255 255 2550 8 acs gt SNMP gt VGW Profile Node ID The node ID entered on the previous page appears Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address Enter the Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address in dotted decimal format The Voice LAN Node IP address is on the TLAN subnet The Node IP address is the IP address used by the IP Phones to communicate with the Voice Gateway Media Cards on the TLAN subnet If a Voice Gateway Media Card becomes the primary Leader during an election it assigns itself the Node IP address Note A green asterisk indicates that a field is a required mandatory field c Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address Enter the Management LAN ELAN subnet gateway IP address in dotted decimal format This is the IP address of the gateway of the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs Also this is the IP address of the router interface on the ELAN subnet if present If there is no Management LAN subnet gateway ent
537. ration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager To select a codec scroll through the list and click the corresponding Select check box See Figure 100 for codec samples A maximum of four codecs can be selected Recommendation Nortel Networks recommends that the system be configured with both G 711 and G 729A if there is a possibility that an IP Softphone 2050 could be configured with the I use a modem to connect to the network check box checked If the node does not have G 729A and or G 723 configured IP Softphone 2050 users with that checkbox selected will have calls blocked Note This does not apply to the MVC 2050 as it only supports G 711 capability there is no dial up capability For more information refer to JP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 in the Select Sound Devices tab section Figure 100 Codec list aa Codec G 711CLEAR CHANNEL Note The codec list contains six codec settings for G 711 G 729A G 729AB C 723 1 G711 Clear Channel and T 38 FAX for the Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 353 of 770 3 The G 711 G711 Clear Channel and T 38 FAX codecs are selected by default and these selections cannot be cleared However the following changes can be made e The payload size jitter buffer setting and companding law for the G 711 codec can be changed The def
538. rd Uses and Timeout See Figure 195 on page 564 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 564 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 195 Temporary password fields 9 153 99 gt System Status gt IP Telephony Information gt al Commands tIP 207 179 153 109 Element Type ITG Pentium Node ay Password Uses Timeout 10 RUN Number of Pings BR PING R button to invoke a command 11 Enter the temporary Node Password the number of uses and the Timeout and click RUN The text area returns the message Please run nodePwdShow to verify the result 12 From the Command drop down list select nodePwdShow from the drop down list box and click RUN The text area data output is similar to the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 9876543 2 Od 2h Om Os 13 To clear the temporary IP Phone Installer password select the nodeTempPwdClear command from the Command drop down list and click RUN 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 565 of 770 14 Confirm that the temporary password has been cleared From the Command drop down list select nodePwdShow and click RUN The text area data output is similar to the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 Od Oh Om Os End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 566 of 770 IP Line adminis
539. re Note When switch over occurs the database is off line for approximately two minutes Selective database recovery for a single user Follow the steps in Procedure 5 to perform a database recovery for a single user The procedure cannot be performed unless there is a valid backup file Procedure 5 Performing a selective database recovery 1 Click System Utility gt IP Telephony The IP Telephony System Utility window opens See Figure 28 Figure 28 IP Telephony System Utility window NERT RTEL oks Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility Vv System Status Personal Directories Backup d Call Server Personal Directories Restore gt IP Telephony v Configuration P Call Server gt ip Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching V System Utility call Server 2 ip Telephony IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 166 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List 2 Click Personal Directories Restore The Personal Directories Restore window opens See Figure 29 Figure 29 Personal Directories Restore window Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility gt Personal Directories Restore Action FTP from Remote Site gt Submit Cancel Remote backup IP address Remote backup userid Remote backup password Remote backup path Remote backup file name 3 From the Action drop do
540. re transmitting data to the Voice Gateway Media Cards 1 Complete the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet See Table 42 on page 199 2 Complete the IP Phone configuration data summary sheet See Table 43 on page 200 3 Install the hardware components a Install the Voice Gateway Media Card s See Procedure 10 on page 208 for installing the ITG P 24 port line cards and Procedure 12 on page 216 for installing the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line cards Cable the Voice Gateway Media Cards i Install the ELAN network TLAN network serial interface cable for the ITG P 24 port line card See Procedure 14 on page 224 ii Install the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN Adapter for the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line card See Procedure 15 on page 228 4 Configure IP Line data on the system a Configure the IP address for the ELAN network interface See Procedure 16 on page 229 Configure VoIP bandwidth management zones See page 230 Configure IP Line physical TNs See page 234 Configure virtual superloops See page 240 Configure Small System if applicable mapping of virtual superloops See page 241 Configure IP Phone features See page 243 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and configuration summary Page 197 of 770 Configure IP Line data using Element Manager a b f g h Manually add an IP Telephony node See page 339 Configure SNMP traps and com
541. re 38 on page 322 10 Assemble and install an IP Phone Refer to P Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 11 Change the default IP Line CLI IPL gt Shell password See Procedure 63 on page 435 12 Configure the IP Phone Installer Passwords see page 425 a Enable and set the administrative IP Phone Installer Password See Procedure 63 on page 435 b If needed enable and set a temporary IP Phone Installer Password See Procedure 64 on page 438 Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet Nortel Networks recommends that a Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet see Table 42 on page 199 be filled out as the line cards are unpacked inventoried and provisioned IP address information is usually supplied by the IP Network Administrator To complete the installation summary sheet the following information is required e MAC address This is the ELAN network interface MAC address on the Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate sticker for example 00 60 38 01 12 77 e ELAN network interface IP address used to perform management through OTM and to communicate with the system e TLAN Node IP address for the IP Telephony node e TLAN network interface IP address on each card e IP address of the active ELNK Ethernet interface on the system core Nortel Networks recommends that an IP Phone configuration data summary sheet see Table 43 on page 200 be filled out as the IP Phones are in
542. re 48 See Figure 48 Zone Basic Property and Bandwidth Management window Zone Basic Property and Bandwidth Management Input Description Input Value Zone Number ZONE Intrazone Bandwith INTRA_BVV Intrazone Strategy INTRA_STGY Interzone Bandwith INTER_BVV Interzone Strategy INTER_STGY Resource Type RES_TYPE Branch Office Support ZBRN Description ZDES Submit Cancel E fioooo Best Quality BQ he fioooo Best Quality BQ z Shared SHARED z r m End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 234 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Configure physical TNs LD 14 Use LD 14 to define the physical TNs for the Voice Gateway Media Card Also use LD 14 to disable the cards The OTM IP Telephony Gateway IP Line application requires Voice Gateway Media Cards to be in a disabled state before transmitting card properties See Table 50 for a list of the prompts and responses in LD 14 Table 50 Configure physical TNs in LD 14 Part 1 of 2 Response Description Identify the channel using the card s TLAN network interface IP address or MAC address REQ NEW Create the Voice Gateway channels on a line card CHG Change configuration data for a Voice Gateway channel OUT Delete the Voice Gateway channels on a line card TYPE VGW Voice Gateway TN TN of the first ITG Physical TN Iscu Format for Large
543. re OTM is installed and can only be used to restore all data For more information on using the OTM Backup Wizard see the Common Services section in Optivity Telephony Manager System Administration 553 3001 330 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 468 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Update IP Telephony node properties using OTM To update the node properties of a Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 71 CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system Procedure 71 Updating the IP Telephony node properties 1 In the OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens Double click on the node in the upper part of the window The Node Properties window appears Perform all required updates to the General tab and Configuration tab parameters The General and Configuration tabs are used to set the node properties The other tabs affect the CONFIG INI file and are also known as the card affecting properties tabs If any node or card property is changed the configuration data must be transmitted to the node or the card If Voice Gateway Media Cards are added deleted or replaced in the node or if a Voice Gateway Media Card is replaced then use one of the following procedures e Add a Voice Gateway Media Card to the node on page 469 e Del
544. re has been a change to the following e node IP address e subnet of either the TLAN or ELAN by changing the subnet mask or the subnet fields of the IP address These changes affect the whole node As a result all the cards must be restarted If the Management ELAN IP address of the Leader has changed all the cards must be restarted Even though this is a change to a single card this change affects all cards as this address is used to transmit properties to the node Follow the steps in Procedure 94 to restart all the Voice Gateway Media Cards Procedure 94 Restarting all Voice Gateway Media Cards 1 Telnet to the card 2 Use the setLeader command to set the new IP address The Leader uses this new IP address when it reboots 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 551 of 770 3 Reboot the Leader using the cardReset command The Leader card reads the new IP address from NVRAM 4 Restart all the other cards End of Procedure Update other node properties Some basic Voice Gateway Media Card configuration must be performed from the IP Telephony Node Edit window To update the node properties in the following sections e DSP Profile section follow the steps in Procedure 44 on page 350 e QoS section follow the steps in Procedure 45 on page 355 Telnet to a Voice Gateway Media Card using Virtual Terminal To access the CLI on a Voice Gateway Media
545. red in the C LOG directory This file contains a list of the problems found and the actions taken by the maintenance audit The audit his file has a fixed size of 4096 bytes The most recent records in the file overwrite the oldest records with newer events appear at the beginning of the file A record in the file is a one line string with maximum size of 256 characters IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 630 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance The format for the records in the history file is index timeString TMxx taskName DescriptionString where e index monotonically increasing record count wraps after 9999 events e timeString the time the event was detected e TMxx record type 0 reboot 1 Suspend and 2 TaskDisappear e taskName the name of problematic task e DescriptionString a description of the action taken An example of the output follows IPL gt auditHistoryShow 0001 APR 25 12 26 25 TMO1 tCSV Suspend 0002 APR 25 12 26 50 TMO1 tSET Suspend 0003 APR 25 12 26 50 TMOO tExcTask Reboot 0004 APR 25 12 35 55 TMO2 tELC Disappear 0005 APR 25 12 35 55 TMOO tELC Reboot 0006 APR 25 12 48 27 TMO1 tUMC Suspend 0007 APR 25 12 48 27 TMOO tExcTask Reboot 0008 APR 25 13 15 56 TMO1 tUMC Suspend 0009 APR 25 13 15 56 TMOO tExcTask Reboot 0010 APR 25 13 29 35 TMO1 tLogTask Suspend 0011 APR 25 13 45 35 TMO1 tLogTask Suspend 553 3001 365 Standar
546. rieved 47 11 221 48 47 11 151 148 47 11 151 129 00 60 38 bd d1 01 010 For Help press F1 Full access 7 3 Press function key F5 to refresh the card status of all cards in the selected node Alternatively from the upper menu select View gt Refresh gt Selection The card status changes from Unknown or Not responding to Disabled Enabled and Unequipped Note If it is not possible to communicate with the Leader 1 and Follower cards in the node after transmitting the node and card properties and rebooting the Leader 0 card this means that the Voice Gateway Media Cards are unable to communicate back to the remote OTM PC through the voice gateway or TLAN router IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 302 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 To establish communication with the Leader 1 or Follower cards in the IP Telephony node perform the following actions a Verify the TLAN physical and logical connections on all the non responsive cards Ensure the following i cables are plugged securely into the correct TLAN connection ii switch is connected to correct TLAN router iii remote OTM can communicate with TLAN router b If remote OTM 2 2 cannot communicate using the TLAN router connect to the Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port with a TTY and use the IPL gt routeAdd command on each Voice Gateway Media Card to add a new IP route through the management
547. ription Installation and Operation Page 238 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Figure 51 Add VGW channels window Add VGW channels V Basic Configuration Input Description Input Value Multiple VGW channel input number MTINPUT Trunk data block TYPE VGW Read Only Terminal Number TN Designator field for trunk DES Extended Trunk XTRK Customer number CUST Zone number ZONE Range 0 255 Submit f Cancel Mandatory fields of current configuration 5 To edit a specific Voice Gateway channel click the Edit button to the right of the channel in the VGW Channels summary window seen in Figure 50 on page 237 The Edit VGW channel window opens See Figure 52 on page 239 The Edit VGW channel window is equivalent to LD 14 s CHG command that enables the changing of the DES and ZONE parameters of the channel 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 239 of 770 Figure 52 Edit VGW channel window Edit VGW channel V Basic Configuration Input Description Input Value Multiple VGW channel input number MTINPUT Read Only Trunk data block TYPE VGW Read Only Terminal Number TN 01000000 Read Only Designator field for trunk DES ITG Extended Trunk XTRK Read Only Customer number CUST a Read Only Zone number ZONE ooo Range 0 255 Submit Delete Cancel Mandatory fields
548. ription Installation and Operation Page 600 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 78 IP Phone Installer Password commands Part 3 of 3 IPL gt command Description Signaling Server nodeTempPwdSet tempPwd uses lt time gt Sets the temporary IP Phone Installer Password This password is disabled by default The password must be a string 6 to 14 digits in length A null password cannot be entered The valid tempPwd characters are 0 9 The uses parameter is a numeric value from 0 1000 This parameter specifies the number of uses for which the temporary password is valid The range for the time parameter is 0 240 hours which is a maximum of 10 days The time parameter specifies the duration in hours that the password is valid e If the uses parameter is set to zero the time parameter is mandatory As a result the password only expires based on time If the uses parameter is non zero the time parameter is optional If both the uses and time parameters are entered the password expires on whichever comes first that is uses is reduced to zero or the time has expired If both uses and time are entered and both are set to zero it is the same as not setting the temporary password at all This command can be entered at any time and the new parameters overwrite the existing temporary password s parameters X nodeTempPwdClear Deletes the temporary IP Phone Inst
549. rise network subnet that need to communicate with IP Line 4 0 e devices that are looking to receive SNMP traps e Voice LAN ELAN subnet mask Enter the Voice LAN subnet mask address in dotted decimal format This is the subnet mask that is used along with the TLAN IP address to identify the subnet to which the Voice Gateway Media Card belongs Coordinate with the Voice LAN gateway router When changing the Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask the change must be coordinated with changing the subnet mask of the Voice LAN TLAN gateway router interface 6 Expand the Cards section and select the card to be changed See Figure 180 on page 540 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 540 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 180 Cards V cards k Card 207 179 153 109 Properties Role Follower Management LAN ELAN IP address 207179153109 Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 60 38 bd 56 66 Voice LAN TLAN IP address f92 168 2538 Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address fa2168 2531 Hostname Card TN Card processor type Pentium Card 7 H323 ID Enable set TPS V System name Test Lab System location System contact Card 207 179 153 111 Properties 7 Enter the Card Properties data for the Leader and Follower cards a Role There must be at least one card in the node This card is the Leader Every IP Telephony node must have only one Leader All other cards function as Follo
550. rivate Zone as the zone where the IP Phone is configured e Select any available channel from the pool of Shared Zones channels LD 117 VGW channels and IP Phones are set as shared or private based on zone configuration In LD 117 zone configuration can be set to either shared or private using the parameter lt zoneResourceType gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 120 of 770 Features A zone is configured in LD 117 as follows NEW ZONE lt zoneNumber gt lt intraZoneBandwidth gt lt intraZoneStrategy gt lt interZoneBandwidth gt lt interZoneStrategy gt lt zoneResourceType gt CHG ZONE lt zoneNumber gt lt intraZoneBandwidth gt lt intraZoneStrategy gt lt interZoneBandwidth gt lt interZoneStrategy gt lt zoneResourceType gt By default a zone is configured as shared zoneResourceType shared Example The command to add a new zone in this example zone 10 is as follows new zone 4 BQ 10000 BQ 10000 private Zone 4 added Total number of Zones n where n is the total number of zones Site details Use the PRT ZONE or PRT ZONE ALL command to see details for all configured zones Table 32 gives a sample output of the PRT ZONE or PRT ZONE ALL command Table 32 Sample output from PRT ZONE or PRT ZONE ALL command Intrazone Interzone Zone State Type Bandwidth Strategy Usage Peak Bandwidth Strategy Usage Peak HO BRCH Kbps Kbps Kbp
551. rk information The request for IP address node ID and node IP is directed to a BOOTP server within its node If the BOOTP request fails the Voice Gateway Media Card uses the last configuration This fallback configuration data is stored locally on the Voice Gateway Media Card If the BOOTP request is successful the Voice Gateway Media Card refreshes its current fallback configuration data The Voice Gateway Media Card reads the contents of the CONFIG_INI file located on its disk for additional configuration parameters Call Statistics collection IP Line 4 0 enables statistics on the Quality of Service QoS of calls connected by the Call Server to be collected These commands print the number of IP Phones registered on a card zone node or Signaling Server Traffic printouts are available per zone at user configurable intervals for the following e blocked calls e bandwidth used e call attempts and completions Counting IP Phones The commands to count registered IP Phones are available in LD 32 The commands are e ECNT CARDS L S C lt customer gt ECNT ZONE zoneNum lt customer gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 108 of 770 Features ECNT NODE nodeNum e ECNT SS hostName 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 109 of 770 Table 22 describes these commands Table 22 LD 32 commands to count registered IP Phones Part 1 of 2 Command Description ECNT CARDL SC C
552. rmal telephone in case the PSAP makes a call back to the originator of the emergency call After the IP Phone is redirected to its Home Site it is not allowed to initiate a new operation for five minutes This prevents the user from accidentally dialing the emergency DN and hanging up In this case the emergency response personnel might call back to confirm the accidental call and thus confirm that there is no emergency If the IP Phone were allowed to immediately resume a Virtual Office login to another site it could not receive the call back If the local TN has another IP Phone Virtual Office logged into it when it comes back the non emergency IP Phone is pre empted Note lf this occurs ESAxxx messages are generated on the system TTY Configuration The Emergency Services Access ESA feature must be configured on all nodes participating in Virtual Office logins No other special configuration is required IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 420 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration For more information refer to Emergency Services Access Description and Administration 553 3001 313 802 1Q The 802 1Q support for IP Phones is configured and controlled using the telephone s user interface or DHCP The DHCP approach eliminates the requirement to manually set the VLAN ID as part of the installation The oe configuration is composed of two items setting the p bits and setting the VLAN ID OT
553. rnal XA problem or Unknown 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Table 67 Critical ITG Error messages Part 4 of 4 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 577 of 770 Maintenance Display Corresponding Critical Error Message Signaling Server Description G041 ITG1041 X perceivedSeverity alarmSeverityWarning probableCause alarmCauseRemoteTransmissionError OTM displays the text F W file s not received but IP Phones have registered May have mixed F W versions across phones When F W file s received IP Phones will automatically be updated G042 Table 68 Critical ITS Error messages Part 1 of 2 ITG1042 perceivedSeverity alarmSeverityWarning probableCause alarmCauseOutOfMemory OTM displays the text Insufficient flash drive space to store F W file Corresponding Maintenance Critical Signaling Display Error Message Server Description S000 ITS1000 X VTI function call time out S001 ITS1001 X User terminal registration failed lt ip gt lt hwid gt lt errno gt lt errtext gt S002 ITS1002 X Connect service activation error lt reason gt S003 ITS1003 X Duplicate master lt node gt lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 578 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 68 Critical ITS Error messages Part 2 of 2 Corresponding Mai
554. rom an existing remote node Cancel 3 Click the Retrieve the active configuration from an existing remote node radio button and then click OK The Retrieve node window opens See Figure 157 on page 501 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 501 of 770 Figure 157 Retrieve node Retrieve node xi To retrieve an existing node define the node location and click Start retrieve button This will retrieve the Node properties and Card properties from the leader card To retrieve the other card properties use the retrieve menu option This operation requires an established connection to the management LAN of the node r Node Location OTM site OTM system opt 56 Customer fo Node Number Active leader management IP SNMP community read write name r Retrieve control zl Start retrieve View last retrieve Close Help IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 502 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 4 The OTM site name OTM system name and customer number must exist in the OTM Navigator before a new IP Telephony node can be added Note Ensure the system type is defined correctly Under Node Location in the Retrieve node window OTM site Select the OTM Site OTM system Select the system Customer Select the Customer number ao 5 Dp Node Number Ensure the node number is unique under the custom
555. rom the Call Server CLI to configure the new Voice Gateway TNs or b In the Element Manager Navigator window click Configuration gt IP Telephony gt Node Summary The Node Summary window opens i Click on the arrowhead ii Click the appropriate Voice Gateway Media Card iii Click VGW CHANNELS next to the appropriate Voice Gateway Media Card The VGW Channels window opens See Figure 211 on page 701 iv if an Alert Box appears log into the CLI of the Call Server In LD 22 enter 167 as a response to the TYPE prompt to determine if Package 167 is enabled or restricted If it is restricted obtain a new keycode to enable GPRI Package 167 In LD 73 enter DDB at the TYPE prompt Press lt CR gt through the overlay accepting all the defaults 12 If no Signaling Server is added to the imported node Telnet to the former IP Trunk Leader 0 card and use the clearLeader command to remove the Leader Flag from Leader 0 End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 708 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 709 of 770 Appendix A NAT router requirements Contents Description for NAT Traversal feature This section contains information on the following topics Descrip 20s oe ioss chad ea Rie a bse de eSeN Lapa RAE ARES 709 Requirements ic be4 061s oF Sb Ree ORL REO Ree eRe eo ERS 710 CONE NAL 2c1 295e5eaeeGeresent
556. rs 11 mins 24 secs 875484 secs Codecs G711Ulaw default G711Alaw G711CC T38FAX ELAN ixpMac1 stat 10 Mbps Half duplex Carrier OK TLAN ixpMac0 stat 100 Mbps Full duplex Carrier OK nodePasswordDisable Please run nodePwdShow to verify the result Run nodePwdShow and get the following results NodeID PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd_ Uses TimeOut 444 No 0 Ud Uh Um Us 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Page 687 of 770 nodePasswordEnable Please run nodePwdShow to verify the result Run nodePwdShow and get the following results NodeID PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd_ Uses TimeOut 444 No 0 Ud Oh Um Us nodePasswordShow NodeID PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses TimeOut 444 No 0 Ud Uh Um Us nodeTempPwdClear Please run nodePwdShow to verify the result Run nodePwdShow and get the following results NodeID PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd_ Uses TimeOut 444 No 0 Od Uh Um Us pbxLinkShow Active CS type CS 1K Active CS S W Release 201R Supported Features GetCSVsn TCP ShiftKey 12050 I2002 CorpDir UserKeyLabel VirtualOffice UseCSPwd CS Main ip 47 104 39 112 ConmnectID 0x2bbfb4c BroadcastID 0x2bc059c Link is up CS Signaling Port 15000 CS Broadcast Port 15001 Broadcast PortID 0x2bc06fc RUDP portID 0x2bc0684 Tcp Link state up Tcp Signaling Port 15000 Tcp socket fd 30 Tcp msgs sent 77 Tcp msgs recd 47 IP Line Description Installation and Operation
557. rt line card e Carrier Remote e Mini carrier Remote e Fiber Remote e Fiber Remote Multi I PE System requirements CS 1000 Release 4 0 software is the minimum system software for IP Line 4 0 OTM 2 2 and Element Manager Optivity Telephony Manager OTM 2 2 and Element Manager are used throughout this document as the primary interface for Voice Gateway Media Cards and IP Line 4 0 OTM 2 2 is the minimum required version CS 1000 systems Either OTM 2 2 or Element Manager can be used as the configuration administration and maintenance interface for IP Line 4 0 on a CS 1000 system If trying to use OTM 2 2 to perform an action available through Element Manager then OTM 2 2 launches Element Manager automatically OTM 2 2 is used for configuration activities not supported by Element Manager such as terminal administration IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 24 of 770 Description Meridian 1 OTM 2 2 is used as the configuration administration and maintenance interface for IP Line 4 0 on a Meridian 1 Element Manager cannot be used as Element Manager is located on a Signaling Server and there is no Signaling Server in a Meridian 1 Corporate Directory OTM 2 2 is necessary for creation of the Corporate Directory database SNMP and alarms Element Manager does not provide a SNMP alarm browser so the OTM 2 2 Alarm Manager is recommended when SNMP alarm collection is required System configurati
558. rted The Menu 1 General Setup sub menu is displayed Menu 1 General Setup System Name Room_304_ RCH Training Center Location Sherman Ave Richardson TX Contact Person s Name John Smith 972 555 1212 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 4 Under General Setup type in the System Name 19 characters no spaces Location and Contact Person s Name for the system site Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel at the bottom of the menu Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM 5 Enter menu selection number 2 to access the MODEM Setup under the Getting Started section 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router Page 737 of 770 The Menu 2 Modem Setup sub menu is displayed Menu 2 MODEM Setup Modem Name MODEM Active Yes Direction Incoming Phone Number Advanced Setup No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 6 Use the arrow keys to navigate and space bar to toggle values Type in Modem Name Set Active Yes and Direction Incoming Type in the Modem Router s Phone Number for reference 7 Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM 8 Enter menu selection number 3 to access Ethernet Set under the Getting Started section The Menu 3 Ethernet Setup sub menu is displayed Menu 3 Ethernet Setup 1 General Setup 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 9 Enter menu selection
559. s Kbps 0 ENL SHARED 100000 BQ 0 0 100000 BQ 0 0 HO 1 ENL SHARED 10000 BQ 0 0 10000 BQ 0 0 HO 4 ENL PRIVATE 10000 BQ 0 0 10000 BQ 0 0 HO 10 ENL SHARED 10000 BQ 0 0 10000 BQ 0 0 HO 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 121 of 770 Resource sharing for Shared and Private Zones If a resource critical IP Phone is configured for a Private Zone and there are not enough resources found within that zone the search continues into the Shared Zones within the same customer for an available DSP channel However if an IP Phone is configured in a Shared Zone the Call Server limits its search to the pool of shared DSP channels The search does not extend into the Private Zones channels When configuring the allocation of shared versus private resources consideration must be given to the number of private resources that are needed Enough DSP resources should be configured to prevent the IP Phones configured in Shared Zones from running out of channels WARNING The Call Server does not search for voice gateway channels in Private Zones when the IP Phone is configured in a Shared Zone Only IP Phones configured in the same Private Zone can use the Private Zone voice gateway channels Since the voice gateway channels in the Private Zone are not accessible to IP Phones in the Shared Zone ensure that only enough private channels are configured to cover the IP
560. s 419 environmental specs 755 ESA 419 F F 10 code 668 xx 668 669 672 faceplate LED 36 fallback configuration data 106 107 FIBN 240 FIBN Package 365 240 Firmware IP Phone 130 Voice Gateway Media Card 139 Follower 106 Follower Voice Gateway Media Card 668 forgot Community names 347 forgot community names 289 forgotten user ID and password 373 G GEN CMD button 679 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Graceful Disable 135 Group maximums 240 H hardware 203 Hardware Watchdog Timer 138 hex codes faceplate display 37 Hold 68 informational CLI commands available from Element Manager 677 Install the replacement Voice Gateway Media Card 669 672 Internet Explorer 203 306 330 332 Internet Telephone configuration data summary sheet 199 Internet Telephone Firmware 130 T O panels backplane connections 727 IPE modules cable connections 726 IP Phone firmware upgrade 305 IP Trunk 3 0 694 IP Trunk cards 693 isetGet 75 isetNATShow 76 77 isetReset 74 75 isetScpwModify 75 isetScpwQuery 75 isetScpwVerify 75 isetShow 74 669 671 itgadmin 373 ITG ISDN Trunk service 695 ITG ISDN trunk service 693 ITG P 24 port line card s display codes 669 ITG P Line Card 31 32 38 207 ITG Trunk 2 x 694 K Keep Alive Time out setting 72 L LD 21 LUU 243 LD 97 241 LD 97 PRT TYPE SUPL 242 Leader 107 LED on faceplate 36 InIs
561. s 0 4 8 and 12 Note Even though the ITG P 24 port line card is a two slot card only the left slot is counted for the card slot number For example for an ITG P 24 port line card installed in slots 2 and 3 the slot number is 2 2 Remove any existing I O panel cabling associated with any card previously installed in the selected card slot 3 Insert the ITG P 24 port line card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector Hook the locking devices Note 1 The red LED on the card faceplate remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in the software at which point the LED turns off Note 2 The faceplate display window displays start up self test results T xx and status messages A display F XX indicates a failure of the self test It is normal for the ITG P 24 port line card to display F 10 during the start up self test F 10 indicates that the self test did not find a Security Device The ITG P 24 port line card does not have a security device Some failures indicate that the card must be replaced See Table 64 on page 569 for a list of the ITG P 24 port line card display codes End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 209 of 770 Installing and cabling the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line cards The Media Card 32 port line card is the successor of the ITG P 24 port li
562. s Od Oh Om Os PwdEna the password is now enabled PwdEna Yes Pwd if no password parameter specified the administrator password is null IP Phones cannot be installed when the password is null A null password causes the node ID and Password screen to be skipped during restart WARNING The nodePwdSet command with no parameter by default enables the administrator password and sets a null zero length password IP Phones cannot be installed if the administrator password is enabled and set to null Always specify the password parameter to install IP Phones Type nodePwdSet password at the IPL gt prompt where the password parameter is 6 to 14 digits in length The valid character are 0 9 For this example use 1234567 as the password Type nodePwdShow to see the following NodelD PwdEna Pwd TmpPwd Uses Timeout 123 Yes 1234567 Od Oh Om Os PwdEna the administrator password is enabled PwdEna Yes Pwd the administrator password 1234567 is displayed Note Always specify the password parameter when entering the nodePwdSet command IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 438 of 770 IP Line 4 0 administration 7 The nodePwdEnable and nodePwdDisable commands enable and disable the administrative IP Phone Installer Password respectively End of Procedure Temporary IP Phone Installer Password A temporary IP Phone Installer Password can be set This enables te
563. s information on the following topics odios ctw carom cad eeaerweeodedanweseteeawreuaedeee 667 Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card 60 60s0e eevee eens 668 Replace a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card 668 Replace a Leader Voice Gateway Media Card 671 Verify Voice Gateway Media Card software and firmware 674 Add another Voice Gateway Media Card 005 674 Access CLI commands from Element Manager 677 Sample Output of Element Manager CLI commands 681 Access the IPL gt CLI from Element Manager 6 s 0s c00e00 691 This chapter provides information about the maintenance functions for the Voice Gateway Media Card performed in Element Manager IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 668 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance using Element Manager Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card Replace the Voice Gateway Media Card when the card is removed or when the following conditions occur e ifthe Voice Gateway Media Card displays a code of the form F xx on the faceplate LED following a reboot This code indicates an unrecoverable hardware failure The card cannot register with the system The exception is the F 10 code which indicates that the Security Device is missing from the card e if the Management ELAN Ethernet interface or the Voice TLAN Ethernet interface on the Voice Gateway Media Card has failed This is indicated by failing
564. s on the NTMF94EA T O panel breakout cable CAUTION Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I O panel DB 9 male serial maintenance port at the same time IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 42 of 770 Description Backplane interfaces The backplane provides connections to the following e ELAN network interface e TLAN network interface e alternate connection to the DS 30X serial maintenance port e Card LAN interface connectors DS 30X voice signaling The DS 30X serial maintenance port carries Pulse Code Modulation PCM voice and proprietary signaling on the IPE backplane between the ITG P 24 port line card and the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Controller XPEC Card LAN Card LAN carries card polling and initialization messages on the IPE backplane between the ITG P 24 port line card and the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Controller XPEC Assembly description The ITG P 24 port line card assembly is a two slot motherboard and daughterboard combination A PCI interconnect board connects the motherboard and the DSP daughterboard See Figure 4 on page 43 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Description Page 43 of 770 Figure 4 ITG P 24 port line card physical assembly PCI Connectors Two Slot Faceplate PCI Board P Motherboard a Daughterboard Functional description of the Voice Gateway Media Cards The Media Card and ITG P 24 port lin
565. s out If the user clicks OK within the warning time out period the timer is reset If the user does not respond the session is cancelled and the user is forced to login again Any data that was modified but not submitted is lost IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 338 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 92 Timeout message Microsoft Internet Explorer F gt x A You are about to time out in 5 minutes Please click OK button immediately or you will lose your new configured data LC End of Procedure Summary of procedures The following is the summary of the steps required to configure a node and a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager 1 Manually add an IP Telephony node on page 339 2 Configure SNMP trap destinations and community name string access on page 345 3 Configure Voice Gateway Profile data on page 349 4 Configure Quality of Service on page 355 5 Configure ELAN IP address Active ELNK TLAN voice port and routes Small Systems and CS 1000S only on page 357 6 Configure file server access on page 362 7 Configure loss and level plan on page 364 8 Add card and configure the card properties of the Voice Gateway Media Card on page 365 9 Submit and transfer the node information on page 368 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Man
566. s to Voice Gateway Media Cards Figure 215 Edit and transfer new node information Site 207 179 153 99 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary New Node to Add Import Node Files gt Node 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Transfer Status Perform the following actions a Enter the correct IP address of the Call Server b Add the Signaling Server if it exists and is not already part of a larger IP Telephony node c Add any additional Voice Gateway Media Cards 10 After all required fields for the card properties have been entered click Submit and Transfer This action saves the configuration changes to the Call Server and transfers the changes to the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards in the node The Transfer Progress window is displayed The BOOTP 1 and CONFIG INI file are saved on the Call Server and transferred to the Signaling Server Leader The BOOTP table is updated so that the converted cards can receive their IP addresses Note t might be necessary to press the Reset button on the faceplate of the converted cards to trigger a new BOOTP request Do not continue with this procedure until all converted cards have received their IP addresses 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Page 707 of 770 11 Configure the new Voice Gateway TNs on the Call Server using one of the following methods a Use LD 14 f
567. s to control registration with a virtual line TN on the Call Server This feature does not provide a user password or a Station Control Password for IP Phones IP Phone 2004 When the password is configured the IP Phone 2004 screen shows 1 The four digit Node ID and a Password prompt see Figure 139 on page 431 instead of the Node ID and TN fields see Figure 137 on page 428 2 When the user enters the password an asterisk is displayed for each digit entered The password is not shown 3 Once the Node ID and Password are entered the user presses OK If the password passes the Connect Server s authentication a screen is displayed with the TN field see Figure 139 on page 431 IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2001 When the password is configured the IP Phone screen shows 1 The four digit Node ID screen is displayed first see Figure 140 on page 432 2 The user is then prompted with the Password screen see Figure 140 on page 432 instead of the TN field screen see Figure 138 on page 429 3 When the user enters the password an asterisk is displayed for each digit entered The password is not shown 4 Once the Password is entered the user presses OK If the password passes the Connect Server s authentication a screen is displayed with the TN field see Figure 140 on page 432 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line 4 0 administration Page 427 of 770 If the Node ID and Password are not entered
568. screen there are two radio buttons i Distribute to Nodes disables all elements that are not Leaders Distribute to Nodes is the default since IP Line is responsible for distributing from the Leader to all Followers in a node ii Distribute to Elements enables all the elements in case it is necessary to distribute the firmware to some elements which have failed IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 390 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Figure 123 IP Telephone FW Upgrade window N ORTE L Site 207 179 153 99 gt Software Upgrade gt NETWORKS IP Telephone FW Upgrade Distribute to Nodes Distribute to Elements Open all nodes v System Status gt Call Server 2 ip Telephony gt Configuration Node IP gt Network Numbering Plan 8 192 168 253 7 V Software Upgrade Hostname ELAN IP Type Role gt Voice Gateway Media mj Card LW 9 NODES gt IP Telephone FW File Upload gt Patching m 2 207 179 153 111 Succession Unknown Media Card gt System Utility gt Administration gt a Support Click a button to invoke a command Tools A Logout 207 179 153 100 Signaling Server Leader m 4 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower S T E D AUG 04 10602B65 BIN 12004 13 56 52 2004 D AUG 04 10603B65 BIN 2002 13 56 50 2004 D JUN 30 s04D44 8IN 200s Prrass2 ea 2004 0604D45 BIN 0604D46 BIN 553 3001
569. sfer the OM file e on the Voice Gateway Media Card console tfxl Error File C OM omreport xxx not found Note Nortel Networks recommends that report generation be scheduled once a day To schedule a generated OM Report follow the steps in Procedure 66 on page 456 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 456 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Procedure 66 Scheduling Reports 1 Select the node in the IP Telephony window Click File gt Report gt Generate The Generate OM Report window opens See Figure 141 Figure 141 Generate OM Report Schedule an OM report Generate OM Report In the Generate OM Report window there are two choices Generate OM report now and Schedule OM report 2 Select the Schedule OM report radio button Click OK The Scheduling window opens See Figure 142 on page 457 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 457 of 770 Figure 142 Scheduling an OM Report Scheduling IP Line OM Report fz DERE Wien Wore s fe here 3 Under Job enter the Name and a Description for the scheduled OM Report 4 Under Run select the radio button that indicates the frequency of report generation 5 Under Start at enter the date and time of the start of the report period using the Month Day Year Hour and Minute list boxes and the am or pm radio buttons 6 Under Start at
570. shows the list of codec types that are displayed in Element Manager Figure 36 Codec list in Element Manager Codec G711 Codec G729A Codec G729AB Codec G723 1 Codec G711 CLEAR CHANNEL Codec 138 FAX The G 711 G 711 Clear Channel and T 38 Fax codecs are automatically selected and cannot be un selected Even though these codecs cannot be un selected the payload size and the jitter buffer for G 711 can be changed For G 711 Clear Channel only the jitter buffer can be changed Select all three any two any one or none of the G 729A G 729AB and G 723 1 codecs If the G 729A or G 729AB codec is selected the payload size and the jitter buffer settings can be changed If the G 723 1 codec is selected only the jitter buffer can be changed as the only supported payload size is 30 msec For codec configuration in Element Manager see Configure Voice Gateway Profile data on page 349 Codec registration After the configuration of codecs is complete the IP Phones and DSPs have to register the configured codecs with the Call Server IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 184 of 770 Codecs Codec registration for IP Phones The IP Phones always register both the G 711 a law and mu law codecs as well as all codec s configured by the user The codecs that can be configured by the user are G 729A G 729AB and G 723 1 The minimum number of codecs registered for an IP Phone is two G 711 a law and G 71
571. ssible to perform the transfer of the software to the card while the card is enabled A Voice Gateway Media Card does not have to be disabled to transfer the software however the card must be disabled before it is rebooted In the IP Telephony Gateway IP Line 4 0 main window select View gt Refresh and verify that the card status is showing Disabled Select Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit The Transmit Options dialog box is displayed See Figure 82 on page 312 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 312 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 6 Under Transmit options select the Transmit to selected cards radio button Figure 82 Transmit Options window Transmit Options xi This window is used to transmit software and configuration data The transmit applies to the cards and or nodes selected in the main window Cards must be disabled before transmitting Internet Telephone firmware m Transmit options Transmit to selected nodes Transmit to selected cards Node Properties to Active Leader _ Gard properties to alllcards in node Tl Card software Software location Browse F Intemet Telephone firmware to Active Leader Firmware location Browse r Transmit control start transmit View last transmit Close Help 7 Select the Card software check box 8 Click on the Browse button to the right of the Software locatio
572. st Operation Directory and Redial List Displays date and time of transaction Modify entry Dial from the list Delete entry Content view mode IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 displays name and DN simultaneously IP Phone 2002 displays only DN Delete list Edit and dial Temporarily modify an entry and dial out Does not modify record in database Access through soft keys No Maximum number of entries 20 Redial List 100 Callers List Virtual Office Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are available when using Virtual Office VO Data is stored on the Signaling Server not on the IP Phone This means when a user logs on using Virtual Office or logs on in a branch office in normal mode they can always access their stored names and numbers IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 148 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Media Gateway 1000B Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are supported in a branch office configuration when the Media Gateway MG 1000B in the branch office location is in normal mode Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List are not available in local mode as the entries are stored on the main office Signaling Server User key for Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List An IP Phone s Private Network Identifier PNI Home Location Code HLOC primary DN PDN are used as t
573. st be distinct from the node IP address Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN All cards in the IP Telephony node must be on the TLAN therefore they all share the same Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address On the Node gt Edit window click SNMP See Figure 181 on page 542 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 542 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Figure 181 Node gt Edit gt SNMP Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Hode Summary gt IP Telephony Hode ID 451 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel gt Node V SNMP g Enable SNMP traps Iv e Subnetmask 192 168 1 49 255 255 255 255 gt VGW Profile gt aos 9 Select the Enable SNMP traps check box if configuring one or more SNMP management IP addresses to receive SNMP traps from cards in the IP Telephony node f IP address Enter the IP address of the trap destination If SNMP traps are enabled the SNMP traps are sent to the IP address entered here More than one IP address can be configured g Subnet mask the subnet mask for the IP address of the trap destination must always be configured as 255 255 255 255 WARNING Do not enter the actual value of the subnet mask on the interface of the SNMP trap destination Doing so can cause misrouting of RTP media and signaling leading to no speech path between the IP Pho
574. stalled and configured 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and configuration summary Page 199 of 770 Table 42 Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet Site Meridian 1 CS 1000 system Meridian 1 CS 1000 customer Node ID Number TLAN Node IP address Meridian 1 CS 1000 active ELNK IP address SNMP Manager List IP addresses TLAN gateway router IP address TLAN subnet mask ELAN gateway router IP address ELAN subnet mask ELAN ELAN TLAN Voice Management Management IP Card IP Card role MAC address address address es ee fe Follower OTM Leader1 dl Z SS rte oO p o o pe ooo po o e oop oo o e Oo oo o e oo p o o e oO p oo o e po o e ee IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 200 of 770 Installation and configuration summary Table 43 IP Phone configuration data summary sheet Partial DHCP Full DHCP User Location IP Subnet Gateway Connect Node VTN address mask IP Server IP address address Connect Server IP address is the Node IP address of the IP Telephony node 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 201 of 770 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Contents This section contains information on the following topics INC dWION 36s Bache be habee ees n AERAR RAEN 202 Equipment consideratis serseri evs eee ieee wt swe ene Re eee 203 RKeguired GymPE vcr ce pena deht rega
575. sters with a Voice Gateway Media Card containing the new IP Phone firmware Note Commands are available from the IPL gt command line to upgrade a single IP Phone immediately all IP Phones immediately or schedule all IP Phones to be upgraded at a later time Before doing this verify that each Voice Gateway Media Card has the correct IP Phone firmware version Select an IP Phone for test purposes Telnet to the Voice Gateway Media Card and then log into the IPL gt command line and enter the following isetReset xxx xxx xxXX xKXKX where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP Address of the selected telephone Monitor the display on the test telephone As the IP Phone upgrades the firmware note the IP Address of the Voice Gateway Media Card from which the telephone is receiving its upgrade Press the Services key key with globe with arrow pointing East and West on the IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 The Services key enables access to the Telephone Options list a Press Select to select Telephone Options b Use the Navigation keys to scroll to Set Info 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 405 of 770 16 17 c Press the Select softkey then press the Navigation keys until it displays FW Version Select the appropriate firmware on the Voice Gateway Media Card Note For example a firmware version can be labelled 0602B38 or 0603B38 which means IP Phone firm
576. strings After the system community name strings are configured it is necessary to perform a data dump to synchronize these community name strings from the Call Server to the Signaling Server and Voice Gateway Media Cards As well when a link is established between the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Cards and the Call Server the Call Server transmits the community name strings to those devices Configure Voice Gateway Profile data Follow the steps in Procedure 44 on page 350 to configure the Voice Gateway Profile data IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 350 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Procedure 44 Configuring DSP Profile data 1 On the Edit window click VGW Profile The VGW Profile window opens See Figure 99 The VGW Profile area includes VGW Profile information and a list of codecs Figure 99 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt VGW Profile V vow Profile Enable Echo canceller Vv Echo canceller tail delay Voice activity detection threshold fi7 SCSCSsSRanges 20 to 40 Idle noise level 65 Range 327 to 327 DTMF Tone detection Vv Enable V 21 FAX tone detection Vv FAX maximum rate bps 14400 FAX playout nominal delay fi 00 Range 0 to 300 FAX no activity timeout 20 Range 10 to 32000 FAX packet size 30 C feet Cee eect Cee feet couec 6723 4 eect couec Tae select 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004
577. sts 4 25244s 0scce 080s bo aedn as 28 CS 1000 and Meridian 1 package components 28 IP Line 4 0 Media Card 8 port card package components 30 Documento psir1ss8t aod been eroa Hees Re eT eae reeves 31 Voice Gateway Media Cards cccscnaceaxeoreaursegeekenieyes 31 CACAO cnet oe Bob ween Soe PRG Sa eeEeS des ciated rO 34 Media Card controls indicators and connectors 35 ITG P 24 port card controls indicators and connectors 38 Functional description of the Voice Gateway Media Cards 43 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 20 of 770 Description IP Phone renio Oi soc gee cade biedeeieeae heed ceeee cee Virtal Terminal Manager o 2 ckawesea as sanwee ene esiees Interactions with IP Phones 4 05 420 cssaaeseegeduoeenes d Signaling and messagg ee oct recent thdgitoddtaetieaes dead NISteNNe Proloco c4 gi xca nade et osr aTr EERE EE ceeds se ELAN TCP Waspoll 4 262694 4es cen ste easel ereanere Virtual superloops virtual TNs and physical TNs VOIGT NG 2 cee ecitesiieeGasoless Se Ghost ensege AEEA POMS HNO os oases WW ERE Re SERRE A aa ee ee bodes IP Line 4 0 application in OTM 2 2 0 i wt cswar eee acess seias Element Manager 2 ios ce ences ex gies nsceee neee eee eReeees Command Lime TiiStlaee soa cic dotted Sie eh eas heen deeeecos ENA 2 ie eeeinedsrdanteeeyeec nn een oasaeses Introduction CS 1000 Release 4 0 introduces the IP Line 4 0 application
578. supports the following features maximum entries 100 maximum characters in name 24 maximum characters in DN 31 multiple actions add new entry edit entry delete entry delete contents of directory copy an entry from Personal Directory to Personal Directory copy an entry from Corporate Directory to Personal Directory dial DN of an entry name search password protection to control access to Personal Directory one minute time out Callers List supports the following features maximum entries 100 maximum characters in name 24 maximum characters in DN 31 multiple actions dial DN of an entry edit entry copy entry IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 150 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List delete entry e sorted by the time the call is logged e contains caller name DN time of last call occurrence and how many times the caller has called this user e Idle Display option display and count all calls or only unanswered calls e displays caller name Redial List only displays caller DN e once 100 entry limit is reached newest entry overwrites oldest entry one minute time out Call log options Call log options allows a user to configure preferences on the IP Phone for the following e if the Callers List logs all incoming calls or only unanswered calls e if Idle Set Display indicates when new calls have been logged to the Callers List
579. t 5201 5247 ITG P 24 port line card RTCP packets into Media Card port number is RTP port number 1 5200 IP Phone RTP packets into IP Phone port matches first RTP port of the Voice Gateway Media Card IP Phone RTCP packets into IP Phone port matches first RTCP port of the Voice Gateway Media Card NAT Mapping Keep Alive The normal operation of the LTPS and the IP Phone requires the LTPS to send a periodic Watchdog Reset UNIStim message This message resets the hardware watchdog timer running on the IP Phone and specifies the period for the time out If the LTPS does not send the Watchdog Reset message before the watchdog timer expires the IP Phone resets and begins a new registration cycle with the LTPS IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 66 of 770 Features To avoid loss of the IP connection CS 1000 Release 4 0 introduces NAT Mapping Keep Alive which sends the Watchdog Reset message more frequently Default values are recommended However if it is necessary to increase the frequency of the Reset Watchdog message increase the NAT Mapping Keep Alive timer value NAT Traversal can be configured to provision the length of time the audio and signaling port mapping is refreshed This configuration can be done in Element Manager on the Call Server in LD 117 or in OTM through a window to the Call Server By default all IP Phones behind a NAT device have the signaling and audio path kept a
580. t Enter the system contact name and telephone number To add additional cards to the node click the Add button again and enter the new card information Repeat this step for each card to be added to the node Observe that new cards appear under the Cards section as they are added See Figure 169 on page 525 Figure 169 Added cards 12 Click the Save and Transfer button after the card s have been added and configured Clicking the Save and Transfer button saves the data to the Call Server Click OK to confirm IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 526 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager Note 1 The Save and Transfer button can be clicked after each card is configured in the Edit window However each time the Save and Transfer button is clicked the Edit window closes and the Node Summary window is displayed To continue the node configuration click the Edit button to return to the Edit window Note 2 If the Cancel button is clicked all information that has been configured is discarded The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens 13 Click the Transfer Status button associated with the node where the new card s was added 14 Click OK to confirm the transfer See Figure 170 Figure 170 Transfer confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 re you sure you want to transfer the node configurati
581. t 15000 Call Server Broadcast Port 15001 Broadcast PortID 0x18366e0 RUDP portID 0x1836868 Link state up Signaling Port socket fd msgs sent X Note The pbxLinkShow command can also be entered at the IPL gt command line Telnet to each Voice Gateway Media Card and log in Enter the pbxLinkShow command at the IPL gt prompt Alternatively look at the display on the card s faceplate and ensure it is not displaying an alarm 32 Select System Status gt IP Telephony from the navigation tree The IP Telephony Information window opens 33 Expand the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card 34 Click the GEN CMD button associated with the Voice Gateway Media Card The General Commands window opens 35 In the Group drop down list click Misc 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 36 37 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 533 of 770 In the Command drop down list click cardRoleShow Note f the card role is not Follower as expected Telnet to the card s IPL gt CLI and enter the clearLeader command to remove the clearLeader flag Verify the card software and firmware version on the new card and if necessary upgrade the software and the firmware Use the procedures outlined in the section Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware on page 382 End of Procedure Delete a Follower Voice Gateway Media Card from the node To delete a Voice Ga
582. t Transmit Monitor the progress in the Transmit Control window to ensure that the IP Line 4 0 loadware is transmitted successfully to all selected cards At the Call Server CLI use the LD 32 DISI command to disable each IP Trunk card that is being converted In the OTM 2 2 ITG ISDN Trunk service double click on each disabled card that is being converted Click the Reset button for each card Verify the 8051XA firmware version of each SMC and ITG P card In OTM 2 2 ITG ISDN Trunk service Telnet to each card and log into the IPL gt shell Check the firmware version by entering the following IPL gt firmwareVversionShow If the firmware version is not the latest version follow the steps in Table 93 on page 696 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 696 of 770 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards Table 93 File download locations Media Card 1 Access the www nortelnetworks com website firmware version is less than 6 7 2 Select Support gt Software Downloads gt Product Family gt CS 1000 gt IP Line 3 Download the Media Card Release 6 7 Firmware Upgrade and Instruction document 4 Download Media Card Release 6 7 firmware Follow the procedures in the Media Card Release 6 7 Firmware Upgrade and Instruction document to upgrade the 8051XA firmware and reboot the Media Card card Note Disable the IP Trunk cards gracefully one by one Upgrade the firmware re
583. t button again Click Close when the properties are successfully transmitted End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 489 of 770 If the IP addresses of a single card have changed the card must be restarted for the changes to take effect See Restart a Voice Gateway Media Card on page 489 However if IP addresses that affect the entire node have been changed then all cards in the node must be restarted See Restart all Voice Gateway Media Cards on page 490 Restart a Voice Gateway Media Card If the IP address of a Voice Gateway Media Card has changed restart that card only Follow the steps in Procedure 76 Procedure 76 Restarting a Voice Gateway Media Card 1 To prevent interruption to the speech path log into LD 32 Type the DISI command This command disables the voice gateway channels when they become idle DISI removes the call traffic but does not remove the IP Phones that are registered on that Voice Gateway Media Card The Graceful TPS Disable command disiTPS does that Type disiTPS at the card s IPL gt prompt to disable the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card This Graceful TPS Disable command prevents new IP Phones from registering on the card All IP Phones registered on the card are re directed to another Voice Gateway Media Card when the IP Phone becomes idle After the command is entered an idle IP Phone is supposed to
584. t switched to IP Phone call All system speech path management is done with physical TNs instead of virtual TNs The channels ports on the Voice Gateway Media Cards are pooled resources The IP Phones virtual TNs are defined on virtual superloops IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 52 of 770 Licenses Description A virtual superloop is a hybrid of real and phantom superloops Like phantom superloops no hardware for example XPEC or line card is used to define and enable units on a virtual superloop As with real superloops virtual superloops use the time slot map to handle IP Phone virtual TNs to IP Phone calls CS 1000 Release 4 0 introduces the Basic IP User License a new License for the IP Phone 2001 The existing IP User License is used for the IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 and the Mobile Voice Client MVC 2050 Note If insufficient Basic IP User Licenses are available for the IP Phone 2001 then the IP User License can also be used for configuration of the IP Phone 2001 If there are no Basic IP User Licenses available for IP Phone 2001 configuration and IP User Licenses are used then an error message is generated SCH1976 Basic IP User License counter has reached its maximum value IP User License was used to configure lt data gt basic IP Phone s type 2001 Action Recommended Purchase additional Basic IP User Licenses for IP Phones type 2001 instead of using
585. t up message from Host processor T F 2 CardLAN enabled waiting for request configuration message T 22 F 22 CardLAN operational A07 enabled display now under host control If the IXP encounters any failures during its initialization an H XX error code is displayed Table 66 shows the list of error codes Table 66 List of error codes for the Media Card Description Host Processor not booting SDRAM test failure SRAM test failure PC Card device failure Network interface failure Meridian 1 interface failure DSP interface failure NVRAM EEPROM interface failure PCM connector failure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 573 of 770 System error messages When an error or specific event occurs SNMP sends an alarm trap to OTM or any SNMP manager that is configured in the SNMP Manager s list in the ITG Card properties System error message are also written to the error log file containing error messages View the error log in OTM IP Line 4 0 by clicking the Open Log File button on the Maintenance tab of the ITG Card Properties Alternatively view the log file in any text browser after uploading it to an FTP host using the LogFilePut command ITG and ITS messages incorporate the severity category of the message in the first digit of the four digit number Message numbers beginning with 0 do not follow this format 1 Critical
586. t window click SNMP See Figure 97 Figure 97 Node gt Edit gt SNMP Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 451 gt Edit Save and Transfer Cancel gt Node Y snmp Add Enable SNMP traps IV P address fi92 168 1 49 255 255 255 255 gt VGW Profile gt QoS 2 Select the Enable SNMP traps check box if configuring one or more SNMP management IP addresses to receive SNMP traps from cards in the IP Telephony node f IP address Enter the IP address of the trap destination If SNMP traps are enabled the SNMP traps are sent to the IP address entered here More than one IP address can be configured g Subnet mask The subnet mask for the IP address of the trap destination must always be configured as 255 255 255 255 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 347 of 770 WARNING Do not enter the actual value of the subnet mask on the interface of the SNMP trap destination Doing so can cause misrouting of RTP media and signaling leading to no speech path between the IP Phones and the Voice Gateway Media Cards or failure of the IP Phones to register with the LTPS h Click ADD to enter the IP address for another trap destination Add destination SNMP Manager IP addresses for the following local or remote OTM server PPP IP address configured in the router o
587. ta from all the cards in the network The resulting data is placed in a file on your OTM PC The data is collected and stored in OTM on a monthly basis To maintain consistent data it is recommended that a report generation be scheduled once a day To view the data for a given month select the Open report option in the File menu Schedule OM report Cancel Help 2 Click Generate OM report now and then click OK OTM creates and displays a report named Operational Measurement Report This report is saved as a comma delimited file csv ipline31_MM_YYYY_file csv The default file that is generated opens in Microsoft Excel or any other application that can open csv files End of Procedure To open and view the OM Report file follow the steps in Procedure 68 Procedure 68 Opening an Operational Measurement OM report 1 Inthe IP Telephony window select the node in the top of the window 2 Click File gt Report gt Open The Open OM Report window opens See Figure 144 on page 460 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 460 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Figure 144 Open OM Report Open OM Report Look in a IPLine30 Data amp c a ipline30_4_2002_filel csv Files of type csv Comma delimited csv 7 Cancel I Open as read only 3 Select a report file and click Open The file opens in a program that interprets csv comma delimited files such as Microsoft
588. tention to any comments specific to nodes which reside on a CS 1000 system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 256 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Launch OTM and the IP Line 4 0 application To launch OTM and start the IP Line 4 0 application follow the steps in Procedure 19 Procedure 19 Launching OTM 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Optivity Telephony Manager gt OTM Navigator 2 The OTM Login screen appears See Figure 54 Figure 54 OTM Login screen NORTEL dU LoginName Cancel Password Help Enter the Login Name and Password Click OK 4 The OTM Navigator window opens OTM Navigator has two tabs Sites and Gatekeeper Zones The IP Line 4 0 application called IP Telephony that is available with OTM is located on the Sites tab Click the Sites tab See Figure 55 on page 257 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 257 of 770 Figure 55 OTM Navigator geOT Navigator DI x File Edit view Maintenance Configuration Security Utilities Window Help aljas 8 x Sl als alel Sites Gatekeeper Zones Ey Services IP Telephony ITG IP Phones ITG IP Telecommuter Wireless IP Gateway ITG ISDN IP Trunks ITG M1 IP Trk 1 H Sites fi BELLEVILLE H Sample Site For Help press F1 5 Expand the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon to launch the IP Line 4 0 applica
589. ter LD 42 return key in 53 42 The following overlays LDs are accessible from an IP Phone operating as a maintenance telephone 30 32 33 34 36 37 38 41 42 43 45 46 60 and 62 Note The above maintenance overlay operations are supported on IP Phones except for the Tone and Digit Switch TDS commands of LD 34 and TONE command of LD 46 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 638 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Upgrade Voice Gateway Media Card 8051 XAController firmware The minimum versions of the 8051 XAController firmware for the Voice Gateway Media Card for vintages earlier than NTVQO1BB and NTVQO1AB are e Version 6 7 for the Media Card e Version 5 7 for the ITG P 24 port line card Note NTVQO1BB and NTVQOIAB Voice Gateway Media Cards require Version 8 0 software which is pre loaded in the factory Check the Nortel Networks web site for the most current version of the firmware See Appendix F on page 763 Once the most current version of the firmware has been downloaded follow the steps in e Procedure 99 on page 639 to upgrade the 8051 XAController firmware on the ITG P 24 port line card e Procedure 100 on page 642 to upgrade the 8051 XAController firmware on the Media Card Upgrade the ITG P 24 port line card 8051 XAController firmware Follow the steps in Procedure 99 to upgrade the 8051 XAController firmware on the ITG P 24 port line card Enter all the upgrade comman
590. teway Media Card from the node follow the steps in Procedure 89 Procedure 89 Deleting a follower Voice Gateway Media Card from the node 1 Click Configuration in the navigation tree 2 Inthe Configuration menu click IP Telephony The Node Summary window appears 3 Click the Edit button for the node containing the Voice Gateway Media Card to be deleted The Edit window appears 4 Expand the Cards section 5 Confirm the card to be deleted and then click the Remove button for that card See Figure 177 Figure 177 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt Remove Card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 534 of 770 IP Line administration using Element Manager 6 Confirm the deletion by clicking OK See Figure 178 Figure 178 Confirm the deletion Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Are you sure you want to delete this element crei 7 Click Save and Transfer to save the node change The Edit window closes and the Node Summary window opens 8 Click the Transfer Status button associated with the node containing the card that was removed 9 Click OK to confirm the transfer The Transfer Progress window opens and the changes are transferred to the Call Server 10 Click OK in the Progress Check Complete dialog box 11 Remove the Voice Gateway Media Card CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Follow anti static procedures and place the Voice Gateway Media Card in an appropriate anti static package
591. the NAT environment to keep the connection active The DiffServ Codepoint determines the priority of the packets in the data network From release 4 0 onwards NAT and QoS parameters will be configured at the system level in overlay 117 and no longer available at the node level r 802 10 NAT T Enable 802 10 support Enable NAT support Priority Bits value 802 1p fe Keepalive message interval E sec OM QoS Thresholds Packet Loss fi m DiffServ Codepoint DSCP Latency milliseconds a0 Control packets 40 Jitter milliseconds p Sj Voice packets 46 Polling Period seconds E Call Server Reporting 7 OK Cancel Apply Help 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 293 of 770 802 1Q enables virtual LANs VLANs to be defined within a single LAN This improves bandwidth management and limits the impact of broadcast and multicast messages Configure the 802 1Q settings as follows a Enable 802 1Q support Select the check box to enable 802 1Q support By default 802 1Q support is disabled b Priority Bits value 802 1p The priority field is a 3 bit value witha default value of 6 The range is 0 7 A value of 6 is recommended by Nortel Networks The p bits within the 802 1Q standard enables packet prioritization at Layer 2 improving network throughput for IP Telephony data Note These values are applied t
592. the card and upgrade the software if necessary Refer to Upgrade the Voice Gateway Media Card software and IP Phone firmware on page 382 Figure 111 Transfer Progress window Site 192 168 1 50 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt Node Summary gt IP Telephony Node ID 400 gt Transfer Status gt Transfer Progress e Transfer in Progress Please Wait EEE 192 168 1 15 Starting m Checked means that file has transferred successfully 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 371 of 770 Figure 112 Transfer Successful message box Microsoft Internet Explorer x AN Transfer succesful to all elements in the node End of Procedure Transfer node configuration from Element Manager to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Before beginning ensure the following e The Voice Gateway Media Cards and cables have been installed e The ELAN and TLAN network interfaces of all cards have access to the IP network e To enable access to Element Manager through a web browser a network PC must be able to access the node s Signaling Server either directly or remotely The IP Telephony node and card properties are configured using Element Manager The configuration data is saved to the Call Server and then transferred to the Voice Gateway Media Cards Saving the configuration The configuration data is saved when the Save and Transfer button
593. the latest available versions by accessing the Nortel Networks web site Refer to Procedure 34 on page 306 for complete instructions When a software or firmware upgrade is required go to the Nortel Networks web site to download the appropriate upgrade files When Internet access is unavailable from the OTM PC use a PC with Internet access and transfer the files to the OTM PC See Appendix F on page 763 IP Phone firmware installation and upgrade The firmware files for the IP Phones are downloaded from OTM 2 2 to the node Master and saved in a directory on the Master card s Flash disk The node Master then notifies the other cards in the node to retrieve the new files When those firmware files are downloaded from OTM they are compressed and stored on the C drive File compression reduces the firmware file to less than 900 Kbytes There is no requirement on operations to pre load the IP Phones with the correct version of firmware Except in the case where the UFTP download to the IP Phone would be blocked such as when the IP Phone is behind a firewall that has port 5105 blocked the IP Phone s firmware is automatically upgraded as part of the registration to the LTPS If the firmware cannot be upgraded due to firewall restrictions then upgrade the IP Phone with the current firmware version before distributing the telephone IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 304 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OT
594. the registration continues after five seconds and the TN is not displayed If an invalid Node ID password is entered the Node ID and Password screen is displayed again This screen is re displayed a maximum of two times giving the technician a total of three chances to enter the password After three failed attempts the registration continues as if there were no password entries The technician can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed If the technician has entered a zero length null password then the Node ID TN and Password screens are not displayed on the IP Phone during the registration process This provides the most security as it prevents any entry of passwords or TNs from the IP Phone Temporary IP Phone Installer Password A Temporary IP Phone Installer Password can be configured which provides temporary user access to the TN for configuration A temporary password removes the need to distribute the Node password and then change the password afterwards The temporary password is automatically deleted after it has been used the defined number of times or when the duration expires whichever comes first The following are examples of situations where the Temporary IP Phone Installer Password can be used e A department is installing an IP Softphone 2050 The technician creates a temporary password sets an appropriate number of uses such as allowing two logins for each IP Softphone 2050 in case a problem oc
595. ting and IPs Ports Security File Server GoS SNTP Define the list of cards for this node To create the list enter the values and click Add Select a card in the list for change or delete rm Card properties Card role Card TN fos Management IP in 11 221 28 Card Type SMC ITG SA gt Management MAC 90 26 D8 D6 88 F6 Host name fo Voice IP Juz 11 151 238 Voice LAN gateway IP Juz 11 2 151 129 Sync status Transmitted Add Change Delete MAC address Leader0 47 11 221 20 00 20 D8 D0 88 F0 47 11 15 47 11 151 129 Cancel Apply 8 Enter the Card Properties data for Leader 1 and the Follower cards a Card role Assign the Card role Leader 0 to the first card configured Assign the second card configured as Leader 1 All remaining cards are assigned as Followers b Management IP This is the ELAN subnet interface IP address for the card OTM and the system use this address to communicate with the card c Management MAC This is the motherboard Ethernet address from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 198 d Voice IP This is the TLAN subnet interface IP address for the card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 471 of 770 e Voice LAN gateway IP This is the IP address of the router interface on the TLAN subnet f Card TN For Large Systems CS 1000E
596. ting index number There is a list of up to 32 codec settings for G 711 G 729A and G 729AB The lesser codec setting index corresponds to BQ Best Quality in LD 117 zone configuration The greater codec setting index corresponds to BB Best Bandwidth For more information see Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Figure 35 Codec list on OTM 2 2 Node Properties Bellville OPT41 Customer 0 Node 550 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Select the DSP profile for all cards in this node Changes to the DSP profile must be transmitted to each card DSP Options Codec Options m G 711Clear Channel Settings Enable one or more codec types and C mulaw alaw Reset Codec Defauits select the appropriate settings for each I Enable voice activity detection YAD p Codec Selection Voice payload size 30 mpc Voice playout nominal delay feo z o Voice playout maximum delay 120 Am Codec profile 0 MG 711Clear Channel Frames packet 30 Note G711 T 38 FAX and G711 idth 169600 bps Clear Channel are mandatory and Poa paidin j cannot be unselected Average Bandwidth 169600 bps OK Cancel Apply Help 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Codecs Page 183 of 770 For more information see Configure DSP profile data on page 271 Codec selection in Element Manager Figure 36
597. tion See Figure 55 The IP Telephony window opens This application is used to configure and administer the IP Telephony nodes and the Voice Gateway Media Cards End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 258 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Add a site system and customer A site system and customer must be added before nodes and Voice Gateway Media Cards can be configured Follow the steps in Procedure 20 to add a site system and customer using OTM Navigator Procedure 20 Adding a site system and customer 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click Configuration gt Add Site See Figure 56 Figure 56 OTM Navigator Configuration gt Add Site i I i ox File Edit View Maintenance Configuration Security Utilities Window Help Add Site a 4 fi be Ir Add System Sites Gatekeeper Zones Move System Ey Services Gatekeeper Zone Manager IP Telephony System Modem Scripts ITG IP Phones ITG IP Telecommuter Event Notification ITG ISDN IP Trunks ITG M1 IP Trk Sites BELLEVILLE E Sample Site OTM Regional Setting Adds a site to the tree The New Site Properties window opens See Figure 57 on page 259 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 259 of 770 Figure 57 New Site Properties window New Site Properties ezza admit 2 Inthe New Site Prop
598. tion process Table 10 Unregistration process If the LTPS detects a loss of connection with one of its registered IP Phones it logs the event The LTPS then sends an unregister message to the system for that IP Phone IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 48 of 770 Description Signaling and messaging The IP Line 4 0 application sends Scan and Signaling Distribution SSD messages to the Call Server through the system s ELAN subnet When tone service is provided the service is signaled to the LTPS using new SSD messages sent through the ELAN subnet Signaling protocols The signaling protocol between the IP Phone and the IP Telephony node is the Unified Networks IP Stimulus Protocol UNIStim The Reliable User Datagram Protocol RUDP is the transport protocol RUDP RUDP is used for e signaling between the Call Server and the Voice Gateway Media Cards e signaling between the IP Telephony node and the IP Phones Description Signaling messages between the Voice Gateway Media Card and IP Phones use RUDP Each RUDP connection is distinguished by its IP address and port number RUDP is another layer on top of UDP RUDP is proprietary to Nortel Networks The features of RUDP are as follows e provides reliable communication system over a network e packages are resent if an acknowledgement message ACK is not received following a time out e messages arrive in the correct sequence e duplic
599. tional equipment includes the following e aserver configured with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP for example a Nortel Networks NetID server e an external modem router to enable remote dial up connection to the ELAN for technical support Nortel Networks RM356 modem router is recommended Install the hardware components There are three cards that use the IP Line 4 0 software the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line cards and the ITG P 24 port line card e See page 209 for installation instructions for the Media Card 8 port and 32 port line card e See page 207 for installation instructions for the ITG P 24 port line card IMPORTANT The ITG P 24 port card is not supported in the Media Gateway 1000E of the CS 1000E system Voice Gateway Media Card If a Media Card 32 port card a Media Card 8 port card or an ITG P 24 port card is running IP Line 4 0 software it is known as a Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 205 of 770 Summary of installation steps The following table summarizes the steps for installing each Voice Gateway Media Card Table 44 Installation summary Part 1 of 2 ITG P 24 port line card Media Card line card Determine card slot See Identify the IPE card See Identify the IPE card slots on a CS 1000M or slots on a CS 1000M or Meridian 1 on page 206 Meridian 1 on page 206
600. to Transfer node configuration from Element Manager to the Voice Gateway Media Cards on page 371 Note 4 Refer to Table 65 on page 571 for a listing of the Media Card display codes End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 217 of 770 Installing the NTCW84JA ITG specific I O Panel filter connector for a Large System For Large Systems the standard IPE module I O filtering is provided by the 50 Pin filter connectors mounted in the I O Panel on the back of the IPE shelf The filter connector attaches externally to the MDF cables and internally to the NT8D81AA Backplane to the I O Panel ribbon cable assembly For 100BaseTX TLAN operation the standard I O filter connector must be replaced with the NTCW84JA ITG Line specific I O filter connector for the following e the leftmost of the two card slots occupied by the ITG P 24 port line card e the slot occupied by the Media Card For Small Systems and CS 1000SS systems the standard I O filter connector already supports 100BaseTX TLAN operation To replace an existing I O Panel Filter Connector follow the steps in Procedure 13 on page 218 Note This NTCW84JA ITG specific Filter Connector is not required on Small Systems or CS 1000S systems CAUTION For Large systems manufactured between 1998 1999 and shipped in North America the IPE modules have the NT8D81BA Backplane to I O Panel ribbon
601. to be installed For more information refer to Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 Expand the License limit if necessary by ordering additional Licenses See Licenses on page 52 for more information Summary of procedures 1 nan A WwW N Configure IP address for the system active ELNK Ethernet interface LD 117 See page 229 Configure VoIP bandwidth management zones LD 117 See page 230 Configure physical TNs LD 14 See page 234 Configure virtual superloops for IP Phones LD 97 See page 240 Configure IP Phone features in LD 11 See page 243 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 229 of 770 Configure IP address for the system active ELNK Ethernet interface LD 117 To configure the Call Server s ELAN network interface IP address active ELNK follow the steps in Procedure 16 Procedure 16 Configuring the ELAN network interface IP address for the active ELNK 1 2 Go to LD 117 Create host entries with the IP address on the ELAN subnet by entering one of the following commands NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP xx xx xx xx NEW HOST SECONDARY _IP xx xx xx xx for Large Systems only Assign the host entry IP address to active and inactive ELNK interfaces on ELAN by entering one of the following commands CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY _IP for Dual CPU only Verify the IP address for the Ethernet
602. torLib service to the RPT LOG or SYSLOG n services traceFileOff Causes the monitorLib server to stop logging to the X log files any and all trace information received by the service The log files include syslog n for the Voice Gateway Media Card and rpt log for the Signaling Server traceAllOn Clears the blocking of all trace information imposed X on the monitorLib service by the traceAllOff command the tracePrintOff command and the traceFileOff command By default all tracing is on IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 624 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 87 General trace tool commands Part 2 of 2 Signaling CLI Command Description Server tracePrintOn Clears only the TTY output blocking that was X imposed by the traceAllOff and tracePrintOff commands traceFileOn Clears only the blocking of logging to files that was X imposed by the traceAllOff and traceFileOff commands Note 1 Ifno directory path is supplied with the file name specified then the file is written to the C U trace directory on the Voice Gateway Media Cards and to the u trace directory on the Signaling Server Note 2 If no file name is given then no trace file is generated and output is directed to the TTY If the file name does not meet the DOS 8 3 restriction then the file name is rejected and no file is generated If the file is deleted cannot be found or has a write error then
603. tory select a listing and then dial a number from the Corporate Directory The Navigation keys are used to refine the search within the Corporate Directory Corporate Directory is configured in LD 11 LD 11 accepts CRPA CRPD class of service for the IP Phones see Corporate Directory LD 11 configuration on page 415 For more information about the operation of the Corporate Directory feature refer to the following e Optivity Telephony Manager Installation and Configuration 553 3001 230 IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 106 of 770 Features Element Manager support Element Manager enables configuration of IP Line 4 0 using a web browser on CS 1000 systems Each Signaling Server hosts a web server Element Manager that allows configuration administration and maintenance to be performed on the system components Element Manager is a graphical web interface that provides a graphical alternative to the traditional CLI and overlays The interface is available to users running a web browser on a PC No special client software is required The Element Manager web server runs on each Signaling Server and the Signaling Server acts as a file server When a web browser is opened and the IP address of the Signaling Server is entered the Element Manager interface is displayed Element Manager is then used to perform tasks such as config
604. tration using Element Manager 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Page 567 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Contents This section contains information on the following topics a Er PANETE ET DEORE Reeds KeERACARR RRL a ERE Rae 568 Faceplate maintenance display codes 0c602006o8Fh4e54 eed dess 568 System erfor MESSAGES os od ove e Re aH RU RR eae esa S13 IP Line and IP Phone maintenance and diagnostics LD 32 579 Ui cateiee saenntswadeseiaekd tte eeeereReskoeiass 581 Maintenance commands for the IP Phone 582 IP Line CLI eninge lt 2 nik oo55s005 44 ede Keee teens eed 585 General purpose commands s sirecesrsceti tireta nnti ririki 586 Pile anster COMMBNUS ic cece che inek esi EE A OA 590 IP configuration Commands 624408060206 neses eens eeean ee 594 Rese CONS cs cored ene edeeh eee dsebwhe ice eeeas 595 DSP COMAIS 225 5040 io21s cn atei ook oeavEsiaeReaees 596 Uperad commands reris ce cetee ea ARAT EEIE E E ean ee 596 IFL shell COmmiaiilss o5 oe kb Keb dGeseee eens beater eins eS 597 IP Phone Installer Password commands 004 598 Vore Gateway comands da d vi oon ste beter teen es svad eae 601 Data Path Capture Tool commands o 2252 s0 s0000 00008055 603 Translation IP DN commands 224 sc0ct ce Hi ee ets een eeei es 604 Gracel TPS gommand cas vesneed soe weweneeeyess Ghee ds 611 IP Phone Loss Plan UK commands 0000 ee 615 Patch and Patching Tool
605. trolled from the CLI of the card When the disiTPS command is executed on the card s LTPS the following occurs e The card does not accept any new registration requests e The card soft resets all registered IP Phones that are in the idle state and redirects the IP Phones to the node Master 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 137 of 770 e The card soft resets the remaining busy registered IP Phones after they release their active call e Ifthe card is node Master an election is held to transfer the mastership This occurs only on the Voice Gateway Media Card The Signaling Server s node mastership is not transferred IMPORTANT When only the disiTPS command is entered on a Signaling Server and the mastership remains with that Signaling Server then IP Phones can re register to both Voice Gateway Media Cards and another Signaling Server in the node To ensure that the IP Phones re register only to the secondary Signaling Server Nortel Networks recommends that the command disableServices be used on the Signaling Server instead of disiTPS Using the disiTPS command alone on the on the Signaling Server is not recommended Alternatively the vtrkShutdown command followed by the disiTPS can be entered Feature operation of the Voice Gateway DISI The Voice Gateway can also be disabled from the CLI of a Voice Gateway Media Card When the disiVGW command is executed the following happens on that card
606. tt 0 3Pi2050Aud_Setup 0 3Pi2050Jitter_ Avg 0 0 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 466 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 3Pi2050Jitter_Max 0 3Pi2050Pkt_Lost 0 00 3Pi2050Voice_Time 0 mins 0 secs ChanAud_ Setup 0 ChanJitter_Avg 0 0 ChanJitter_Max 0 ChanPkt_Lost 0 00 ChanVoice Time 0 mins 0 secs Each collection period provides the following information e The date and time for the collection period hour e LTPS information for IP Phones that are registered to the LTPS on the Voice Gateway Media Card during that hour The LTPS information is prefixed by the model number 12001 12002 12004 12050 During normal operation the LTPS values for the Voice Gateway Media Card can be zeros as the IP Phones normally register to the LTPS on the Signaling Server e Voice Gateway channel information accumulated during the hour The Voice Gateway data is prefixed by Chan e Notes indicating whether the machine has been rebooted during the hour The OM file relates to the omreport xxx file on the Voice Gateway Media Card where xxx indicates the numbers of days since December 31 In general no relationship exists between the IP Phones registered on a card and the Voice Gateway channels on the card if two or more cards are used in the node If only one card is used with multiple IP Phones a partial correlation might exist between the IP Phones and the card information However even with only
607. ually add and configure an IP Telephony node on CS 1000 systems Multiple nodes can be configured and managed from Element Manager Node definition A node is defined as a collection of Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards Each node in the network has a unique Node ID This Node ID is an integer value A node has only one Primary Signaling Server or Leader Voice Gateway Media Card All the other Voice Gateway Media Cards are defined as Followers IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 332 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Note 1 All IP addresses and subnet mask data must be in dotted decimal format Convert subnet mask data from Classless Inter Domain CIDR format for more information see Subnet Mask Conversion from CIDR to Dotted Decimal Format on page 761 Note 2 See Table 42 on page 199 for IP addresses and information required in this procedure Note 3 The following sections discuss how to configure IP Line 4 0 using Element Manager The following three sections of the IP Telephony section in Element Manager are not covered in this NTP SNTP see IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 Gatekeeper see IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 Signaling Server see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Internet Explorer browser configuration Element Manager requires Mi
608. ubnet mask for the IP address of the trap destination must always be configured as 255 255 25 255 WARNING Do not enter the actual value of the subnet mask on the interface of the SNMP trap destination Doing so can cause misrouting of RTP media and signaling leading to no speech path between the IP Phones and the Voice Gateway Media Cards or failure of the IP Phones to register with the LTPS d To add a trap destination IP address enter the IP address and subnet mask if applicable in the SNMP IP address field and click Add Add trap destination IP addresses for the following local or remote OTM server PPP IP address configured in the router on the ELAN for the remote support OTM PC SNMP manager for remote alarm monitoring Note Up to six SNMP trap destinations can be defined 3 Click Apply Click OK to exit the window 5 To transmit the information to the node from the menu select Configuration gt Synchronize gt Transmit End of Procedure Note If the community names are forgotten connect a TTY to the Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port Restart the card The card displays the community name on the TTY during start up IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 290 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Configure file server access With the addition of new IP Phones there are also additional firmware files for the IP Phones The Voice Gateway Media Card
609. ul TPS commands Part 2 of 2 Command Description enaVGW Enables the Voice Gateway All gateway channels register with the Call Server This command is applicable only to the Voice Gateway Media Card or the stand alone IP Line application Enables both the LTPS service and the Voice Gateway channels This command is a combination of both enaTPS and enaVGW commands On the Signaling Server this command affects only the LTPS It does not affect the virtual trunks or gatekeeper components disableServices Causes the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server to gracefully switch the registered resources to the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers located in the same node This command does not interrupt established calls forceDisableServices Forces all registered resources on the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server to re register with the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers in the node This command interrupts established calls enableServices Enables all the Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers to accept registrations of resources levelRegistations Causes the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server to attempt to balance the registration load between this card server and the rest of the node components IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 614 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 83 Graceful Disable commands Part 1 of 2 Sign
610. unter values are displayed without being reset IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 80 of 770 Features The output for each Echo Server displays the following information e Configured the IP address port configured for this Echo Server in LD 117 e Actual the IP address port used for this Echo Server followed by an explanation in parenthesis This is different from the Configured parameter only when the default address 0 0 0 0 has been configured The explanation in parenthesis is one of the following TLAN IP this card the IP address used is the TLAN network interface of this card the Echo Server is active on this card node IP this card the IP address used is the Node IP address the Echo Server is active on this card because it is the node master node IP other card the IP address used is the Node IP address but anther card is currently the Node master the Echo Server is not active on this card not this card the IP address is not this card s TLAN IP address or the Node s IP address the Echo Server is not active on this card e LTPS request sent the number of Resolve Port Mapping Request messages sent from the LTPS to IP Phones with this Echo Server identified as the one to contact e Failed resp rec d the number of Resolve Port Mapping Ack messages received from the IP Phones that had the public IP address and port configured as 0 0 0 0 0000 Eac
611. unting from the most significant bit of the first IP address field A complete IP address consists of 32 bits Therefore a typical CIDR format subnet mask is in the range from 9 to 30 Each decimal number field in the dotted decimal format has a value from 0 to 255 where decimal 255 represents binary 1111 1111 Follow the steps in Procedure 120 on page 762 to convert a subnet mask from CIDR format to dotted decimal format IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 762 of 770 Appendix E Subnet Mask Conversion from CIDR to Dotted Decimal Format Procedure 120 Converting a subnet mask from CIDR format to dotted decimal format 1 Divide the CIDR format value by 8 The quotient the number of times that eight divides into the CIDR format value equals the number of dotted decimal fields containing 255 In the example above the subnet mask is expressed as 20 Twenty divided by eight equals a quotient of two with a remainder of four Therefore the first two fields of the subnet mask in dotted decimal format are 255 255 2 Ifthere is a remainder refer to Table 106 to obtain the dotted decimal value for the field following the last field containing 255 In the example of 20 above the remainder is four In Table 106 a remainder of four equals a binary value of 1111 0000 and the dotted decimal value of the next and last field is 240 Therefore the first three fields of the subnet mask are 255 255 240 3 If there are a
612. up Networking DUN PPP client on the remote OTM 2 2 PC Note The remote OTM PC receives this ELAN IP address when DUN makes a dial in PPP connection to the Modem Router As long as DUN remains connected to the Modem Router IP applications on the remote OTM PC function as if the PC were located on the customer s ELAN Under Session Options configure Input Filter Sets and Output Filter Sets according to the customer s IP network security policy and practices The default setting however is no Filter Sets Set Idle Timeout 1200 1200 seconds provides 20 minutes idle timeout disconnect for remote support purposes Press Enter to confirm and save data to ROM and then press Esc to return from the sub menu to the main menu Enter menu selection number 14 under the Advanced Applications section The Menu 14 Dial in User Setup is displayed Menu 14 Dial in User Setup 1 itgadmin on nau FP WD e o o Enter Menu Selection Number Note Up to eight dial in user profiles can be defined according to the customer s network security policy Enter menu selection 1 to edit the first dial in user profile IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 742 of 770 Appendix C RM356 Modem Router 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Menu 14 1 Edit Dial in User is displayed Menu 14 1 Edit Dial in User User Name itgadmin Active Yes Password kkkkkkkk Callback No Phone Supplie
613. upgrade from a new Voice Gateway Media Card Use Element Manager to upgrade the IP Phone firmware files to the new Voice Gateway Media Card See Procedure 60 on page 401 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 386 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Determine Voice Gateway Media Card software version To determine the version of software on the Voice Gateway Media Card follow the steps in Procedure 54 Procedure 54 Determining card software version 1 Click Software Upgrade from the navigation tree 2 Click Voice Gateway Media Card LW The Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade window opens See Figure 120 Figure 120 IP Telephony LW Upgrade N RTEL NETWOR KS Site 192 168 1 50 gt Software Upgrade gt Voice Gateway Media Card LW Upgrade v System Status Open all nodes Close All nodes Clear all gt Call Server op Telephony gt Configuration Node IP 192 168 2 91 gt Network Numbering Plan V Software Upgrade Node IP 192 168 2 100 P Voice Gateway Media Card LW Node IP 192 168 2 90 gt IP Telephone FW File Upload Node IP 192 168 2 81 gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support 2 Tools A Logout Click a button to invoke a command File Name Create Time HU MAY 02 15 20 40 2002 1PL30041 P2 ITG Pentium TUE JUN 18 13 40 32 2002 1PL30048 P2 ie Pentium TUE JUL 23 08 58 34 2002 t F 3 Expand a node a
614. upport representative for further assistance End of Procedure For additional information on configuring the IP Phones the IP Softphone 2050 and the MVC 2050 refer to IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Upgrading the MVC 2050 For information on upgrading the MVC 2050 software refer to the Nortel Networks Mobile Voice Client 2050 User Guide IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 322 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Configure OTM Alarm Management to receive IP Line SNMP traps To configure the alarm notification feature in OTM 2 2 to receive SNMP traps follow the steps in Procedure 38 For more information about OTM Alarm Management refer to Optivity Telephony Manager System Administration 553 3001 330 Procedure 38 Configuring SNMP Traps 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window select the Utilities menu option and click on Alarm Notification See Figure 84 on page 323 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 323 of 770 Figure 84 OTM Navigator Utilities gt Alarm Notification OTM Navigator J0 File Edit View Maintenance Configuration Security Utilities Window Help ujaji 8 x Sl a Sen Sites Gatekeeper Zones Restore 5j a Services Corporate Directory IP Telephony LDAP Setup amp Logs ITG IP Phones ITG IP Telecommuter Wireless IP Gateway Alarm Notification ITG ISD
615. uring an IP Telephony Node checking and uploading loadware and firmware files and retrieving the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB configuration files from the Call Server The Voice Gateway Media Cards are notified to FTP the files from the Call Server OTM 2 2 s Navigators incorporate links to each Element Manager web server in a network BOOTP and CONFIG INI If the Voice Gateway Media Card is a Follower of a primary Signaling Server it generates a BOOTP request to retrieve its network information The request for IP address node ID and node IP is directed to a BOOTP server within its node If the BOOTP request fails the Voice Gateway Media Card uses the last configuration This fallback configuration data is stored locally on the Voice Gateway Media Card If the BOOTP request is successful the Voice Gateway Media Card refreshes its current fallback configuration data 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 107 of 770 If the Voice Gateway Media Card is located in a stand alone IP Telephony node and is designated as the Leader for its node it provides BOOTP service to all other configured Voice Gateway Media Cards within its node The Leader determines its own network information using a combination of locally stored static information and the bootp tab file If the Voice Gateway Media Card is located in a stand alone IP Telephony node and is designated as a Follower it generates a BOOTP request to retrieve its netwo
616. used for configuring the Call Server ELAN IP address Active ELNK TLAN voice port and routes This information is applicable only to Small Systems Procedure 46 Configuring the Call Server ELAN IP address Active ELNK TLAN voice port and routes on a Small System 1 Click LAN Configuration See Figure 103 Figure 103 Configuration gt Node Summary gt Edit gt LAN configuration V LAN configuration Call server IP address a7 1 221 41 Survivable Succession Media Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 Signaling port fi 5000 Range 1024 to 65535 Broadcast port fisooi Range 1024 to 65535 Signaling port 5o00 Range 1024 to 65535 Voice port 5200 Range 1024 to 65535 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 358 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager 2 Enter the following Management LAN ELAN configuration settings a Call Server IP address This is the IP address of the Call Server on the ELAN subnet Enter the Call Server ELAN subnet IP Address Active ELNK Note The Call Server ELAN subnet IP address must correspond to the Active ELNK IP address configured in LD 117 The IP address must be in the same subnet as the ELAN subnet for the IP Line node b Survivable Media Gateway IP address This address is configured for survivability It is the IP address of the Survivable CS 1000S Media Gateway on the ELAN subnet Note 1 The Survivable CS 1000S Media Gateway IP address m
617. ust correspond to the Active ELNK IP address If configured all Voice Gateway Media Cards in the same node should be in the same Survivable Cabinet Note 2 The Survivable Media Gateway associated with the Primary Signaling Server IP Telephony node is called the Alternate Call Server It is normally located in the same equipment rack with the Call Server and Signaling Server therefore it is normally connected to the same ELAN subnet as the Call Server and the Primary Signaling Server IP Telephony node The Alternate Call Server Media Gateway should be equipped with sufficient trunk cards Voice Gateway Media Cards and centralized CallPilot so that it provides a large degree of survivability in case of Call Server equipment failure for IP Phone users who normally register through the Signaling Server Refer to Communication Server 1000S Planning and Engineering 553 3031 120 and Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration 553 3031 210 for more information about survivability c Signaling port The default value is 15000 The range is 1024 to 65535 d Broadcast port The default value is 15001 The range is 1024 to 65535 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP Telephony nodes using Element Manager Page 359 of 770 3 Under Voice LAN TLAN configuration a Signaling port The default value is 5000 The range is 1024 to 65535 The TLAN Signaling occurs on UDP ports 7300 4100 5100 and 500
618. ute list to correct the routing so that response packets are sent on the ELAN subnet Each entry creates a route entry in the card s route table that directs packets out the ELAN network interface See Figure 105 on page 361 CAUTION Use caution when assigning card routing table entries Do not include the IP address of an IP Phone Otherwise voice traffic to these IP Phones is incorrectly routed through the ELAN subnet and ELAN gateway To avoid including the wrong IP address Nortel Networks recommends that Host IDs be defined for the card routing table entries To add additional routes click the Add button again and enter the route information Repeat this step for each route to be added 15 Click Save and Transfer and then click OK 16 Inthe Node Summary window click the Transfer Status button associated with the node that had the IP address changes End of Procedure 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 547 of 770 Restart a Voice Gateway Media Card If the IP address of a single Voice Gateway Media Card has changed it must be restarted in order for the changes to take effect Note If IP addresses that affect the entire node are changed all cards in the node must be restarted See Restart all the Voice Gateway Media Cards on page 550 Changes to the SNMP IP addresses take place immediately when the transfer occurs restarting the cards is not required
619. utput partial output from the left side of the screen IP Address NAT Type RegType State Up Time 47 11 179 168 C i2004 Regular online 0 04 20 34 47 11 179 167 C i2004 Regular online 0 03 48 17 isetNATShow IP Line 4 0 introduces the isetNATShow command This command outputs information about IP Phones behind a NAT device The public and private IP address and ports are provided for both signaling and media In most cases the private signaling port information is available If the firmware on the IP Phone is outdated the private signaling port information is not printed If the IP Phone is found to be behind a Symmetric NAT device the media IP information is not printed out The following is an example of output for a Symmetric NAT device Signalling Media Public IP Addr Port Public IP Addr Port Private IP Addr Port Private IP Addr Port NAT Type RTCP Type Set TN Regd TN 47 11 217 102 10000 lt lt No Speech Possible gt gt Symmetric Y i2002 Ph2 061 08 061 08 192 168 1 3 5000 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 77 of 770 The type of NAT is indicated as detected by Echo Server 2 The support of RTCP signaling is indicated by Y if N is displayed then features that depend on RTCP such as Proactive Voice Quality Management PVQM will not work An IP Phone s TN or public signaling IP address can be entered after the command Entering the isetNATShow command at the CLI of any card in an
620. v eew CRAdS ERROR Ee ETE 667 piod cHoi resserre b 4 Ke RARER G eA SESS EARS MRD RWS aed 667 Replace a Voice Gateway Media Card 3 c0cccsadse sawtaweede be 668 Add another Voice Gateway Media Card 004 674 Access CLI commands from Element Manager 677 Access the IPL gt CLI from Element Manager s 3050200 0008 691 Convert IP Trunk Cards to Voice Gateway Media Cards ETTITA A EEEE AN Reka eee ad 693 ING ao A ELE LT a EAE L odie 693 nodhi i keen nre ERE 693 Belo you DOG ies onc keene ed e EIN eee EERIE RA 694 Convert the IP TNE Cats occ nce ene heehas eobmnkie nun A 694 Add the converted cards to an IP Telephony node 697 Appendix A NAT router requirements for NAT Traversal FEGIUIe icici ceeer sar eav es iwewenes 709 COCs wees Bassano amen da eee enone iawediadd 709 DESCHDUON 50902425 0G RSA EIS ARSE sR ERER FERS 709 eenaa a as cao divs ectsegenagediehecheareyetangeanved 710 Natehegk iipit ccc id4 c cevbedeheee dak oeuhon ee Ree ds ae oH aS 714 Appendix B I O maintenance and extender cable description 0065 717 COENS ites Meteo hekedshieeMdbeakidagiebhestsgepaheaheees 717 Modni 655d ieridisee eenaa kra TI NIMPHMEA FO 64016 case ck erui ranan ir Ee ERIE E 718 Connector pin ASsISNMENIS io oc bw ho oh wae ene cee de ERa iii 720 NTAGSICA maintenance cable description 5 4 40s s08deceeeu ss 724 NTAG81BA maintenance extender cable 0 Tao IP Line Descript
621. ware version 1 38 e 02 represents the IP Phone 2004 and 03 represents the IP Phone 2002 e B represents the version number 1 e 38 represents the release number 38 Lift the handset of the IP Phone and make a call to verify the IP Phone works Before proceeding ensure the time on the card is set correctly Telnet to each Voice Gateway Media Card and log in At the IPL gt command line enter the following umsUpgradeAll hh mma p hh mma p specifies the time when the upgrade will occur a represents A M and p represents P M The time is in Standard format For example umsUpgradeAll 11 30a or umsUpgradeAll 2 45p At the time specified all the IP Phones registered to the Voice Gateway Media Card go out of service This can take several minutes Upon completion of the firmware upgrade the IP Phones are brought back online in groups of ten CAUTION If the umsUpgradeAll command is used without the time parameter all IP Phones registered on cards that are logged into are immediately taken out of service Use the time parameter with the command to prevent this from happening After the test telephone is working the unsUpgradeAll command does not require the time parameter However if the time parameter is not used the command immediately resets all the IP Phones currently registered on that line card IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 406 of 770 Configuration of IP Telephony n
622. wers This field is read only 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using Element Manager Page 541 of 770 Management LAN ELAN IP address This is the ELAN IP address for the card Element Manager and the system use this address to communicate with the card If changing the Management LAN IP address of the Leader card Telnet to the card and use the setLleader command to make the same change new Management IP address in the NVRAM of the Leader card The Leader must be reset to resume communication with the node Note Prior to resetting the Leader unplug all the other cards to prevent any other card from becoming the Master When the Leader restarts plug the cards back in These other cards receive their new configuration from Leader 0 c Management LAN ELAN MAC address This is the motherboard Ethernet address from the Voice Gateway Media Card installation summary sheet on page 199 All other IP configuration depends on the accurate configuration of the Management MAC address The MAC address is located on the faceplate of the Voice Gateway Media Card and is labelled as MOTHERBOARD Ethernet address The Management MAC address corresponds to the ELAN address Voice LAN TLAN IP address This is the card Voice IP address This address is also known as the card TLAN IP address In an IP Telephony node all cards must be assigned an address on the same TLAN subnet The card Voice IP address mu
623. window Site 192 168 1 52 gt Configuration gt IP Telephony Configuration gt NORTEL NETWORKS Node Summary gt System Stat ystem status News Neus to Add v Configuration ry za Call Server Import Node Files gt IP Telephony gt Network Numbering Plan gt Software Upgrade gt Patching gt System Utility gt Administration gt Support Tools amp Logout gt Node 451 Node IP 192 168 2 91 gt Node 441 Node IP 192 168 2 81 3 Expand anode by clicking the arrow to the left of the node Click the DSP Channels button The VGW Channels summary window opens See Figure 50 on page 237 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Installation and initial configuration of an IP telephony node Page 237 of 770 Figure 50 VGW Channels summary window VGW Channels Node 541 Card 47 11 221 48 TN 10 TN Description Customer ZONE feaa f Delete 010 0 00 00 ITG 0 ooo 01000001 ITG 0 ooo 01000002 ITG ooo 010 0 00 03 ITG ooo 01000004 ITG ooo 01000005 ITG ooo 01000006 ITG ooo 010 0 00 07 ITG ooo 010 0 0008 ITG ooo 010 0 00 09 ITG ooo 01000010 ITG ooo 01000011 ITG ooo 01000012 ITG ooo 01000013 ITG ooo 01000014 ITG ooo Edit 01000015 ITG ooo 4 _ To add new gateway channels click the Add button at the top in the Gateway Channel summary window The Add VGW channels window opens See Figure 51 on page 238 Note Figure 51 is the equivalent to LD 14 s NEW command IP Line Desc
624. with the IP address lists the IP Phones and their TNs and recommends using the isetReset TN command For example oam gt isetReset 47 11 217 102 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 75 of 770 WARNING There are 2 IP Phones that use the public IP address of 47 11 217 102 Please reset the IP Phone using the TN isetReset TN The number of IP Phones that share the same public IP address is printed Note Commands such as isetScpwQuery isetScpwModify and isetScpwVerify have the same error handling as isetReset If an IP address is entered that multiple IP Phones are using an error message prints For example WARNING There are 2 IP Phones that use the public IP address of 47 11 217 102 isetGet The isetGet command can search on the NAT type NAT xxx where x is e C the IP Phone is behind a Cone NAT e the IP Phone is behind a Symmetric NAT e U the IP Phone is behind a NAT of unknown type response only received from Echo Server 1 e P waiting on a response from the IP Phone or the IP Phone never received a response from Echo Server 1 e Blank space the IP Phone is not behind any kind of NAT normal case e Y true when an IP Phone s NAT is C S or U e N true when an IP Phone s NAT is blank meaning no NAT detected IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 76 of 770 Features For example IPL gt isetGet NAT Y returns the o
625. wn list select Restore Single User The Personal Directories Restore window for a single user opens See Figure 30 on page 167 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Page 167 of 770 Figure 30 Personal Directories Restore for a single user window Site 207 179 153 99 gt System Utility gt IP Telephony System Utility gt Personal Directories Restore Action BeSt Ene ENSS Submit Cancel Customer Number Directory Number DN User Id i fe I Personal Directory Redial List Callers List User Preferences 4 Enter the Customer Number and DN of the user 5 Select the check box es of the data that is to be restored 6 Click Submit End of Procedure IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 168 of 770 Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Fault clearance The recovery of the database clears any faults Recommendation Nortel Networks recommends that the IP Phone Application Server be installed on a dedicated Signaling Server to ensure that database operations do not affect call processing Call Server configuration To provide password protection for an IP Phone user s Personal Directory Callers List and Redial List Station Control Password SCPW must be configured on the Call Server If SCPW is not configured password administration on the IP Phone cannot be accessed In LD 15 and in Element Manager a new prompt
626. working list at the bottom of the tab Make the appropriate changes and then repeat the previous steps 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Page 485 of 770 11 Select the SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab See Figure 151 Figure 151 Node Properties SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab Node Properties BELLE ILLE OPT41 Customer 0 Node 541 General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Define the IP addresses to which SNMP traps will be sent To create the list type in the new values and click Add Select an item in the list to change or delete SNMP traps m Card routing table entries JV Enable SNMP traps IP address IP address E Subnet mask Subnet mask IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Add Change 2e Delete Changes can be made to the SNMP Traps and Card routing table entries without affecting other IP addresses Change the SNMP traps and Card routing table entries as required based on the trap destination to be reached IP addresses that are added in this tab create special card routing tables that direct packets out the ELAN subnet and ELAN gateway Exercise caution when adding entries as the entry could result in one way voice transmission if a change results in voice packets being streamed out the ELAN network interface instead of t
627. y that node can then be added to another OTM PC by retrieving the configuration data from the existing IP Telephony node Configure the site name system name and customer number in the OTM Navigator before adding a new IP Telephony node Only one IP Telephony node can be added in the OTM IP Line application for each system customer If multiple OTM PCs are used to manage the same IP Telephony network care must be taken to synchronize the different copies of the IP Telephony database The OTM Configuration gt Synchronize gt Retrieve function can be used to synchronize the OTM IP Telephony database with the database on the IP Telephony node CAUTION Service Interruption This procedure is not supported for a node that resides on a CS 1000 system IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 500 of 770 IP Line administration using OTM 2 2 Follow the steps in Procedure 81 to add an IP Telephony node by retrieving an existing node Procedure 81 Adding a node by retrieving an existing node 1 Inthe OTM Navigator window click the Services folder Double click the IP Telephony icon The IP Telephony window opens 2 Click Configuration gt Node gt Add The Add Node dialog box opens See Figure 156 Figure 156 Add Node Retrieve configuration from existing node LC Select the type of operation Define the node configuration manually IPL release IPL3 0 Y Retrieve the active configuration f
628. y IP address pbxLinkShow Displays information about the link to the CPU including the configuration and link status itgAlarmTest Generates ITGxxxx test alarms itsAlarmTest Generates ITSxxxx test alarms itgPLThreshold Sets the IP Phone and gateway alarm packet loss threshold units 0 1 An alarm is generated when the threshold is reached elmShow Displays a list of supported languages itgChanStateShow Displays the state for channels for example if they are idle or busy IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 590 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance File transfer commands Table 72 File Transfer commands Part 1 of 4 Table 72 lists the file transfer commands Signaling IPL gt Commands Description Server swDownload Loads a new version of software from the FTP host to the x hostname username password directory path filename Voice Gateway Media Card Updates the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the binary file received from an FTP server corresponding to the hostname IP address The Voice Gateway Media Card FTP client performs a Get which downloads the file to the flash bank A checksum is calculated to verify correct delivery Once the new software version is successfully downloaded the Voice Gateway Media Card must be rebooted with cardReset to run the new software Note
629. y node IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 288 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Procedure 28 Configuring SNMP trap destinations for an IP Telephony node 1 Click the SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab in the Node Properties window See Figure 67 Figure 74 Node Properties SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Define the IP addresses to which SNMP traps will be sent To create the list type in the new values and click Add Select an item in the list to change or delete m SNMP traps IV Enable SNMP traps IP address Juz 51 14 22 Subnet mask 255 255 0 6 IP Address 47 51 14 22 255 255 0 0 w rm Card routing table entries IP address a7 25 112 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address 47 25 1121 255 255 255 0 OK Cancel Apply Help 2 On the left side of the window under SNMP traps a Enable SNMP traps Select the Enable SNMP traps check box if configuring one or more destination SNMP management IP addresses to receive SNMP traps from cards in the IP Telephony node b IP address If SNMP traps are enabled this is the IP address of the destination where the SNMP traps are sent 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Page 289 of 770 c Subnet mask The s
630. y on the ITG P 24 port line card To upgrade the firmware version of the ITG P 24 port line card to support the Watchdog functionality see Procedure 99 on page 639 Media Card Version 6 0 of the firmware file is the required minimum to enable the Watchdog Timer functionality on the Media Card line cards To upgrade the firmware version of the Media Card line cards to support the Watchdog functionality see Procedure 100 on page 642 IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 140 of 770 Features Codecs Codec refers to the voice coding and compression algorithm used by the DSPs on the Voice Gateway Media Card Different codecs provide different levels of voice quality and compression properties The specific codecs and the order in which they are used are configured on the LTPS and CS 1000 and Meridian 1 Table 34 shows which codecs are supported on the systems Table 34 Supported codecs Payload size G 711 a law G 711 mu law NOVAD 10 20 and 30 ms G 729A 10 20 30 40 and 50 ms G 729AB 10 20 30 40 and 50 ms G 723 1 1 30 ms T 38 2 supported for fax calls on gateway channels G 711 Clear Channel 2 supported for fax calls on gateway channels Note 1 The G 723 1 codec has bit rates of 5 3 Kbps and 6 3 Kbps In IP Line 4 0 The G 723 1 codec can only be configured with a 5 3 Kbps bit rate however the system accepts both G 723 1 5 3Kbps and 6 4Kbps from the far end N
631. y patches for the Voice Gateway Media Card e The release of the patch is assumed to be the same as that of the current load The address to be patched is checked to ensure that it is in range For each address that is changed the old contents are assumed to be the current contents of that memory address If a path is not provided for the new path filename then it is assumed that the patch is in the C u patch directory Once a memory patch is created using the pnew command it is loaded and activated like any other patch Syntax pnew Note The pnew command has no parameter s 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 621 of 770 Patch Directories There are two patch directories on a Voice Gateway Media Card 1 C u patch This is the default directory for patch files Patch files should be copied to this directory 2 C u patch reten Use this directory to store patch retention control files Do not use this directory to store patches and do not remove files from this directory Patch Synchronization Across a Node Element Manager provides a mechanism for downloading and putting patches in service across a node Patch synchronization across a node cannot be carried out from the IPL gt prompt IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 622 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Table 86 lists the Patching Tool commands Table 86 Patc
632. yout nominal delay 40 ag 80 ms packet ms Voice playout maximum delay me Codec profile 7 Frames packet 2 Note G711 is mandatory and Peak Bandwidth 78400 bps cannot be unselected Average Bandwidth 47040 bps Note f there are multiple nodes on a system and the same codec is selected on more than one node ensure that each node has the same voice payload size configured for the codec End of Procedure Configure SNMP traps and ELAN gateway routing table Follow the steps in Procedure 24 to configure SNMP traps and the ELAN gateway routing table Procedure 24 Configuring SNMP traps and ELAN GW Routing table 1 Click the SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab in the New Node window See Figure 67 on page 276 IP addresses that are added in this tab create special card routing tables that direct packets out the ELAN and ELAN gateway Exercise caution when adding entries since the entry could result in one way voice transmission if a change results in voice packets being streamed out the ELAN network interface instead of the TLAN network interface IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 276 of 770 Configuration of IP telephony nodes using OTM 2 2 Figure 67 New Node SNMP Traps Routing and IPs tab General Configuration DSP Profile SNMP Traps Routing and IPs Ports Security File Server QoS SNTP Define the IP addresses to which SNMP traps will be sent To create t
633. ype of DN DN configured CPDN for the DN IP Line Description Installation and Operation Page 606 of 770 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance If the IP Phone is behind a NAT device the public IP address is displayed followed by the private IP address in parenthesis An example of PRT IPDN output is shown in Figure 200 Figure 200 PRT IPDN output gt prt ipdn 30 1 1 100 Signaling IP 30 1 1 100 1248 192 16B8 1 12 Media IP 30 1 1 100 1246 192 168 1 12 5200 CUST 00 TN 061 02 TYPE 12002 ZONE 000 REG Key CPND Name 00 SCR 2013 01 SCR Signaling IP 30 1 1 100 1250 192 168 1 13 Media IP 30 1 1 100 1252 192 168 1 12 5200 CUST DO TN 061 01 TYPE 12004 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 01 SCR 2041 05 SCR 2042 gt prt ipdn 30 1 1 1D Signaling IP 30 1 1 10 5000 Media IP 30 1 1 10 5200 CUST 00 TN 061 00 TYPE 12004 ZONE 000 REG Key DN CPND Name 8001 Partial IP addresses Partial IP addresses can be entered Partial IP addresses can be entered with only the leading digits of the IP address for example 142 10 or as the IP address with zeroes at the end for example 142 10 0 0 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance Page 607 of 770 The following examples for PRT IPDN lt IP_ADDR gt shows a partial IP address of 47 0 0 The zeroes in the lt IP_ADDR gt are handled as if they are trimmed off This means that the output of PRT IPDN 47 is the same as th
634. ystem report list sops 12345 14 16 add report 16 to be printed tops 12345 14 16 display system report list with report 16 added cops 12345 14 16 16 delete report 16 tops 1234514 display system report list with report 16 deleted 553 3001 365 Standard 3 00 September 2004 Features Page 117 of 770 User defined feature key labels Table 31 Definition IP Line 4 0 gives the IP Phone user the ability to program the label on the feature key This label change is saved and then displayed on the feature key Availability Table 31 describes the feature key availability on the IP Phones Feature key availability on IP Phones IP Phone 2002 Number of feature Number of feature keys using Shift Maximum label keys key character length IP Phone 2004 IP Softphone 2050 MVC 2050 Note There are no feature keys on the IP Phone 2001 The feature key labels for each IP Phonee are stored in the Call Server s database When the Call Server performs an EDD the feature key labels are saved to the database The feature key label information is retrieved from the file into memory during the sysload of the Call Server When the system performs an INI or sysload feature key label changes performed by users between the last EDD and the INI or sysload are lost When the IP Phone registers with the Call Server the Call Server looks up the feature key label in the memory based on the TN of th

Avaya IP Line User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents